WF-C579R WF-C579Ra WF-C529R A Service Manual

SERVICE MANUAL
Color Inkjet Printer
EPSON WF-C579R/C579Ra
WF-C529R
CONFIDENTIAL
SEMF18-006
Notice:
 All rights reserved. No part of this manual may be reproduced, stored in a retrieval system, or transmitted in any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical,
photocopying, recording, or otherwise, without the prior written permission of SEIKO EPSON CORPORATION.
 The contents of this manual are subject to change without notice.
 All efforts have been made to ensure the accuracy of the contents of this manual. However, should any errors be detected, SEIKO EPSON would greatly appreciate being
informed of them.
 The above not withstanding SEIKO EPSON CORPORATION can assume no responsibility for any errors in this manual or the consequences thereof.
EPSON is a registered trademark of SEIKO EPSON CORPORATION.
General Notice: Other product names used herein are for identification purpose only and may be trademarks or registered trademarks of their
respective owners. EPSON disclaims any and all rights in those marks.
Copyright © 2018 SEIKO EPSON CORPORATION.

　　　　　　　 P ⋅ CS Quality Assurance Department
Confidential
Safety Precautions
All safety procedures described here shall be strictly adhered to by all parties servicing and maintaining this product.
DANGER
Strictly observe the following cautions. Failure to comply could result in serious bodily injury or loss of life.
1. Always disconnect the product from the power source and peripheral devices when servicing the product or performing maintenance.
2. When performing works described in this manual, do not connect to a power source until instructed to do so. Connecting to a power source causes high voltage
in the power supply unit and some electronic components even if the product power switch is off. If you need to perform the work with the power cable
connected to a power source, use extreme caution to avoid electrical shock.
WARNING
Strictly observe the following cautions. Failure to comply may lead to personal injury or loss of life.
1. Always wear protective goggles for disassembly and reassembly to protect your eyes from ink in working. If any ink gets in your eyes, wash your eyes with
clean water and consult a doctor immediately.
2. When using compressed air products; such as air duster, for cleaning during repair and maintenance, the use of such products containing flammable gas is
prohibited.
PRECAUTIONS
Strictly observe the following cautions. Failure to comply may lead to personal injury or damage of the product.
1. Repairs on Epson product should be performed only by an Epson certified repair technician.
2. No work should be performed on this product by persons unfamiliar with basic safety knowledge required for electrician.
3. The power rating of this product is indicated on the serial number/rating plate. Never connect this product to the power source whose voltages is different from
the rated voltage.
4. Replace malfunctioning components only with those components provided or approved by Epson; introduction of second-source ICs or other non-approved
components may damage the product and void any applicable Epson warranty.
Confidential
5. In order to protect sensitive microprocessors and circuitry, use static discharge equipment, such as anti-static wrist straps, when accessing internal components.
6. Do not tilt this product immediately after initial ink charge, especially after performing the ink charge several times. Doing so may cause ink to leak from the
product because it may take some time for the waste ink pads to completely absorb ink wasted due to the ink charge.
7. Never touch the ink or wasted ink with bare hands. If ink comes into contact with your skin, wash it off with soap and water immediately. If you have a skin
irritation, consult a doctor immediately.
8. When disassembling or assembling this product, make sure to wear gloves to avoid injuries from metal parts with sharp edges.
9. Use only recommended tools for disassembling, assembling or adjusting the printer.
10. Observe the specified torque when tightening screws.
11. Be extremely careful not to scratch or contaminate the following parts.
 Nozzle plate of the Printhead
 Gears
 Rollers
 LCD
 Scanner Sensor
 Exterior parts
12. Never use oil or grease other than those specified in this manual. Use of different types of oil or grease may damage the component or give bad influence on the
printer function.
13. Apply the specified amount of grease described in this manual.
14. Make the specified adjustments when you disassemble the printer.
15. When cleaning this product, follow the procedure described in this manual.
16. When transporting the product with ink filled in the print head, take precautionary measure against ink leak before packing the product.
17. Make sure to install antivirus software in the computers used for the service support activities.
18. Keep the virus pattern file of antivirus software up-to-date.
Confidential
About This Manual
This manual, consists of the following chapters, is intended for repair service personnel and includes information necessary for properly performing maintenance
and servicing the product.
CHAPTER 1.PRODUCT OUTLINE

Describes the feature of the product.
CHAPTER 2. PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS

Describes the basic specifications of the product.
CHAPTER 3. STRUCTURE
Explains about components and operating principles of the product.
CHAPTER 4. INSTALLATION
Describes how to install and set up the product.
CHAPTER 5. SERVICE SUPPORT MODE

Explains about the service support mode.
CHAPTER 6. TROUBLESHOOTING
Provides information for identifying causes of errors/problems from the symptoms or events, and the procedure for troubleshooting.
CHAPTER 7. REPAIR WORK

Describes how to disassemble and reassemble the product, and describes required adjustments.
CHAPTER 8. MAINTENANCE/INSPECTION
Provides cautions, points to be checked and procedure for maintaining and inspecting the product.
CHAPTER 9. APPENDIX
Provides additional information for reference.
Confidential
Symbols Used in this Manual
Various symbols are used throughout this manual either to provide additional information on a specific topic or to warn of possible danger present during a
procedure or an action.
Be aware of all symbols when they are used, and always read NOTE, CAUTION, or WARNING messages.
Indicates an operating or maintenance procedure, practice or condition that, if not strictly observed, would result in injury or loss of life.
Indicates an operating or maintenance procedure, practice or condition that, if not strictly observed, could result in injury or loss of life.
Indicates an operating or maintenance procedure, practice, or condition that, if not strictly observed, could result in damage to, or destruction of,
equipment.
C H E C K May indicate an operating or maintenance procedure, practice or condition that is necessary to accomplish a task efficiently. It may also provide additional information
P O IN T that is related to a specific subject, or comment on the results achieved through a previous action.
Indicates that a particular task must be carried out according to a certain standard after disassembly and before re-assembly, otherwise the quality of the components in
question may be adversely affected.
A D J U S T M E N T Indicates an operating or maintenance procedure, practice or condition that is necessary to keep the product’s quality.
R E Q U IR E D
Confidential
Revision Status
Revision Date of Issue Description
A October 2nd, 2018 First release
Confidential
EPSON WF-C579R/WF-C579Ra/WF-C529R Revision A
Contents
Chapter 1 Product outline 3.3.2.1 Overview ............................................................................................ 44
3.3.2.2 Shifting PG (APG Mechanism) .......................................................... 45
1.1 Product Summary ............................................................................................... 12 3.3.2.3 APG Lever actions ............................................................................. 45
3.3.2.4 PG type ............................................................................................... 46
Chapter 2 Product Specifications 3.3.3 Paper Loading/Paper Feed mechanism ...................................................... 47
3.3.3.1 Overview ............................................................................................ 47
2.1 Product Hardware Specifications ...................................................................... 14
3.3.3.2 Paper Loading/Feed Path ................................................................... 48
2.2 Printing Specifications ....................................................................................... 18 3.3.3.3 Detail of Paper Loading/Feed Mechanism ......................................... 50
2.3 Copying Specifications (WF-C579R only) ....................................................... 18 3.3.4 Ink Supply Mechanism .............................................................................. 58
2.4 ADF Specifications (WF-C579R only) ............................................................. 19 3.3.4.1 Overview ............................................................................................ 58
3.3.4.2 Operating principles ........................................................................... 58
2.5 Scanner Specifications (WF-C579R only) ........................................................ 20
3.3.4.3 Ink leak detection function ................................................................. 59
2.6 Options Specifications ....................................................................................... 20 3.3.5 Inksystem mechanism ................................................................................ 60
2.7 Network Specifications/Fax Specifications ....................................................... 21 3.3.5.1 Overview ............................................................................................ 60
3.3.5.2 Operating principles ........................................................................... 61
Chapter 3 Structure 3.3.6 Scanner / ADF Mechanism ........................................................................ 67
3.3.6.1 Scanner Mechanism ........................................................................... 67
3.1 Product Configuration (Name of Each Part) ..................................................... 23
3.3.6.2 ADF Mechanism ................................................................................ 68
3.1.1 WF-C579R ................................................................................................. 23
3.1.2 WF-C529R ................................................................................................. 29 3.4 Life control ........................................................................................................ 70
3.2 Motor, Sensor, Clutch, and Solenoid Specifications ......................................... 34 Chapter 4 Installation
3.2.1 Printer Main Unit (Motors and solenoids) ................................................. 35
3.2.2 Printer Main Unit (Ink detection and cover detection system sensors) ..... 36 4.1 Overview of Introduction and Installation ........................................................ 72
3.2.3 Printer Main Unit (Encoder sensors and PW sensor) ................................ 37 4.1.1 Installation Workflow ............................................................................... 72
3.2.4 Printer Main Unit (Paper feed and conveyance system sensors and other sen- 4.1.2 Checks Before Installation ........................................................................ 73
sors) ........................................................................................................... 38 4.2 Installation Procedure ........................................................................................ 75
3.2.5 Options (Motor and Sensors) ..................................................................... 39 4.2.1 Checking Items Included in Package ........................................................ 75
3.2.6 Scanner (Motor and Sensor) ...................................................................... 40 4.2.2 Removing Packaging Material and Protection Tape ................................ 76
3.2.7 ADF (Motor and Sensor) ........................................................................... 41 4.2.3 Installation ................................................................................................ 77
3.3 Operating principles .......................................................................................... 42 4.2.3.1 Installation and Attaching Optional Cassette ..................................... 77
3.3.1 Printhead .................................................................................................... 42 4.2.3.2 Connecting the Power ........................................................................ 78
3.3.1.1 Overview ............................................................................................ 42 4.2.4 Firmware update ....................................................................................... 79
3.3.1.2 Head Angular Mecha Adjustment ...................................................... 43 4.2.5 Ink Information Display Setting ................................................................ 79
3.3.2 Carriage Mechanism .................................................................................. 44 4.2.6 Main Unit Settings .................................................................................... 81
8
Confidential
4.2.6.1 Setting the date and time .................................................................... 81 6.5.3 FAX Error Code ..................................................................................... 238
4.2.6.2 Initial Ink Filling ................................................................................ 82 6.5.3.1 Overview .......................................................................................... 238
4.2.6.3 Network Setting .................................................................................. 84 6.5.3.2 Error code list ................................................................................... 238
4.2.6.4 Fax Settings ...................................................................................... 100 6.5.4 FAX Service Parameter .......................................................................... 241
4.2.7 Printing/operation checks ....................................................................... 103 6.5.4.1 Outline of setting change in FAX Maintenance Mode .................... 241
6.5.4.2 Parameter changing procedure ......................................................... 242
Chapter 5 Service support mode 6.5.4.3 FAX Service Parameter Table .......................................................... 246
6.5.5 Fax related user special parameters. ....................................................... 257
5.1 Overview ......................................................................................................... 106 6.5.5.1 Emergency ejection of fax reception document (FAX to PC) ......... 257
5.2 Service mode startup ....................................................................................... 107 6.5.5.2 Emergency ejection of received fax documents
5.3 Menu configuration ......................................................................................... 110 (FAX to Memory) ............................................................... 258
5.4 Menu Screen Transition .................................................................................. 111 6.5.6 Fax related troubleshooting .................................................................... 260
6.5.6.1 Fax troubleshooting basics .............................................................. 260
Chapter 6 Troubleshooting 6.5.6.2 Equipment information necessary for fax trouble report. ................ 262
6.5.6.3 Troubleshooting from fax function diagnosis .................................. 263
6.1 Overview ......................................................................................................... 113 6.5.6.4 Troubleshooting from error code ..................................................... 264
6.2 Troubleshooting Workflow ............................................................................. 114
Chapter 7 Repair work
6.3 List of Errors/Problems ................................................................................... 115
6.3.1 For problems with error indications ....................................................... 115 7.1 Adjustment and Inspection Work ..................................................................... 267
6.3.1.1 Normal Errors ................................................................................... 115 7.1.1 Precautions of repairing the product ........................................................ 267
6.3.1.2 Fatal Errors ....................................................................................... 138 7.1.2 Repair Workflow ..................................................................................... 268
6.3.2 For problems without error indications .................................................. 171 7.1.3 Tools and Jigs .......................................................................................... 269
6.3.2.1 Feeding trouble ................................................................................. 172 7.2 Adjustment and Inspection Work ..................................................................... 270
6.3.2.2 Printing/image quality trouble .......................................................... 176 7.2.1 Adjustment and Inspection Overview ..................................................... 270
6.3.2.3 ADF/Scanner trouble ........................................................................ 200 7.2.2 Adjustment and Inspection List ............................................................... 271
6.3.2.4 Other ................................................................................................. 203 7.2.3 Required Adjustments ............................................................................. 281
6.3.2.5 Remedy of When The Check Pattern is not appropriate .................. 204 7.2.4 Adjustment and Inspection Details .......................................................... 284
6.4 Individual Action Check Function .................................................................. 213 7.2.4.1 Mechanical Adjustments and Inspections ........................................ 284
6.4.1 Overview ................................................................................................. 213 7.2.4.2 Software Adjustments and Inspections ............................................ 292
6.4.2 Precautions for Startup ........................................................................... 214 7.2.4.3 Maintenance ..................................................................................... 328
6.4.3 How to Perform Individual Action Checks ............................................ 217 7.3 Repair Work Procedures .................................................................................. 332
6.4.3.1 Check Item List ................................................................................ 218 7.3.1 Parts/Components Location ..................................................................... 332
6.4.3.2 All Sensor Check Items .................................................................... 220 7.3.2 Preparation for servicing ......................................................................... 344
6.5 Fax Troubleshooting ........................................................................................ 221 7.3.2.1 Unlocking the CR Unit ..................................................................... 344
6.5.1 Outline of the FAX Troubleshooting ...................................................... 221 7.3.2.2 Removing the Maintenance Box ...................................................... 345
6.5.2 Reports/Logs related to FAX .................................................................. 221 7.3.2.3 Removing the Ink Pack .................................................................... 345
6.5.2.1 FAX Communication Log ................................................................ 221 7.3.3 How to Read This Chapter ...................................................................... 347
6.5.2.2 Protocol trace .................................................................................... 223 7.3.4 Repair Work Details ................................................................................ 350
6.5.2.3 FAX Function Check Report ............................................................ 237 7.3.4.1 Housing (WF-C579R) (1) ................................................................ 350
9
Confidential
7.3.4.2 Housing (WF-C579R) (2) ................................................................ 356 8.5.2 Procedure for firmware update using a USB flash drive. ....................... 691
7.3.4.3 Housing (WF-C529R) (1) ................................................................ 361 8.6 Periodic Replacement Parts .............................................................................. 695
7.3.4.4 Housing (WF-C529R) (2) ................................................................ 366 8.6.1 Overview ................................................................................................. 695
7.3.4.5 Ink Supply Mechanism (1) ............................................................... 375 8.6.2 Resetting the Counter of Periodic Replacement Parts ............................. 695
7.3.4.6 Ink Supply Mechanism (2) ............................................................... 389
7.3.4.7 Ink Supply Mechanism (3) ............................................................... 405 Chapter 9 Appendix
7.3.4.8 ADF/SCN (1) (WF-C579R only) ..................................................... 419
7.3.4.9 ADF/SCN (2) (WF-C579R only) ..................................................... 427 9.1 Connection Diagram ......................................................................................... 697
7.3.4.10 Electrical Components (1) .............................................................. 435 9.2 Part Names Conversion Table .......................................................................... 698
7.3.4.11 Electrical Components (2) .............................................................. 444 9.2.1 WF-C579R ............................................................................................... 698
7.3.4.12 Electrical Components (3) (WF-C579R) ....................................... 459 9.2.2 WF-C529R ............................................................................................... 700
7.3.4.13 Electrical Components (4) (WF-C529R) ....................................... 468 9.2.3 Optional Paper Cassette Unit ................................................................... 701
7.3.4.14 Inksystem ........................................................................................ 478 9.3 Status Sheet Information .................................................................................. 703
7.3.4.15 Carriage Mechanism (1) ................................................................. 490
7.3.4.18 Paper Feed Mechanism (1) ............................................................. 539
7.3.4.24 Optional Paper Cassette Unit (1) .................................................... 638
Chapter 8 Maintenance/inspection
8.1 Cleaning ........................................................................................................... 677
8.1.1 Cleaning Method .................................................................................... 677
8.2 Lubrication ...................................................................................................... 680
8.2.1 Lubrication Points and Instructions ........................................................ 681
8.3 Printer Status Information ............................................................................... 684
8.4 USB Data Swap ............................................................................................... 685
8.4.1 Overview ................................................................................................. 685
8.4.2 Detail of procedure ................................................................................. 686
8.5 Firmware Update Using USB Flash Drive ....................................................... 691
8.5.1 Overview ................................................................................................. 691
10
Confidential
CHAPTER
1
PRODUCT OUTLINE
Confidential
1.1 Product Summary  Compact

Large capacity ink packs installed inside, lesser limitations for replacement.
The features of this product are as follows:
 Large capacity ink packs
Saves time for managing and replacing the consumables. Environmentally
friendly with less waste materials.
 High ink yield
• Black: 50,000 pages
• Color: 20,000 pages
WF-C579R/C579Ra WF-C529R
Figure 1-3. External view
 High-speed printing/scanning
No need to wait thanks to high speed processing
First print Color 5.3 sec.
output time Monochrome 4.8 sec.
Figure 1-1. Ink packs Print speed Color/monochrome 24 ipm
 Large capacity cassettes Single-sided 30 ipm
Scan speed
Saves time for refilling paper. Duplex 60 ipm (one pass duplex)
 Optional paper cassettes can be added  High reliability
• Main unit + 1 paper cassette: max. 880 sheets (default configuration)  Reduced risk of paper jamming
• Main unit + 2 paper cassettes: max. 1,430 pages (with optional cassette) • Paper loading: Retard roller type
 Less visible defective pixels
80 sheets
250 sheets • Equipped with a nozzle diagnosis system.
The missing head nozzle is detected automatically and the image quality
is adjusted, which helps secure the print quality, and prevents re-printing.
550 sheets  Improved serviceability
 Incidental works of main components are eliminated.
(The MTTR is within 30 minutes.)
 Pre-installed service program (PC-less)
Figure 1-2. Paper cassettes
Product outline Product Summary 12

Confidential
CHAPTER
2
PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS
Confidential
2.1 Product Hardware Specifications

 Hardware specifications
Specification
Item
When the stacker is attached 425 mm (W) x 535 mm (D) x 513 mm (H)
Dimension (Stored)
When the stacker has been removed 425 mm (W) x 434 mm (D) x 513 mm (H)
When the stacker/paper support has been extended 425 mm (W) x 638 mm (D) x 605 mm (H)
When paper support has been extended
425 mm (W) x 578 mm (D) x 605 mm (H)
Dimension (Printing) (when printing on A4 sheets)
When the scanner is used 425 mm (W) x 535 mm (D) x 772 mm (H) ---
When the printer cover is open --- 425 mm (W) x 535 mm (D) x 700 mm (H)
Without consumables and options 25.8 kg 22.1 kg
Weight
With Optional Paper Cassette Unit (including C3) 30.3 kg 26.6 kg
Panel LCD 4.3 inch color LCD 2.4 inch color LCD
Touch panel Optical touch panel ---
Power supply rating 100 to 240 VAC
Input voltage range 90 to 264 VAC
Rated current 1.1 to 0.6 A 0.7 to 0.4 A
Maximum rated current 1.3 to 0.7 A
Rated frequency range 50 to 60 Hz
Input frequency range 49.5 to 60.5 Hz
Printing Approx. 28 W Approx. 23 W
Ready mode Approx. 14 W Approx. 7 W
Power consumption
Sleep mode Approx. 1.3 W Approx. 1.2 W
Power off mode Approx. 0.2 W Approx. 0.2 W
Temperature 10 to 35 degrees C
Operating Humidity (without condensation) 20 to 80% RH
Altitude 3,000 m or lower
Environmental
Temperature Before opening: -20 to 60 degrees C, After opening: -20 to 40 degrees C*
Stored Humidity (without condensation) 5 to 85% RH
Altitude ---
Product Specifications Product Hardware Specifications 14

Confidential
Specification
Item
Paper cassette 1 (64gsm) 250 sheets
Paper loading capacity Paper cassette 2 (optional paper cassette unit)
550 sheets
(64gsm)
Plain paper (A4/LTR) 150 sheets
Output tray capacity Photo paper 20 sheets
Postcard 20 sheets
XL size BK different by each country
BK ---
C different by each country
L size
M different by each country
Replacement Ink Packs Y different by each country
BK different by each country
C different by each country
Standard
M different by each country
Y different by each country
Replacement Maintenance Box T6716
Product lifetime 240,000 sheets
Note "*": 40 degrees C: within one month

60 degrees C: within 120 hours

Confidential
 Paper handling
Paper weight
Paper
Paper types Paper sizes (grams per
source
square meter)
Plain paper Legal, 8.5 x 13 in., Letter, A4, B5, Executive, A5, Half Letter, A6, B6, User-defined sizes 64 to 90 g/m2
Envelopes #10, DL, C6, C4 75 to 90 g/m2
Bright White Ink Jet Paper A4 92.5 g/m2
Preprinted Legal, 8.5 x 13 in., Letter, A4, B5, Executive, A5, Half Letter, A6, B6, User-defined sizes 64 to 90 g/m2
Letterhead Legal, 8.5 x 13 in., Letter, A4, B5, Executive, A5, Half Letter, A6, B6, User-defined sizes 64 to 90 g/m2
Recycled Legal, 8.5 x 13 in., Letter, A4, B5, Executive, A5, Half Letter, A6, B6, User-defined sizes 64 to 90 g/m2
Paper Color Legal, 8.5 x 13 in., Letter, A4, B5, Executive, A5, Half Letter, A6, B6, User-defined sizes 64 to 90 g/m2
cassette 1 Business plain paper Legal, 8.5 x 13 in., Letter, A4, B5, Executive, A5, Half Letter, A6, B6, User-defined sizes 73 g/m2
(89 to 215.9
Thick paper 1 Legal, 8.5 x 13 in., Letter, A4, B5, Executive, A5, Half Letter, A6, B6, User-defined sizes 91 to 160 g/m2
mm x 127 to
355.6 mm) Ultra Glossy Photo Paper Letter, A4, 8 x 10 in., 5 x 7 in., 4 x 6 in. 300 g/m2
Premium Glossy Photo Paper/
Letter, A4, 8 x 10 in., 5 x 7 in., HV 16:9 wide, 4 x 6 in. 255 g/m2
Premium Photo Paper Glossy
Premium Semi-gloss Photo Paper Letter, A4, 5 x 7 in., 4 x 6 in. 250 g/m2
Matte Paper-Heavy weight/
Letter, A4 167 g/m2
Premium Presentation Paper Matte
Photo Quality Ink Jet Paper/
A4 102 g/m2
Presentation Paper Matte
Paper
cassette 2
(100 to Letterhead Legal, 8.5 x 13 in., Letter, A4, B5, Executive, A5, Half Letter, A6, B6, User-defined sizes 64 to 90 g/m2
215.9 mm x Recycled Legal, 8.5 x 13 in., Letter, A4, B5, Executive, A5, Half Letter, A6, B6, User-defined sizes 64 to 90 g/m2
148 to 355.6
Color Legal, 8.5 x 13 in., Letter, A4, B5, Executive, A5, Half Letter, A6, B6, User-defined sizes 64 to 90 g/m2
mm)
Business plain paper Legal, 8.5 x 13 in., Letter, A4, B5, Executive, A5, Half Letter, A6, B6, User-defined sizes 73 g/m2

Confidential
Paper weight
Paper
Paper types Paper sizes (grams per
source
square meter)
Paper
cassette 3 Preprinted Legal, 8.5 x 13 in., Letter, A4, B5, Executive, A5, Half Letter, A6, B6, User-defined sizes 64 to 90 g/m2
(optional) Letterhead Legal, 8.5 x 13 in., Letter, A4, B5, Executive, A5, Half Letter, A6, B6, User-defined sizes 64 to 90 g/m2
(100 to
215.9 mm x Recycled Legal, 8.5 x 13 in., Letter, A4, B5, Executive, A5, Half Letter, A6, B6, User-defined sizes 64 to 90 g/m2
148 to 355.6 Color Legal, 8.5 x 13 in., Letter, A4, B5, Executive, A5, Half Letter, A6, B6, User-defined sizes 64 to 90 g/m2
mm) Business plain paper Legal, 8.5 x 13 in., Letter, A4, B5, Executive, A5, Half Letter, A6, B6, User-defined sizes 73 g/m2
Envelopes #10, DL, C6, C4 75 to 90 g/m2
Letterhead Legal, 8.5 x 13 in., Letter, A4, B5, Executive, A5, Half Letter, A6, B6, User-defined sizes 64 to 90 g/m2
Recycled Legal, 8.5 x 13 in., Letter, A4, B5, Executive, A5, Half Letter, A6, B6, User-defined sizes 64 to 90 g/m2
Rear paper Color Legal, 8.5 x 13 in., Letter, A4, B5, Executive, A5, Half Letter, A6, B6, User-defined sizes 64 to 90 g/m2
feed tray
Business plain paper Legal, 8.5 x 13 in., Letter, A4, B5, Executive, A5, Half Letter, A6, B6, User-defined sizes 73 g/m2
(Rear ASF
Unit) Thick Paper 1 Legal, 8.5 x 13 in., Letter, A4, B5, Executive, A5, Half Letter, A6, B6, User-defined sizes 91 to 160 g/m2
(64 to 215.9 Thick Paper 2 Legal, 8.5 x 13 in., Letter, A4, B5, Executive, A5, Half Letter, A6, B6, User-defined sizes 64 to 90 g/m2
mm x 127 to
Ultra Glossy Photo Paper Letter, A4, 8 x 10 in., 5 x 7 in., 4 x 6 in. 300 g/m2
6000 mm)
Letter, A4, 8 x 10 in., 5 x 7 in., HV 16:9 wide, 4 x 7 in. 255 g/m2
Premium Semi-gloss Photo Paper Letter, A4, 5 x 7 in., 4 x 6 in. 250 g/m2
Matte Paper-Heavy weight/
A4 167 g/m2
Premium Presentation Paper Matte
Photo Quality Ink Jet Paper/
A4 102 g/m2
Presentation Paper Matte

Confidential
2.2 Printing Specifications 2.3 Copying Specifications (WF-C579R/C579Ra

only)
Item Specification
Print method Serial inkjet Item Specification
Paper ejection Face up Scan Flatbed 300 dpi x 600 dpi, 600 dpi x 600 dpi
Paper feed method Friction feed method resolution ADF 300 dpi x 300 dpi, 600 dpi x 600 dpi
Print head μTFP4 Print resolutions 600 dpi x 600 dpi, 600 dpi x 1200 dpi
Number of Black 800 nozzles Legal, A4, Letter, B5, 8 x 10 in., A5,
Document Flatbed
nozzles Color 800 nozzles for each color 5 x 7 in., 4 x 6 in.
size
Minimum ink droplet size 3.8 pl ADF Legal, A4, Letter, B5, A5, A6
Number of ink colors 4 Number of pages that can be stored for collate
160
copy
Black Pigment ink
Ink type  Standard copy
Color Pigment ink
 One-sided document --> 2-sided
Black in upper tray copy (Scanner glass/ADF)
Yellow, Magenta, Cyan in lower tray  2-sided document --> One-sided
Order of Ink Packs
(from left to right when viewed from copy (ADF)
the front)  2-sided document --> 2-sided copy
Number of Ink Packs 4 (ADF)
Maintenance Box User-replaceable  2-Up copy
Copy features
 One-sided document --> 2-sided
Maximum print resolution 4800 x 1200
copy (Scanner glass/ADF)
Print speed One side 24 ipm / 24 ipm  2-sided document --> One-sided
(monochrome/ copy (ADF)
color) 2-sided 15 ipm / 15 ipm
 2-sided document --> 2-sided copy
(ADF)
 ID card copy (Scanner glass)
 Collate copy
Product Specifications Printing Specifications 18

Confidential
Item Specification 2.4 ADF Specifications (WF-C579R/C579Ra only)

Number of copies 1 to 999
Zoom Custom 25% to 400% Item Specification
 One-sided -> One-sided Sensor type CIS
 One-sided -> 2-sided Light source LED
2-Sided
 2-sided -> One-sided Maximum optical resolutions (main scan x sub scan) 1200 dpi x 2400 dpi
 2-sided -> 2-sided
Document setting Centering
Density
-4 to +4 Document set orientation Face up
Adjustment
Contrast -4 to +4 Auto 2-sided scanning 1 path
Image 300 dpi color 0.5 msec/line
Color balance -4 to +4
Copy adjustment
Sharpness Yes 300 dpi monochrome 0.5 msec/line
settings Scan speed
Remove 600 dpi color 0.85 msec/line
Yes
background 600 dpi monochrome 0.85 msec/line
 Text Plain paper, High-quality
Document paper type
 Text and Image paper, Recycled paper
Document type (Quality)
 Ultra fine A4, Letter, Legal, B5, A5,
Size
 Photo Document paper size A6
Dry time for 2-sided copy 0 sec, 10 sec, 60 sec Paper weight 64 to 95 g/m2
Copy density restriction for 2- Sheet feeding capacity
Yes 50 sheets
sided copy (plain paper (hight-quality paper, recycled paper) 80 g/m2)
Margin 3 mm One side: 70,000 sheets
ADF durability
Preview Yes 2-sided: 70,000 sheets
Product Specifications ADF Specifications (WF-C579R/C579Ra only) 19

Confidential
2.5 Scanner Specifications (WF-C579R/C579Ra 2.6 Options Specifications

only)
Item Specification
Item Specification Including projections:
425 mm (W) x 399 mm (D) x 143 mm (H)
Scanner type Flatbed Dimension
Optional Paper Excluding projections:
Sensor type CIS 425 mm (W) x 399 mm (D) x 104 mm (H)
Cassette Unit
Light source LED Weight 4.6 kg
Optical resolution 1,200 dpi Code PXA4CU3
Maximum optical resolutions 1,200 x 2,400 dpi
Maximum scan area 216 x 297 mm
Maximum document size A4, Letter
Document setting Far left corner
300 dpi color 0.85 msec/line
300 dpi monochrome 0.84 msec/line
Scan speed
Scanner durability 36,000
Product Specifications Scanner Specifications (WF-C579R/C579Ra only) 20

Confidential
2.7 Network Specifications/Fax Specifications  Fax specifications (WF-C579R/C579Ra only)

Item Specification
 Network specifications
Standard analog telephone lines (PSTN), PBX (Private
Support lines
Item Specification Branch Exchange) telephone systems
 10BASE-T (IEEE802.3i) Standard: 8 pixels per mm x 3.85 lines per mm
 100BASE-TX (IEEE802.3u) Fine: 8 pixels per mm x 7.7 lines per mm
Wired Ethernet standards Monochrome
 1000BASE-T (IEEE802.3ab) Resolution Super Fine: 8 pixels per mm x 15.4 lines per mm
 IEEE802.3az (energy save type)
Ultra Fine: 16 pixels per mm x 15.4 lines per mm
 IEEE802.11b
Color 200 x 200 dpi
 IEEE802.11g
Wi-Fi standards Speed Up to 33.6 kbps
 IEEE802.11n
 IEEE802.11ac Encoding Monochrome MH, MR, MMR
Network protocol TCP/IPv4, TCP/IPv6 method Color JPEG
 Infrastructure mode Communication mode CCITT/ITU Group 3, Super Group 3 (V34)
Coordination modes
 Wi-Fi Direct mode (Simple AP mode) Document sizes Letter, A4, Legal
 WEP (64/128 bit) Paper sizes to print faxes Letter, A4, Legal
Wireless security  WPA2-PSK(AES)* Transmission time Up to 33.6 kbps
 WPA-2 Enterprise
Page memory for received faxes Up to 550 pages or 6MB
802.11b/g/n: 2.400GHz to 2.4835GHz
Speed dial 200 contents
Frequency range 802.11a/ac: 5.150GHz to 5.350GHz
5.470GHz to 5.725GHz Group dial 199 contents
* : Conforms to the WPA2 standard, and supports the WPA/WPA2 Personal standard
Product Specifications Network Specifications/Fax Specifications 21

Confidential
CHAPTER
3
STRUCTURE
Confidential
3.1 Product Configuration (Name of Each Part) Table 3-1. Name of Each Part
No. Name Description
3.1.1 WF-C579R/C579Ra 1
ADF (Automatic Document Open when removing jammed originals in the
Feeder) cover (F) ADF.
Feeds originals straight into the printer. Slide to
2 ADF edge guides
the edges of the originals.
3 ADF input tray Feeds originals automatically.
4 ADF output tray Holds originals ejected from the ADF.
5 Paper cassette 1 (C1) Loads paper.
Figure 3-1. Name of Each Part
Structure Product Configuration (Name of Each Part) 23

Confidential
Table 3-2. Name of Each Part

Feeds the paper straight into the printer.
1 Edge guides
Slide to the edges of the paper.
2 Paper support Supports loaded paper.
Prevents foreign substance from entering the
3 Feeder guard
printer. Usually keep this guard closed.
4 Rear paper feed (B) Loads paper.
5 Output tray Holds the ejected paper.
Feeds the paper straight into the printer. Slide to
6 Edge guides
the edges of the paper.
7 Paper cassette Loads paper.

Confidential

1 Document cover Blocks external light while scanning.
2 Scanner glass Place the originals.
Operates the printer.
3 Control panel
You can change the angle of the control panel.
4 External interface USB port Connects memory devices.

Confidential

Scans placed originals. Open when removing
1 Scanner unit (J)
jammed paper inside the printer.
2 Print head Fires ink.
3 Ink supply unit tray Sets an ink supply unit.
4 Front cover (A) Open when replacing ink supply units.
5 Front cover lock Locks the front cover.

Confidential

1 LAN port Connects a LAN cable.
2 USB port Connects a USB cable.
USB port for future use.
* Service USB port
Do not remove the sticker.
3 LINE port Connects a phone line.
4 EXT. port Connects external phone devices.
5 AC inlet Connects the power cord.
6 Rear Cover (D) Open when removing jammed paper.
7 Rear Cover (E) Open when removing jammed paper.
8 Maintenance box cover (H) Open when replacing the maintenance box.

Confidential

No. Description
Turns the printer on or off.
1
Unplug the power cord after checking that the power light is off.
2 Displays the home screen.
Displays the Help screen.
3
You can check solutions to problems from here.
Logs off from the printer when Access Control is enabled.
4
When Access Control is disabled, this is also disabled.
Pauses the current printing job and allows you to interrupt another job. However, you
5 cannot interrupt a new job from the computer.
Press this button again to restart a paused job.
Resets the current settings to user default settings. If user default settings have not
6
been made, resets to the factory default.
7 Displays the Contacts list. You can register, edit or delete the contacts.
Turns on when received documents that have not yet been read, printed, or saved, are
Figure 3-6. Name of Each Part 8
stored in the printer's memory.
9 Displays menus and messages.
10 Stops the current operation.
Displays the Paper Setting screen. You can select the paper size and paper type
11
settings for each paper source.
Displays the Job/Status menu. You can check the printer's status and job history.
The error light on the left flashes or turns on when an error occurs.
12
The data light on the right flashes when the printer is processing data. It turns on
when there are queued jobs.
13 Enters numbers, characters, and symbols.
14 Clears number settings such as the number of copies.

Confidential
3.1.2 WF-C529R Table 3-7. Name of Each Part

Operates the printer.
1 Control panel
You can change the angle of the control panel.

Confidential

1 Edge guides
2 Paper support Supports loaded paper.
Prevents foreign substance from entering the
3 Feeder guard
printer. Usually keep this guard closed.
4 Rear paper feed (B) Loads paper.
5 Output tray Holds the ejected paper.
6 Edge guides
7 Paper cassette Loads paper.

Confidential

Open when removing jammed paper inside the
1 Printer cover (J)
printer.
2 Print head Fires ink.
3 Ink supply unit tray Sets an ink supply unit.
4 Front cover (A) Open when replacing ink supply units.
5 Front cover lock Locks the front cover.

Confidential

1 LAN port Connects a LAN cable.
2 USB port Connects a USB cable.
USB port for future use.
* Service USB port
Do not remove the sticker.
3 AC inlet Connects the power cord.
4 Rear Cover (D) Open when removing jammed paper.
5 Rear Cover (E) Open when removing jammed paper.
6 Maintenance box cover (H) Open when replacing the maintenance box.

Confidential

No. Description
Turns the printer on or off.
1
Unplug the power cord after checking that the power light is off.
2 Displays the home screen.
Displays the Paper Setting screen. You can select the paper size and paper type
3
settings for each paper source.
4 Stops the current operation.
5 Applies to a variety of functions depending on the situation.
Press , ,  and  to select the items. Press OK to confirm your selection or run
Figure 3-11. Name of Each Part 6
the selected feature.
7 Returns to the previous screen.
Flashes when the printer is processing data.
8
It turns on when there are queued jobs.
9 Flashes or turns on when an error occurs.

Confidential
3.2 Motor, Sensor, Clutch, and Solenoid Specifications

This section shows the positions and specifications of the motors, sensors, and
solenoids used in the product.
 Printer main unit
 Motors and solenoids (p. 35)
 Ink detection and cover detection system sensors (p. 36)
 Encoder sensors and PW sensor (p. 37)
 Paper feed and conveyance system sensors and other sensors (p. 38)
 Options
 Motors and sensors (p. 39)
 Scanner
 ADF
Structure Motor, Sensor, Clutch, and Solenoid Specifications 34

Confidential
3.2.1 Printer Main Unit (Motors and solenoids)

Table 3-12. Motors and solenoids
No. Name Function Type
Used for driving the feed mechanism.
 Pickup Roller DC motor 2
1 ASF Motor
 Rear ASF Assy (42VDC±5%)
 Rear Unit A
DC motor 3
2 CR Motor Assy Used for CR operation driving.
(42VDC±5%)
Used for driving the pump of Inksystem DC motor

3 I/S Motor
Assy. (42VDC±5%)
Used for supplying ink from the ink packs DC motor
4 Decompression Motor 1
to the buffer of the ink supply unit. (42VDC±5%)
 Used for feed and delivery roller
DC motor
5 PF Motor driving.
(42VDC±5%)
 Used for driving the APG lever.
Performs switching of the ASF motor
A Rear ASF Solenoid ---
drive transmission to the Rear ASF Assy.
Figure 3-12. Motors and solenoids

Confidential
3.2.2 Printer Main Unit (Ink detection and cover detection system sensors)
Table 3-13. Ink detection and cover detection system sensors
Rear Unit Detection

Mechanical 2
1 Detects the installation state of the Rear contact
Sensor Unit. (3.3VDC±5%)
Transmissive
2 Ink End Sensor Detects the end of the ink. photo-interrupter 1
(3.3VDC±5%)
3
Maintenance Box
3 Used for maintenance box recognition. CSIC
Detection Sensor Assy
4 Ink Pack Sensor (C) Used for ink pack (cyan) recognition. CSIC
5 Ink Pack Sensor (M) Used for ink pack (magenta) recognition. CSIC
ADF/SCN Open Sensor
Mechanical
(WF-C579R/C579Ra) Detects the open/closed state of the ADF/
6 contact
Printer Cover Open SCN unit or the printer cover.
(3.3VDC±5%)
Sensor (WF-C529R)
Mechanical
Front Cover Open Detects the open/closed state of the front
7 contact
Sensor cover. (3.3VDC±5%)
2
8 Ink Pack Sensor (Bk) Used for ink pack (black) recognition. CSIC
9 Ink Pack Sensor (Y) Used for ink pack (yellow) recognition. CSIC
to paper cassette (C3)
4
9
8 5
7 6
Figure 3-13. Ink detection and cover detection system sensors

Confidential
3.2.3 Printer Main Unit (Encoder sensors and PW sensor)

Table 3-14. Encoder sensors and PW sensor
Transmissive
Used for paper loading driving (ASF
1 ASF Encoder photo-interrupter
motor) control. 2
(3.3VDC±5%)
Transmissive
2 CR Encoder Used for CR operation control (CR scale photo-interrupter
reading). (3.3VDC±5%) 1 3
Reflective photo-
3 PW Sensor Used for paper leading edge and paper interrupter
width detection. (3.3VDC±5%)
Transmissive
Used for ink eject driving (I/S motor)
4 IS Encoder photo-interrupter
control.
(3.3VDC±5%)
Transmissive
Used for paper feed driving (PF motor)
5 PF Encoder photo-interrupter
control.
(3.3VDC±5%)
5 4
Figure 3-14. Encoder sensors and PW sensor

Confidential
3.2.4 Printer Main Unit (Paper feed and conveyance system sensors and other sensors)
Table 3-15. Paper feed and conveyance system sensors and other sensors
Mechanical 4 5
Detects the insertion state of the paper
1 Cassette Detection Sensor contact
cassette.
(3.3VDC±5%)
3
Transmissive
Cassette Paper Detection Detects whether or not there is paper inside photo- 2
2
Sensor the paper cassette. interrupter
6
(3.3VDC±5%)
1
Transmissive
Rear ASF Paper Detection Detects whether or not there is paper inside photo-
3
Sensor the Rear ASF Assy. interrupter
(3.3VDC±5%)
Transmissive
Used for paper conveyance detection photo-
4 Feed Sensor
between the pickup roller and PE sensor. interrupter
(3.3VDC±5%)
Transmissive
Detects the paper leading edge and paper photo-
5 PE Sensor
trailing edge during paper feeding. interrupter
(3.3VDC±5%)
Temperature and Humidity Measures temp/humidity to set the Analog sensor
6
Sensor appropriate drying time. (3.3VDC)
Detects the ink leakage inside the ink Analog sensor
7 Ink Leak Sensor
supply unit. (3.3VDC±5%)
Figure 3-15. Paper feed and conveyance system sensors and other sensors

Confidential
3.2.5 Options (Motor and Sensors)

Table 3-16. Options (Motor and Sensor)
DC motor
A ASF Motor Used for driving the feed mechanism.
(42VDC±5%)
DC motor
B Lift Motor Used to raise the paper cassette’s hopper.
(42VDC±5%)
Transmissive 5 6
photo-
1 ASF Encoder Used for ASF motor operation control. 4
interrupter
(3.3VDC±5%)
3
Transmissive
Used for paper conveyance detection from photo- 2
2 Feed Sensor
the pickup roller. interrupter
(3.3VDC±5%) 1
Mechanical
Jam Cover Detection Detects the open/closed state of the rear
3 contact
Sensor cover. (3.3VDC±5%)
Transmissive
photo-
4 Hopper Position Sensor Detects the up/down state of the hopper.
interrupter
(3.3VDC±5%)
A
Transmissive
Cassette Paper Detection Detects whether or not there is paper inside photo-
5
Sensor the paper cassette. interrupter B
(3.3VDC±5%)
Mechanical 7
6 Cassette Detection Sensor Detects the insertion state of the paper cas- contact
sette. (3.3VDC±5%)
Transmissive
Used for detecting the phase of lift motor photo-
7 Lift Phase Sensor
driving. interrupter
(3.3VDC±5%)
Figure 3-16. Options (Motor and Sensor)

Confidential
3.2.6 Scanner (Motor and Sensor)

Table 3-17. Scanner (Motor and Sensor)
DC motor
A SCN Motor Used for driving the scanner carriage.
(42VDC±5%)
Used to read the document on the scanner
1 CIS Module CIS
glass.
Transmissive
Used for scanner motor operation control. photo-
2 SCN Encoder
interrupter
(3.3VDC±5%)
Figure 3-17. Scanner (Motor and Sensor)

Confidential
3.2.7 ADF (Motor and Sensor)

Table 3-18. ADF (Motor and Sensor)
Used for driving the document feed mecha- DC motor
A ADF Motor
nism. (42VDC±5%)
B ADF Solenoid Performs switching of the drive transmis- ---

sion to the pickup roller.
Transmissive
Used for controlling operation of the ADF photo-
1 ADF Encoder 2
motor. interrupter
(3.3VDC±5%)
2 CIS Module Used for scanning the backside of a docu- CIS B

ment
Transmissive 1
Detects whether or not a document is photo-
3 ADF DOC Sensor
placed on the ADF document support. interrupter
(3.3VDC±5%)
Transmissive
Detects whether or not there is a document photo-
4 ADF PE Sensor
in the paper path. interrupter
(3.3VDC±5%)
4 3
Figure 3-18. ADF (Motor and Sensor)

Confidential
3.3 Operating principles The nozzle layout as seen from behind the Printhead is shown below.
3.3.1 Printhead Row B

(Cyan)
Row D
(Bk)
Row F
(Magenta)
Row H
(Yellow)
3.3.1.1 Overview Row A Row C Row E Row G

(Yellow) (Magenta) (Bk) (Cyan)
EPSON WF-C579R/WF-C579Ra/WF-C529R employs the μTFP4 head.
The μTFP4 head features dense nozzle pitches (600 dpi). In addition, the number of
nozzles per row is also greater with the row length of 1.33 inches.
Paper feed direction

These features contribute to higher image quality and faster printing by increasing both
the quantity and the density of ink droplets per shot.
The following table lists the Printhead specifications.
Table 3-19. Nozzle Configuration
Printhead type μTFP4
Black (B: 2 row), Cyan (C: 2 row)

Color
Magenta (M: 2 row), Yellow (Y: 2 row)
Number of nozzles 3200 nozzles (400 nozzles per row)

Nozzle pitch 0.042 mm (1/600 inch)
Full digit side Carriage movement direction 0 digit side
Row H Row A Figure 3-20. Nozzle layout

This product uses off-carriage type ink supply mechanism. Therefore, the Printhead is
equipped with self-sealing valves1 so that the amount of ink fired from the Printhead is
not affected by variation in pressure inside the ink path caused by movements of the
carriage or ink supply operations.
Figure 3-19. Printhead Appearance
1. This valve opens only when the pressure of the output side drops below a specified value. Because of this
characteristic of the valve, pressure variation in the input side does not affect the output side.
Structure Operating principles 42

Confidential
3.3.1.2 Head Angular Mecha Adjustment Row A Row H Row A Row H

This section explains the head angular mecha adjustment for adjusting the inclination Misalignment of
of the Printhead on the CR Unit physically. the nozzle
locations
Overview
As for the nozzle arrangement of the μTFP4 head mounted on this printer, the noz-
zles of the same color are not arranged next to each other. Therefore, the influence of
the posture (inclination) of the Printhead of this printer on the print quality is great.
The inclination of the Printhead of this printer is corrected with software (the adjust-
corrected) and mechanically by adjusting the head angular adjustment dial mounted
on the carriage mechanism. The rotational amount of the adjustment dial is deter-
mined based on the result of visual check of the printed adjustment pattern.
In this adjustment, the inclination of the Printhead is defined as the amount of mis- No inclination Inclined
alignment of the nozzles on row H and the center points of the spaces between the
nozzles on row A shown in Figure 3-21. The purpose of the adjustment is to elimi- Figure 3-21. Definition of the inclination of the Printhead
nate the misalignment (the inclination of the Printhead) completely.
Range of adjustment
By rotating the head angular adjustment dial, the Printhead is rotated on the pivot + direction - direction
point on the bottom. The relationship between the rotational direction of the Head
Angular Adjustment Dial and that of the Printhead is as follows.
Table 3-20. Rotational direction of Head Angular Adjustment Dial and that of Printhead
Rotational direction of Head Angular
+ direction - direction
Adjustment Dial
Head Angular Adjustment Dial
Rotational direction of Printhead CCW CW
The resolution performance of the Head Angular Adjustment Dial is approximately

12μm, and adjustable up to ± 144μm. CR Unit
Printhead
Figure 3-22. Head angular mecha adjustment

Confidential
3.3.2 Carriage Mechanism Cross-section

CR Unit backside Main Frame
CR Encoder
3.3.2.1 Overview Sensor
The carriage mechanism of this product consists of the CR Unit, CR Encoder Sensor,
CR Scale, CR Motor, CR Timing Belt, and etc. The Carriage Mechanism is a key
mechanism to ensure stable print quality because printing is performed by moving the
CR Unit from side to side.
As shown on the right, the CR Unit is placed on the CR Guide Frame being the
upperside of the assy held by the Main Frame. The CR Unit is attached to the CR
Timing Belt that is moved by the CR Motor so that the unit can move from side to side APG Cam
to print. The position and speed of the CR Unit are always monitored by the CR
Encoder Sensor and CR Scale, and the CR Motor is controlled in accordance with the APG Slider CR Guide Frame CR Unit
information acquired by the CR Encoder Sensor.
The APG Mechanism adjusts the distance between the printhead nozzle and the paper
CR Motor
(PG: Platen Gap) as suitable, depending on the paper to be printed. (behind the Main Frame)
The APG Mechanism of this product is equipped with an APG Cam placed between
Main Frame
the CR Unit and CR Guide Frame, and simply changes PG1 just by the movements of
the APG Trigger Lever and CR Unit.
CR Unit
CR Scale
CR Guide Frame
APG Trigger Lever
1. A gap between the printhead surface and the paper surface. To ensure print quality, the two surfaces must be parallel,
and adequate control over the amount of ink fired from the printhead and the carriage movements is required based Figure 3-23. Carriage Mechanism / APG Mechanism
on the PG appropriate to paper type.

Confidential
3.3.2.2 Shifting PG (APG Mechanism) 3.3.2.3 APG Lever actions

This product's APG Mechanism shifts PG with the APG Cam mounted on the Carriage. The PF Motor drives the Planet Gear, operating the APG Lever, and this sets or resets
APG Cam is located between the CR Guide Frame and the Carriage, and has a stepped the APG Lever.
cam face. With the APG Lever applied, if the Carriage moves toward the APG Lever,
the lever pushes the APG Cam, and the cam face of the APG Cam in contact with the APG Lever is set APG Lever is reset
APG Slider is shifted. This action shifts PG.
PG: wide Carriage
Tip of APG Lever APG Cam
CR Guide Frame
APG Slider
Platen (Paper Guide Front)
PG When PF Motor rotates CCW, APG When PF Motor rotates CW, APG
Printhead
Lever is set. Lever is reset.
PG: narrow Together with the Carriage APG Lever

movement, the APG Lever
pushes the APG Cam, and PG
is shifted.
Planet Gear
PF Roller
CR Guide Frame
PG
PF Gear
Figure 3-24. APG Cam and APG Lever (Simplified Image)
PF Motor
Figure 3-25. APG Lever

Confidential
3.3.2.4 PG type
This product has four types of PGs. The following describes the details of PGs. Each PG is determined by up to where the Carriage moves with reference to the APG Lever. PG set
once is held until the next PG shift sequence.
283.972 264.16 287.744

Distance from
0-digit (mm) APG shift standby APG reset complete APG reset standby
position position position
APG Cam
PG 4
PG 3
PG 1
PG 2
Carriage PG 1 PG 4
APG shift start position PG 3
operation PG 2 Cam face
position and
PG (mm)
APG shift area PG 4
PG 3
PG 4 set position
PG 2
PG 1
PG 3 set position
PG 2 set position
PG 1 set position
80-digit 0-digit
PG (mm) 1.6 1.85 2.35 3.0

PG Position PG1 PG2 PG3 PG4
Printing plain paper (Single) Printing plain To avoid Envelope
(Standard), Photo paper paper (Fine), rubbing (Uni-d)
Post card, (Uni-d)
Application Photo matte
paper, Duplex
printing, or to
avoid rubbing

Confidential
3.3.3 Paper Loading/Paper Feed mechanism

LD Roller
3.3.3.1 Overview
Middle Roller
The components of the paper loading mechanism and the loading method are
as follows.
Pickup Roller
Mechanism Power source and control Function
Standard  Power source  Drives the Pickup Roller, loading PF Roller
Cassette  ASF Motor paper from the Standard Cassette.
(Paper  Control  Paper loaded from the Cassette is
Cassette1)  ASF Encoder/ fed to the PF Roller using the ASF Encoder EJ Roller
ASF Scale Middle roller of the Rear unit.
Optional  Power source  ASF Motor (Optional Cassette) ASF Motor
Cassette  ASF Motor  Drives the Pickup Roller, loading
(Paper (optional cassette) paper from the Optional Cassette.
Cassette2)  Lift Motor  Drives the Vertical Feed Roller
 ASF Motor and the feed roller of the Ink
Front Supply Unit, feeding the paper to
 Control
paper the Middle Roller of the Rear PF Encoder PF Motor
loading  ASF Encoder/
ASF Scale Unit. Paper Cassette 1
(optional cassette)  Lift Motor
 Lift Phase Sensor  Drives the lift-up mechanism, Vertical Feed Roller
 ASF Encoder/ raising the paper set on the
Pickup Roller
ASF Scale Optional Cassette up to the
paper pick-up position. ASF Encoder
 ASF Motor (Optional Cassette)
 Paper loaded from the optional
cassette is fed to the PF Roller
using the Middle Roller of the
Rear Unit.
Rear paper loading  Power source Drives the LD Roller and Hopper of
 ASF Motor the Rear ASF Assy, loading paper
 Control from the Rear ASF Assy.
 ASF Encoder/ ASF Motor
ASF Scale (Optional cassette)
Paper feed  Power source Drives the PF Roller/EJ Roller, Lift Motor
 PF Motor loading and outputting paper. Paper Cassette 2
 Control Lift Phase Sensor
 PF Encoder/
PF Scale Figure 3-26. Paper Loading/Paper Feed mechanism

Confidential
3.3.3.2 Paper Loading/Feed Path

Hopper
FEEDING FROM THE PAPER CASSETTE 1
1. When you set Paper Cassette 1 in the printer, the Cassette Hopper is lifted
up by the pickup mechanism provided in Paper Cassette 1. The paper set in 1
paper cassette 1 is lifted up by the Cassette Hopper, and comes in contact
LD Roller
with the Pickup Roller.
2. The ASF Motor is driven, and the Pickup Roller conveys paper to the Retard
Separation Roller. The paper conveyed to the Separation Roller is Roller
separated from the second paper by the Separation Roller and Retard Printhead PE Sensor 2
Middle Roller
Roller, and is conveyed to the Middle Roller after passing through the
position where paper is detected by the Feed Sensor. 5 3
3. The paper conveyed to the Middle Roller is conveyed by the Middle Roller 2
up to the position where paper is detected by the PE Sensor. 4 PF Roller
EJ Roller Feed
1 Sensor
4. When the PE Sensor detects the paper, skew removal is performed in
accordance with the printing conditions. After the completion of skew Separation
removal, the paper is conveyed to the printing start position by the PF Roller
Roller, and printing starts. Pick-up Retard Roller

Cassette Hopper
Roller
5. After the completion of printing, the paper is extracted by the PF Roller Paper Cassette 1
and EJ Roller.
FEEDING FROM THE REAR ASF ASSY
1. When printing is performed from the rear paper feed device, the drive
transmission of the ASF Motor is switched by the Rear ASF Solenoid, and
the LD Roller rotates by the ASF Motor.
2. The paper set in the Hopper is conveyed to the Middle roller by the hopper-
Feeding path from the Paper Cassette 1
up action of the Hopper and LD Roller.
Feeding path from the Rear ASF Assy
3. The paper conveyed to the Middle Roller is conveyed by the Middle Roller
to the position where paper is detected by the PE Sensor, and printing is
performed in the same way as the Front Cassette. Figure 3-27. Paper loading/feed path (1)

Confidential
FEEDING FROM OPTIONAL CASSETTE (PAPER CASSETTE 2)
1. The drive of the Lift Motor is transferred to the optional hopper-up mechanism
parts, which lifts up the Optional Cassette Hopper, and the paper set in Paper
Cassette 2 comes in contact with the Optional Pickup Roller.
2. The ASF Motor is driven, and the Optional Pickup Roller conveys paper to
the Optional Separation Roller. The paper conveyed to the Optional
Separation Roller is separated from the second paper by the Optional
Separation Roller and Optional Retard Roller, and is conveyed to the Middle Roller
Vertical Feed Roller. Printhead PE Sensor
3. The paper conveyed to the Vertical Feed Roller is passed through the
Optional Feed Sensor by the Vertical Feed Roller and is conveyed up to the 4
feed roller of the Ink Supply Unit. And then the paper is conveyed by the Feed
Sensor
feed roller of the Ink Supply Unit up to the position where it is detected by
the Feed Sensor of the printer. EJ Roller PF Roller
4. When the Feed Sensor detects a paper, the ASF Motor is driven, the paper 3
Feed Roller
is conveyed by the Middle Roller up to the position where it is detected by
Optional Feed Sensor
the PE Sensor, and printing is performed in the same way as the front
cassette paper feeding. Vertical Feed Roller
Optional Separation Roller
FEEDING PATH DURING THE AUTOMATIC DUPLEX PRINTING Optional Pick-up Roller
2
When automatic duplex printing is performed, an automatic judgment function 1
for the drying time of the printed surface after surface printing is provided in
order to avoid friction of the printed surface. If drying is determined to be
necessary after surface printing, two-stage printed surface drying wait is
performed at two locations, namely on the Stacker (when the paper is held by Optional Cassette hopper Optional Retard Roller
the PF Roller and the Driven Roller) and inside the Rear Unit (when the Middle
Paper cassette 2 Feeding path from the Paper Cassette 2
Roller has held the end of the paper).
Automatic Duplex Printing feeding path
In this product, the temperature and humidity of the operating environment is
detected by loading a Temperature and Humidity Sensor, and the throughput is
improved by setting an appropriate drying time in accordance with the
Figure 3-28. Paper loading/feed path (2)
operating environment.

Confidential
3.3.3.3 Detail of Paper Loading/Feed Mechanism
PRINTER MAIN UNIT Release rib Hopper Lock Hopper Stopper Cassette Hopper
Lift-up mechanism
This mechanism lifts up the paper set in the paper cassette up to the paper
pickup position by the pickup mechanism.
Release Rib on Frame of main unit
The lift-up mechanism operates the Cassette Hopper by the force of the spring
provided inside the Paper Cassette.
When the Paper Cassette has been removed from the printer, the Cassette
Hopper is locked by the Hopper Lock present in the center part and the Hopper
Stopper on the left and right sides.
When you set the Paper Cassette in the printer, the Hopper Lock and Hopper
Stopper of the Paper Cassette come in contact with the Release Rib, and the
lock is released. The released Cassette Hopper rises due to the tension of the
spring.
Release Rib Hopper Lock
Hopper Stopper
Cassette Hopper
Hopper Stopper
Spring
Paper Cassette 1
Figure 3-29. Lift-up mechanism

Confidential
Front Feeding Mechanism

Separation Roller
The front feeding mechanism is composed of the Pick-up mechanism and the Pickup Roller
intermediate feeding mechanism. One Way Clutch
 Pick-up mechanism
This mechanism picks up paper from the Cassette Assy and feeds it up to the Pickup Drive Shaft B
intermediate feeding mechanism. The retard separation method is used for

paper separation.
The ASF Motor drives the pick-up mechanism. The pickup roller and
separation roller uses a one way clutch to always rotate in a set direction (paper Spur Gear 16.8
One Way Clutch
feed direction) only. When the ASF Motor rotates the opposite direction of
paper feeding, the drive force is cut off by the One Way Clutch, so neither the
Pick-up Roller nor Separation Roller rotates. Spur Gear 15
ASF Motor Compound Gear A
Compound Gear A
Compound Gear B Pickup Drive Shaft A
Pickup Drive Shaft A

Compound Gear B
Spur Gear16.8
Spur Gear 15 ASF Motor
Figure 3-30. Drive path

Spur Gear 16.8
Spur Gear 15
Pickup Drive Shaft B
One Way Clutch
Pickup Roller/Separation Roller

Confidential
 Intermediate feeding mechanism

This mechanism feeds the paper fed from the Cassette Assy to the paper feed
Middle Roller Duplex Gear Compound Gear 35.5, 26.4
mechanism.
Planet Gear
The intermediate feeding mechanism is driven by the ASF Motor.
The Middle Roller always rotates in a set direction (paper feed direction)
because of the Planet Gear, regardless of the ASF motor rotational direction.
ASF Motor Compound

Planet Gear Gear C
Compound Gear A Pinion Gear of

ASF Motor
Compound Gear A
Compound Gear C
Planet Gear Middle Roller
Planet Gear
Planet Gear
Duplex Gear
Compound Gear
35.5, 26.4
Compound Gear 35.5, 26.4
Duplex Gear
Planet Gear
Middle Roller
Planet Gear
ASF Motor
Compound Gear C
Compound Gear A

Confidential
Rear Feeding Mechanism

 Overview
This mechanism feeds the paper set on the Hopper to the intermediate feeding
mechanism. The retard separation method is used for paper separation.
The rear feeding mechanism is driven by the ASF Motor.
Since the ASF Motor drives the pick-up mechanism and intermediate feeding
mechanism, the ASF Clutch Gear and Rear ASF Solenoid Assy turn the drive
force ON/OFF so that the LD Roller rotates during the rear feed only.
ASF Motor
Compound Gear A
Rear ASF
Compound Gear C Solenoid
Planet Gear LD Roller

Planet Gear Spur Gear
Planet Gear
Compound Gear D
Compound Gear ASF Clutch Gear Compound Gear 35.5, 26.4

35.5, 26.4
Planet Gear
Compound Gear D
Planet Gear
Spur Gear
ASF Motor
Spur Gear Compound Gear C
Compound Gear A
Rear ASF Solenoid/ASF Clutch Gear operation
LD Roller

Confidential
 Operation of the rear feeding mechanism When the LD Roller rotates once, the Change Lever engages with the
 Drive force control by the ASF Clutch Gear and Rear ASF Solenoid Assy hook on the ASF Clutch Gear and the roller is locked. Then, the ASF
The Rear ASF Solenoid Assy controls the operation of the Change Motor's drive force to the LD Roller is cut off and the rear feed process
Lever by electrifying the Solenoid.1 The relationship of the electrifying is complete.2
status of the Solenoid and the status of the Change Lever is as follow.
Side view of rear feeding
Table 3-21. Electrifying status of the Solenoid and the operation of the Change Lever mechanism: Locked ASF Clutch Gear
(When solenoid is not electrified)
Electrifying status of the Solenoid Electrified Not electrified Hook
Solenoid
Change lever Unlocked Locked
When the Change Lever engages with (or locks) the hook on the ASF
Clutch Gear, the clutch of ASF Clutch Gear is cut off and the ASF Change Lever
Motor's drive force is not transmitted to the LD Roller.
When the Change Lever releases (unlocks for driving the rear feeding) Side view of rear feeding
mechanism: Unlocked
the hook on the ASF Clutch Gear, the clutch of ASF Clutch Gear (When solenoid is electrified)
engages and the ASF Motor's drive force is transmitted to the LD Roller.
 When performing the rear feed The lock of the
Change Lever is
When the printer starts performing the rear feed, the Solenoid of the disengaged
Rear ASF Solenoid Assy is electrified and the Change Lever is moved
down to unlock the hook. Then the clutch of the ASF Clutch Gear
engages and the drive force of the ASF Motor is transmitted to the LD
Roller. After the lock is released, the ASF Motor drives the ASF Side view of rear feeding mechanism:
Clutch Gear and LD Roller to move the hook on the ASF Clutch Gear When rear feed is driven
away from the lock position. (When solenoid is not electrified)
Therefore, when electrifying the Solenoid is stopped and the Change
Lever is back to the original position, the hook on the ASF Clutch Gear
is positioned lower than the Change Lever due to the rotation of the LD
Roller and not going to be locked again.
After electrifying the Solenoid is stopped, the ASF Motor rotates
clockwise further and the LD Roller rotates in the paper feed direction.
Figure 3-33. Operation of the rear feeding mechanism
A sheet of paper set on the Hopper is separated by the LD Roller and
Retard Roller and fed to the intermediate feeding mechanism.
2. The LD Roller is D-shaped. This shape allows the LD Roller and Retard Roller to release the paper when the
paper reaches the intermediate feeding mechanism so as not to affect the paper feeding process of the
1. Equipped with a pull type Solenoid in which the magnetic body id pulled by the electromagnetic force. intermediate feeding mechanism.

Confidential
Paper Feed Mechanism

This mechanism feeds the paper fed from the intermediate feeding mechanism
and ejects it.
The paper feed mechanism is driven by the PF Motor's drive force. The drive
force of the PF Motor is transmitted by the PF Timing Belt to the PF Roller and
EJ roller to perform paper feeding before/after printing.
PF Motor
PF Timing Belt PF Roller

Spur Gear 49.32
Spur Gear 28.8 PF Roller Spur Gear

28.8
Spur Gear 49.32
EJ Roller
Spur Gear 21.1
PF Motor
EJ Roller
PF Timing Belt Spur Gear 21.1

Confidential
OPTIONAL PAPER CASSETTE UNIT
Lift-up mechanism (Optional cassette)

This mechanism lifts the paper loaded on the Paper Cassette 2 up to the paper
pickup position. This mechanism is driven by the drive force of the Lift Motor. Spur Gear 55.2
The Lift Motor's drive force is transmitted via the Lift-up Gear Group to this Compound Gear C
mechanism and rotates the Lift-up shaft. Lift Motor

Compound
Gear A
Lift Motor
Hopper
Spur Gear 30
Compound Gear A
Compound Gear B
Compound Gear B
Lift Up Sector Gear 40T

Compound Gear C
Spur Gear 55.2
Spur Gear 30
Spur Gear 30
Lift-up mechanism
Optional Cassette
(Paper Cassette 2)

Confidential
ASF Mechanism (Optional cassette)

This mechanism picks up paper from the Optional Cassette, and conveys it up to
the intermediate feeding mechanism of the printer, and the same retard separation
method as that for the Paper Cassette of the printer is adopted.
The ASF mechanism is configured by the pickup mechanism and the intermediate
Vertical Feed Roller
feeding mechanism, and operates by the driving force of the ASF Motor.
 Pick-up mechanism
On the shafts of the Pick-up Roller and Separation Roller, the One Way Clutch is
mounted to always rotate in a set direction (paper feed direction) only. When the Spur Gear 22
ASF Motor rotates the opposite direction of paper feeding, the drive force is cut off
by the One Way Clutch, so neither the Pick-up Roller nor Separation Roller rotates. Spur Gear 63
 Intermediate feeding mechanism

ASF Motor
A One Way Clutch Gear is provided in the middle of the drive path in the
intermediate feeding mechanism, and the Vertical Feed Roller rotates in only
one fixed direction (paper feed direction). (If it is not in the paper feed
direction, it performs idling and no rotation.)
Spur Gear Pick-up Drive Shaft
ASF Motor
Pick-up Roller/
Spur Gear 23 Separation Roller
Compound Gear A Compound Gear B
Compound
Gear A One Way
Clutch Gear
One Way Clutch Gear Spur Gear
Compound
Gear B
Spur Gear 23 Pick-up Drive Shaft One Way Clutch
Spur Gear 63 One Way Clutch

Retard Roller
Spur Gear 22
Pick-up Roller/ Separation

Vertical Feed Roller Roller Figure 3-36. Drive path

Confidential
3.3.4 Ink Supply Mechanism Ink path simplified model Magnetic Valve
3.3.4.1 Overview
Self-sealing Valve (in Printhead)
The ink supply mechanism consists of the Ink Path Unit that is composed of the Ink
Printhead
Supply Tube Assy, Diaphragm Pump, Buffer, and Decompression Pump Assy, and
ink is supplied from the ink pack installed in the lower part of the product. Magnetic Valve
According to the quantity of ink discharged from the Printhead, ink is sucked from Decompression Pump Assy
Spring Valve
the ink packs by driving the Decompress Pump Unit and operating the Diaphragm Air chamber
Pump. The ink path is always kept pressurized even after the power is turned off by Ventilation Valve
Diaphragm (rubber film)
the Diaphragm Pump and the Buffer. Therefore, ink can be supplied stably during Check Valve
Ink Pack Spring
high-volume printing. Spring Buffer
3.3.4.2 Operating principles

Ink supply becomes ready by installing the ink pack into the Ink Pack Unit in the lower
part of the product. The Ink Pack Unit also mounts the CR Contact Module to detect the Check Valve Ink Chamber Diaphragm Pump Rubber Choke Valve
remaining ink amount in the ink pack.
The diaphragm is operated when the Decompress Pump Assy reduces the pressure Diaphragm Pump Buffer
Printhead Magnetic Valve Ink Supply
Tube Assy
inside the Diaphragm Pump, and it sucks ink from the ink packs Ink is supplied through (red) (blue)
the Buffer and ink tube to the Printhead. The Decompress Pump Assys and Diaphragm
Pumps supply sufficient ink needed for the quantity of the Printhead’s ink discharge in
high speed printing with high image quality. Magnetic
Valve/
In addition, this product is equipped with valves at the two joints of the Ink Tube below Spring Valve
in order to improve convenience during replacement of the Printhead and the Ink Supply
Unit. Thanks to these valves, the work usually incidental to the replacement (ink
discharge from the ink path) is not necessary.
 Joint to the Printhead
A magnetic valve is attached. During normal use, the valve is opened by
the magnetic force of the magnet holder. While replacing the Printhead,
the valve is closed and the ink path is shut because the magnet holder is
removed then.
 Joint to the Ink Supply Unit
At the end section of the tube of the Ink Supply Unit, a compression spring
and a valve is equipped, and the tube joint has a needle-like shape. During
normal use (when connected), the needle pushes and opens the valve. Ink Pack
When replacing the Ink Supply Tube Assy, the compression spring presses Top: Black
Decompression Pump Assy Bottom: Yellow, magenta, cyan
and shuts the valve immediately after removal of the tube.
Figure 3-37. Ink supply mechanism

Confidential
3.3.4.3 Ink leak detection function

A sensor for detecting an ink leak is provided in this product in order to enable
the quick detection of an ink leak when an ink leak occurs from the ink supply
path due to an abnormality in the product.
The Ink Leak Sensor Assy is provided inside the Ink Pack Unit, and detects an
ink leak by the adherence of ink on it (Ink Porous Pad, 1) when an ink leak Ink Leak Sensor Assy
occurs. It also generates an ink leak error in the printer.
Ink Leak Sensor Assy
Absorber
Figure 3-38. Ink leak sensor Assy

Confidential
3.3.5 Inksystem mechanism

3.3.5.1 Overview
The inksystem mechanism of this product is composed of the Inksystem Assy, Maintenance Box
and Maintenance Box.
The ink sucked by the Cap mechanism and Pump mechanism from the
Printhead is drained via the Waste Ink Tube and into the Waste Ink Pad in the
Maintenance Box.
The amount of waste ink is controlled by the counter in the firmware taking the
amount of evaporation into account so as not to let the ink leak out of the
printer because the waste ink exceeds the limit of the storage capacity.
Further, this product uses a mechanism by which the user him/herself can
replace the Maintenance Box.
Inksystem Assy
Figure 3-39. Ink system mechanism

Confidential
3.3.5.2 Operating principles Venting valve Cap Carriage lock lever
Wiper
OVERVIEW
Pump motor
The inksystem mechanism of this product employs the direct acting type1 and
consists of the carriage lock mechanism, wiper mechanism, capping
mechanism, pump mechanism, and venting valve (valve mechanism).
All the mechanisms are driven by the pump motor. The drive force of the pump
motor is transmitted to each mechanism via transmission parts, such as the
pump-drive compound gear, clutch gear, intermittent gear, cam, and drive
lever.
Additionally, this product utilize a maintenance box (waste ink pad) that retains
waste ink from the cap, with which users can replace ink themselves.
Carriage lock mechanism

Printhead Pump unit Pump-drive compound gear Pump encoder sensor
Valve mechanism Figure 3-41. Inksystem Mechanism
Cap mechanism
DRIVE PATH
The ink system mechanism is driven by the Pump Motor. The relationship
Pump mechanism between the Pump Motor rotational direction and operation of each part is as
follows.
Wiper mechanism Table 3-22. Pump motor rotational direction and operation of the inksystem
Rotational direction of the Pump Motor *
Mechanism
CW CCW
Maintenance Box
(waste ink pad) Wiper Wiping position Passing
Cap Drop Rise (capping)
Figure 3-40. Inksystem Mechanism (Simplified Model) Pump Release Suction

CR Lock Drop (CR Lock release) Rise (CR Lock set)
Venting Valve Open Close
1. There are two types of the capping: direct acting type and sliding type. In the direct acting type, the cap moves up and
down independently of the carriage and caps the printhead. In the sliding type, the printhead is capped (the cap is
moved up) when the carriage pushes the cap slider. *: Rotational direction seen from output shaft.

Confidential
Driving path is as follow.

Pump Motor
Symbol Parts name Symbol Parts name
Combination Gear A
A Combination Gear A G Intermittent Gear 1
Combination Gear B Combination Gear B
B H Intermittent Gear 2
(with Pump Encoder Scale)
Spur Gear
C Spur Gear I Wiper/cap-drive Cam
Pump Drive Combination Pump Drive
D J Wiper Gear 1 Combination Gear C
Gear Combination Gear
E Combination Gear C K Wiper Gear 2 Clutch
Pump (p 63)
F Clutch L Wiper Gear 3
Intermittent Gear 1
Intermittent Gear 1
Pump Motor F
G G Wiper/cap-drive
H Cam
I
A Cap (p 64) CR Lock Lever Valve (p 66) Wiper Gear 1
(p 65)
Wiper Gear 2
E
B
Drive Drive Wiper Gear 3
disengaged
C
D Wiper (p 65)
Figure 3-43. Inksystem Mechanism Drive Path (2)

L
The Clutch, Intermittent Gear 1, Intermittent Gear 2, and Wiper/cap-drive Cam
move linked to the rotation of Combination Gear C, but if the Wiper moves to
K
J the wiping position, the Intermittent Gear 2 teeth surface separate, and the
Combination Gear C drive is disengaged. At these times, the Wiper, Cap,
E Valve, and CR Lock Lever will not operate even if the Pump Motor is rotating.
If the Pump Motor rotates in the opposite direction, then the Intermittent Gear 2
and Combination Gear C will again mesh, operating each part.
Figure 3-42. Inksystem Mechanism Drive Path (1) This prevents mechanisms except the pump mechanism from driving while the
Pump Motor rotates continuously to drive the pump mechanism.

Confidential
OPERATION OF EACH MECHANISM
Pump Mechanism
Pump Frame
The pump mechanism sucks ink from the Printhead at cleaning.
The drive force from the Pump-drive Compound Gear is transmitted to the Pump Tube
pump shaft via the Timing Plate. This Timing Plate allows the Pump-drive
Compound Gear to start rotating at the different timing from the Pump Shaft. Pump Cam
After the PF Motor rotates for a while, the Pump Unit starts its operation. Pump Pulley
When the Pump Motor rotates counter-clock wise as seen from the output-shaft
side of the motor, the drive force via the Pump-drive Compound Gear rotates Pump Shaft
the Pump Pulley to flatten the tube to suck the air (to generate negative
Pump Spacer
pressure) inside the tube.
When the Pump Motor rotates clock wise, the Pump Pulley does not flatten the
tube, and the negative pressure is released.
Furthermore, this products incorporate two pumps, with improved suction
performance.
Pump Shaft
Pump motor counter-clock wise Pump motor clock wise
rotation (suction) rotation (release) Pump Frame
Rotates flattening
Pump-drive
the tube. Pump Tube Compound Gear
Pump Spring (x2)
Pump Pulley Pump Cam
Rotates without Timing Plate

flattening the
tube.
Figure 3-44. Pump Mechanism (1)

Figure 3-45. Structure of the Pump Unit

Confidential
Cap Mechanism The cam surface (in red) of the

wiper/cap-drive cam raises and
The direct acting type is employed in the capping mechanism, where the Cap is lowers the cap drive lever.
Cap
moved up and down by the Pump Motor and the Printhead is capped at the
suction for cleaning.
Intermittent Gear 2 rotates on drive power from the Pump Motor, and the cam
surface on the Intermittent Gear 2 pushes the Cap, moving it forward. At this time,
the cap tab contacts the Printhead surface, guiding the Printhead on the Cap.
Next, the Wiper/cap-drive Cam moves the Cap Drive Lever, raising the Cap,
Wiper/cap-drive
capping the Printhead. Cam
Printhead Printhead Cap Drive Lever

Cap
Cap
Figure 3-47. Cap Mechanism (2)
Wiper/cap-drive
Intermittent Cam
Gear (2)
Cap Drive Lever
Tab
Figure 3-46. Cap Mechanism (1)

Confidential
CR Lock Mechanism Wiper Mechanism

The tension of the compression spring at the bottom of the CR Lock moves up The rotation of the Wiper/cap-drive Cam drives the wiper mechanism. After
the CR Lock. When the CR Lock Drive Lever pushes the CR Lock downward, release of the capping, if the Wiper Cam rotates, the drive is conveyed to Wiper
the CR Lock is released. Gears 1, 2, and 3, and the Wiper moves along the CR unit path.
Since the CR Lock Drive Lever moves up and down together with the Cap
Passing status Printhead
Drive Lever, the CR Lock also operates together with the movement of the
Cap. This means that the printhead nozzle surface is always capped when the Wiper
Wiper/cap-drive
Cam
CR Lock is set.
Lever down Printhead

(Unlock)
CR lock
Wiper/cap-drive
Cam Wiper Gear 1 Wiper Gear 3
Compression Spring
Wiper Gear 2
Cap Drive Lever
CR Lock Drive Lever

Wiping
Back
Lever up
(Lock)
Figure 3-49. Wiper Mechanism

Figure 3-48. CR Lock Mechanism

Confidential
Venting Valve
Before capping, the Valve Lever interferes with the Link Lever, therefore the
Wiper/cap-drive Cam
Venting Valve opens. (side of 0-digit side)
During the capping sequence, the Valve Lever shaft moves along the Wiper/ The rotation of the Wiper/cap-
drive Cam moves the salient of
cap-drive Cam Slot, and the Valve Lever drops backwards. When this happens, the Wiper Drive Lever along
the cam surface of the Wiper/
the Valve Lever and Link Lever interference is removed, and the return force cap-drive Cam (red part) to
move the valve open and close.
of the Compression Spring makes this slide to the 80-digit side, closing the
Venting Valve.
Compression Spring
Link Lever
Pump Tube (to Cap)
Shaft
Valve Lever
Wiper/cap-drive
Cam
Valve: Open (vented) Valve: Closed
Figure 3-50. Venting Valve

Confidential
3.3.6 Scanner / ADF Mechanism

3.3.6.1 Scanner Mechanism
The scanner mechanism consists of a CIS Module that scans documents and SCN Unit
SCN Motor that drives the Scanner Carriage.

The drive of the SCN Motor is transmitted to the Scanner Carriage by the
Scanner Timing Belt, which moves the CIS Module, and scans the draft.
Additionally, the CIS Module incorporates a Digital Translation Module. This CIS Module
converts read data to a digital signal and sends it to the Main Board, thus
shortening data transfer time.
SCN Motor
Bottom
Digital
Translation
Module
Figure 3-51. Scanner Mechanism

Confidential
3.3.6.2 ADF Mechanism

s
The ADF mechanism of this product consists of ADF motor, ADF Encoder,
ADF PE Sensor, ADF Doc Sensor, PF Roller, EJ Roller, Pickup Roller and etc. Separation Pad Separation Roller Pickup Roller
ADF DOC Sensor
Lever
The mechanism is capable of double-sided scanning and equipped with a CIS ADF PE Sensor
Lever
Module on the ADF mechanism. Both faces of the document can be scanned
simultaneously with the CIS modules on the Scanner mechanism and the ADF
mechanism.
Pickup Roller
ADF Unit
Solenoid
ADF Encoder
During reverse
CIS Module side scanning
PF Roller CIS Module CIS Module EJ Roller

(Scanner) (ADF)
Scans front Scans back
face. face.
Figure 3-53. Document Feed Path (Cross-section view)

ADF Motor ADF Doc Sensor
EJ Roller
ADF PE Sensor PF Roller
Figure 3-52. ADF Mechanism

Confidential
In the ADF mechanism of this product, the drive of the Pickup Assy drive gear The drive path from the ADF Motor to the Pickup Assy Drive Gear is as
is shut off by the Planet Gear and Solenoid. follows.
In addition, the Pickup Assy includes a Cam and Clutch inside it to enable its If the Solenoid is energized, then the Plunger pushes up the protruding lever.
upward/downward movements and switching of Pickup Roller rotation The drive from the ADF Motor is conveyed through the Spur Gear 28.9 to the
according to the rotational direction of the Pickup Assy Drive Gear. connected Planet Gear Holder, and the Planet Gear Holder rotates clockwise.
As a result, the drive from the Planet Gear is conveyed to the LD Gear, rotating
Pickup Roller the Pickup Assy Drive Gear.
If the Solenoid is no longer energized, then the Plunger will retract, with the
lever returning the Planet Gear Holder to its original location, disconnecting
the Planet Gear drive.
Pickup Assy Drive
Gear
Plunger
Solenoid
Planet Gear Separation Roller Solenoid Lever Pickup Assy Drive
Gear
Cam / Clutch LD Gear
ADF Motor
Figure 3-54. Pickup Roller / Separation Roller Planet Gear Holder
Planet Gear
Spur Gear 28.9
ADF Motor
Figure 3-55. Drive Path to the Pickup Assy Drive Gear

Confidential
3.4 Life control  Replace the Pickup Roller Assy in a set along with the
Retard Roller of the Printer, and replace the Feed Roller
Information for the life of consumables and periodic replacement parts is
of the Optional Paper Cassette in a set along with the
shown below.
Retard Roller and Separation Roller of the Optional
The parts or components listed below need to be replaced periodically.
Paper Cassette.
 After replacing them, make sure to reset the counter for
the parts using the service support mode. (p.695)
Table 3-23. Life information

Threshold value Counting the
Target of Error Operation when
Classification Name Counting method number of Life clear method Redisplay of life
replacement Near-end End display life ends
replacement
Replace with a
Ink Pack 4% 0% Enabled new ink pack.
User/Service Stops the printing
Consumables Software control Replace with a ---
personnel (Normal error)
Maintenance Box 97% 100% Enabled new maintenance
box.
Pickup Roller
C1 cassette feed Assy Near-end/
145,500 sheets 150,000 sheets Enabled  Redisplayed on the panel
roller End Panel operation
Retard Roller Continues the whenever the printer is
(Reset counters
Periodic Feed Roller Counting by printing turned on.
Service of periodic
replacement Optional personnel
paper feed
replacement
(Select OK to  Redisplayed on the panel
part Separation operation cancel the error
cassette feed 145,500 sheets 150,000 sheets every time 300 sheets are
Roller Enabled parts in Service
roller* message.) fed using the
support mode)
Retard Roller corresponding cassette.
Rear ASF Assy 48,500 sheets 50,000 sheets Enabled
* : The Separation Roller Assy of the Optional Paper Cassette is the same as the Feed Roller of the Optional Paper Cassette.
Structure Life control 70

Confidential
CHAPTER
4
INSTALLATION
Confidential
4.1 Overview of Introduction and Installation 4.1.1 Installation Workflow

In this section, product introduction and installation is explained. Checks before installation
(p. 73)
 Check the installation procedure also using the
Unpacking
installation manual posted on the service information
portal. Checking items included in
package (p. 75)
 Make sure to update the firmware to the newest version
when installing the printer.
 Make sure to install or update the printer driver and the Removing packaging material
and protection tape (p. 76)
scanner driver of the newest version.
In this timing, obtain the customer's agreement.
Installation
(Hardware)
Installing the printer
(p. 77)
Installation
(Software)
Firmware update (p. 79)
Ink information display

setting (p. 79)
Main unit settings

(p. 81)
Printing/operation check
(p. 103)
Figure 4-1. Overall Flow of Introduction and Installation
Installation Overview of Introduction and Installation 72

Confidential
4.1.2 Checks Before Installation  Installation space

Check that the installation location has the sufficient space and can withstand
the weight shown below. (For the detailed specifications, refer to Chapter 2
Product Specifications (p. 13).)
 Dimensions when installing the printer
 Printer main unit (paper cassette 2 equipped)
Item WF-C579R/C579Ra WF-C529R
External dimensions  For storage  For storage
 Width: 425 mm  Width: 425 mm
 Depth: 535 mm  Depth: 535 mm
 Height: 513 mm  Height: 513 mm
 For printing  For printing
 Height: 605 mm  Height: 605 mm WF-C579R/C579Ra WF-C529R
Weight 25.8 kg 22.1 kg
 Printer main unit (paper cassette 2 equipped) + optional paper cassette A 722 mm 706 mm
B 848 mm 848 mm
C 425 mm 425 mm
External dimensions  For storage  For storage
D 259 mm 194 mm
E 79 mm 79 mm
F 370 mm 370 mm
 For printing  For printing
Weight 30.3 kg 26.6 kg

Confidential
 Installation environment  Avoid the following places for installation. Doing so may
Depending on the ambient environmental conditions such as outside air, it may result in malfunction or failure.
not be possible to maintain the operation quality of the product, so we  Places subjected to direct sunlight
recommend the operating within the temperature and humidity range  Places subjected to a sudden change in temperature
guaranteed below. and/or humidity
 Where fire is used
 Product
 Where volatile substances exist
Guaranteed quality  Places subjected to vibrations frequently
Item
Operation Image Paper feeding  Places near to a TV or a radio
Temperature 5 to 35 degrees C 10 to 35 degrees C  Places full of dust or dirt
Humidity 20 to 80% (Non condensing)  Where water may be splashed over the printer
 Places near to an air conditioner
 Ink pack
 Places near to a humidifier
Guaranteed quality  Take an anti-static measure such as using an anti-static
Item
Operation When installed When transported mat (commercially available) when working in a place
Temperature 10 to 35 degrees C -20 to 40 degrees C -30 to 60 degrees C where static electricity easily occurs.
20 to 80%
Humidity 5 to 85% (Non condensing)
(Non condensing)

Confidential
4.2 Installation Procedure 4.2.1 Checking Items Included in Package

When unpacking, check that the following items are included.
When moving the main unit, be sure to perform the work in No. Name Remark
accordance with the following points.
(1) Printer main unit ---
 The printer is heavy so the work to unpack and move it One for each color
must be carried out by at least two people. (2) Ink Pack
(Black, cyan, yellow, and magenta)
 When lifting up the printer, lift it up with your hands
(3) Power cable ---
placed in the locations indicated in the diagram below.
(4) Software disc ---
Be sure to hold the printer as indicated because there is a
risk of dropping it or trapping your fingers when (5) Start Here ---
lowering it if other parts are held when lifting up the (6) Precautions on using the product Cassette number label included
printer. (7) User's guide Only WF-C579R/C579Ra
 To prevent the printer from dropping or falling, do not (8) Stacker (output tray) ---
tilt the printer when moving it.
Installation Installation Procedure 75

Confidential
4.2.2 Removing Packaging Material and Protection Tape  WF-C529R

Remove the packaging materials and protection tape attached to the printer. Be careful
because there is in particular the risk of forgetting to remove the following.
 CR fixing tape
 WF-C579R/C579Ra
Figure 4-3. CR fixing tape (2)

 Ink pack protection material
Figure 4-2. CR fixing tape (1)
Figure 4-4. Ink pack protection material

Make sure to remove the all packing material, because fatal
error is occurred by remaining the packing material.

Confidential
4.2.3 Installation C H E C K 2. Remove the Rear Lower Cover Assy in the direction of the
P O IN T arrow by picking up the tab on the Rear Lower Cover Assy.
4.2.3.1 Installation and Attaching Optional Cassette
1. Place the optional cassette to the point where installing the printer main unit. Rear
2. Place the printer on the optional cassette.
Rear Lower Cover

Assy
Tab
3. Attach the Optional Paper Cassette Unit (C2) to the

Optional Paper Cassette Unit (C3).
Optional Paper
Cassette Unit (C2)
Figure 4-5. Installation (1)

C H E C K When attaching the Optional Paper Cassette Unit (C3) to the
P O IN T Optional Paper Cassette Unit (C2), it is necessary to remove Optional Paper
the Rear Lower Cover Assy from the Optional Paper Cassette Cassette Unit (C3)
Unit (C2). Remove the Rear Lower Cover Assy by following
the steps given below.
When placing the printer on the Optional Paper Cassette Unit,
1. Pull out the Paper Cassette 2, then remove it from the there is a risk of damaging the connector of the Optional Paper
Optional Paper Cassette Unit (C2). Cassette Unit, so be sure to lower it down vertical while aligning the
four corners of the printer and the Optional Paper Cassette Unit.
Paper Cassette 2
Be careful not to damage

when connecting
Optional Paper Cassette Unit (C2)

Confidential
3. Paste the cassette number label. 4.2.3.2 Connecting the Power

1. Connect the power cable.
Figure 4-8. Connecting the power

4. Attach the Stacker.

Confidential
4.2.4 Firmware update 4.2.5 Ink Information Display Setting

When turning on the printer for the first time, start it in the service support Depending on the contract, ink information of this printer can be shown/hidden
mode. (See 5.2 Service mode startup (P. 107)) as necessary. In this setting, you can hide the Near Ink Cartridge Replacement
message displayed on the operation screen when the remaining ink is running
After the printer has started, connect the USB flash drive, in which the latest out.
firmware is stored, to the USB port of the printer. Then select [USB FW
Update] in the service support mode menu to check the firmware version of the C H E C K Factory default setting is as follows.
printer. (See 8.5 Firmware Update Using USB Flash Drive (P. 691)) P O IN T  Ink Low show/hide setting: DISP (show)
C H E C K  If the firmware version of the printer is older than the

P O IN T latest version which is openly available on the web, make  How to hide Ink Low message
sure to update the printer’s firmware.
 For WF-C529R, peel off the piece of tape on the Left 1. Make sure the printer is turned off.
Cover and use the USB port on the rear side. 2. Press and hold [Power] while pressing [#].
3. Confirm the mode ID input screen is displayed.
UP/DOWN:[2][8]
SHIFT:[6]/FIN:[#]
Tape USB port
Figure 4-9. Mode ID input screen

C H E C K Inquire of the Epson Service Department about the ID to
P O IN T enter the ink information switching mode.

Confidential
4. Input the corresponding number in the Mode ID input screen. Use the [2][8] 6. Select “2.INK Low Disp Change” from the menu of the ink information
button for inputting. Pressing [6] moves the selection to the next digit. Press [#] switching mode.
when the entry is complete.
Ink Info Change Mode
UP/DOWN:[2][8] Run : Center / Select : Right
Remaining ink amount show/hide (does not indicate
SHIFT:[6]/FIN:[#] remaining ink)
1. INK Rest Disp Change Normally not used. Used only on a special contract.
1* 2. INK Low Disp Change
Ink Low show/hide
(Does not show the Ink remaining
warning)
Figure 4-10. Ink information switching mode (1) Figure 4-12. Ink information switching mode (3)
UP/DOWN:[2][8] 7. On the menu below, select the setting according to the contract.
SHIFT:[6]/FIN:[#]
• DISP; indicates Ink Low: Press Left (left area).
****5 • NON DISP; does not indicate Ink Low: Press Right (right area).
• NoChange; exits without changing setting: Press Power (Power button).
OK:FIN Retry:SHIFT INK Low Disp Change
Ink Rest Disp ?
DISP: Press[Left]Button
Figure 4-11. Ink information switching mode (2)
NON DISP: Press[Right]Button
5. When the confirmation message is displayed, press the appropriate button NoChange: Press[Power]Button
below according to your desired operation.
• When entering the ink information switching mode
Press the execution button.
• When inputting the mode ID again Figure 4-13. Ink information switching mode (4)
Press the input digit shift button.
C H E C K In the ink information switching mode, operate with the
P O IN T buttons below.
 Center (screen center): operate
 Right (right area): move the selection (downward)

Confidential
8. After changing the setting, the complete screen below is indicated. 4.2.6 Main Unit Settings
Confirm the setting is set to “Ink Low: NON DISP”, and turn the power off by
Turn on the power and then configure the main unit settings in the following
pressing the Power button.
steps.
INK Low Disp Change
Ink Disp Change is Complete! 4.2.6.1 Setting the date and time
Ink Rest: DISP Set the date and time setting correctly.
Ink Low: NON DISP
Press [Power] Button to finish. If the date and time setting is not done correctly, the data of
automatic meter reading may not be processed correctly, so
be sure to set it correctly.
1. Select [Date Format].
Figure 4-14. Ink information switching mode (5)
Figure 4-15. Setting the date and time (1)

2. Enter the date.

Confidential
3. Select the time display format. 4.2.6.2 Initial Ink Filling

Attach the ink packs and perform the initial ink filling.
Make sure to use the ink packs included in package.
1. Open the Front Cover.

4. Enter the time and tap [OK] button.
Figure 4-19. Initial ink filling (1)

Figure 4-18. Setting the date and time (4) 2. Shake the box of the ink pack 10 times well and unpack.
C H E C K After setting, make sure to check the date and time displayed
P O IN T on the menu screen is correct.
Do not touch
the chip.

Confidential
3. Press the ink supply unit tray, and then pull it out. 6. Close the Front Cover.
Initial ink filling starts.

4. Remove the packing material from the ink supply unit tray, then set the ink
pack. Do not perform the following items during initial ink filling.
 Turning the power off.
 Opening/Closing any of the covers.
 Removing any ink pack from the printer.
 Loading paper into the paper feed tray.
 Connecting the USB cable and the network cable.

5. Check the color of the label, then insert the ink supply unit tray fully.
Install all ink supply unit trays as well.

Confidential
4.2.6.3 Network Setting 4. Tap “How to change an IP address”.
 When configuring the network settings, make sure there

is no physical connection.
 The settings will not be able to be configured if the
combination of network addresses is incorrect.
 Wireless communication and wired communication
cannot be used together.
 Printer IP address settings Figure 4-27. How to Change IP Address

 Switching to the network settings screen 5. Tap “Settings”.
1. Switch the panel to the Home screen.
2. Tap the network icon.
Figure 4-28. Go to Settings

6. Check that the Advanced Settings screen is displayed.
Figure 4-25. Network Icon
3. Tap “Description”.
Figure 4-29. Advanced Settings Screen

• When setting a static IP address, refer to How to set a static IP address
(p. 85).
Figure 4-26. Network Connection Settings • When setting an address via DHCP (IPv4), refer to How to set an IP
address using DHCP (p. 89).

Confidential
 How to set a static IP address 2. Setting the IP address

1. Switching the network address setting method 2-1.Tap the IP address. (Initial value is 192.168.192.168)
1-1.If TCP/IP is set to “Auto”, tap “Auto”.
Figure 4-30. Switching to Manual Setting (1)

Figure 4-33. Setting IP Address (1)
1-2.Tap “Auto” of “Obtain IP address”.
2-2.The software keyboard appears. Enter the IP address.

1-3.Check that “Obtain IP address” is “Manual”.

Confidential
2-3.When input is complete, tap “OK”. 3. Setting the subnet mask

3-1.Tap the subnet mask. (Initial value is 255.255.255.0)

2-4.Check that the entered IP address is displayed. Figure 4-37. Setting Subnet Mask (1)
3-2.The software keyboard appears. Enter the subnet mask based on the
hearing sheet.
Figure 4-38. Setting Subnet Mask (2)

3-3.When input is complete, tap “OK”.

Confidential
3-4.Check that the entered subnet mask is displayed. 4. Setting the default gateway
4-1.Tap “Default Gateway”. (Initial value is 192.168.192.254)

Figure 4-41. Setting Default Gateway (1)
4-2.The software keyboard appears. Enter the default gateway based on
the hearing sheet.


Confidential
4-4.Check that the entered default gateway is displayed. 5. Saving the settings
5-1.Tap “Start Setup”.

4-5.Set the services cooperated. (Setting a DNS server is required.) Figure 4-45. Starting Setup
• When setting a DNS server, refer to Setting the DNS server (p 94). 5-2.Wait until the settings are reflected.
• When setting a proxy server, refer to Setting a proxy server (p 97).
Figure 4-46. Screen during Setting

5-3.Check that the Setup Complete screen is displayed.
Figure 4-47. Setup Complete Screen

Confidential
 How to set an IP address using DHCP 1-3.Check that “TCP/IP” is “Auto”.

1. Switching the network address setting method
1-1.If TCP/IP is set to “Manual”, tap “Manual”.
Figure 4-50. Switching to Auto Setting (3)

1-4.Set the services cooperated.
Figure 4-48. Switching to Auto Setting (1) • When setting a DNS server, refer to Setting the DNS server (p 94).
1-2.Tap “Manual” of “Obtain IP Address”. • When setting a proxy server, refer to Setting a proxy server (p 97).
Figure 4-49. Switching to Auto Setting (2)

Confidential
2. Saving the settings  Setting wireless LAN

2-1.Tap “Start Setup”.  How to set wireless LAN
1. Switching to the access point settings screen
1-1.Switch the panel to the Home screen.
Figure 4-51. Starting Setup

2-2.Wait until the settings are reflected.
Figure 4-54. Switching to Access Point Settings Screen (1)
1-2.Tap the network icon.


Confidential
1-3.Tap “Router”. 2. Setting the SSID

2-1. Tap “Wi-Fi Setup Wizard”.

1-4.Tap “Start Setup”. Figure 4-58. Setting SSID (1)
2-2.Wait until the access point is found.

Figure 4-59. Setting SSID (2)
2-3.Select an SSID.

Confidential
2-4.Tap “Enter” of Enter password. 2-8.When a message for printing the diagnosis results appears, press the
[Print] button and make sure that the diagnosis results is OK.

2-5.Enter a password and tap “OK”.


2-7.Wait until the setting is completed.

Confidential
 Wired settings  Setting the services cooperated

1. Connecting a LAN cable
 When setting an IP address with DHCP
1-1.Connect a LAN cable. You can choose to set DNS server automatically or
manually.
If an IP address is set manually, DNS server is for manual
setting only.
 Proxy server setting is performed in the other screen.
When changed the setting such as IP address, make sure
to save the settings before switching the screen.
Figure 4-65. Connecting a LAN Cable

2. Checking the network icon
2-1.Check that the network icon is for a wired connection.
Figure 4-66. Checking Network Icon

Confidential
 Setting the DNS server 2. Setting the primary DNS

1. Switching the DNS server setting method 2-1.Tap the IP address of the primary DNS.
1-1.If the DNS server is set to “Auto”, tap “Auto”.
Figure 4-69. Setting Primary DNS (1)

Figure 4-67. Switching DNS Server Setting Method (1) 2-2.The software keyboard appears. Enter the IP address of a primary
1-2.Check that DNS server is “Manual”. DNS server based on the hearing sheet.
Figure 4-68. Switching DNS Server Setting Method (2) Figure 4-70. Setting Primary DNS (2)

Confidential
2-4.Check that the primary DNS setting has changed. 3. Setting the secondary DNS
3-1.Tap the IP address of the secondary DNS.

Figure 4-73. Setting Secondary DNS (1)
3-2. The software keyboard appears. Enter the IP address of a secondary
DNS server based on the hearing sheet.

3-3. When input is complete, tap “OK”.

Confidential
3-4.Check that the secondary DNS setting has changed. 4. Saving the settings



Confidential
 Setting a proxy server 2. Setting use of proxy server

1. Switching to the proxy server settings screen 2-1.Tap “Do not use” of the Proxy Server Settings.
1-1.Tap “Do not use” of the Proxy Server.
Figure 4-82. Setting Use of Proxy Server (1)

Figure 4-80. Switching to Proxy Server Settings Screen 2-2.Check that the Proxy Server Settings is “Use”.
1-2.Check that the Proxy Server Settings screen is displayed.
Figure 4-83. Setting Use of Proxy Server (2)

Figure 4-81. Proxy Server Settings Screen

Confidential
3. Setting the proxy server 3-4.Check that the proxy server setting has changed.
3-1.Tap the URL of the proxy server.
Figure 4-87. Proxy Server Setting (4)

3-2.Check that the input screen appears and then enter an URL or IP
address.

3-3.Tap “OK”.

Confidential
4. Setting the port number of the proxy server 4-4.Check that the port number has changed.
4-1.Tap the port number.
Figure 4-91. Setting Port Number of Proxy Server (4)

4-2.The software keyboard appears. Enter the port number based on the
hearing sheet.

4-3.Tap “OK”.

Confidential
5. Saving the settings 4.2.6.4 Fax Settings

C H E C K This work is not required if the user will not use the fax
P O IN T function.
1. Connect the telephone line to the printer.

2. Select [Settings] from the Home menu.
3. Select [General Settings] > [Fax Settings] > [Fax Setting Wizard].


Figure 4-95. Fax Settings (1)

5-4.Print the network status sheet and check the setting state.

Confidential
4. Press [Proceed] to run the fax setup wizard. 7. Select whether or not to use a telephone connected to the printer in the Receive
Mode Setting screen.
 Use: Press [Yes] to proceed to the next step.
 Not use: Press [No] and go to step 9. Receive mode is set to [Auto].

5. Enter the name of the sender (e.g., company name) in the sender name input
screen.
8. Select whether or not to receive faxes automatically in the Receive Mode
Selection screen.
 Receive automatically: Press [Yes]. Receive mode is set to [Switch Fax/
Telephone Automatically].
 Not receive automatically: Press [No]. Receive mode is set to [Manual].

6. Enter the fax number of the sender in the sender number input screen.

Confidential
9. Confirm the settings in the Setting Confirmation screen and then press [Proceed].
C H E C K  If an error is displayed in the report, resolve the problem
To correct a setting, press the [←] button to return to the previous screen.
P O IN T according to the instructions in the report.
 If the Select Connection Line screen appears, select the
connection line. When connected to a private branch
exchange (PBX) or terminal adapter, [Private Branch
Exchange (PBX)] must be selected.
 If the Dial Tone Detection Selection screen appears, select
[Do not detect]. However, when [Do not detect] is set,
there is a risk of a wrong number being dialed due to the
first digit of a fax number not being dialed.
 To individually set the items without using the fax setup
wizard or change items that were already set with the fax
setup wizard, select
10. Press [Start Checking] to perform diagnosis of the fax function. [General Settings] >[Fax Settings] and then select and set
When a message for printing the diagnosis results appears, press the [Print] button each corresponding individual item from the Fax Settings
to print the fax function diagnosis report.
screen.
 In an environment in which an external dial number such
as “0” or “9” is required such as an office that uses
extension telephones, set the following settings.
2. Select [General Settings] > [Fax Settings] > [Basic
Settings] > [Line Type] in this order.
3. Select [PBX].
4. Select [Use] in the Access code screen.
5. Press [Access code], enter the external dial number
that is used, and press [OK].
After setting these settings, enter “#” instead of the actual
external dial number when sending a fax to an external
number.

Confidential
4.2.7 Printing/operation checks 4. Load paper into the paper cassette (C1) and press [Start].
 Nozzle check print
2. Select [Maintenance] from the Settings menu.
Figure 4-105. Nozzle check print (3)

5. Check the check patterns and make sure that there are no nozzles
missing and all nozzles discharge ink correctly.
If all nozzles discharge ink correctly, press the [OK] button to end the
nozzle check. If any of the nozzles are missing, press the [NG] button
Figure 4-103. Nozzle check print (1) to execute head cleaning.
3. Select [Print Head Nozzle Check].

Confidential
 Copy function check (WF-C579R/C579Ra only)  Operation check of Scanner Unit.

11.
1. Load paper (A4 size) into the paper cassette.

C H E C K Confirm the following items in copy function check. 2. Load a any document (A4 size) into the Flatbed.
P O IN T  ADF Unit 3. Select [Copy] from the Home screen.
• Document feed operation confirmation 4. Press [2-Sided], select [1→1 Sided], and press the Start button to execute
• Scan (Copy) image quality confirmation copying.
 Scanner Unit
• Scan (Copy) image quality confirmation
 Operation check of ADF Unit

1. Load paper (A4 size) into the paper cassette.
2. Load a any document (A4 size) into the ADF unit.
3. Select [Copy] from the Home screen.
4. Press [2-Sided], select [2→2 Sided], and press the Start button to execute
copying. Figure 4-108. Copy function check (2)
Figure 4-107. Copy function check (1)

Confidential
CHAPTER
5
SERVICE SUPPORT MODE
Confidential
5.1 Overview C H E C K  After performing A02 CR Unlock Power Off of Individual

P O IN T Action Check: MENU or B90 Printhead of Before Repair
Service support mode is a service dedicated special mode that can be started by
Operation: MENU, left outside cap error occurs when
a special operation. This mode allows you to execute functions including
rebooted the printer in service support mode and perform
Individual Action Check that you use when troubleshooting, the adjustment
adjustment or action check.
and inspection after replacing parts and the firmware update using the USB
This error occurs when the CR Unit is not at the home
flash drive etc. See 5.3 Menu configuration (p.110) for the detail.
position when the printer is turned on. Since the CR Unit
is moved from the cap because of the process written
C H E C K  By turning the Cover Open Sensor off, service support
P O IN T
above (CR unlock), no error is occurring to the printer.
mode can be performed in the state that the ADF/SCN
Therefore, press the OK button to cancel left outside cap
Unit is not connected.
error.
When starting service support mode without ADF/SCN
Unit connected to the printer, make sure to push down
and secure the lever of the Cover Open Sensor (turning
the sensor off) with a piece of tape or the like.
Left Outside Cap Error
Tape
Lever Push [#] Button
Figure 5-2. left outside cap error screen

Cover Open Sensor
Tape
Cover Open Sensor
Figure 5-1. Fixing the Cover Open Sensor
Service support mode Overview 106

Confidential
5.2 Service mode startup 2. Enter ID number of Service Support Mode, and start the service support mode.
C H E C K  Enter “89109” when starting service support mode.
FOR WF-C579R/C579RA P O IN T  Operating procedure
• Number input (move in ascending order): [2] button
1. Press and hold down the power button while pressing the [#] button from
• Number input (move in descending order): [8] button
the power-off state until a message appears on the panel LCD.
• Input digit shift: [6] button
Power button • Execute: [#] button
UP/DOWN:[2][8]
SHIFT:[6]/FIN:[#]
1*
[#] button
Figure 5-3. Printer Startup
UP/DOWN:[2][8]
Figure 5-5. ID number input screen (2)
SHIFT:[6]/FIN:[#]
 ID number input procedure
_ 1. Press a number input button ([2] button or [8] button) to enter a
number from 0 to 9.
2. Press the input digit shift button ([6] button) to shift to the next digit.
3. Repeat the above procedure to enter the specified ID number.
4. When all of the ID number is entered, press the execute button ([#]
button). A confirmation message appears.
5. Press the execute button ([#] button) to execute or press the input digit
Figure 5-4. ID number input screen (1) shift button ([6] button) to enter the number again.
 It is not possible to return to the previous digit after
shifting digits. If you wish to correct the number of the
previous digit, proceed with the steps until after Step 4.
and then perform input again.
 Please note that the execute button is not enabled until at
least two digits have been entered.
Service support mode Service mode startup 107

Confidential
FOR WF-C529R 2. Enter ID number of Service Support Mode, and start the service support
mode.
1. Press and hold down the power button while pressing the [OK] button from
the power-off state until a message appears on the panel LCD. C H E C K  Enter “89109” when starting service support mode.
P O IN T  Operating procedure
Power button
• Number input (move in ascending order): [] button
• Number input (move in descending order): [] button
• Input digit shift: [] button
• Execute: [OK] button
UP/DOWN:[UP][DOWN]
[OK] button
SHIFT:[RIGHT]/FIN:[OK]
Figure 5-6. Printer Startup 1*
UP/DOWN:[UP][DOWN]
SHIFT:[RIGHT]/FIN:[OK]
_
Figure 5-8. ID number input screen (2)
 ID number input procedure
1. Press a number input button ([] button or [] button) to enter a
number from 0 to 9.
Figure 5-7. ID number input screen (1) 2. Press the input digit shift button ([] button) to shift to the next digit.
3. Repeat the above procedure to enter the specified ID number.
4. When all of the ID number is entered, press the execute button ([#]
button). A confirmation message appears.
5. Press the execute button ([OK] button) to execute or press the input
digit shift button ([] button) to enter the number again.
 It is not possible to return to the previous digit after
shifting digits. If you wish to correct the number of the
previous digit, proceed with the steps until after Step 4.
and then perform input again.
 Please note that the execute button is not enabled until at
least two digits have been entered.

Confidential
Solution if enter and execute the wrong ID

 When a different mode starts:
If you enter the wrong ID and a different mode starts,
there is the possibility of changing important settings of
the unit, so press the power button to turn off the power
immediately and then perform the process again to enter
the correct ID number.
 When non-existent ID number:
The following panel LCD display appears and the power
is turned off automatically.
Input ID is not Found!!
Please wait Poweroff...

Confidential
5.3 Menu configuration

Service Support Mode Top Service Support Mode Top (1/2) Service Support Mode Top (2/2)
Up/Down:[2][8] Shift:[4][6] Up/Down:[ ↑ ][ ↓ ] Shift:[ → ] Up/Down:[ ↑ ][ ↓ ] Shift:[ → ]
Back:[*] Run:[#] Back:[Back] Run:[OK] Back:[Back] Run:[OK]
Individual Action Check: MENU Individual Action Check: MENU Debug Log Get Mode:MENU
Before Repair Operation:MENU Before Repair Operation:MENU
Adjustment:MENU
Adjustment:MENU
Maintenance:MENU
Maintenance:MENU
Printer Status Information
USB Data Swap:MENU Printer Status Information
CR Unlock Power Off USB Data Swap:MENU
USB FW Update CR Unlock Power Off
Counter Reset USB FW Update
Debug Log Get Mode:MENU Counter Reset
Figure 5-9. Top Menu Screen (WF-C579R/C579Ra) Figure 5-10. Top Menu Screen (WF-C529R)
Display Overview Usage situation Details
Allows you to check whether or not the various motors, sensors, and solenoids are operating
Individual Action Check: MENU Troubleshooting P. 213
normally.
Perform the supplemental work of parts for which supplemental work is required before
Before Repair Operation: MENU
performing repair work.
When performing repair work P. 271
Adjustment: MENU Allows you to make the adjustments required when replacing parts.
Maintenance: MENU Perform ink filling, cleaning, and other maintenance inside the ink supply system.
Printer Status Information Allows you to check the current firmware version and the history of the errors. Troubleshooting P. 684
Use this to back up the data from the old machine and restore the data on the new machine When exchanging product and after
USB Data Swap: MENU P. 685
when exchanging the product or after the Main Board replacement. Main Board replacement
CR Unlock Power Off Turns off the printer with the CR Unit unlocked. Before troubleshooting and repair work P. 213
USB FW Update Updates the firmware using a USB flash drive without using the PC. When updating firmware P. 691
When replacing the periodic
Counter Reset Allows you to reset the life counter of the periodic replacement parts after replacing them. P. 695
replacement parts
When performing analysis, allows you to copy the data necessary for analysis to a USB
Debug Log Get Mode: MENU When requesting analysis ---
flash drive connected to the main unit.
Service support mode Menu configuration 110

Confidential
5.4 Menu Screen Transition
Service Support Mode Top Menu
Individual Action Check: MENU Before Repair Operation:MENU Adjustment : MENU Maintenance : MENU Printer Status Information USB Data Swap: MENU
■ A00 Input A No.-Individual ■ B90 Print Head ■ B00 Input B No.-Adjustment ■ C00 Input C No.-Maintenance ■ Main Board Replace: MENU
■ Output: MENU ■ B91 Ink Supply Unit ■ Main Parts Adjustment Seq: MENU ■ Ink Fill: MENU □ Data Back Up
□ Data Restore
□ A10 CR Motor ■ B92 Ink System Assy □ B80 Print Head Seq □ C01 Head Ink Fill
□ Data Delete from USB
□ A11 PF Motor □ B81 Ink Supply Unit Seq □ C02 Initial Fill
□ ASF Motor:MENU □ B82 Ink System Assy Seq ■ Swap Mech Unit: MENU
A13 ASF Motor (C1) □ B83 Rear ASF Unit Seq ■ Head Cleaning: MENU
□ Data Back Up
A14 ASF Motor (C2) □ B84 Main Board Seq
□ C03 CL1 □ Data Restore
A15 ASF Motor (C3) ■ Simple Adjustment: MENU □ □ Data Delete from USB
C04 CL2
□ Lift Motor/Sensor:MENU □ C05 CL3
A18 Lift Motor/Sensor(C2) □ B61 PTS ACC/Dec.Adjust (S)
□ C06 Strong CL
A19 Lift Motor/Sensor(C3) □ B62 Bi-D Adjust (S)
□ C07 Refresh CL
□ A21 Supply Pump Motor □ B63 Bi-D Band Adjust (S)
□ A23 IS Motor □ B64 Band Feed Adjust (S) ■ Ink Discharge: MENU CR Unlock Power OFF
□ A31 Rear ASF Solenoid C08 Head Ink Discharge
■ Individual Adjustment: MENU □
□ C09 Supply Ink Discharge
■ Input: MENU ■ B29 Check Pattern (Plain) □ C10 Suction Pump Ink Discharge
□ A40 ALL Sensor Check □ C11 Head Thermistor Check USB FW Update
□ OP CHK-Feed/Eject:MENU ■ B34 Check Pattern (Matte)
A41 Simplex-Cassette 1 ■ C20 Status Sheet Print
A42 Simplex-Cassette 2
A43 Simplex-Cassette 3 Counter Reset
A45 Simplex-Rear ASF
A46 Duplex-Cassette 1
Debug Log Get Mode: MENU
□ Sensor CHK-Feed/Eject:MENU
A50 Sensor Check-Cassette 1 Individual Adjustment: MENU䚷
■ Debug Log Get Mode
A51 Sensor Check-Cassette 2
A52 Sensor Check-Cassette 3 ■ Mech Ready/Initialize: MENU ■ Mech Adjust: MENU ■ Config Data Set Mode
A54 Sensor Check-Rear ASF □ B10 Head ID Input □ B40 CR Motor Correct
□ ■ Config Data Set Reset Mode
□ A57 Temp/hum. Sensor □ B14 Initialize-PW Sensor B41 PF Motor Correct
□ A58 Ink End Sensor □ B16 Counter Reset □ B42 ASF Motor Correct C1
□ A59 Ink Leak Sensor □ B66 ASF/LIFT Motor Correct C2
■ Mech Check: MENU □ B67 ASF/LIFT Motor Correct C3
■ A01 Auto Check □ B69 IS Motor Correct
□ B21 CR Scale Check
■ A02 CR Unlock Power OFF □ B23 PE Sensor Check
■ Printing Adjust: MENU
□ B24 Temp/hum. Sensor
□ B43 Head Angular Adj.Mech
■ Printing Check: MENU □ B44 Head Angular Adj.Soft
□ □ B46 Bi-D Adjust
B26 Nozzle Noise Check
□ B27 Nozzle Rank Categorise □ B45 PTS Acc./Dec.Adjust
□ B28 Nozzle Detect Check □ B48 Bi-D Band Adjust
□ B29 Check Pattern (Plain) □ B49 PW Sensor Correct
□ B34 Check Pattern (Matte) □ B50 Print Start Pos.䠄ASF䠅
□ B30 RGB Pattern □ B51 Print Start Pos.䠄Rear ASF䠅
□ B32 Nozzle Check Pattern □ B52 PE Adjust䠄ASF䠅
□ B53 PE Adjust䠄Rear ASF䠅
□ B54 Feed Adjust
□ B55 Band Feed Adjust
Service support mode Menu Screen Transition 111

Confidential
CHAPTER
6
TROUBLESHOOTING
Confidential
6.1 Overview
This chapter describes the information required when troubleshooting.
The functions used when troubleshooting is as follows.
 Individual Action Check (p. 213)
With regard to electrical components such as motors, sensors, and
solenoids, this function can operate each of them individually so it can be
used to narrow down the cause of a failure.
 Printer Status Information (p. 684)
When fatal error occurs, latest error histories cannot be checked since the
service status sheet cannot be printed. This function allows you to check
the latest fatal error histories (printer fatal errors, ADF/SCN fatal errors)
and system error histories.
 Service Status Sheet (p. 703)
Information required for servicing is provided.
Troubleshooting Overview 113

Confidential
6.2 Troubleshooting Workflow
START
Service Request
A
Hearing
Check parts that must

Refer to List of Errors/Problems (P. 115) and isolate the trouble. replace or better to
Identify the cause replace to prevent the
problem from
For problems with error indications recurring
Refer to Normal Errors (P. 115).
Assisting NO
the customer Refer to Fatal Errors (P. 138).
Dispatch CE
required? Refer to Paper jam error (P. 130).
YES
For problems without error indications
Repair support
Assist the customer Refer to Feeding trouble (P. 172).
Refer to Printing/image quality trouble (P. 176).
Refer to ADF/Scanner trouble (P. 200). END

Problem NO
solved? Refer to Other (P. 203).
YES
END A
Figure 6-1. Troubleshooting Workflow
Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Workflow 114

Confidential
6.3 List of Errors/Problems

6.3.1 For problems with error indications
6.3.1.1 Normal Errors
C H E C K  Error codes are also assigned to normal errors with this product, and the occurrence history can be checked in the following ways.
P O IN T • Service status sheet
• Service support mode (Printer status information)
 Unlike with a fatal error, the error code is not displayed on the panel when an error occurs.
Error
Error Code Error details Error solution
Name Path / ink color
Occurs if a paper jam has occurred in the printer
920000 Paper jam error --- See Paper jam error (P. 130).
mechanism.
Occurs if mechanism initialization was not
performed normally because removal of the CR Remove the CR protective material and
920001 CR protective material removal forgotten error ---
protective material or protective tape had been protective tape.
forgotten when the power was first turned on.
920021 Paper Cassette (C1)
Occurs if the paper did not reach the feed sensor
920022 Not feeding error Paper Cassette (C2) See Not Feeding Error (P. 133).
when paper feeding was executed.
920041 Paper Cassette (C1) Check the feed roller attachment state and
Occurs if the paper did not reach the feed sensor
920042 Paper Cassette (C2) reattach the feed roller.
Not feeding error (maintenance roller when paper feeding was executed.
* If this error occurs again later, isolate the cause
replacement) (Occurs only immediately after feed roller
920043 Paper Cassette (C3) as described in the remedy procedure for the not
maintenance.)
feeding error.
920061 Paper Cassette (C1) Occurs if separation of the paper with the
Fan the paper and then reload the paper in the
920062 Paper Cassette (C2) separation roller could not be performed well, so
paper cassette.
Stack collapsed error the second sheet is in a half fed state and in a
position different from the original paper feed If this error subsequently occurs frequently, see
920063 Paper Cassette (C3) Stack Collapsed Error (P. 134).
start position.
Load paper into the corresponding cassette or
920202 Paper Cassette (C2) Occurs if there is determined to be no paper tray.
No paper error
920203 Paper Cassette (C3) when printing is executed. If this error is not resolved, refer to No Paper
Error (P. 134).
920205 Rear ASF
Troubleshooting List of Errors/Problems 115

Confidential
Error
920221 Paper Cassette (C1) Attach the paper cassette.
Occurs if the specified paper cassette is
920222 No cassette/tray error Paper Cassette (C2) If this error is not resolved, refer to No Cassette/
determined to be not attached.
920223 Paper Cassette (C3) tray Error (P. 135).
Occurs if multiple sheets are fed at the same

920245 Double feeding error Rear ASF Reload the paper and then try again.
time when manual duplex printing.
920262 Paper Cassette (C2) Occurs if the length of the paper loaded when
Match the main unit setting and actual paper
Automatic duplex paper size mismatch error automatic duplex printing differs from that of
920263 Paper Cassette (C3) size.
the setting.
920265 Rear ASF
920282 Paper Cassette (C2) Occurs if the paper size when fax printing is Match the main unit setting and actual paper
Fax paper length mismatch error
920283 Paper Cassette (C3) determined to not match. size.
920285 Rear ASF
920302 Paper Cassette (C2) Occurs if paper corresponding to the paper size
Match the paper size setting of the driver, etc.
Paper size mismatch error setting of the driver, etc. is not set on the main
920303 Paper Cassette (C3) and the actual paper size.
unit.
920305 Rear ASF
920322 Paper Cassette (C2) Occurs if paper corresponding to the paper type
Match the paper type setting of the driver, etc.
Paper type mismatch error setting of the driver, etc. is not set on the main
920323 Paper Cassette (C3) and the actual paper type.
unit.
920325 Rear ASF
920342 Paper Cassette (C2) Occurs if the paper size and paper type Match the paper settings (size and type) of the
Paper size and type mismatch error
920343 Paper Cassette (C3) mismatches occur at the same time. driver, etc. and the actual paper (size and type).
920345 Rear ASF
920382 Paper Cassette (C2) Occurs if a paper size or paper type mismatch
Match the main unit setting / print settings and
Duplex printing not possible error occurs and the duplex reverse process is
920383 Paper Cassette (C3) actual paper size.
determined to be physically impossible.
920385 Rear ASF

Confidential
Error
920402 Paper Cassette (C2) Occurs if the cassette fails and cannot perform
Cassette failure error operation appropriately during the paper lift up See Cassette Failure Error (P. 136).
920403 Paper Cassette (C3) operation due to cassette attachment.
920421 Paper Cassette (C1)  Temporarily turn the error display off (if will
920422 Paper Cassette (C2) continue use without replacing the part).
Occurs when printing ends or the power turns on
• Press the [OK] button in the Error screen.
920423 Feed roller end of life reached error Paper Cassette (C3) if the print count of the corresponding cassette
(The error will be displayed later every 300
has reached the number of pages for its life.
sheets or when the power is turned on.)
920425 Rear ASF
 Replace the part and reset the internal counter.
920501 Rear cover open error ---
Close the corresponding cover.
920502 Rear cover open error (optional cassette) --- Occurs if the corresponding cover is in an open
state. If this error is not resolved, refer to Cover Open
920503 Ink case open error (P1) --- Error (P. 136).
920518 Top cover open error ---
The CR Unit was left in a stopped state out of
920550 Left outside CAP error --- the home position for at least 30 minutes and the Press the [OK] button in the Warning screen.
process was canceled.
Occurs when printer is in paper reset waiting
920566 Manual duplex printing paper reset wait error --- state while performing backside printing of Set paper.
manual duplex printing.
920601 Black
920602 Cyan Occurs if the remaining amount of ink goes
Ink end error Replace the ink pack.
920603 Magenta below the limit value.
920604 Yellow
920621 Black
920622 Cyan
Ink recognition read error
920623 Magenta
920624 Yellow Occurs if the ink pack is in a state in which it
See Ink Recognition Error (P. 137).
920641 Black cannot be recognized
920642 Cyan
Ink recognition write error
920643 Magenta
920644 Yellow

Confidential
Error
920661 Black
920662 Cyan
Ink not attached error Occurs if the ink pack is not attached. Attach the ink pack.
920663 Magenta
920664 Yellow
920681 Black
920682 Remaining amount of ink for initial filling Cyan Occurs if there is less than the amount of ink Attach an ink pack with adequate ink for initial
920683 insufficient warning error Magenta required for filling when initial filling starts. filling.
920684 Yellow
920701 Black
920702 Cyan Occurs if an ink pack supplied with the product
Attach other than the ink pack for initial filling
Error for initial filling I/C was used for ink replacement for other than
920703 Magenta (ASP ink pack).
initial ink filling.
920704 Yellow
920721 Black
920722 Cyan Occurs if the inserted ink is unrecognizable
Ink recognition error Attach the correct ink pack.
920723 Magenta because it is non-genuine ink.
920724 Yellow
920741 Black
920742 Cyan Occurs if the remaining amount of ink is
Attach an ink pack with the amount required for
Remaining amount of ink insufficient error insufficient when executing strong cleaning,
920743 Magenta cleaning.
refresh cleaning.
920744 Yellow
Occurs if the usage amount of the maintenance
920900 Maintenance box full error --- Replace the maintenance box.
box exceeded the limit value.
920901 No maintenance box error --- Occurs if there is no maintenance box attached. Attach a maintenance box.
920902 Maintenance box recognition error (read) --- Occurs if the maintenance box cannot be
See Maintenance Box Recognition Error (P. 137).
920903 Maintenance box recognition error (write) --- recognized.
Occurs if the remaining amount of the
Remaining amount of maintenance box Attach a maintenance box with the amount
920904 --- maintenance box is insufficient when executing
insufficient error required for cleaning.
strong cleaning, refresh cleaning.

Confidential
Error
Occurs if page data that uses a large amount of
920980 Memory full error --- memory is sent and the main unit memory
capacity is exceeded.
Occurs if print data that uses a large amount of
920981 Memory insufficient error --- memory is sent and the main unit memory Reduce the amount of memory used for print
becomes insufficient. page data by, for example, splitting up the print
Memory insufficient error (number of print pages.
920982 --- Occurs if a number of print copies data of a data
copies)
size exceeding the free space is sent in the state
Memory insufficient error (resolution
920983 --- in which there is little free space in the main unit
reduction)
memory.
920984 Memory insufficient error (reverse printing) ---
Occurs if manual feeding is specified from the
920985 Manual feed error --- Load paper into the Rear ASF.
PCL driver and then printing is executed.
Occurs when driver that is not corresponded to
920987 Driver mismatch error --- Use corresponding driver.
the printer is used.
Press the [OK] button in the Error screen.
921002 Paper Cassette (C2) Displayed when the Feed Roller has reached (The error will be displayed later every 300
Feed roller end of life approaching warning
921003 Paper Cassette (C3) 97% of its service life. sheets or when the power is turned on until the
end of life of the part is reached.)
921005 Rear ASF
921021 Paper Cassette (C1)  Temporarily turn the error display off (if will
921022 Paper Cassette (C2) continue use without replacing the part).
Occurs when printing ends or the power turns on
• Press the [OK] button in the Error screen.
921023 Feed roller end of life reached warning Paper Cassette (C3) if the print count of the corresponding cassette
(The error will be displayed later every 300
has reached the number of pages for its life.
sheets or when the power is turned on.)
921025 Rear ASF
 Replace the part and reset the internal counter.
921201 Black
921202 Cyan Occurs if the remaining amount of the ink pack
Ink low ---
921203 Magenta has become near the limit value.
921204 Yellow
Occurs if the usage amount of the maintenance
921400 Maintenance box nearly full --- ---
box has become near the limit value.
921401 Black print mode warning --- --- ---
Remove the paper jammed in the ADF unit
930000 ADF paper jam --- Occurs if a paper jam occurred in the ADF unit.
document feed path.

Confidential
Error
Split up the document and send it in parts.
Occurs if there is no memory remaining when
940000 Send memory storage error --- Specify direct printing and then send the
fax scanning.
document.
Occurs if there is no memory remaining during
940001 Receive memory storage error --- fax receiving or if a document exceeding 100 Process the inbox data (print, cancel, or delete).
pages is received at one time.
Occurs if dialing the other party's fax number
940002 Sending incomplete (no dial tone) --- Check the telephone line and then try again.
failed because a dial tone could not be detected.
940003 Sending incomplete (busy) --- Wait a while and then try again.
failed because the other party's line was busy.
940004 Sending incomplete (no response) --- Wait a while and then try again.
failed because there was no response.
Occurs if the modular cords are connected to
940005 Sending incomplete (reverse insertion) --- Connect them to LINE and EXT correctly.
LINE and EXT in reverse.
Occurs if the modular cord is not connected to Check the telephone line and connect the
940006 Sending incomplete (no connection) ---
the telephone line. modular cord.
Occurs if the DNS settings of the email server
940007 DNS error (email) ---
are invalid. Check the DNS settings of the printer.
Occurs if the DNS settings of the save Check the DNS server settings.
940008 DNS error (folder) ---
destination are invalid.
 Check the authentication method.
• Check the SMTP server address and port.
Occurs if the authentication settings of the email
940009 Authentication error (email) --- • Check the POP3 server address and port.
server are invalid.
 Check the account name.
 Check the password.
Occurs if one of the following settings is Check the following.
invalid. • Folder path
940010 Authentication error (folder) --- • Save destination • User name
• User name • Password
• Password setting • Account name

Confidential
Error
 Check the SMTP server address and port.
 Check the POP3 server address and port.
 Check the network settings (IP address, subnet
mask, and default gateway).
 Check that the network cable is physically
Occurs if a communication error occurred
940011 Communication error (email) --- connected.
during email forwarding.
 Check whether or not the address is correct.
 Check the access point settings.
 Check the firewall settings.
 Check the server (possibility of server being
down).
 Check the folder path.
 Check that the network cable is physically
connected.
 Check the network settings (IP address, subnet
mask, and default gateway).
940012 Communication error (folder) ---  Check the firewall settings.
during folder forwarding.
down).
 Check whether or not a file of the same name
in the save destination has been left open.
 Check whether or not a file of the same name
in the save destination is write prohibited.
Check that the following save destination
settings are correct.
• Communication mode
Occurs if the specified save destination did not
940013 Destination invalid error (folder) --- • Folder path
exist.
• User name
• Password
• Port number
Occurs if writing could not be performed
Save destination space insufficient error
940014 --- because there is no free space in the save Free up space in the save destination.
(folder)
destination folder.
Occurs if the received data the user is attempting
940015 No received data --- ---
to print again has been discarded.

Confidential
Error
Occurs if the preview button is pressed when
940016 Preview not possible --- Disable direct transmission.
direct transmission is in the enabled state.
Do the following depending on the intended use.
 When wish to transmit in color
Color transmission not possible for Occurs if transmission at a specified time is
940017 --- • Transmit without specifying a time.
transmission at specified time specified and then the color start key is pressed.
 When wish to specify a time and then transmit
• Select black and white and then transmit.
Color transmission to multiple destinations not Occurs if multiple destinations are specified and
940020 --- • Transmit to one destination at a time.
possible then the color start key is pressed.
 When wish to perform fax broadcasting
Occurs if duplex scanning is specified and then
940021 Duplex color transmission not possible --- • Cancel duplex scanning.
the color start key is pressed.
 When wish to perform duplex scanning
Occurs if the color start key is pressed when the
940022 Color transmission not possible when ECM off --- • Enable the ECM setting.
ECM setting is in the disabled state.
 When the ECM setting cannot be changed
• Select black and white.
Occurs if the on-hook dial button is pressed Wait until the line becomes available and then
940024 Hook operation disabled ---
when the line is in use. try again.
Occurs if a number is input when the dial buffer Wait until the input dial data is processed and the
940025 Dial buffer ---
is full with on-hook dialing. buffer space becomes available.
Occurs if fax printing is started when the set
940029 Paper size mismatch error --- paper size is smaller than the paper size of the Set the correct paper size.
fax data to be printed.
Occurs if the media is removed during saving or
940030 Media error (media removed) --- Connect the media and then try again.
creating a folder.
Occurs if media for saving received faxes is Connect media with free space and then try
940031 Media error (memory full) ---
inserted but the media has no free space. again.

Confidential
Error
Occurs if connected media for saving received
faxes and attempted to create a folder for saving  Cancel the media setting (write prohibited).
940032 Memory error (write prohibited) ---
received faxes in the storage media but the  Connect media that is not write protected.
media is write protected.
 Reconnect the media.
Occurs if a write error occurred during saving
940033 Media error (failure) ---  Connect different media. (A folder must be
received faxes.
created by storage dedicated folder creation.)
Occurs if attempted to change the fax settings Make sure fax usage has finished before
940034 Fax function in use ---
while the fax function was in use. changing the settings.
Occurs if attempted to change the fax settings
Make sure changing of the fax settings from a
940035 PC in use --- while the fax settings were being changed from
PC has finished before changing the settings.
a PC.
Occurs if email is selected in the forwarding
940036 Email server is not set --- settings when the email server settings have not Configure the email server settings.
been configured.
Occurs if email is selected in the forwarding
Check the connection with the email server and
940037 No connection to email server --- settings in the state in which there is no
establish a connection.
connection with the email server.
940038 Fax Board failure --- Occurs when the FAX Board is broken. Replace the FAX Board.
Occurs if the DNS settings of the email server  Check the DNS settings of the printer.
950000 DNS error for Scan to Email ---
are invalid.  Check the DNS server settings.
 Check the SMTP server address and port.
 Check the POP3 server address and port.
 Check the network setting related items.
• IP address, subnet mask, and default gateway
→ Perform email server connection diagnosis
(Scan to Email function only)
950001 Communication error for Scan to Email ---  Check that the network cable is physically
during Scan to Email execution.
connected.
 Check whether or not the address is correct.
down).

Confidential
Error
 Check the authentication method.
• Check the SMTP server address and port.
Occurs if the authentication settings of the email
950002 Authentication error for Scan to Email --- • Check the POP3 server address and port.
server are invalid.
 Check the account name.
 Check the password.
 Change the scan settings (increase the
maximum attachment file size).
Occurs if the size of the scanning data to be
 Reduce the size of the scanning data (reduce
950003 Size exceeded for Scan to Email --- attached exceeded the maximum attachment file
the size by changing the resolution or
size.
compression ratio).
 Reduce the number of document pages.
Occurs if insufficient memory during Scan to Make sure the job being executed has finished
950004 Insufficient memory for Scan to Email ---
Email execution. before trying again.
ADF document removal required for Scan to Occurs if a document needs to be removed from
950005 --- Remove the document from the ADF unit.
Email the ADF unit during Scan to Email execution.
ADF document loading required for Scan to Occurs if a document needs to be loaded in the
950006 --- Load the document in the ADF unit.
Email ADF unit during Scan to Email execution.
Occurs if the number of document scanning
Send and save the scanned data and then scan the
950007 Addition limit exceeded for Scan to Email --- sheets has reached the limit with the document
remaining document sheets as a different job.
addition function.
Occurs if the DNS settings of the save  Check the DNS settings of the printer.
950020 DNS error for Scan to Folder ---
destination are invalid.  Check the DNS server settings.
 Check that the following save destination
• Folder path
• Connection mode
• Port number
Occurs if a communication error occurred  Check that the network cable is physically
950021 Communication error for Scan to Folder ---
during Scan to Folder execution. connected.
 Check the network setting related items.
• IP address, subnet mask, and default gateway
down).

Confidential
Error
Occurs if any of the user name and password • Communication mode
950022 Authentication error for Scan to Folder --- settings for accessing the specified save • Folder path
destination is invalid. • User name
• Password
• Port number
 Ensure there is sufficient storage area in the
save destination folder.
Occurs if the scanned data did not fit in the  Reduce the size of the scanning data (reduce
950023 Size exceeded error for Scan to Folder ---
folder of the save destination. the size by changing the resolution or
compression ratio).
Occurs if insufficient memory during Scan to Make sure the job being executed has finished
950024 Insufficient memory for Scan to Folder ---
folder execution. before trying again.
Folder the ADF unit during Scan to Folder execution.
Folder ADF unit during Scan to Folder execution.
950027 Addition limit exceeded for Scan to Folder --- sheets has reached the limit with the document
addition function.
Occurs if the specified save destination did not • Folder path
950028 Destination invalid for Scan to Folder ---
exist.
• User name
• Password
• Port number
 Remove the file with the same name in the
Occurs if a file name in the save destination is save destination folder.
950029 File name duplicated for Scan to Folder ---
duplicated.  Set the file header to a different character
string and then execute again.
950040 Communication error for Scan to Cloud --- Check that there is a connection to the network.
during destination acquisition.

Confidential
Error
Occurs when the Epson Connect service of the Enable the service in Epson Connect settings of
950041 Service stopped for Scan to Cloud ---
printer is paused. the setup.
Occurs if the Epson Connect service is not Register the Epson Connect service to the
950042 Service not registered for Scan to Cloud ---
registered. printer.
Occurs if not connected to the Epson Connect
server due to one of the following reasons.
 When the login process is performed after  Check that there is a connection to the
950043 Not logged in for Scan to Cloud --- printer startup but a destination search is network.
started during the process.  Wait a while and then try again.
 When the login process failed due to
communication error
Cloud the ADF unit during Scan to Cloud execution.
Cloud ADF unit during Scan to Cloud execution.
Occurs if the scanned data exceeded the size of Reduce the number of document pages and then
950046 Size exceeded for Scan to Cloud ---
data that can be transmitted. try again.
Occurs if the destination is invalid.
(Occurs if the destination information on the
950047 Invalid destination for Scan to Cloud --- server is rewritten during the period from Set the destination again.
acquiring the destination list to transmitting the
data.)
Occurs if not even one destination is registered Register a destination to the Epson Connect
950048 Destination not registered for Scan to Cloud ---
to the server. service.
950049 Addition limit exceeded for Scan to Cloud --- sheets has reached the limit with the document
addition function.
950060 Communication error for AirPrint (eSCL) ---
950070 Communication error for Scan to WSD --- Occurs if a communication error occurred
Check that there is a connection to the network.
Communication error for Scan to Document during execution of each function.
950080 ---
Capture Pro
Check whether or not the destination is currently
PC in use error for Scan to Document Capture communicating with another printer.
950081 --- Occurs if the destination PC is busy.
Pro (If communication is in progress, make sure
communication has finished before trying again.)

Confidential
Error
No applicable PC for Scan to Document Occurs if not connected with a PC compatible Connect with a PC compatible with Document
950082 ---
Capture Pro with Document Capture Pro. Capture Pro.
Communication error for Scan to Document
950090 --- during Scan to Document Capture Pro Server Check that there is a connection to the network.
Capture Pro Server
execution.
Server in use error for Scan to Document
950091 --- Occurs if the server is busy. Wait a while and then try again.
Capture Pro Server
No response for Scan to Document Capture Pro Occurs if a server compatible with Document Connect with a server compatible with
950092 ---
Server Capture Pro Server could not be found. Document Capture Pro Server.
No job error for Scan to Document Capture Pro Occurs if not even one job is registered to the
950093 --- Register a job on Document Capture Pro Server.
Server server.
 Check that there is a connection to the
Occurs if a communication error occurred network.
950100 Communication error for SMTP Server ---
during communication to SMTP Server.  Check mail sever setting
 Check that SMTP Server is operated correctly.
 Check that there is a connection to the
Occurs if a communication error occurred network.
950101 Communication error for POP3 Server ---
during communication to POP3 Server.  Check mail server setting
 Check that POP3 Server is operated correctly.
 Check mail server setting.
Occurs if trouble occurred during connection to
950102 DNS error for mail server (SMTP) --- (SMTP Server Address)
SMTP Server.
 Check the connection state to DNS Server.
 Check mail server setting.
Occurs if trouble occurred during connection to
950103 DNS error for mail server (POP3) --- (POP3 Server Address)
POP3 Server.
 Check the connection state to DNS Server.
Occurs if authentication process is failure on Check following mail server setting.
950104 Authentication error for SMTP Server ---
SMTP Server.  Authentication method
Occurs if authentication process is failure on  Authentication account
950105 Authentication error for POP3 Server ---
POP3 Server.  Authentication password
Occurs if printer's date and time setting is
950106 Certificate error (Date/time) --- incorrect, or if you have a root certificate for the Check date and time setting of printer.
server, but it has expired.

Confidential
Error
Occurs if printer does not have a root certificate  Check that printer have route certificate
corresponding to the server or if the CA corresponding to the server.
950107 Certificate error (CA certificate) ---
certificate for verifying the partner server is not  Check that CA certificate for verifying the
imported. Partner server is imported.
Occurs if certificate obtained from the server is Check that certificate obtained from the server is
950108 Certificate error (other) ---
broken. correctly.
Occurs if mismatch SMTP connection setting on
Secure connection mismatch
950109 --- server and Client, or server is not support SMTP
(Server is not SSL)
Secure Connection (SSL Connection).
Secure connection mismatch
950110 --- server and client, or if Server request the SSL/ Check that secure connection setting on Sever
(Server is SSL/TLS)
TLS connection to SMTP Secure Connection. and Client are matched.
Secure connection mismatch server and client, or if Server request the
950111 ---
(Server is STARTTLS) STARTTLS connection to SMTP Secure
Connection.
SMTP server connection failure Check following mail server setting.
Occurs if printer communication by using the no
950112 (“Connection to server failed” of “Sever is not ---  SMTP server address
support protocol.
SMTP Server)  SMPT Server port number
SMTP Server Authentication method mismatch Change the Authentication method of printer to
950113 ---
(SMTP-Auth is necessary) Occurs if mismatch the authentication method SMTP Authentication.
SMTP Server Authentication method mismatch on Server and client. Change the Authentication method of printer to
950114 ---
(SMTP-Auth is not necessary) POP before SMTP.
Occurs if source address specification is
950115 Source address specification error --- Check source address.
mistake.
 Ensure there is sufficient storage area in the
storage media.
The storage media space for scanning data is  Reduce the size of the scanning data (reduce
990000 Insufficient space for Scan to External Memory ---
insufficient. the size by changing the resolution or
compression ratio).
Cancel the write prohibited settings of the
990001 Write prohibited for Scan to External Memory --- Occurs if the storage media is write prohibited.
storage media.
Occurs if a folder cannot be created in the
990002 Folder creation for Scan to External Memory --- Connect different media.
storage media.

Confidential
Error
The storage media was removed during Scan to
990003 Card removed for Scan to External Memory --- Connect the media.
External Media execution.
Insufficient memory for Scan to External Occurs if insufficient memory during Scan to Make sure the job being executed has finished
990004 ---
Memory External Memory execution. before trying again.
Try again.
Occurs if saving failed due to an error other than
990005 Other error for Scan to External Memory --- (If the same error occurs again after trying again,
the above.
Contact the Epson Service Support department.)
Addition limit exceeded for Scan to External Send and save the scanned data and then scan the
990006 --- sheets has reached the limit with the document
Memory remaining document sheets as a different job.
addition function.
Occurs if the connected media is not formatted
990100 External memory recognition not possible --- Connect different media.
or is in an unsupported format.
Occurs if attempted to execute the external
Simultaneous operation execution error for Make sure the running function has finished
990101 --- memory printing function when a function that
external memory printing before trying again.
cannot be executed at the same time is running.
Add the PC printing privilege for the
Occurs if user authentication was successful but
990200 Security (user restriction) print restriction --- corresponding user in WebConfig and
there is no PC printing privilege for that user.
NetConfig.
 Occurs if user authentication failed.
 Check that the user name and password are
 Occurs if the setting for permitting execution
correct.
of a job with no authentication information is
990201 Security (user restriction) authentication error ---  Set the setting for permitting execution of a
set to “Prohibit” when a print job with no
job with no authentication information to
authentication information (user name and
“Permit”.
password) is received.
990300 Memory full error for copying --- Split up the document and scan it in parts.
sheets exceeded the memory capacity.
Reboot notification warning by changing Occurs when rebooting is needed for reflecting
991000 --- Reboot the printer.
settings the changed settings.

Confidential
PAPER JAM ERROR
C H E C K In this product, in order to improve the analysis of paper jam error (Error code: 920000), sub code is allocated for each paper jam
P O IN T occurrence factor.
When a paper jam occurs, sub code is recorded simultaneously with a paper jam error.
(Regarding the detail of paper jam occurrence factor, refer to Detail of paper jam occurrence factor (P. 132).)
Table 6-1. Paper Jam sub code list

Paper Cassette (C1) Paper Cassette (C2) Paper Cassette (C3) Duplex Rear ASF
Code Content of paper jam Code Content of paper jam Code Content of paper jam Code Content of paper jam Code Content of paper jam
001 C1 normal rotation 037 C2 normal rotation 073 C3 normal rotation 145 Duplex normal rotation 181 Rear Tray normal rotation
PE sensor Unreached PE sensor Unreached PE sensor Unreached PE sensor Unreached PE sensor Unreached
002 C1 reverse 038 C2 reverse 074 C3 reverse 146 Duplex reverse 182 Rear Tray reverse
PE sensor Unreached PE sensor Unreached PE sensor Unreached PE sensor Unreached PE sensor Unreached
003 C1 normal rotation 039 C2 normal rotation 075 C3 normal rotation 147 Duplex normal rotation 183 Rear Tray normal rotation
PE sensor not off PE sensor not off PE sensor not off PE sensor not off PE sensor not off
004 C1 reverse 040 C2 reverse 076 C3 reverse 148 Duplex reverse 184 Rear Tray reverse
PE sensor not off PE sensor not off PE sensor not off PE sensor not off PE sensor not off
005 C1 PW sensor Unreached 041 C2 PW sensor Unreached 077 C3 PW sensor Unreached 149 Duplex PW sensor Unreached 185 Rear Tray PW sensor Unreached
007 C1 FE sensor Unreached 043 C2 FE sensor Unreached 079 C3 FE sensor Unreached 151 Duplex FE sensor Unreached 187 Rear Tray FE sensor Unreached
008 C1 FE sensor Unreached B 044 C2 FE sensor Unreached B 080 C3 FE sensor Unreached B 152 Duplex FE sensor Unreached B 188 Rear Tray FE sensor Unreached B
009 C1 FE sensor not off 045 C2 FE sensor not off 081 C3 FE sensor not off 153 Duplex FE sensor not off 189 Rear Tray FE sensor not off
010 C1 FE2 sensor Unreached 046 C2 FE2 sensor Unreached 082 C3 FE2 sensor Unreached 154 Duplex FE2 sensor Unreached 190 Rear Tray FE2 sensor Unreached
011 C1 FE2 sensor not off 047 C2 FE2 sensor not off 083 C3 FE2 sensor not off 155 Duplex FE2 sensor not off 191 Rear Tray FE2 sensor not off
012 C1 FE3 sensor Unreached 048 C2 FE3 sensor Unreached 084 C3 FE3 sensor Unreached 156 Duplex FE3 sensor Unreached 192 Rear Tray FE3 sensor Unreached
013 C1 FE3 sensor not off 049 C2 FE3 sensor not off 085 C3 FE3 sensor not off 157 Duplex FE3 sensor not off 193 Rear Tray FE3 sensor not off
017 C1 CR Motor 053 C2 CR Motor 089 C3 CR Motor 161 Duplex CR Motor 197 Rear Tray CR Motor
018 C1 PF Motor 054 C2 PF Motor 090 C3 PF Motor 162 Duplex PF Motor 198 Rear Tray PF Motor
019 C1 ASF Motor 055 C2 ASF Motor 091 C3 ASF Motor 163 Duplex ASF Motor 199 Rear Tray ASF Motor
020 C1 ASF2 Motor 056 C2 ASF2 Motor 092 C3 ASF2 Motor 164 Duplex ASF2 Motor 200 Rear Tray ASF2 Motor
021 C1 ASF3 Motor 057 C2 ASF3 Motor 093 C3 ASF3 Motor 165 Duplex ASF3 Motor 201 Rear Tray ASF3 Motor
023 C1 NF error 059 C2 NF error 095 C3 NF error 167 Duplex NF error 203 Rear Tray NF error
024 C1 Stack collapsed 060 C2 Stack collapsed 096 C3 Stack collapsed 168 Duplex Stack collapsed 204 Rear Tray Stack collapsed
026 Home seek failure 062 Home seek failure* 098 Home seek failure* 170 Home seek failure* 206 Home seek failure*
027 CR protective material 063 CR protective material 099 CR protective material 171 CR protective material 207 CR protective material
removal forgotten error removal forgotten error* removal forgotten error* removal forgotten error* removal forgotten error*
028 Emergency shutdown 064 Emergency shutdown 100 Emergency shutdown 172 Emergency shutdown 208 Emergency shutdown
(Rear Cover)* (Rear Cover)* (Rear Cover)* (Rear Cover)* (Rear Cover)*
029 Option connect error 065 Option connect error 101 Option connect error 173 Option connect error 209 Option connect error

Confidential
Table 6-1. Paper Jam sub code list

Paper Cassette (C1) Paper Cassette (C2) Paper Cassette (C3) Duplex Rear ASF
Code Content of paper jam Code Content of paper jam Code Content of paper jam Code Content of paper jam Code Content of paper jam
030 C1 without arguments 066 C2 without arguments 102 C3 without arguments 174 Duplex without arguments 210 Rear tray without arguments
031 C1 reserved* 067 C2 reserved* 103 C3 reserved* 175 Duplex reserved* 211 Rear tray reserved*
Note "*": Do not occur normally.

Confidential
Table 6-2. Detail of paper jam occurrence factor Table 6-2. Detail of paper jam occurrence factor
Paper jam occurrence Paper jam occurrence
Detail Detail
factor factor
Normal rotation This error occurs when the paper does not reach the PE sensor FE3 Sensor not off This error occurs when feed sensor of option cassette (3rd)
PE sensor Unreached at the time of feeding paper from the corresponding paper does not becoming the off condition at the time of feeding the
feeder. paper with specified step after the paper reaches to the feed
sensor of option cassette (3rd).
Reverse PE sensor This error occurs when the paper does not reach the PE sensor
Unreached at the time of pulling in paper at duplex print from the CR Motor This error occurs when detecting the speed down of CR
corresponding paper feeder. movement at the time of feeding and printing the paper from
corresponding paper feeder.
Normal rotation This error occurs when PE Sensor is not becoming the off
PE Sensor not off condition at the time of the printer fed the paper with PF Motor This error occurs when detecting the excess load of PF
specified step after the paper reaches to the PE Sensor. movement at the time of feeding the paper from the
Reverse PE Sensor not off This error occurs when PE Sensor is not becoming the off
condition at the time of the feeding the paper with specified ASF Motor This error occurs when detecting the excess load of ASF
step at duplex print after the paper reaches to the PE Sensor. movement at the time of feeding the paper from the
PW Sensor Unreached This error occurs when PW Sensor does not detect the paper
edge at the time of feeding the paper from with specified step ASF2 Motor This error occurs when detecting the excess load of ASF
after the paper reaches to the PE Sensor. movement of option cassette (2nd) at the time of feeding the
paper from the corresponding paper feeder.
FE Sensor Unreached This error occurs when feed sensor does not detect the paper
at the time of feeding the paper with specified step from the ASF3 Motor This error occurs when detecting the excess load of ASF
corresponding paper feeder. movement of option cassette (3rd) at the time of feeding the
paper from the corresponding paper feeder.
FE Sensor Unreached B This error occurs when feed sensor of printer does not detect
the paper at the time of feeding the paper from option NF Error This error occurs when the paper does not feed form the
cassette. corresponding paper feeder.
FE Sensor not off This error occurs when feed sensor does not becoming the off Stack collapsed This error occurs when separation of the paper with the
condition at the time of the feeding the paper with specified separation roller could not be performed well, so the second
step after the paper reaches to the feed sensor. sheet is in a half fed state and in a position different from the
original paper feed start position.
FE2 sensor Unreached This error occurs when the feed sensor of option cassette
(2nd) does not detect the paper at the time of feeding the Home seek failure This error occurs when the printer does not detect the contact
paper from corresponding paper feeder. to the CR Lock when performing the Home position seek.
FE2 Sensor not off This error occurs when feed sensor of option cassette (2nd) CR protective material This error occurs when mechanism initialization was not
does not becoming the off condition at the time of feeding the removal forgotten error performed normally because removal of the CR protective
paper with specified step after the paper reaches to the feed material or protective tape had been forgotten when the power
sensor of option cassette (2nd). was first turned on.
FE3 sensor Unreached This error occurs when the feed sensor of option cassette (3rd) Emergency shutdown This error occurs when open the rear cover while printing.
does not detect the paper at the time of feeding the paper from Optional cassette Occurs when the printer cannot communicate with the
corresponding paper feeder. communication error optional cassette.

Confidential
NOT FEEDING ERROR  Troubleshooting

Step Check and measure Yes No
 Error name
1 Check for a foreign object and remaining Go to step 2 Remove the
 Not feeding error (Paper Cassette (C1)) (Error code: 920021) jammed paper foreign object or
 Not feeding error (Paper Cassette (C2)) (Error code: 920022) Check that there is no foreign object or paper jammed paper.
 Not feeding error (Paper Cassette (C3)) (Error code: 920023) jam in the feed path.
Is the result OK?
 Error occurrence condition Check the paper feed operation using
2 Go to step 3 Explain that the
 Occurs if the paper did not reach the feed sensor when paper feeding genuine paper problem is caused
was executed. Check the paper feed operation using genuine by the paper.
paper. Did the error occur?
 Trouble related parts and causes
3 Check the feed roller state Go to step 4 Clean or replace
 Caused by paper (paper type, paper bent, etc.) Check that the feed rollers are not dirty, the feed rollers.
 Foreign object or paper jammed in paper feed path scratched or damaged.
Is the result OK?
 Feed roller worn out
4 Check the feed sensor lever operation Go to step 5 Reassemble or
 Feed roller dirty replace the feed
Move the feed sensor lever by hand to check
 Feed sensor lever operation defect or damage the operation and whether the lever is sensor lever.
 Feed sensor failure damaged.
Is the result OK?
5 Check the feed sensor detection Contact the Replace the feed
Check that the feed sensor detection operation Epson sensor.
is performed correctly with A40 All Sensor Service
Check of the individual action checks. Support
department

Confidential
STACK COLLAPSED ERROR NO PAPER ERROR

 Error name  Error name
 Stack collapsed error (Paper Cassette (C1)) (Error code: 920061)  Stack collapsed error (Paper Cassette (C1)) (Error code: 920201)
 Error occurrence condition  Stack collapsed error (Rear tray) (Error code: 920205)
 Occurs if separation of the paper with the separation roller could not be  Error occurrence condition
performed well, so the second sheet is in a half fed state and in a  Occurs if there is determined to be no paper when printing is executed.
position different from the original paper feed start position.
 Paper incorrectly loaded
 Caused by paper (paper type, paper bent, etc.)
 Paper detection sensor failure
 Feed roller worn out
 Paper detection sensor lever failure
 Feed roller dirty
 Cassette end guide position inappropriate
 Troubleshooting
1 Check the paper feed operation using genuine Clean or Explain that
paper replace the the problem
Check the paper feed operation using genuine feed rollers. is caused by
paper. the paper.
Did the error occur?

Confidential
 Troubleshooting NO CASSETTE/TRAY ERROR

 Error name
1 Check the paper loading state Go to step 2 Reload the
paper.
 No cassette/tray error (Paper Cassette (C1)) (Error code: 920221)
Check that the paper is correctly loaded in the
cassette.  No cassette/tray error (Paper Cassette (C2)) (Error code: 920222)
2 Check the paper detection sensor lever Go to step 3 Replace the  No cassette/tray error (Paper Cassette (C3)) (Error code: 920223)
Check that the paper detection sensor lever is paper
not damaged. detection  Error occurrence condition
Is the result OK? sensor lever.  Occurs if the specified paper cassette is determined to be not attached.
3 Check the paper detection sensor Replace the Replace the  Trouble related parts and causes
Perform an individual action check and make Main Board paper
sure that there is no sensor output error. Assy. detection  Paper cassette incorrectly inserted
• A50 to A54 Sensor Check (If the trouble is sensor.  Paper cassette failure
not resolved after
 Paper cassette detection sensor failure
Is the result OK? replacing the
Main Board  Troubleshooting
Assy, contact the
Epson Service Step Check and measure Yes No
Support
1 Check the paper cassette insertion Go to step 2 Reinsert the
department.)
state paper
Check that the paper cassette is correctly cassette.
inserted.
2 Check the paper cassette Go to step 3 Replace the
Check that the paper cassette is not paper
damaged. cassette.
Is the result OK?
3 Check the paper detection sensor Replace the Main Replace the
Perform an individual action check and Board Assy. paper
make sure that there is no sensor output (If the trouble is not cassette
error. resolved after detection
• A50 to A54 Sensor Check replacing the Main sensor.
Board Assy, contact
Is the result OK? the Epson Service
Support department.)

Confidential
CASSETTE FAILURE ERROR COVER OPEN ERROR

 Cassette failure error (Paper Cassette (C2)) (Error code: 920402)  Rear cover open error (Error code: 920501)
 Cassette failure error (Paper Cassette (C3)) (Error code: 920403)  Rear cover open error (optional cassette) (Error code: 920502)
 Error occurrence condition  Ink case open error (P1) (Error code: 920503)
 Occurs if lift up detection is not possible when the paper cassette is  Top cover open error (Error code: 920518)
inserted due to a failure of the lift up sensor or lift up motor. State in  Error occurrence condition
which the operation of feeding from the corresponding cassette is not
 Occurs if the corresponding cover is in an open state.
performed. However, feeding and printing from the different cassettes
is possible.  Trouble related parts and causes
 Trouble related parts and causes  Corresponding cover open state
 Paper feed cassette hopper up mechanism failure  Corresponding cover damaged
 Lift gear train part damaged  Corresponding cover open sensor failure
 Lift motor failure  Troubleshooting
 Troubleshooting Step Check and measure Yes No
1 Close the cover Go to step 2 End
Does the error occur when the front cover is in the
1 Check the paper cassette Go to step 2 Replace the closed state?
Is the hopper up mechanism of the paper cassette paper
cassette. 2 Check the cover state Replace the Replace the
damaged?
Check that the cover is not damaged. cover open cover.
Is the result OK? sensor.
Is the result OK?
2 Check the lift gear train parts Go to step 3 Replace the
The lift gear train parts must not be damaged or lift gear
become detached. train parts.
Is the result OK?
3 Check the lift motor and lift encoder states Contact the Replace the
Perform an individual action check and make sure Epson lift motor
that there is no sensor output error. Service assembly.
• A18/A19 Lift Motor/Sensor Support
department.
Is the result OK?

Confidential
INK RECOGNITION ERROR MAINTENANCE BOX RECOGNITION ERROR

 Ink recognition read error  Maintenance box recognition error (read) (Error code: 920902)
• Black (Error code: 920621)  Maintenance box recognition error (write) (Error code: 920903)
• Cyan (Error code: 920622)
• Magenta (Error code: 920623)  Error occurrence condition
• Yellow (Error code: 920624)  Occurs if the data written to CSIC of the maintenance box differs from
 Ink recognition write error normal or cannot be recognized.
• Black (Error code: 920641)  Trouble related parts and causes
• Cyan (Error code: 920642)
• Magenta (Error code: 920643)
 Maintenance box attachment failure
• Yellow (Error code: 920644)  CSIC contact parts dirty
 Error occurrence condition  Maintenance box CSIC defect
 Occurs if the data written to CSIC of the ink pack differs from normal  CSIC contact part failure
or cannot be recognized.  Troubleshooting
 Trouble related parts and causes Step Check and measure Yes No
 Ink pack attachment failure 1 Reattach the maintenance box Go to step 2 End
 CSIC contact parts dirty Does the error occur after reattach the maintenance
box?
 Ink pack CSIC failure
2 Clean the Maintenance box CSIC Go to step 3 End
 CSIC contact part failure Clean the Maintenance box CSIC with a dust-free
 Troubleshooting cloth.
Does the error occur?
3 Attach a new maintenance box Replace the End
1 Reattach the ink pack Go to step 2 End Does the error occur after attach a new CSIC
Does the error occur after reattach the ink pack? maintenance box? contact
parts.
2 Clean the Ink pack CSIC Go to step 3 End
Clean the Ink pack CSIC with a dust-free cloth.
Does the error occur?
3 Attach a new ink pack Replace the End
Does the error occur after attach a ink pack? Ink Supply
Unit.

Confidential
6.3.1.2 Fatal Errors Table 6-3. Fatal Errors

Table 6-3. Fatal Errors Troubleshooting
Category Error code Error details
procedure
Troubleshooting
Category Error code Error details 100069 FB PID excess load P. 142
procedure
100070 FB PID excess time P. 141
100001 ADF PID excess speed detection P. 141
100073 FB BS+ excess sped detection P. 141
100002 ADF PID reverse detection
P. 142 100074 FB BS+ reverse detection
100003 ADF PID lock detection
100075 FB BS+ lock detection P. 142
100004 ADF PID acceleration lock ---
100077 FB BS+ excess load
100005 ADF PID excess load P. 142
Scanner 100078 FB BS+ excess time P. 141
100006 ADF PID driving time P. 141
100081 Auto judge Fatal Error 1 ---
100009 ADF BS+ excess speed error ---
100010 ADF BS+ reverse error ---
100011 ADF BS+ lock error ---
100013 ADF BS+ excess load error ---
100014 ADF BS+ driving time error P. 141
190000 Calibration error ---
100016 HP position detection failure P. 143
000020 CR PID driving time error P. 146
100017 Contact detection distance exceeded
000021 CR PID excess load error P. 147
Scanner Opposite side contact detection distance
100018 P. 143
exceeded error 000022 CR PID excess speed error P. 146
100019 Wrong contact detection distance error 000023 CR PID reverse error
100020 Measurement error --- 000024 CR PID lock error P. 147
100032 LED light failure --- 000025 CR PID under speed error
100048 MAIN-B connection error P. 144 000030 CR load position driving time error P. 146
MAIN-A power source circuit conduction 000031 CR load position excess load error P. 147
100049 --- Printer
error 000032 CR load position excess speed error P. 146
100050 MAIN-B ROM level mismatch error P. 144
000033 CR load position reverse error P. 147
100053 Scanner illegal error P. 145
000040 PF PID driving time error P. 148
100054 Paper jam error P. 145
000041 PF PID excess load error P. 149
100065 FB PID excess speed error detection P. 141
000042 PF PID excess speed error P. 149
100066 FB PID reverse detection
P. 142 000043 PF PID reverse error
100067 FB PID lock detection P. 149
000044 PF PID lock error
100068 FB PID acceleration lock error ---
000050 PF load position driving time error P. 148

Confidential
Table 6-3. Fatal Errors Table 6-3. Fatal Errors

Troubleshooting Troubleshooting
Category Error code Error details Category Error code Error details
procedure procedure
000051 PF load position excess load error P. 149 000180 LFT2 PID driving time error P. 158
000052 PF load position excess speed error P. 149 000181 LFT2 PID excess load error P. 159
000053 PF load position reverse error P. 149 000182 LFT2 PID excess speed error P. 158
000060 ASF PID driving time error P. 151 000184 LFT2 PID lock error P. 159
000061 ASF PID excess load error P. 152 000200 LFT3 PID driving time error P. 158
000062 ASF PID excess speed error P. 151 000201 LFT3 PID excess load error P. 159
000063 ASF PID reverse error 000202 LFT3 PID excess speed error P. 158
P. 152
000064 ASF PID lock error 000204 LFT3 PID lock error P. 159
000070 ASF load position driving time error P. 151 000540 ASF3 PID driving time error P. 155
000071 ASF load position excess load error P. 152 000541 ASF3 PID excess load error P. 156
000072 ASF load position excess speed error P. 151 000542 ASF3 PID excess speed error P. 155
000073 ASF load position reverse error P. 152 000543 ASF3 PID reverse error
P. 156
000080 2nd ASF PID driving time error P. 155 000544 ASF3 PID lock error
000081 2nd ASF PID excess load error P. 156 000550 ASF3 load position driving time error P. 155
000082 2nd ASF PID excess speed error P. 155 Printer 000551 ASF3 load position excess load error P. 156
Printer
000083 2nd ASF PID reverse error 000552 ASF3 load position excess speed error P. 155
P. 156
000084 2nd ASF PID lock error 000553 ASF3 load position reverse error P. 156
000090 2nd ASF load position driving time error P. 155 001012 DCP1 driving time error P. 168
000091 2nd ASF load position excess load error P. 156 Emergency stop error caused by cover
030004 P. 168
000092 2nd ASF load position excess speed error P. 155 opening
031001 X-Hot detect error (pre printing)
000093 2nd ASF load position reverse error P. 156 P. 160
031002 X-Hot detect error (after flushing)
000100 IS PID driving time error P. 153
031003 Transistor temperature error P. 162
000101 IS PID excess load error P. 154
031004 Head temperature error P. 160
000102 IS PID excess speed error P. 153
031006 Print head fuse blown error P. 161
000103 IS PID reverse error
P. 154 031008 VBS over-voltage error P. 161
000104 IS PID lock error
031011 HCS error P. 162
000110 IS load position driving time error P. 153
032001 Over adding connection error P. 163
000111 IS load position excess load error P. 154
032002 Unsupported additional cassette connection error P. 163
000112 IS load position excess speed error P. 153
000113 IS load position reverse error P. 154

Confidential
Table 6-3. Fatal Errors Table 6-3. Fatal Errors

Troubleshooting Troubleshooting
Category Error code Error details Category Error code Error details
procedure procedure
032051 Addition setting state error 1 202620 Wi-Fi Board failure 1. Check the
P. 164 connection of
032052 Addition setting state error 2 203004 Panel Unit failure
corresponding
032101 Addition recovery mode error P. 164 PDF Board failure parts.
032151 Addition communication error 1 2. Replace the
032152 Addition communication error 2 corresponding
System error 203201 parts.
032153 Addition communication error 3
3. Replace the
032154 Addition communication error 4 Main Board
032155 Addition communication error 5 Assy.
032156 Addition communication error 6 Firmware bug Contact the Epson
Other than
P. 165 Service Support
032157 Addition communication error 7 above
department.
Printer
033001 CRCM fuse blown error P. 166
033003 Other Ink device error
033004 Other Ink device error ---
033005 Other Ink device error
033006 CRCM access error (hardware failure)
P. 166
033007 CRCM access error (hardware failure)
033008 CRCM access error (firmware failure)
P. 167
033010 CSIC access error (hardware failure)
034001 Home position seek error P. 167
034010 Motor runaway error P. 169
034841 Ink leak error P. 169
060001 Error caused by other than printer device P. 170
060002 Driver mismatch error P. 170
060003 Error due to PCD verify command ---
060008 PDL SOC version mismatch error ---

Confidential
ADF/SCN RELATED FATAL ERROR_1 ADF/SCN RELATED FATAL ERROR_2

 ADF PID excess speed detection (error code: 100001)  ADF PID excess time (error code: 100006)
 FB PID excess speed detection (error code: 100065)  ADF BS+ driving time error (error code: 100014)
 FB BS+ excess speed detection (error code: 100073)  FB PID excess time (error code: 100070)
 Cause  FB BS+ excess time (error code: 100078)
State in which driven at unexpected speed (fast) for control.  Cause
 Suspected cause The driving time of the motor exceeded the set time.
 Encoder cable disconnected  Suspected cause

 ADF/SCN Unit failure  ADF/SCN Unit failure
 Troubleshooting  Troubleshooting
Step Check and measure Yes No Step Check and measure Yes No
1 Check the connection state of the ADF/SCN Go to step 2 End 1 Check the reproducibility Replace the End
cables Did the corresponding error occur? ADF/SCN
Reconnect the two ADF/SCN cables to the Main Unit.
Board Assy again.
Did the error occur after connecting the cables
again?
2 Check the connection state of the encoder cable Replace the Reconnect
Is the cable of the corresponding encoder correctly ADF/SCN the encoder
connected to the ADF/SCN main board? Unit. cable.

Confidential
ADF/SCN RELATED FATAL ERROR_3  Troubleshooting

 Error name
1 Check for a foreign object and jammed paper Go to step 2 Remove the
 ADF PID reverse detection (error code: 100002) remaining foreign
 ADF PID lock detection (error code: 100003) Check that there is no foreign object or paper jam object or
remaining in the document feed path. jammed
 ADF PID excess load (error code: 100005)
Is the result OK? paper.
 FB PID reverse detection (error code: 100066)
2 Check the connection state of the ADF/SCN Go to step 3 End
 FB PID lock detection (error code: 100067) cables
 FB PID excess load (error code: 100069) Reconnect the two ADF/SCN cables to the Main
Board Assy again.
 FB BS+ reverse detection (error code: 100074)
 FB BS+ lock detection (error code: 100075) again?
 FB BS+ excess load (error code: 100077) 3 Check the connection state of the encoder cable Replace the Reconnect
Is the cable of the corresponding encoder correctly ADF/SCN the encoder
 Cause
connected to the ADF/SCN main board? Unit. cable.
 The driving time of the motor exceeded the set time.
 When rotated in the opposite direction to rotation direction
(There was a sudden load error, and the motor rotated in the opposite
direction in reaction to it.)
 State in which load of motor exceeds expected load, and motor does
not rotate at all
 Suspected cause
 Foreign object or jammed paper remaining
 Motor cable disconnected
 ADF/SCN Unit failure

Confidential

 Home position detection failure (error code: 100016)  Contact detection distance exceeded (error code: 100017)
 Cause  Opposite side contact detection distance exceeded error
(error code: 100018)
Occurs when the Home position marking cannot be scanned.
 Wrong contact detection distance error (error code: 100019)
 Suspected cause  Cause
 CIS module FFC disconnected
Occurs if the CIS module cannot correctly detect the origin position during
 ADF/SCN Unit failure (CIS module failure) the initial operation.
 Troubleshooting
 Suspected cause
Step Check and measure Yes No  CIS module FFC disconnected
1 Check the connection state of the ADF/SCN Go to step 2 End  ADF/SCN Unit failure
cables
Connect the two ADF/SCN cables to the Main  Troubleshooting
Board Assy again.
again? 1 Check the connection state of the ADF/SCN Go to step 2 End
Check the connection state of the CIS module cables
2 Replace the Reconnect
FFC ADF/SCN the SCN Connect the two ADF/SCN cables to the Main
Is the CIS module correctly connected to the ADF/ Unit. CIS module Board Assy again.
SCN main board? FFC. Did the error occur after connecting the cables
again?
2 Check the connection state of the CIS module Replace the Reconnect
FFC ADF/SCN the SCN
Is the SCN CIS module correctly connected to the Unit. CIS module
ADF/SCN main board? FFC.

Confidential

 MAIN-B connection error (error code: 100048)  MAIN-B ROM level mismatch error (error code: 100050)
 Cause  Cause
Occurs if communication is not possible between the ADF/SCN main Occurs if the main unit firmware and SCN firmware versions do not match.
board and Main Board Assy of the main unit.
 Suspected cause
 Suspected cause  Main unit firmware and ADF/SCN firmware version mismatch
 Faulty connection between ADF/SCN main board and Main Board  Troubleshooting
Assy of the main unit (cable disconnected or broken)
 Update the firmware to match the main unit firmware and ADF/SCN
firmware versions.
 Main Board Assy failure
 Troubleshooting
1 Check the connection state of the Go to step 2  When disconnected
ADF/SCN cables Reconnect the cable.
For ADF/SCN cables, check the  When damaged
following items. Replace the ADF/SCN
• Are the ADF/SCN cables connected Unit.
correctly to the Main Board Assy?
• Any damage on the ADF/SCN
cables?
Is the result OK?
2 Reinstall and check the ADF/SCN Replace the Replace the ADF/SCN
Unit Main Board Unit.
Check by replacing the ADF/SCN Unit Assy.
with a normal unit (which works
normally).
Did the error occur?

Confidential

 Scanner illegal error (error code: 100053)  Paper jam error (error code: 100054)
 Cause  Cause
Occurs if enter a state that is not logically possible. (Does not occur Occurs if a paper jam occurred in the document feed path of the ADF.
normally.)
 Suspected cause
 Suspected cause  Paper jam or foreign object
 Entered a state that is not logically possible. (Not part failure, etc.)  Troubleshooting
 Troubleshooting  Remove the jammed paper or foreign object.
 Turn the power off and then back on.

Confidential
CR RELATED FATAL ERROR_1 CR RELATED FATAL ERROR_2

 CR PID driving time error (error code: 000020)  CR PID excess speed error (error code: 000022)
 CR load position driving time error (error code: 000030)  CR load position excess speed error (error code: 000032)
 Cause  Cause
The driving time of the motor exceeded the set time. State in which driven at unexpected speed (fast) for control.
 Suspected cause  Suspected cause
 Main Board Assy failure  CR timing belt detached or broken
 Troubleshooting  CR motor failure
Step Check and Measure Yes No
1 Check the reproducibility Replace the Inquire at Epson
 Troubleshooting
Did the corresponding error occur? Main Board Service Support
Assy. department.
1 Check the CR timing belt Replace the  When detached
Check that the timing belt is not following parts in Reattach the CR
detached or broken. sequence. timing belt.
• CR motor  When broken
Is the result OK? • Main Board Replace the CR
Assy unit.
(If the trouble is
not resolved after
replacing the parts
as shown above,
inquire at Epson
Service Support
department.)

Confidential
CR RELATED FATAL ERROR_3  Troubleshooting

 Error name
1 Check for paper jam paper Go to step 2 Remove the paper jam
 CR PID excess load error (error code: 000021) remaining and foreign object paper and foreign
 CR PID reverse error (error code: 000023) There is no paper jam paper and object.
 CR PID lock error (error code: 000024) foreign object in the CR scanning
section.
 CR PID under speed error (error code: 000025) Is the result OK?
 CR load position excess load error (error code: 000031) 2 Check the CR lock lever operation Go to step 3 Replace the
 CR load position reverse error (error code: 000033) Does the CR lock lever operate Inksystem Assy.
correctly when the power is on?
 Cause
(Is the lowering operation performed
 State in which load of CR motor exceeds expected load correctly?)
 When rotated in the opposite direction to rotation direction 3 Check the status of the CR main Go to step 4 Clean the main frame
(There was a sudden load error, and the motor rotated in the opposite frame and lubricate it.
direction in reaction to it) Did the following occur on the CR
main frame?
 State in which load of motor exceeds expected load, and motor does • Is the CR main frame dirty from
not rotate at all paper dust or mist?
 When unexpected deceleration has been detected while controlling CR • Is a lubrication shortage
motor. occurring?
Is the result OK?
 Suspected cause
 Paper jam paper remaining
 CR lock lever failure (Inksystem Assy failure)
 CR main frame lubrication shortage/paper dust/mist
 PG error
 CR encoder failure
 CR motor failure
 Main Board Assy failure (Motor driver failure)

Confidential
Step Check and Measure Yes No PF RELATED FATAL ERROR_1

4 Check the PG Go to step 5 Adjust the PG.
Is the PG value the standard value?
 Error name
Are the CR unit and platen in contact?  PF PID driving time error (error code: 000040)
 PF load position driving time error (error code: 000050)
Is the result OK?
 Cause
5 Check the CR operation Go to step 6  When in runaway
Turn on the power and check the CR condition The drive time of the motor exceeded the set time.
operation. Replace the CR
• Is it not in runaway condition? encoder. (Replace the  Suspected cause
CR unit.)
• Is it operating?  Main Board Assy failure
 When not operating
Is the result OK?
Replace the CR motor.  Troubleshooting
6 Check the corresponding error Replace the End
Is the error continuing after checking Main Board
step 1 to step 5? Assy. 1 Check the reproducibility Replace the Inquire at
(If the trouble is Did the corresponding error occur? Main Board Epson
not resolved after Assy. Service
replacing the Support
Main Board department.
Assy, inquire at
Epson Service
Support
department.)

Confidential
PF RELATED FATAL ERROR_2 PF RELATED FATAL ERROR_3

 PF PID excess speed error (error code: 000042)  PF PID excess load error (error code: 000041)
 PF load position excess speed error (error code: 000052)  PF PID reverse error (error code: 000043)
 Cause  PF PID lock error (error code: 000044)
 PF load position excess load error (error code: 000051)
State in which driven at unexpected speed (fast) for control.
 PF load position reverse error (error code: 000053)
 Suspected cause
 Cause
 PF timing belt detached or broken
 State in which load of PF motor exceeds expected load
 PF gear train part damaged
 When rotated in the opposite direction to rotation direction
 Main Board Assy failure (Motor driver failure) (There was a sudden load error, and the motor rotated in the opposite
 Troubleshooting direction in reaction to it)
not rotate at all
1 Check the PF timing belt Replace the Main  When detached
Check that the PF timing belt is not Board Assy. Reattach the PF  Suspected cause
detached or broken. (If the trouble is timing belt.  Foreign object or jammed paper remaining
not resolved after  When broken
replacing the Main  Paper path damaged and feed roller worn out
Is the result OK? Inquire at Epson
Board Assy, Service Support  PF gear train part damaged
inquire at Epson department.
Service Support  PF encoder failure
department.)  PF motor failure

Confidential
 Troubleshooting Step Check and Measure Yes No
Step Check and Measure Yes No 5 Perform PF motor operation Go to step 6 Go to step 7
check 1
1 Check for paper jam paper Go to step 2 Remove the paper jam
Turn on the power and check the PF
remaining and foreign object paper and foreign
motor operation. Did the PF motor
Check that there is no paper object.
operate (rotate)?
jammed paper or foreign object
remaining in the paper feed path. 6 Perform PF motor operation Replace the Replace the PF
check 2 Main Board encoder.
Is the PF motor operating Assy.
2 Check the timing of error Go to step 4 Go to step 3 normally? (The PF motor is not (If the trouble is
occurrence operating abnormally) not resolved
At what timing does the error occur after replacing
with the product? the Main Board
Does it occur when the power is Assy, inquire at
turned on? Epson Service
3 Check the operation of the feed Go to step 4 Replace the Paper Support
roller (Paper Guide Upper Assy) Guide Upper Assy. department.)
For feed roller, check the following 7 Check the PF drive gears Inquire at Epson Remove the foreign
items. Check if a foreign object impedes Service object or Replace the
• The feed roller is not damaged rotation or the PF drive gears are Support damaged part.
or worn out. damaged. department.
• Does the roller rotate?
Is the result OK? Is the result OK?
4 Check for damaged or broken Go to step 5  When part can be

part in the paper feed path replaced
Check that there is no damaged or Replace the damaged
broken part in the paper feed path. part.
(There is nothing hindering paper  When part cannot be
feeding.) replaced
Is the result OK? Inquire at Epson
Service Support
department.

Confidential
ASF RELATED FATAL ERROR_1 ASF RELATED FATAL ERROR_2

 ASF PID driving time error (error code: 000060)  ASF PID excess speed error (error code: 000062)
 ASF load position driving time error (error code: 000070)  ASF load position excess speed error (error code: 000072)
 Cause  Cause
The drive time of the motor exceeded the set time. State in which driven at unexpected speed (fast) for control.
 Main Board Assy failure  ASF gear train part damaged
 Troubleshooting  ASF motor failure
 Main Board Assy failure (Motor driver failure)
1 Check the reproducibility Replace the Inquire at
 Troubleshooting
Did the corresponding error occur? Main Board Epson
Assy. Service
Support 1 Check the ASF gear train parts Replace the  When dropped
department. Check that an ASF gear train part following parts in off
has not dropped off or become sequence. Reassemble the
detached. • ASF Motor Assy ASF gear train
Is the result OK? • Main Board parts.
Assy  When damaged
(If the trouble is not Replace the ASF
resolved after Motor Assy.
replacing the parts
shown above,
inquire at Epson
Service Support
department.

Confidential
ASF RELATED FATAL ERROR_3  Troubleshooting

 Error name
1 Check the paper feed path state Go to step 2 Remove the
 ASF PID excess load error (error code: 000061) jammed paper
Check the paper feed path state as
 ASF PID reverse error (error code: 000063) follows. and foreign
• Is there any jammed paper or foreign object.
 ASF PID lock error (error code: 000064)
object remaining in the paper feed
 ASF load position excess load error (error code: 000071) path?
 ASF load position reverse error (error code: 000073) Is the result OK?
 Cause 2 Check the feed roller and the Go to step 3 Replace the
conveyance roller state feed roller or
 State in which load of ASF motor exceeds expected load replace the
Check that a feed roller and a
 When rotated in the opposite direction to rotation direction conveyance roller are not damaged or Rear Unit.
(There was a sudden load error, and the motor rotated in the opposite worn out.
direction in reaction to it.) Is the result OK?
 State in which load of motor exceeds expected load, and motor does 3 Check the ASF motor operation_1 Go to step 4 Go to step 5
not rotate at all Turn on the power and check the ASF
motor operation.
 Suspected cause Did the ASF motor operate (rotate)?
 Jammed paper or foreign object remaining 4 Check the ASF motor operation_2 Replace the Main Replace the
Is the ASF motor operating normally? Board Assy. ASF encoder.
 Paper path damaged and conveyance roller worn out
(If the trouble is
 ASF gear train part damaged not resolved after
 ASF encoder failure replacing the
Main Board
 ASF motor failure Assy, inquire at
 Main Board Assy failure Epson Service
Support
department.)
5 Check the ASF gear train parts Replace the ASF Remove the
Check if a foreign object impedes Motor Assy. foreign object
rotation or the ASF drive gears are (If the trouble is or replace the
damaged. not resolved after ASF Motor
Is the result OK? replacing the Assy.
ASF motor assy,
replace the Main
Board Assy.)

Confidential
IS RELATED FATAL ERROR_1 IS RELATED FATAL ERROR_2

 IS PID driving time error (error code: 000100)  IS PID excess speed error(error code: 000102)
 IS load position driving time error (error code: 000110)  IS load position excess speed error (error code: 000112)
 Cause  Cause
The drive time of the motor exceeded the set time. State in which driven at unexpected speed (fast) for control
 FW abnormality  Dirt on the IS scale
 Main Board Assy failure  IS motor failure (Inksystem Assy failure)
 Troubleshooting  Main Board Assy failure (Motor driver failure)

 Troubleshooting
1 Check the reproducibility Go to step 2 Inquire at Step Check and measure Yes No
Did the corresponding error occur? Epson 1 Check the IS scale state Replace the Clean the IS scale.
Service following parts in (Wipe with a dust-
Any dirt on the IS scale?
Support sequence. free cloth.)
department. *If the cleaning is
• Inksystem Assy
2 Check the firmware version Replace the Update to • Main Board difficult, replace
Is the firmware version latest? Main Board the newest Assy the Inksystem
Assy. firmware. Assy.
(If the trouble is
(If the trouble is
not resolved after
not resolved after
replacing the parts
replacing the
shown above,
Main Board
inquire at Epson
Assy, inquire at
Service Support
Epson Service
department.)
Support
department.)

Confidential
IS RELATED FATAL ERROR_3  Troubleshooting

 Error name
1 Check the state of the Inksystem Go to step 2  If any foreign object
 IS PID excess load error (error code: 000101) gear train parts exists
 IS PID reverse error (error code: 000103) Check the following in the Remove the foreign object
 IS PID lock error (error code: 000104) Inksystem gear train parts. or jammed paper.
• Is there anything such as a  When damaged
 IS load position excess load error (error code: 000111) foreign object impeding the Replace the Inksystem
 IS load position reverse error (error code: 000113) operation? Assy.
• Are the Inksystem gear train
 Cause parts damaged?
 State in which load of IS motor exceeds expected load Is the result OK?
 When rotated in the opposite direction to rotation direction 2 Perform IS motor operation check 1 Go to step 3 Replace the Inksystem
(There was a sudden load error, and the motor rotated in the opposite Turn on the power and check the IS Assy.
direction in reaction to it) motor operation.
Did the IS motor operate (rotate)?
3 Perform IS motor operation check 2 Replace the Replace the Inksystem
not rotate at all Main Board Assy.
Is the IS motor operating normally?
 Suspected cause Assy.
(If the trouble
 Foreign object remaining is not
 Inksystem gear train part damaged resolved after
replacing the
 IS encoder failure Main Board
 IS motor failure Assy, inquire
at Epson
Service
Support
department.)

Confidential
ADDITIONAL ASF RELATED FATAL ERROR_1 ADDITIONAL ASF RELATED FATAL ERROR_2
 2nd ASF PID driving time error (error code: 000080)  2nd ASF PID excess speed error (error code: 000082)
 2nd ASF load position driving time error (error code: 000090)  2nd ASF load position excess speed error (error code: 000092)
 ASF3 PID driving time error (error code: 000540)  ASF3 PID excess speed error (error code: 000542)
 ASF3 load position driving time error (error code: 000550)  ASF3 load position excess speed error (error code: 000552)
 Cause  Cause
The drive time of the motor exceeded the set time. State in which driven at unexpected speed (fast) for control.
 Optional Paper Cassette Main Board Assy failure  Additional ASF gear train detached or damaged
 Troubleshooting  Additional ASF motor failure
 Optional Paper Cassette Main Board Assy failure
1 Check the reproducibility Replace the Optional Inquire at
 Troubleshooting
Did the corresponding error occur? Paper Cassette Main Epson Service
Board Assy. Support
(If the trouble is not department. 1 Check the additional ASF gear Replace the  When dropped
resolved after replacing the train parts Optional Paper off or become
Optional Paper Cassette For additional ASF gear train parts, Cassette Main detached
Main Board Assy, inquire check the following items. Board Assy. Reassemble the
at Epson Service Support • Has any additional ASF gear train (If the trouble is additional ASF gear
department.) part dropped off or become not resolved after train parts.
detached? replacing the  When damaged
• Are the additional ASF gear train Optional Paper Replace the
parts damaged? Cassette Main Optional Paper
Board Assy, Cassette Unit.
Is the result OK?
inquire at Epson
Service Support
department.)

Confidential
ADDITIONAL ASF RELATED FATAL ERROR_3  Suspected cause

 Foreign object or jammed paper remaining
 Error name
 Paper path damaged and conveyance roller worn out
 2nd ASF PID excess load error (error code: 000081)
 Additional ASF gear train part failure
 2nd ASF PID reverse error (error code: 000083)
 Additional ASF motor encoder failure
 2nd ASF PID lock error (error code: 000084)
 Additional ASF motor failure
 2nd ASF load position excess load error (error code: 000091)
 2nd ASF load position reverse error (error code: 000093)
 Troubleshooting
 ASF3 PID excess load error (error code: 000541)
 ASF3 PID reverse error (error code: 000543) Step Check and measure Yes No
 ASF3 PID lock error (error code: 000544) 1 Check for foreign object or jammed Go to step 2 Remove the
paper remaining foreign object
 ASF3 load position excess load error (error code: 000551) • Any foreign object or jammed paper or jammed
 ASF3 load position reverse error (error code: 000553) remained in the paper feed path? paper.
Is the result OK?
 Cause
3 Check the feed roller and conveyance Go to step 3 Replace the
 State in which load of additional ASF motor exceeds expected load roller. feed roller or
 When rotated in the opposite direction to rotation direction Check that the feed roller and a conveyance conveyance
(There was a sudden load error, and the motor rotated in the opposite roller is not damaged or not worn out. roller.
direction in reaction to it.) Is the result OK?
not rotate at all

Confidential

3 Perform the additional ASF motor Go to step 4 Go to step 5
operation check 1
Turn on the power and check the additional
ASF motor operation.
Did the additional ASF motor operate
(rotate)?
4 Perform the additional ASF motor Replace the Replace the
operation check 2 Optional Paper additional ASF
Is the additional ASF motor operating Cassette Main encoder.
normally? Board Assy.
(If the trouble
is not resolved
after replacing
the Optional
Paper Cassette
Main Board
Assy, inquire at
Epson Service
Support.
department.)
5 Check the additional ASF gear train parts Inquire at  When any
Check if a foreign object impedes rotation or Epson Service foreign
the ASF gear train parts are damaged. Support object exists
department. Remove the
foreign object.
Is the result OK?
 When
damaged
Inquire at
Epson Service
Support
department.

Confidential
ADDITIONAL LIFT RELATED FATAL ERROR_1 ADDITIONAL LIFT RELATED FATAL ERROR_2
 LFT2 PID driving time error (error code: 000180)  LFT2 PID excess speed error (error code: 000182)
 LFT3 PID driving time error (error code: 000200)  LFT3 PID excess speed error (error code: 000202)
 Cause  Cause
The driving time of the motor exceeded the set time. State in which driven at unexpected speed (fast) for control
 Optional Paper Cassette Main Board Assy failure  Additional lift gear train detached or damaged
 Troubleshooting  Additional lift motor failure
1 Check the reproducibility Replace the Inquire at
 Troubleshooting
Did the corresponding error occur? Optional Paper Epson Service
Cassette Main Support
Board Assy. department. 1 Check the additional lift gear train Replace the  When dropped
(If the trouble is not parts Optional Paper off or become
resolved after For additional lift gear train parts, Cassette Main detached
replacing the check the following items. Board Assy. Reassemble the
Optional Paper • Has any additional lift gear train (If the trouble is additional lift gear
Cassette Main part dropped off or become not resolved after train parts.
Board Assy, inquire detached? replacing the  When damaged
at Epson Service • Are the additional lift gear train Optional Paper Replace the
Support department.) Cassette Main damaged part or the
parts damaged?
Board Assy, Optional Paper
Is the result OK?
inquire at Epson Cassette Unit.
Service Support
department.)

Confidential
ADDITIONAL LIFT RELATED FATAL ERROR_3  Troubleshooting

 Error name
1 Check the paper cassette_1 Go to step 2 Remove the foreign
 LFT2 PID excess load error (error code: 000181) object.
Check that there is no foreign
 LFT2 PID lock error (error code: 000184) object in the paper cassette.
 LFT3 PID excess load error (error code: 000201) 2 Check the paper cassette_2 Go to step 3  When more than the
 LFT3 PID lock error (error code: 000204) Check that more than the maximum number of
maximum number of sheets of sheets of paper is
 Cause paper is not loaded. Furthermore, loaded
is the paper loaded correctly? Reduce the number of
 The load became unexpectedly high with additional hopper lift driving. sheets of paper loaded.
 State in which load of motor exceeds expected load, and motor does  When the paper is not
not rotate at all loaded correctly
Load it correctly.
 Suspected cause
3 Check the paper cassette_3 Go to step 4  When the hopper
 Paper incorrectly loaded or number of sheets loaded exceeds For paper cassette, check the mechanism does not
maximum following items. operate correctly
 Foreign object in paper cassette • Is the hopper mechanism Replace the paper
operating correctly? cassette.
 Damage to or foreign object trapped in additional lift gear train parts (Check if the hopper operate  When the drive gears
 Additional lift phase sensor failure by rotating the drive gears of is damaged
the left side of the paper Replace the drive gears.
 Additional lift motor failure cassette by hand.)
 Optional Paper Cassette Main Board Assy failure • Is driving gear damaged?
Is the result OK?

Confidential
Step Check and measure Yes No PRINT HEAD RELATED FATAL ERROR_1
4 Perform the additional lift Go to step 5 Go to step 6
motor operation check_1  Error name
Turn on the power and check the  X-Hot detect error (pre printing) (error code: 031001)
additional lift motor operation.
Did the additional lift motor  X-Hot detect error (after flushing) (error code: 031002)
operate (rotate)?  Head temperature error (error code: 031004)
5 Perform the additional lift Replace the Replace the additional  Cause
motor operation check 2 Optional Paper lift phase sensor.
Check that the additional lift Cassette Main Occurs if the head temperature exceeds a set temperature.
motor is not operating Board Assy.
abnormally. (rotation does not (If the trouble is  Suspected cause
stop) not resolved after
 Head FFC inserted slanted or damaged
Is the result OK? replacing the
Optional Paper  Printhead failure
Cassette Main
Board Assy,  Troubleshooting
inquire at Epson
Service Support.
department.) 1 Check the head FFC state Replace the  When inserted
6 Check the additional lift gear Inquire at Epson  If any foreign object For head FFC, check the following items. Printhead. slantly
train parts Service Support exists • Is head FFC is inserted slantly? Reconnect the head
Check that there is locking due to department. Remove the foreign FFC.
• Is head FFC damaged?
foreign object and the additional object.  When damaged
Is the result OK?
lift gear train parts are not  When damaged Replace the head
damaged. Inquire at Epson Service FFC.
Is the result OK? Support department.

Confidential
PRINT HEAD RELATED FATAL ERROR_2 PRINT HEAD RELATED FATAL ERROR_3
 Printhead fuse blown error (error code: 031006)  VBS over-voltage error (error code: 031008)
 Cause  Cause
Occurs if the Printhead fuse has blown. Occurs when an abnormal voltage is applied to the head drive circuit.
 Printhead failure  Head FFC inserted slanted
 Head FFC inserted slanted  Printhead failure
 Main Board Assy failure  Main Board Assy failure
Step Check and measure Yes No Step Check and measure Yes No
1 Check the head FFC state Go to step 2  When 1 Check the head FFC state Replace the following parts in  When
For head FFC, check the following items. inserted For head FFC, check the sequence. inserted
• Is head FFC is inserted slantly? slantly following items. • Printhead slantly
• Is head FFC damaged? Reconnect • Is head FFC is inserted • Main Board Assy Reconnect
the head slantly? the head
Is the result OK? (If the trouble is not resolved after
FFC. FFC.
• Is head FFC damaged? replacing the parts shown above,
 When also replace the head FFC. If the  When
Is the result OK?
damaged trouble is still not resolved, damaged
Replace the Contact the Epson Service Replace the
head FFC. Support department.) head FFC.
2 Replace the Printhead and the Main Board Assy Inquire at End
Replace the Printhead and the Main Board Assy. Epson
Is the error continued after replacing the parts Service
shown above? Support
department.

Confidential
PRINT HEAD RELATED FATAL ERROR_4 PRINT HEAD RELATED FATAL ERROR_5
 HCS error (error code: 031011)  Transistor temperature error (error code: 031003)
 Cause  Cause
Occurs if communication is not possible between the print head and the Occurs if an FET of the Main Board Assy or head drive circuit exceeds a
Main Board Assy. set temperature.
 Printhead failure  Main Board Assy failure
 Head FFC damaged  Printhead failure
 Main Board Assy failure  Troubleshooting
 Troubleshooting Cancel the ADF/SCN fatal error.
1 Check the head FFC state Replace the following parts in  When
sequence. 1 Check the reproducibility Replace the following  When inserted
For head FFC, check the inserted
slantly Turn the power off and back on to parts in sequence. slantly
following items. • Printhead
Reconnect check the reproducibility. • Printhead Reconnect the
• Is head FFC is inserted • Main Board Assy
the head Did the corresponding error occur? • Main Board Assy CRCM FFC.
slantly? (If the trouble is not resolved after
FFC. (If the trouble is not  When
• Is head FFC damaged? replacing the parts shown above,
 When resolved after replacing damaged
Is the result OK? also replace the head FFC. If the
damaged the parts shown above, Replace the
trouble is still not resolved,
Replace the Contact the Epson CRCM FFC.
Contact the Epson Service
Support department.) head FFC. Service Support
department.)

Confidential
ADDITIONAL_CONNECTION RELATED FATAL ERROR_1 ADDITIONAL_CONNECTION RELATED FATAL ERROR_2

 Over-adding connection error (error code: 032001)  Unsupported optional cassette connection error (error code: 032002)
 Cause  Cause
State in which more than the maximum number of optional cassettes  Occurs when an unsupported optional cassette is connected.
connected  Suspected cause
 Suspected cause  Unsupported optional cassette connected.
 More than the maximum number of optional cassettes connected.  Troubleshooting
 Troubleshooting  Use supported optional cassettes.
 Install within the specified number of optional cassettes.

Confidential
ADDITIONAL_CONNECTION RELATED FATAL ERROR_3 ADDITIONAL FW RELATED FATAL ERROR

 Additional setting state error 1 (Error code: 032051)  Addition recovery mode error (error code: 032101)
 Additional setting state error 2 (Error code: 032052)  Cause
 Cause Occurs when the recovery mode is entered due to a failure of the firmware
Occurs when the condition that the connection terminal seems to be update of the optional cassette.
defective connection is detected at the main unit and optional cassette  Suspected cause
connection section.
 Optional cassette firmware update is failure.
 Suspected cause
 Troubleshooting
 Optional cassette installation failure
 Foreign object (in connection part)
1 Re-update the firmware. Replace the End
 Optional cassette connection part failure
Re-update the firmware in the error occurring state. Optional
 Optional Paper Cassette Main Board failure Did the error occur after updating the firmware? Paper
Cassette
 Troubleshooting Main Board
Assy.
1 Check the Optional Cassette installation state Go to step 2 Reinstall the
Check that the Optional Cassette is properly optional
installed. cassette.
2 Check the foreign material in connection part Go to step 3 Remove the
Check that there is no foreign object trapped in the foreign
contact point between the main unit and the object from
extension cassette. connection
part.
3 Check the operation after reinstalling the Replace the End
Connection part of optional cassette Optional
Replace the connection part of optional cassette Paper
with normal product and check operation. Cassette
Did the error occur? Main Board
Assy.

Confidential
ADDITIONAL_COMMUNICATION RELATED FATAL ERROR  Troubleshooting

 Error name
1 Check the reproducibility Go to step 2 End
 Addition communication error 1 (Error code:032151)
Turn the power off and back on again to check
 Addition communication error 2 (Error code:032152) whether the error occurs.
 Addition communication error 3 (Error code: 032153) Did the error occur?
 Addition communication error 4 (Error code: 032154) 2 Check the operation after reinstalling the If the error If the error
optional cassette did not occurred,
 Addition communication error 5 (Error code: 032155) Check by replacing the optional cassette with a occur, replace the
 Addition communication error 6 (Error code: 032156) normal unit (which works normally). go to step 3. Main Board
No error occurred? Assy.
 Addition communication error 7 (Error code: 032157)
3 Check the operation after reinstalling the Replace the End
Connection part of optional cassette Optional
 Addition communication error 9 (Error code: 032159) Replace the connection part of optional cassette Paper
 Addition communication error 10 (Error code: 032160) with normal product and check operation. Cassette
Did the error occur? Main Board
 Addition communication error 11 (Error code: 032161) Assy.
 Cause
 Occurs during communication data abnormality due to noise etc., or
when the communication has not been established between the printer
and the optional cassettes.
 Occurs when changing the number of stages of optional cassettes while
the power is on.
 Suspected cause
 Optional cassette connection part failure
 Optional Paper Cassette Main Board failure

Confidential
CRCM RELATED FATAL ERROR_1 CRCM RELATED FATAL ERROR_2

 CRCM fuse blown error (Error code:033001)  CRCM access error (hardware failure) (Error code: 033006)
 Cause  CRCM access error (hardware failure) (Error code: 033007)
CRCM fuse is blown.  Cause
 Suspected cause Communication error when reading/writing data from the CRCM
 CRCM FFC inserted slanted  Suspected cause

 CRCM FFC failure  CRCM FFC detached
 Main Board Assy failure  CRCM FFC damaged
 Troubleshooting  CRCM board failure
1 Check the CRCM FFC connection state Replace the  When
 Troubleshooting
For CRCM FFC, check the following items. Main Board inserted
• Is CRCM FFC is inserted slantly? Assy. slantly
Reconnect 1 Check the CRCM FFC connection Replace the Main Board  When
• Is CRCM FFC damaged? state
the CRCM Assy. inserted
Is the result OK? For CRCM FFC, check the
FFC. slantly
 When following items. Reconnect the
damaged • Is CRCM FFC is inserted CRCM FFC.
Replace the slantly?  When
CRCM FFC. • Is CRCM FFC damaged? damaged
Replace the
Is the result OK? CRCM FFC.

Confidential
CRCM RELATED FATAL ERROR_3 HOME POSITION SEEK ERROR

 CRCM access error (firmware failure) (Error code:033008)  Home position seek error (Error code: 034001)
 CSIC access error (hardware failure) (Error code: 033010)  Cause
 Cause Occurs if the home position seek failed.
The access error by the main unit (Main Board Assy) failure.  Suspected cause
 Suspected cause  Paper jam or foreign object (in CR operation area)
 CRCM FFC inserted slanted  CR lock lever failure (Inksystem Assy failure)
 CRCM FFC damaged  Troubleshooting
 Troubleshooting 1 Check for paper jam and foreign object Go to step 2 Remove the
Check that there is no paper jam or foreign object jammed
in the CR operation area. paper and
1 Check the CRCM FFC connection Replace the Main Board  When foreign
state. Assy. inserted object.
For CRCM FFC, check the slantly Check the CR lock lever operation
2 No Replace the
following items. Reconnect the Inksystem
Turn on the power and check that the CR lock reproduction
• Is CRCM FFC is inserted CRCM FFC. Assy.
lever is operating. (If the trouble
slantly?  When is not resolved,
Does the CR lock lever work normally?
• Is CRCM FFC damaged? damaged Contact the
Is the result OK? Replace the Epson Service
CRCM FFC. Support
department.)

Confidential
DCP1 DRIVING TIME ERROR EMERGENCY STOP ERROR CAUSED BY COVER OPENING
 DCP1 driving time error (Error code: 001012)  Emergency stop error caused by cover opening (Error code: 030004)
 Cause  Cause
The driving time of the motor exceeded the set time. Occurs if the rear unit is removed or rear cover of the optional cassette is
opened during motor driving.
 Suspected cause
(Although the fatal error occurrence history is recorded to the main unit,　
 Main Board Assy failure the main unit display indicates a paper jam error.)
 Troubleshooting  Suspected cause
Step Check and measure Yes No  The rear unit removed or the rear cover of the optional cassette opened
1 Check the reproducibility Replace the Contact the during motor driving.
Did the corresponding error occur? Main Board Epson
Assy. Service
Support
department.

Confidential
MOTOR RUNAWAY ERROR INK LEAK ERROR

 Motor runaway error (Error code: 034010)  Ink leak error (Error code: 034841)
 Cause  Cause
Occurs when state of motor being driven even though a voltage is not Occurs when moisture or ink stick on the ink leak sensor.
applied to the motor.
 Suspected cause
 Suspected cause  Ink leak
 Main Board Assy failure  False detection by condensation (Do not occur normally.)
 Replace the Main Board Assy.  Contact the Epson Service Support department.

Confidential
ERROR CAUSED BY OTHER THAN PRINTER DEVICE DRIVER MISMATCH ERROR

 Error caused by other than printer device  Driver mismatch error (Error code: 060002)
(Error code: 060001)
 Cause
 Cause
Occurs when the driver is not supported.
Internal error of the printer's main body due to a fatal error of something
 Suspected cause
(ADF/SCN) other than the printer devices
 Driver is not supported.
(The error history is recorded to the main unit and it is not displayed.)
 Troubleshooting
 Suspected cause  Use the driver supported.
 ADF/SCN fatal error occurring.
 Troubleshooting
 Cancel the ADF/SCN fatal error.

Confidential
6.3.2 For problems without error indications

Table 6-4. Symptom List
Category Symptom Reference
Feeding trouble Double feeding P. 172
Paper damaged or bent P. 174
Printing/image quality A Nozzles missing P. 176
trouble Ink bleed (characters distorted/blurred) P. 178
White or black bands P. 181
Print position offset in CR operation P. 183
direction
Print position offset in feed direction P. 185
Print smudges P. 188
Color deviation P. 191
Blank printout (blank paper ejected) P. 194
Lines not smooth and ruled-line deviation P. 197
ADF/scanner trouble --- P. 200
Other Power does not turn on. P. 203

Confidential
6.3.2.1 Feeding trouble
DOUBLE FEEDING
 Symptom
 Multiple paper sheets are output at the same time.
Figure 6-2. Double Feeding

 Cause
 Environment
 Paper
 Settings
 Wear or wrong installation of rollers related to paper feeding

Confidential
 Troubleshooting
1 Check the operating environment Go to step 2 Recommend using in an appropriate environment.
Check that the operating environment is within the specifications.
(Refer to Product Specifications (P. 13) for details.)
2 Check the paper Go to step 3 Use suitable paper and load properly.
Check the paper and paper setting status.  When improved
Explain to the customer that the error occurred because of
• Check that using suitable paper (not paper already used for printing, paper).
unsuitable paper or improper paper loading, and recommend
• Check that the paper guide positions are appropriate. to use suitable paper and load paper properly.
• Check that the paper edges are aligned in the cassette.  When not improved
Go to step 3
3 Check the settings Go to step 4 Change the settings size.
Check that the paper size settings on the printer and that of the driver match with the  When improved
actual paper size. Explain to the customer that the error occurred because of
Is the paper size setting and the actual paper size appropriate? unsuitable size setting, and recommend to set paper size
correctly.
4 Check the related feed roller Contact the Epson Reinstall or replace the corresponding part as shown below.
Service Support  When the error occurs in case of front feeding
Check the related feed rollers as shown below are not worn out and they are installed
correctly. department. • Pickup Roller Assy (p. 552)
 When the error occurs in case of front feeding • Retard Roller (p. 552)
• Pickup Roller Assy  When the error occurs in case of rear feeding
• Retard Roller • Rear ASF Assy (p. 557)
 When the error occurs in case of rear feeding If the symptom is continued after performing the above, contact
• Rear ASF Assy the Epson Service Support department.
The corresponding roller is normal?

Confidential
PAPER DAMAGED OR BENT

 Symptom
 Printed paper is damaged or bent.
Figure 6-3. Paper Damaged or Bent

 Cause
 Environment
 Paper (curled, printed etc.)
 Feed path foreign object
 Star Wheel Assy failure
 PG value abnormal
 Ink density excessive

Confidential
 Troubleshooting
1 Check the operating environment Go to step 2 Recommend using in an appropriate environment.
Check that the operating environment is within the specifications.
For operating environment, refer to 2.1 Product Hardware Specifications (P. 14).
2 Check the paper Go to step 3  Use suitable paper.
Make sure appropriate paper has been used.  Use the rubbing avoidance mode.
• Check that there is no damage to the paper before it pases through. *: If the symptom continues even after using the rubbing
• Check that the paper is in an appropriate state (no curling). avoidance mode, refer to the avoidance measures.
• Check that using suitable paper (not paper already used for printing). *: Since the PG is set wide while using the rubbing avoidance
*: When, for example, A4 paper is used cut to A5 size, the long grain becomes the mode, print quality slightly lowers.
short grain so there is a tendency for edges to bend easily.
Is the result OK?

3 Check the feed path Go to step 4 Remove the foreign object and then clean.
Check that there is no damage to or foreign object on the feed path. If damaged, contact the Epson Service Support department.
Is the result OK?
4 Check the Star Wheel Assy Go to step 5 Replace the Star Wheel Assy. (p. 539)
 Check that the jagged part of the Star Wheel Assy rotates normally.
 Check that there are no cuts or other damage locally on the EJ roller surface.
5 Check the PG Contact the Epson Perform the PG Adjustment. (p. 284)
Is the PG within the specified value range (1.60 ±0.05 mm)? Service Support If the symptom is continued after performing the above,
department. contact the Epson Service Support department.
Avoidance If the symptom continues even in the rubbing avoidance mode
measures 1. Reduce the print density.
2. Increase the drying time.
3. Make sure that a high density image does not come at the trailing edge of the first
side (rotate, change the print order, etc.).

Confidential
6.3.2.2 Printing/image quality trouble
NOZZLES MISSING
 Symptom
 Nozzles missing
OK NG
Figure 6-4. Nozzles Clogged
 Cause
 Nozzles clogged
 Inksystem Assy failure
 Air bubbles collected in ink tubes
 Printhead failure

Confidential
 Troubleshooting
Step Check and Measure YES No

1 Check the nozzle check pattern End Obtain the information as follows from the service status
Print nozzle check patterns and check whether there are nozzles missing or deflection. (No reproduction) sheet and execute head cleaning according to the nozzle
Nozzle condition is excellent? missing state check matrix table.
• Nozzle missing rank
 Nozzle check pattern print method is belows. • Cleaning History
 Normal menu
• [Setting] ⇒ [Maintenance] ⇒ [Print Head Nozzle Check] If nozzle missing is not improved after performing the above,
go to step 2.
 Service Support Mode
• B32 Nozzle Check Pattern (p. 300)
2 Check the Inksystem Assy Go to step 3  When cap/wiper is dirty
Check the following point about the Inksystem Assy. • Clean the cap surface/wiper part.
(Execute “CR Unlock Power Off (p. 219)” from the Service Support mode in advance to  When capping failure of the nozzle surface is confirmed
release the CR lock before checking the Inksystem Assy.) • Replace the Inksystem Assy. (p. 478)
Inksystem Assy is correct condition?
 When the wiper part breakage/wiper operation failure is
confirmed
1. Check the cap parts
• Replace th Inksystem Assy. (p. 478)
• Check that the cap surfaces are not dirty.
• Rotated the Inksystem assy gears by hand and check that the cap moves up and down, If nozzle missing is not improved after performing the above,
and also capped correctly in the capping state. go to step 3.
2. Check the wiper parts
• Check that there is not soiling or damage to the wiper parts
• Rotate the Inksystem assy gears by hand and check that the wipers move back and
forth.
3 Check the ink tubes Go to step 4 In the service support mode, execute C06 Strong head
Visually check that air bubbles have not collected in the ink tubes. cleaning (p. 329) to remove the bubbles in the tubes.
(If there are parts where the color is unmistakably pale in the supply system ink tubes, air
If nozzle missing is not improved after performing the above,
bubbles may have collected.)
go to step 4.
Ink tube is correct condition?
4 Replace the Printhead Replace the Printhead. (p. 504)
Replace the Printhead. If the trouble is not resolved after replacing the Printhead, contact the Epson Service Support
department.

Confidential
INK BLEED
 Symptom
Characters and images are distorted or blurred.
Figure 6-5. Ink Bleed

 Cause
 Paper
 Ink
 Miss-match the Printer setting and print paper.
 PG adjustment value deviation
 Temperature and humidity sensors failure

Confidential
 Troubleshooting

1 Check whether printing or copying  Occurs with printing and copying  Occurs with copying only
Check whether the symptom occurs with printing or with copying. Go to the Step 2 Refer to 6.3.2.3 ADF/Scanner trouble (→P. 200).
2 Check the settings Go to step 3 Change the settings.
Check that the print settings and paper type setting is correct. If the symptom continues to occur after changing the
setting, go to step 3.
3 Check the paper Go to step 4 Recommend using the standard paper (genuine paper).
Print with standard paper (genuine paper) and check that there is no character
distortion or blurring.
Is the result OK?
4 Check the ink packs Go to Step 5 Recommend using genuine ink packs and check whether
Check the ink packs attached to the printer. or not the corresponding error occurs by using genuine
Are genuine ink packs attached? packs.
*: To replace ink inside the ink path, ink filling is
necessary.
If the symptom continues to occur after changing to the
genuine ink packs, go to step 5.
5 Check the nozzle check pattern Go to step 6 Obtain the information as follows from the service status
Print nozzle check patterns and check whether there are nozzles missing or sheet and execute head cleaning according to the nozzle
deflection. missing state check matrix table.
Nozzle condition is OK? • Nozzle missing rank
• Cleaning History
 Nozzle check pattern print method is belows.
If nozzle missing is not improved, refer to Nozzles
 Normal menu
Missing (P. 176).
• [Setting] ⇒ [Maintenance] ⇒ [Print Head Nozzle Check]
If the symptom is not improved after performing the
above, go to step 6.
6 Check the PG Go to step 7 Perform the PG Adjustment. (p. 284)
Is the PG within the specified value range (1.60 ±0.05 mm)? If the symptom continues to occur after performing the
PG adjustment, go to step 7.

Confidential

7 Check the temperature Contact the Epson Service Support  When the head thermistor is detecting abnormal value
Check that the head thermistor and temperature and humidity sensor department. • Replace the Printhead. (p. 504)
temperatures are appropriate. Execute the following items from the Service
 When the Temperature and Humidity Sensor is
Support mode then. detecting abnormal value
• B24 Temp./hum. Sensor (p. 295) • Replace the Temperature and Humidity Sensor.
• C11 Head Thermistor Check (p. 330) (p. 375)
* The head temperature becomes very hot after continuous printing so wait
about 1 hour after printing before performing the check.
Do the sensors operate normally?

Confidential
WHITE OR BLACK BANDS

 Symptom
White or black (dark) bands occur in the horizontal direction on images.
Sub scanning line (feed) direction

Main scanning line (CR operation) direction
Figure 6-6. White or Black Bands

 Cause
 The paper settings of main unit or printer driver are not appropriate.
 Nozzles missing
 Inksystem Assy replacement
 Adjustment values are inappropriate.

Confidential
 Troubleshooting

Check that the paper type and size are appropriate. If the symptom continues to occur after performing
Check that the rubbing avoidance mode is “off”. the above, go to step 2.
2 Check the nozzle check pattern Go to step 3 Obtain the information as follows from the service
Print nozzle check patterns and check whether there are nozzles missing or deflection. status sheet and execute head cleaning according to
Nozzle condition is OK? the nozzle missing state check matrix table.
 Normal menu
If nozzle missing is not improved, refer to Nozzles
• [Setting] ⇒ [Maintenance] ⇒ [Print Head Nozzle Check] Missing (P. 176).
If the symptom continues to occur after performing
• B32 Nozzle Check Pattern (p. 300) the above, go to step 4.
3 Execute adjustment again End Contact the Epson Service Support department.
Execute the following adjustments from the service support mode.
• B54 Feed Adjust (p. 314)
• B55 Band Feed Adjust (p. 315)
Is the symptom improved?

Confidential
PRINT POSITION OFFSET IN CR OPERATION DIRECTION

 Symptom
The image is offset in the main scanning direction (left and right margins
are not equal) and the left or right edge of the image is cut off.

Figure 6-7. Print Position Offset in CR Operation Direction

 Cause
 Paper load position offset
 Print start position adjustment value deviation
 PW sensor is dirty or has deteriorated.
 PW sensor adjustment value incorrect
 CR scale dirty, damaged, or defective

Confidential
 Troubleshooting

1 Check the paper cassette Go to step 2 Correct the guide position.
Check that the paper size and guide position are appropriate. If the symptom continues to occur after
Are the paper size and guide position appropriate? performing the above, go to step 2.
Check the settings of the main unit/printer driver listed below. If the symptom continues to occur after
• Main unit settings: Check that the paper type/size settings and actual loaded paper performing the above, go to step 3.
are appropriate.
• Driver: Check that a value other than 0 is not input for the offset in the
extended settings.
Are the printer/driver settings appropriate?
3 Check the CR Scale Go to step 4  When the CR Scale is dirty
Execute the following adjustment from the service support mode. • Clean the CR Scale.
• B21 CR Scale Check (p. 294)  When the CR Scale is damaged
• Replace the CR Scale. (p. 490)
Is the CR Scale normal? If the symptom continues to occur after performing

the above, go to step 4.
4 Execute adjustment again Replace the Main Board Assy. (p. 444) End
Execute the following adjustments from the service support mode. If the symptom continues to occur after
• B49 PW Sensor Correct (p. 312) replacing the Main Board Assy, contact
• B50 Print Start Pos (ASF) (p. 312) the Epson Service Support department.
• B51 Print Start Pos (Rear ASF) (p. 312)
Does the symptom continue to occur?

Confidential
PRINT POSITION OFFSET IN FEED DIRECTION

 Symptom
 The image is offset in the sub scanning (feed) direction.
(Top and bottom margins are not equal.)
 The top or bottom edge of the image is cut off.

Figure 6-8. Print Position Offset in Feed Direction

 Cause
 Paper
 Wear or wrong installation of rollers related to paper feeding
 PE Lever Assy failure
 PE sensor failure
 PW sensor problem

Confidential
 Troubleshooting
1 Check the paper Go to step 2 Change the paper to suitable paper.
Check that suitable paper (paper is not printed or does not have any punch holes, etc.) If the symptom continues to occur after
is being used. performing the above, go to step 2.
Check the settings of the main unit/printer driver listed below.
If the symptom continues to occur after
• Main unit settings: Check that the paper type/size settings and actual loaded paper
performing the above, go to step 3.
are appropriate.
• Driver: Check that a value other than 0 is not input for the offset in the
extended settings.
Are the printer/driver settings appropriate?
3 Check the feed rollers and conveyance rollers Go to step 4  When the corresponding roller is dirty from
Check the state of the feed rollers and conveyance rollers as shown below. paper dust etc
• Pickup Roller Assy • Clean the roller.
• Retard Roller  When the corresponding roller is damaged or
• Rear ASF Assy worn out
• Paper Guide Upper Assy  Replace the corresponding roller.
• PF roller (SMAP roller) • Pickup Roller Assy (p. 552)
 What to check • Retard Roller (p. 552)
• Is the each roller’s surface dirty from paper dust etc.? • Rear ASF Assy (p. 557)
• Is not the each roller damaged or worn out? • Paper Guide Upper Assy (p. 567)
*: When the PF roller is damaged or worn out,
Are the pickup and conveyance rollers normal?
contact the Epson Service Support department.
If the symptom continues to occur after performing

the above, go to step 4.
4 Check the PE sensor and the PE Lever Assy Go to step 5 Replace the PE Lever Assy. (p. 567)
Execute the PE Sensor Check from the service support mode. If the symptom continues to occur after
• B23 PE Sensor Check (p. 295) performing the above, go to step 5.
Is the result OK?

Confidential

5 Execute the adjustment again Replace the Main Board Assy. (p. 444) End
Execute the following adjustments from the service support mode. If the symptom continues to occur after
• B49 PW Sensor Correct (p. 312) replacing the Main Board Assy, contact the
• B52 PE Adjust (ASF) (p. 317) Epson Service Support department.
• B53 PE Adjust (Rear ASF) (p. 317)

Confidential
PRINT SMUDGES
 Symptom
Unexpected smudges can be seen somewhere (including back side) on
printouts.
Figure 6-9. Print smudges

 Cause
 Dirt on the reading face of the ADF/SCN Unit. (when copying)
 Dirt transferred from feed path
 Paper
 Contact with nozzle surface (PG adjustment value deviation)
 Dirt or damage of the Printhead nozzle surface
 Dirt on the bottom surface of the CR Unit

Confidential
 Troubleshooting
Step Check and measure YES No
Check whether the symptom occurs with printing or with copying. Go to step 2 Refer to 6.3.2.3 ADF/Scanner trouble (P. 200).
2 Confirm the contamination adherence Go to step 3 Clean the corresponding parts.
 Check inside the product * If there are large ink deposits, check that there is no ink
Check that there is no noticeable dirt inside the product. leaking.
 Check the platen
Check that there is no noticeable dirt on the platen.
 Check the feed path and feed roller surfaces
Is not the feed path and the feed roller dirty?
 CR side surface
Check that there is no dust or ink adhered.
Is the result OK? (no dirt)

3 Check the paper and settings Go to Step 4 Change the paper or settings.
 Check the paper Recommend to use the rubbing avoidance mode.
Check that the paper is in an appropriate state (no curling).
 Check the settings If the symptom continues to occur after performing the
Check whether or not the paper settings are appropriate. above, go to step 4.
Are the paper state and paper settings appropriate?
Check the following point about the Inksystem Assy. • Cleaning the cap surface/wiper part (p. 677)
(Execute “CR Unlock Power Off” (p. 219) from the Service Support mode in advance  When capping failure of the nozzle surface is confirmed
to release the CR lock before checking the Inksystem Assy.) • Replace the Inksystem Assy. (p. 478)
1. Check the cap parts  When the wiper part breakage/wiper operation failure is
confirmed
• Replace th Inksystem Assy. (p. 478)
• Rotated the Inksystem assy gears by hand and check that the cap moves up and
down, and also capped correctly in the capping state. If nozzle missing is not improved after performing the
• Check that there is not soiling or damage to the wiper parts.
• Rotate the Inksystem assy gears by hand and check that the wipers move back
and forth.
Is the result OK?

Confidential
Step Check and measure YES No

Check that the PG is within the specified value range (1.60 ±0.05 mm). If the symptom continues to occur after performing the
Is the PG within the standard value? above, go to step 6.
6 Check the CR Unit and the nozzle surface of the Printhead Contact the Epson Service Support  When the nozzle surface of the Printhead or the CR Unit
 Check the nozzle surface of the Printhead department. bottom surface is dirty
• Any damaged or dirt on the nozzle surface of the Printhead? • Clean the nozzle surface or the CR Unit bottom
surface.
 Check the CR Unit
• Is there no dirt on the bottom surface of the Printhead?  When the nozzle surface of the Printhead is damaged
• Replace the Printhead. (p. 504)
Is the result OK? (Does the symptom continue to occur?) If the symptom continues to occur after performing the
above, contact the Epson Service Support department.

Confidential
COLOR DEVIATION
 Symptom
 Expected color and printed result differs.
 Printed colors differ when compared with each other.
Example (1) Colors are completely different.
(2) Another color is mixed creating a gradation.
(3) Color is slightly different.
(1) (2) (3)
Figure 6-10. Color deviation

 Cause
 Different comparison conditions
 ADF/SCN Unit reading abnormal condition
 Paper type
 Printer Settings
 Air bubbles in the Ink tube

Confidential
 Troubleshooting
Check whether the symptom occurs with printing or with copying. Go to step 2 Refer to 6.3.2.3 ADF/Scanner trouble (P. 200).
2 Check the settings Go to step 3 Change the setting.
Check the settings of the main unit listed below. If the symptom continues to occur after performing the
 Main unit settings: Check that the paper type/size settings and actual loaded paper are above, go to step 3.
appropriate.
Are the printer settings appropriate?
3 Check the paper Go to step 4 Print on appropriate paper.
• Check whether or not the front and back sides of the paper match. If the symptom continues to occur after performing the
• Check whether or not the result is the same even when printing on plain paper. above, go to step 4.
Is the result OK?
4 Check the nozzle check pattern Go to step 5 Obtain the information as follows from the service status
Print nozzle check patterns and check whether there are nozzles missing or deflection. sheet and execute head cleaning according to the nozzle
Is the nozzle good condition? missing state check matrix table.
 Normal menu
*: If nozzle missing is not improved, refer to
• [Setting] ⇒ [Maintenance] ⇒ [Print Head Nozzle Check]
Nozzles Missing (P. 176).
If the symptom continues to occur after performing the
Check the following point about the Inksystem Assy. • Clean the cap surface / wiper part.
(Execute “CR Unlock Power Off” (p. 219) from the Service Support mode in advance to  When capping failure of the nozzle surface is confirmed
release the CR lock before checking the Inksystem Assy.) • Replace the Inksystem Assy. (p. 478)
1. Check the cap parts  When the wiper part breakage / wiper operation failure is
confirmed
• Replace the Inksystem Assy. (p. 478)
• Rotated the Inksystem assy gears by hand and check that the cap moves up and
down, and also capped correctly in the capping state. If nozzle missing is not improved after performing the above,
go to step 6.
• Check that there is not soiling or damage to the wiper parts
• Rotate the Inksystem assy gears by hand and check that the wipers move back and
forth.

Confidential

6 Check the ink tubes Go to step 7 In the service support mode, execute C06 Strong head
Visually check that air bubbles have not collected in the ink tubes. cleaning (p. 329) to remove the bubbles in the tubes.
(If there are parts where the color is unmistakably pale in the ink tubes, air bubbles may If nozzle missing is not improved after performing the
have collected.) above, go to Step 7.
Are the ink tubes good condition?
8 Replace the Printhead Replace the Printhead. (p. 504)
Replace the Printhead. If the symptom continues to occur after replacing the Printhead, contact the Epson Service Support
department.

Confidential
BLANK PRINTOUT (BLANK PAPER EJECTED)

 Symptom
Blank paper is printed when printing.
Blank paper
Figure 6-11. Blank Printout (Blank Paper Ejected)

 Cause
 Paper (Used paper, heavy paper)
 Print Settings
 Network trouble
 Dirt/wrong installation/wear or damage of the Pickup Roller Assy or
Retard Roller
 Head FFC Assy failure

Confidential
 Troubleshooting

1 Check the operation when blank pages are ejected  For blank paper ejected  For Double feeding
Check the operation during blank paper ejection according to the procedure described Go to step 2 Refer to Double Feeding (P. 172).
below.  For blank printout
 Double feeding: Feed two sheets at the same time. The first sheet is printed and the Go to step 6
second sheet is blank.
 Blank paper ejected: Paper is ejected without the CR unit moving.
 Blank printout: Paper is ejected without getting printed in spite of the CR unit
performed printing operation (moving to the left and right).
2 Check the paper Go to step 3  Change the standard paper.
Check the following points about paper status.  Set the edge guide of paper cassette correctly.
• Check whether or not using thick paper or a paper that has already been printed on.
• Check whether or not the paper size and edge guide position are appropriate. If the symptom continues to occur after performing the above,
go to step 3.
Are the paper being used and the loading condition appropriate?
For paper settings and the print data, check the following items. If the symptom continues to occur after performing the above,
• Check whether or not the paper settings of the main unit and driver are appropriate. go to step 4.
• Check whether or not blank paper parts are included in the print data.
Are the paper settings and the print data appropriate?
4 Check the network Go to step 5 If printing wirelessly, print with a wired connection.
If the data does not arrive for 5 or more minutes after the print command,
blank paper is ejected due to a timeout error.
Does the blank print occur by internal printing (Status sheet, Nozzle check pattern,
etc.)?
5 Check the Pickup Roller Assy/Retard Rollers Go to step 6  When the rollers are not attached appropriately
Check the following point. • Reattach them.
• Are the Pickup Roller Assy/Retard Rollers installed correctly?  When the rollers are dirty
• Are the Pickup Roller Assy/Retard Rollers dirty? • Clean them.
• Are the Pickup Roller Assy/Retard Rollers worn out?  When the rollers worn out
Do the rollers rotate correctly? • Replace them.
If the symptom is not resolved after performing the above, go to
step 6.

Confidential

6 Check the nozzle check pattern Go to step 7 Obtain the information as follows from the service status sheet
Print nozzle check patterns and check whether there are nozzles missing or deflection. and execute head cleaning according to the nozzle missing
Is the nozzle condition OK? state check matrix table.
 Normal menu
• [Setting] ⇒ [Maintenance] ⇒ [Print Head Nozzle Check] Nozzles Missing (P. 176).
 Service Support Mode If the symptom continues to occur, go to step 7.
7 Check the Head FFC Assy Replace the Printhead. (p. 504) Replace the Head FFC Assy. (p. 504)
For Head FFC Assy, check the following items. If the symptom continues to occur If the symptom continues to occur after replacing the Head
• Is not the Head FFC Assy inserted slanted? after replacing the Printhead, FFC Assy, replace the following parts in sequence.
replace the Main Board Assy. • Printhead (p. 504)
• Is the terminal of the Head FFC Assy peeled or damaged?
(p. 444)
Is the Head FFC Assy normal? • Main Board Assy (p. 444)
If not improved, contact the Epson
Service Support. department.

Confidential
LINES NOT SMOOTH AND RULED-LINE DEVIATION

 Symptom
 Printed lines are not smooth.
 Lines printed in double in parts
 Color deviation of part of mixed colors
1 2 3
4 5 6
Figure 6-12. Lines not smooth and ruled-line deviation

 Cause
 Paper
 Paper settings of main unit or printer driver settings are inappropriate.
 Nozzles missing or deflection
 CR scale reading failure
 Foreign matter on CR scanning lines
 Overload when CR operation
 Adjustment value failure
 PG value is abnormal

Confidential
 Troubleshooting

1 Check the settings Go to step 2  If the paper setting is wrong
For settings, check the following items. • Recommend to change the paper setting according to the
• Paper settings: Check that the paper type/size settings and actual loaded paper are paper being used.
appropriate.  If the print quality setting is wrong
• Quality option: Standard or High? • Select Standard or High.
Are the print settings appropriate? If the symptom continues to occur after performing the above,
go to step 2.
2 Check the nozzle check pattern Go to step 3 Obtain the information as follows from the service status sheet
Print nozzle check patterns and check whether there are nozzles missing or deflection. and execute head cleaning according to the nozzle missing
Is the nozzle condition OK? state check matrix table.
 Normal menu
• [Setting] ⇒ [Maintenance] ⇒ [Print Head Nozzle Check] Nozzles Missing (P. 176).
 Service Support Mode If the symptom continues to occur after performing the above,
• B32 Nozzle Check Pattern (p. 300) go to step 3.
3 Check the CR Scale Go to step 4  When the CR Scale is dirty
Perform the following item from service support mode. • Clean the CR Scale.
• B21 CR Scale Check (p. 294)  When the CR Scale is damaged
• Replace the CR Scale. (p. 490)
Is the result OK?
If the symptom continues to occur after performing the above,
go to step 4.
4 Check the CR operation Go to step 5  When there is load to the CR Unit operation.
Check the following point about the CR Unit. • Clean the CR guide frame and apply grease. (p. 681)
(Execute “CR Unlock Power Off” (p. 219) from the service support mode in advance to  When there are foreign matter on the CR guide frame or the
release the CR lock before checking the CR Unit.) CR scanning lines.
• Move the CR left and right while holding the belt and check that it moves smoothly. • Remove the foreign matter.
• Is there any foreign object on the CR guide frame or CR scanning lines?  When the CR timing belt is damaged
• Check that the CR belt is not damaged or worn out. • Replace the CR Unit (Including the CR timing belt). (p.
518)
Is the result OK?
go to step 5.

Confidential

Is the PG within the specified value range (1.60 ±0.05 mm)?
go to step 6.
6 Execute the readjustment Contact the Epson Service Support End
Execute the following adjustment from the service support mode. department.
• B43 Head Angular Adj.Mech (p. 302)
• B44 Head Angular Adj.Soft (p. 308)
• B45 PTS Acc./Dsc. Adjust (p. 306)
• B46 Bi-D Adjust (p. 309)
• B48 Bi-D Band Adjust (p. 311)

Confidential
6.3.2.3 ADF/Scanner trouble

 Symptom
Occurs only when copying from the ADF or scanning glass (scanner).
 Cause
 Glass dirty
 Scanning sensor (CIS module) dirty
 ADF CIS module failure
 SCN CIS module failure

Confidential
 Troubleshooting
Symptom Check and measure Correspondence after confirmation

Image defect 1 For checking contamination, check the following items. If the symptom continues to occur after cleaning, replace the ADF/SCN
Line appears on the image  ADF Unit Unit (p. 419) because one of the CIS modules of the ADF/SCN Unit may
• Check the contamination of the ADF reading part (ADF CIS be broken.
module part). (If the error continued after replacing the ADF/SCN Unit, contact the
[Measure] Clean the ADF scan glass surface. Epson Service Support department.)
 SCN Unit
• Check the contamination of the SCN glass surface.
[Measure] Clean the SCN glass surface.
Image defect 2 1. Check the contamination of ADF/SCN glass surface. If the symptom continues to occur after performing the procedure given in
Some or all of an image is not scanned [Measure] Clean the glass surface of the ADF/scanning glass. the left column, replace the ADF/SCN Unit (p. 419) because one of the
CIS modules of the ADF/SCN Unit may be broken.
2. Check the scanner cable connection.
[Measure] Reconnect the Scanner cable correctly. (If the error continued after replacing the ADF/SCN Unit, contact the
Epson Service Support department.)
Image defect 3 Check the contamination of ADF/SCN glass surface. If the symptom continues to occur after performing the procedure given in
Color is pale/abnormal [Measure] Clean ADF/SCN scan glass surface. the left column, replace the ADF/SCN Unit (p. 419) because one of the
CIS modules of the ADF/SCN Unit may be broken.
(If the error continued after replacing the ADF/SCN Unit, contact the
Image defect 4 1. Check the contamination of ADF/SCN glass surface. If the symptom continues to occur after performing the procedure given in
Image defects other than the above that occur [Measure] Clean the ADF/SCN glass surface. the left column, replace the ADF/SCN Unit (p. 419) because one of the
only when copying 2. Check the scanner cable connection. CIS modules of the ADF/SCN Unit may be broken.
[Measure] Reconnect the Scanner cable correctly. (If the error continued after replacing the ADF/SCN Unit, contact the
Feed defect 1 Clean the ADF LD Roller/Separation Pad. If the symptom continues to occur after performing the procedure given in
Double Feeding the left column, replace the ADF LD Roller and the Separation Pad. (p.
427)
(If the error continues to occur after replacing the ADF Pickup Roller and
ADF Pad, replace the ADF/SCN Unit. If not improved, contact the Epson
Service Support department.)
Feed defect 2 Check that there is no foreign object or damage in the ADF feed path. If the symptom continues to occur after performing the procedure given in
Document bending [Measure] Remove the foreign object if any. the left column or there is damage in the ADF feed path, replace the ADF/
SCN Unit. (p. 419)
(If the error continued after replacing the ADF/SCN Unit, contact the

Confidential
Symptom Check and measure Correspondence after confirmation

Feed defect 3  Check that the ADF is closed correctly. Replace the ADF/SCN Unit. (p. 419)
Paper jam occurs when feeding from the ADF  Clean the ADF feed path. (If the error continued after replacing the ADF/SCN Unit, contact the
 Clean the feed roller surfaces. Epson Service Support department.)

Confidential
6.3.2.4 Other
POWER DOES NOT TURN ON

 Symptom
The printer does not turn on in spite of pressing the power button.
 Cause
 Panel Assy failure
 Relay Cable (Panel to Main) is not connected correctly or disconnected.
 Power supply Assy failure
 Troubleshooting
1 Check the Relay Cable (Panel to Main) Go to step 2  When It is not connected correctly.
Check the following point about the Relay Cable (Panel to Main). • Reconnect the Relay Cable (Panel to Main).
• Is the Relay Cable (Panel to Main) connected correctly?  When It is damaged.
• Is not the Relay Cable (Panel to Main) damaged? • Replace the Relay Cable (Panel to Main).
Is the Relay Cable (Panel to Main) normal? If the error still occurs after performing the above, go to step 2.
2 Check the normal panel unit Go to step 3 Replace the Panel Assy.
Check by replacing the panel unit with a normal unit (which works normally). • WF-C579R/C579Ra: p. 459
Does the symptom recur? • WF-C529R: p. 468
3 Check with a normal Power Supply Assy Replace the Main Replace the Power Supply Assy. (p. 444)
Check by replacing the Power Supply Assy with a normal assy (which works normally). Board Assy. (p. 444)
Does the symptom recur?

Confidential
6.3.2.5 Remedy of When The Check Pattern is not appropriate  Checking target
• Pattern A: Mixed colors, skewed injection
CHECK PATTERN PLAIN PAPER FIRST PAGE • Pattern B: Mixed colors, nozzle clogging
 Adjustment pattern  Judgment
• Pattern A: Any mixed colors or skewed injection?
• Pattern B: Any abnormalities such as mixed colors or nozzle clogging?
C H E C K Pattern A is not proper for judging nozzle clogging since

P O IN T yellow or the like affects visibility. Make sure to see pattern B
when judging nozzle clogging.
Pattern A  Remedy
• Perform Cleaning (p.329)
(Perform in the order of CL1 → CL2 → CL3 → Strong CL→
Refresh CL)
Pattern B

Confidential
CHECK PATTERN PLAIN PAPER SECOND PAGE  Checking target

• Pattern A: 1st dot position misalignment, paper skew
 Adjustment pattern • Pattern B: Printing start position misalignment
• Pattern C: Print Head Inclination Adjust failure
Pattern A  Judgment
• Pattern A: Is the distance between the horizontal line and the top edge
of the paper within 3±1.0 mm?
Pattern B • Pattern B: Is the distance between the vertical line and the left edge of
the paper within 3±1.5 mm?
• Pattern C: Are the lines printed straightly?
Pattern C
OK NG
Figure 6-13. Pattern C

 Remedy
• Pattern A: Perform B50 Print Start Pos. (ASF) (p.312)
• Pattern B: Perform B52 PE Adjust (ASF) (p.317)
• Pattern C: Perform following adjustments in this order.
1.B43 Head Angular Adj. Mech (p.302)
2.B44 Head Angular Adj. Soft (p.308)

Confidential
CHECK PATTERN PLAIN PAPER THIRD PAGE  Checking target

• Pattern A: No object
 Adjustment pattern • Pattern B: No object
• Pattern C: Band Feed Adjust failure (condition: PG1, monochrome)
Pattern A  Judgment
• Pattern C: Any overlapping of the upper and lower blocks or any white
band in the center patch?
Pattern B
C H E C K Make sure the best pattern is one of the patterns with “*”
P O IN T printed on the right side.
Pattern C
Overlapping of the upper and lower blocks White band
Figure 6-14. Pattern C

 Remedy
• Pattern C: Perform following adjustments in this order.
1.B48 Bi-d Band Adjust (p.311)
2.B55 Band Feed Adjust (p.315)

Confidential
CHECK PATTERN PLAIN PAPER FOURTH, FIFTH, SIXTH PAGE  Checking target
• 4th page: Band Feed Adjust failure (condition: PG1, color)
 Adjustment pattern • 5th page: Band Feed Adjust failure (condition: PG2, monochrome)
• 6th page: Band Feed Adjust failure (condition: PG2, color)
 Judgment
• Any overlapping of the upper and lower blocks or any white band in
the center patch?
C H E C K Make sure the best pattern is one of the patterns with “*”
P O IN T printed on the right side.
4th page 5th page

Overlapping of the upper and lower blocks White band
Figure 6-15. Pattern

 Remedy
• Perform following adjustments in this order.
1.B48 Bi-d Band Adjust (p.311)
6th page

Confidential
CHECK PATTERN PLAIN PAPER SEVENTH PAGE  Checking target

• Pattern C: Bi-d Adjust failure (condition: PG1)
Pattern A • Pattern D: Bi-d Band Adjust failure (condition: PG1)
 Judgment
Pattern B
Pattern C
• Pattern B: Is the distance between the vertical line and the left edge of
• Pattern D: Are the upper and lower lines printed straightly inside the
judgment area (inside the dotted line)?
Pattern D
 Remedy
• Pattern A: Perform B51 Print Start Pos. (Rear ASF) (p.312)
• Pattern B: Perform B53 PE Adjust (Rear ASF) (p.317)
• Pattern C: Perform B46 Bi-d Adjust (p.309)
• Pattern D: Perform B48 Bi-d Band Adjust (p.311)

Confidential
CHECK PATTERN PLAIN PAPER EIGHTH PAGE (FRONT SIDE)  Checking target
 Judgment
Pattern A • Pattern A: Is the distance between the horizontal line and the top edge
Pattern B
 Remedy

Confidential
CHECK PATTERN PLAIN PAPER EIGHTH PAGE (BACK SIDE)  Checking target
• Pattern C: Bi-d Adjust failure (condition: PG2)
Pattern A • Pattern D: Bi-d Band Adjust failure (condition: PG2)
 Judgment
Pattern B
of the paper within 3±1.0 mm.
Pattern C
the paper within 3±1.5 mm.
• Pattern D: Are the upper and lower lines printed straightly inside the
judgment area (inside the dotted line)?
Pattern D
 Remedy
• Pattern A: Perform B51 Print Start Pos. (Rear ASF) (p.312)
• Pattern B: Perform B53 PE Adjust (Rear ASF) (p.317)
• Pattern C: Perform B46 Bi-d Adjust (p.309)
• Pattern D: Perform B48 Bi-d Band Adjust (p.311)

Confidential
CHECK PATTERN PLAIN PAPER NINTH, TENTH PAGE  Checking target

• Missing dots, mixed colors, massive missing dots
 Adjustment pattern
 Judgment
• Any printing abnormalities such as Missing dots, mixed colors, or
massive missing dots?
 Remedy
• Perform following adjustments in this order.
1.[Settings] → [Maintenance] → [Print Quality Adjustment
per Paper.]
9th page 10th page

Confidential
CHECK PATTERN MATTE PAPER FIRST PAGE  Checking target

• Pattern A: PF Adjust (microweave) failure
 Adjustment pattern • Pattern B: Dirt/Scratch on CR Scale
• Pattern C: Feed Adjust failure
 Judgment
• Pattern A, C: Any overlapping of the upper and lower blocks or any
white band in the center patch?
C H E C K Make sure the best pattern is printed in the center.

P O IN T
Pattern A
NG OK NG
Pattern B
Figure 6-16. Pattern A, C
• Pattern B: Any print skipping (vertical white band)?
 Remedy
Pattern C • Pattern A, C: Perform B54 Feed Adjust (p.314)
• Pattern B: Check the dirt/scratch on the CR Scale.

Confidential
6.4 Individual Action Check Function HOW TO START THE INDIVIDUAL ACTION MODE
1. Start the printer in the service mode. (Refer to 5.2 Service mode startup)
6.4.1 Overview
The individual action check is a mode to check whether the various motors, 2. Select “Individual Action Check: MENU” from the service support mode
menu.
sensors, and other parts are operating normally so that service personnel can
investigate the cause of an error on site when there is a service call, etc. and its 3. Select check item from the “Individual Action Check” menu to perform the
purpose is to reduce the downtime for servicing on site. checks of the individual actions of the motors, sensors, and solenoids.
With regard to electrical components such as motors, sensors, and solenoids,
this function can operate each of them individually so it can be used to narrow Service Support Mode Individual Action Check
Up/Down:[2][8] Shift:[4][6] Up/Down:[2][8] Shift:[4][6]
down the cause of a failure. Back:[*] Run:[#] Back:[*] Run:[#]
Individual Action Check: MENU A00 Input A No.-individual
Before Repair Operation: MENU Output: MENU
Adjustment: MENU Input: MENU
Maintenance: MENU A01 Auto Check
Printer Status Information A02 CR Unlock Power Off
USB Data Swap: MENU
CR Unlock Power Off
USB FW Update
Counter Reset
Debug Log Get Mode: MENU
Service Mode Startup Screen Individual Action Check Menu Screen
Figure 6-17. Service Support Mode Screens
Troubleshooting Individual Action Check Function 213

Confidential
6.4.2 Precautions for Startup

The error specifications of the individual action mode differ from those of a normal startup as whether the individual action of each motor, sensor, and solenoid is
acceptable or not is judged so errors other than fatal errors are not displayed.
Instead of displaying errors, dedicated information is displayed in the individual action mode.
The following shows the information displayed in the individual action mode.
Table 6-5. List of information displayed in the individual action mode

Error type Main unit display Description Individual action check menu
Fatal error Fatal_Error Motor related error for which motor control is judged to be unsafe. Overall
Fatal_Code
No cassette error C1_Nothing Displayed when the paper cassette (C1) is not loaded in the feed operation check.  Feed/Eject check
• A41 Simplex-Cassette 1
• A46 Duplex-Cassette 1
C2_Nothing Displayed when the paper cassette (C2) is not loaded in the feed operation check.  Feed/Eject check
Information
C3_Nothing Displayed when the paper cassette (C3) (optional cassette) is not loaded in the feed  Feed/Eject check
operation check. • A43 Simplex-Cassette 3
Hopper position sensor C2_Lift_Error Displayed when the hopper position sensor (paper cassette (C2)) cannot detect correctly in  Feed/Eject check
error the cassette hopper operation check of feed/eject check during raising the hopper after the • A42 Simplex-Cassette 2
cassette is reinstalled. • A47 Duplex-Cassette 2
C3_Lift_Error Displayed when the hopper position sensor (paper cassette (C3)) cannot detect correctly in  Feed/Eject check
the cassette hopper operation check of feed/eject check during raising the hopper after the • A43 Simplex-Cassette 3
cassette is reinstalled. • A48 Duplex-Cassette 3

Confidential

No paper error C1_Paper_Out Displayed when there is no paper loaded in the paper cassette (C1) in the feed/eject check.  Feed/Eject check
C2_Paper_Out Displayed when there is no paper loaded in the paper cassette (C2) in the feed/eject check.  Feed/Eject check
C3_Paper_Out Displayed when there is no paper loaded in the paper cassette (C3) in the feed/eject check.  Feed/Eject check
RASF_Paper_Out Displayed when there is no paper loaded in the rear tray in the feed/eject check.  Feed/Eject check
• A45 Simplex-Rear ASF
Paper jam error Paper_Jam_1 Displayed when the paper did not reach the main unit PE sensor in the feed/eject check.  Feed/Eject check
(Not reached PE) • A41 Simplex-Cassette 1
Information
Paper jam error Paper_Jam_2 Displayed when the main unit PE sensor could not detect the paper trailing edge in the • A42 Simplex-Cassette 2
(PE sensor does not turn feed/eject check. • A43 Simplex-Cassette 3
OFF) • A45 Simplex-Rear ASF
Paper jam error Paper_Jam_3 Displayed when the paper did not reach the main unit PE sensor after reversing it for  Feed/Eject check
(Reverse failure, not duplex printing in the feed/eject check. • A46 Duplex-Cassette 1
reached PE) • A47 Duplex-Cassette 2
Paper jam error Paper_Jam_4 Displayed when the paper did not reach the main unit feed sensor in the feed/eject check.  Feed/Eject check
(Not reached main unit • A42 Simplex-Cassette 2
feed sensor) • A43 Simplex-Cassette 3

Confidential

Paper jam error C1_NF Displayed when the paper did not reach the main unit feed sensor when feeding from paper  Feed/Eject check
(Paper feeding failed) cassette (C1). • A41 Simplex-Cassette 1
C2_NF Displayed when the paper did not reach the feed sensor on the optional cassette (C2) when  Feed/Eject check
feeding from paper cassette (C2). • A42 Simplex-Cassette 2
C3_NF Displayed when the paper did not reach the feed sensor on the optional cassette (C3) when  Feed/Eject check
feeding from paper cassette (C3). • A43 Simplex-Cassette 3
Information
Paper jam error C1_DF Displayed when the stack is judged to have collapsed when feeding paper from paper  Feed/Eject check
(Stack collapsed) cassette (C1). • A41 Simplex-Cassette 1
C2_DF Displayed when the stack is judged to have collapsed when feeding paper from paper  Feed/Eject check
cassette (C2). • A42 Simplex-Cassette 2
C3_DF Displayed when the stack is judged to have collapsed when feeding paper from paper  Feed/Eject check
cassette (C3). • A43 Simplex-Cassette 3
Cassette pull out Pull_Out_The Displayed when the paper cassette is loaded during performing the lift motor/lift phase  Additional ASF lift motor/lift sensor
instruction Cassette sensor operation check. • A18 Lift Motor/Sensor (C2)
• A19 Lift Motor/Sensor (C3)

Confidential
6.4.3 How to Perform Individual Action Checks B: ENTER THE PROGRAM NUMBER
There are the following two ways to perform individual action checks so select one of 1. Select “A00 Individual -Input A Number” from the individual
the ways to perform the checks. action check mode menu.
2. To enter a number, press the [#] button to display the program number
A: SELECT A CHECK ITEM FROM THE LIST input screen. To return to the previous menu screen, press the [*]
1. Select “Output: MENU (output system parts)” or “Input: MENU button.
(input system parts)” from the individual action check mode menu 3. When the program number input screen appears, refer to the check
screen. item list (P. 218) and then enter the program number of the
2. Select the target check items from the corresponding menu to execute corresponding check item and press the [OK] button.
the checks. (Example: In the case of the CR motor check, enter “10”.)
* Enter a number of two digits following A of the program number.
Individual Action - Output Individual Action - Input
Input A No. - Individual &DQFHO
Back:[*] Run:[#] Back:[*] Run:[#]
A10 CR Motor A40 ALL Sensor Check
INPUT A-XX 2 Digit Number. 1 2 3
A11 PF Motor OP CHK - Feed/Eject: MENU
If wrong,
ASF Motor: MENU Sensor CHK - Feed/Eject: MENU 4 5 6 C
return this screen.
Lift Motor / Sensor: MENU A57 Temp/hum. Sensor
A21 Supply Pump Motor A58 Ink End Sensor
INPUT Number: Push [#] - 7 8 9
A23 IS Motor A59 Ink Leak Sensor
Back Menu: Push [*] OK
A31 RASF Solenoid 0
Input A No. - Individual Program No. Input Screen
Output: MENU Input: MENU Figure 6-19. Individual Action Checks: Enter the program number
Figure 6-18. Individual Action Checks: Select a check item from the list

Confidential
6.4.3.1 Check Item List

Table 6-6. Check Item List
Program
Type Screen display Description Judgment method Remarks
No.
Auto Check Automatically checks the motor/sensor state The check results are displayed on the panel Set the one paper to the
together with the initial operation and displays the LCD. Rear ASF and each paper
check results of the items given below. cassette.
• Motors runaway
General A01 • Installation state of consumables and other parts
• Error state/Paper jam state
• Main unit sensors/encoders
• Cassette (Paper Detection Sensor)
• Rear ASF (Paper Detection Sensor)
CR Motor Moves the CR unit back and forth to perform a CR Check that the CR motor sound is not
A10 ---
motor failure check. abnormal.
PF Motor Drives the PF motor for approximately 2 seconds to Check that the PF motor sound is not
A11 ---
perform a PF motor failure check. abnormal.
A13 ASF Motor (C1) Drives each ASF motor for approximately 2 to 3 Check that the ASF motor sound is not
A14 ASF Motor (C2) seconds to perform an ASF motor failure check. abnormal. ---
A15 ASF Motor (C3)
A18 Lift Motor/Sensor (C2) Drives the lift motor for two to three seconds and Check that the lift motor sound is not Remove the cassette
Lift Motor/Sensor (C3) checks whether the motor works normal and whether abnormal and the sensor error is not before execution.
A19 displayed.
Output the sensor detects the statuses normally.
system Supply Pump Motor Drives the decompression motor and checks Check that the Decompression Motor sound
A21 ---
whether the motor works normally. is not abnormal.
IS Motor Drives the IS motor CW/CCW, and open/close the Check that the CR unit moves up/down by Open the ADF/SCN Unit
A23 cap to perform an IS motor failure check. the cap up/down operation of driving the IS or the Printer Cover
motor. beforehand.
A31 Rear ASF Solenoid After operating the Rear ASF solenoid, rotate the Check that the Rear ASF solenoid sound is
LD Roller more than once to perform the rear ASF not abnormal.
solenoid failure check. After operating the Rear ASF solenoid, the
---
LD roller rotates. After the LD roller rotated
once, check the LD roller does not rotate
regardless of motor sound.

Confidential
Table 6-6. Check Item List

Program
Type Screen display Description Judgment method Remarks
No.
A40 ALL Sensor Check Displays the state of sensors related to main unit Manually switch the target sensor ON/OFF Since various sensors are
cassette and optional cassette in real time. and check that the sensor state displayed on mounted, the results are
the panel LCD changes. divided in some pages.
Regarding the detail of All sensor check,
refer to “All Sensor Check Items (p. 220)”.
A41 Simplex-Cassette 1 Perform paper feeding/ejecting of single side The check results are displayed on the panel
A42 Simplex-Cassette 2 printing from each cassette to check the state of all LCD.
the cassette related sensors and sensors in the paper
A43 Simplex-Cassette 3 feed path.
Simplex-Rear ASF Feed paper from the Rear ASF to check the state of
A45 ---
sensors in the paper feed path.
A46 Duplex-Cassette 1 Perform paper feeding/ejecting of double side
A47 Duplex-Cassette 2 printing from each cassette to check the state of all
the cassette related sensors and sensors in the paper
A48 Duplex-Cassette 3 feed path.
A50 Sensor Check - Cassette 1 Perform failure check for each sensor related to Check the state of each sensor changes by
A51 Sensor Check - Cassette 2 each paper feed path. installing/removing the cassette and by paper
Input
set condition. ---
system A52 Sensor Check - Cassette 3
A54 Sensor Check - Rear ASF
Temp/ hum. Sensor Measure the current temperature and humidity, then Judge in the order given below.
check that the temperature and humidity sensors are 1. Check the output values of the
operating normally. temperature and humidity sensors.
 Error judgment guide
A57 • Broken wire : 0°C or lower ---
• Short : 60°C or higher
2. Touch the temperature and humidity
sensors with a hand and check the change
of the output values.
Ink End Sensor Check the ink end sensor state by comparing the Check that the state of the ink end sensor
A58 actual remaining ink amount and detection state of matches the printer state with ink present. ---
the ink end sensor.
Ink Leak Sensor Check the ink leak sensor state with ink present. The check results are displayed on the panel
A59 ---
LCD.
Auxiliary CR Unlock Power Off Turns off the power from the CR unlock state. ---
A02 ---
functions

Confidential
6.4.3.2 All Sensor Check Items

Table 6-7. All Sensor Check Items
Category Display Applicable Sensor Confirmation method
Main Top Cover Sensor ADF/SCN Open Sensor, Confirm the state of sensor is changing by opening/closing the corresponding cover.
Printer Cover Open Sensor
Rear Unit Detection Sensor Rear Unit Detection Sensor
Ink Cover Sensor Front Cover Open Sensor
PE Sensor PE Sensor Confirm the state of sensor is changing by pushing the PE sensor lever by paper etc.
Feed Sensor Feed Sensor (Main Product side) Confirm the state of sensor is changing by moving the Feed Sensor Lever by hand.
Ink Ink End Sensor BK Ink End Sensor 1 Confirm the state of sensor is changing by moving the Ink End Sensor Lever by hand.
Ink End Sensor MG Ink End Sensor 2 (When moving the Ink End Sensor Lever, make sure not to damage the Buffer.)
Ink End Sensor CY Ink End Sensor 3
Ink End Sensor YE Ink End Sensor 4
Paper Cassette (C1) Cassette Detection Sensor Cassette Detection Sensor Confirm the state of sensor is changing by installing /removing the paper cassette (C1)
Paper Detection Sensor Cassette Paper Detection Sensor and by changing the paper set condition of paper cassette (C1).
Feed Sensor Feed Sensor (Main Unit) Confirm the state of sensor is changing by moving the Feed Sensor Lever by hand.
Hopper Position Sensor Hopper Position Sensor

Feed Sensor Feed Sensor Confirm the state of sensor is changing by moving the Feed Sensor Lever.
Jam Cover Detection Sensor Jam Cover Detection Sensor Confirm the state of sensor is changing by opening/closing the corresponding cover.
Hopper Position Sensor Hopper Position Sensor

Feed Sensor Feed Sensor Confirm the state of sensor is changing by moving the Feed Sensor Lever.
Jam Cover Detection Sensor Jam Cover Detection Sensor Confirm the state of sensor is changing by opening/closing the corresponding cover.
Rear ASF Paper Detection Sensor Rear ASF Paper Detection Sensor Confirm the state of sensor is changing by setting the paper to Rear ASF Assy.
PE Sensor PE Sensor Confirm the state of sensor is changing by pushing the PE sensor by paper etc.

Confidential
6.5 Fax Troubleshooting  Output Sample
6.5.1 Outline of the FAX Troubleshooting

(1)
This material describes the information related to “Reports/Logs”, “Error
Codes”, “Service Parameters”, “Basic information”, and (2)
“Troubleshooting” based on these information that can be used to solve
the problems related to FAX. (3)
6.5.2 Reports/Logs related to FAX

6.5.2.1 FAX Communication Log
A history report of sent and received 30 fax jobs.
Settings are available for Display, Auto or Manual Print (every 30/time/off).
Codes of communication error are not displayed on the report by default To

display the error codes, set [Report Format] to [Detail].
 Output Procedure
Manual [FAX] ⇒ [(Menu)] ⇒ [FAX Report] ⇒ [FAX Log] = Select [Print]
[Setup] ⇒ [General Setting] ⇒ [FAX Settings] ⇒ [Report Settings]
Auto ⇒ [FAX Log Auto Print]
= [Off] / [On (Every 30)] / [On (Time)]
 Output Settings
[Setup] ⇒ [General Setting] ⇒ [FAX Settings] ⇒ [Report Settings]
Report Format
⇒ [Report Format] = [Simple] / [Detail]
Troubleshooting Fax Troubleshooting 221

Confidential
Title Report name  Indications of destination number (in priority order)

Number of pages to be reported Sender 1. Registered name in the contact list
(1) PAGE
(number of pages/total number of pages) (Send/Polling 2. Dialed telephone number
Date /Time Printed time (yyyy.mm.dd hh:mm) Recive)(*3) 3. Destination fax ID (*1)
Name Sender’s name registered to the product Receiver 1. Sender’s telephone number (when notifying number with the caller
(2) ID)(*2)
Fax Sender’s fax number registered to the product (Receive/Polling
Send)(*3) 2. Destination fax ID (*1)
Job number
Receipt No. Common to other reports and job management. NOTE 1 : Usually the destination fax ID signals (CSI/TSI/CIG) are registered with numbers
This helps to identify the job. (telephone number is used in most cases). If these are registered with
Date / Time Starting time of communication text, the registered text are displayed as they are. When registering in
this product, select [Setup] ⇒ [General Settings] ⇒ [FAX Settings]
Sending/Receiving/Polling Sending/Polling Reception/ ⇒ [Basic Settings] ⇒ [Header] ⇒ [Your Phone Number] (number,
Type
PC Sending/Forwarding space, or + only).
ID See “Indications of destination number” 2 : For a product with Caller ID, the Destination fax ID is displayed when the caller
Duration mm:ss ID is enabled ([Fax settings] > [Basic settings] > [Caller ID display]),
and the sender notifies its telephone number. If the notified telephone
(3) Sending from memory: Number of pages of communication number has been registered in the contact list, the registered name is
succeeded/total number of pages displayed on the panel of the receiver. However, the telephone
Pages
Direct sending/reception: Number of pages of communication number is used for fax log.
succeeded When a fax is sent without notification, the destination fax ID is
displayed.
 Succeeded: OK
3 : Usual settings are Sending/Polling Reception for sender, Receiving/Polling
 Failed: Error details (Line Busy, No answer, Communication sending for receiver. However if Manual send/Manual receive is
Result Error enabled, these settings may be reversed. In addition, if a fax is sent
Line is not connected/Incorrect port connection/ with [Connected telephone] or [On hook dial] and Manual Send/Manual
Cancel, etc.) Receive is turned on, the “destination fax ID” is always displayed.
Error xxx (Report Format = only when set to Detail)
Example)
Case Indications of destination number

When receive a fax through caller ID line, Sender is displayed. However, “sender’s
then response with connected telephone telephone number” is displayed other than
and perform Manual Send; “destination fax ID”.
When send a fax with a connected Receiver is displayed. However, “destination
telephone and perform Manual Send; fax ID” is displayed other than the dialed
telephone number.
When send a fax with on hook dial Receiver is displayed. However,
(Contact list/Direct dial) “destination fax ID” is displayed other than
the registered name in the list or dialed
telephone number.

Confidential
6.5.2.2 Protocol trace  Output Sample

A detailed report for the previous sent or received fax.
Settings are available for Manual Print, or Auto Print after communication by (1)
changing the RAM Edit.
(2)
If a communication does not start until send/receive operation (when it did not
(3)
enter Phase B after Phase A), the log is displayed as a blank space.
(4)
 Output Procedure (5)
[FAX] ⇒ [(Menu)] ⇒ [FAX Report] ⇒ [Protocol trace]
Manual
= Select [Print]
Use Fax parameter Setting mode #006 to automatically print the log
Auto for every communication.
See “Communication Protocol trace” in Service Parameter List.
 Output Setting
Use FAX parameter setting mode #005 to save and print error
Save / Print
communication only.
error only
Use Fax parameter Setting mode #007 to save one log/ save three log/
Auto print the Protocol trace.
(1) Title etc. Same as FAX log

(2) Name, Fax Sender’s name registered to the product
Receipt No. ~ Logs of the received faxes.
(3) Communication Description is same as Fax log.
result
(4) DIS(DTC) / DCS Refer to “How to use DIS(DTC) / DCS” (p.258)
Command / Response Refer to “How to use Command/Response log”
(5)
Log (p.260).

Confidential
 Viewpoint of DIS(DTS)/DCS
Before starting communication, faxes communicate their own functions on
the sending side and the receiving side, and then determine the
communication function and speed.
The receiving side fax machine transmits its own function to the sending
side fax machine by the DIS signal.
The sending fax machine receives the DIS signal from the receiving fax
machine and can use the information on the sending side and the receiving
side.
After selecting the maximum function set by the transmission side, you can
check the communication mode selected by the DCS signal
By checking the information of DIS (DTC), the contents of the capability
of the receiving side fax can check the communication mode selected by
the sending side fax by checking the information of the DCS.
The protocol monitor log is recorded and printed on only one sheet by one
communication.
If the protocol becomes long due to communication of a plurality of pages
and it does not fit on one page, the head protocol log is deleted and only the
last protocol log is recorded and printed.
Fax communications are created according to ITU, and the main ITUs
involved are T30. and T4.
DIS (DTC) DCS reads out the content of FIF (facsimile information field)
by referring to the bit allocation table of DIS (DTC) / DCS.

Confidential
 Ability bit table of DIS (DTC)  Example of DIS　 8020C28AC480D5838018 　FCS=80 　FIF=20
C2 8A C4 80 D5 83 80 18
To refer to the bit allocation table and data, rearrange the following high
order bits for every 2 bytes of data.
hex 2 0 C 2 8 A
bin 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 0
bit no. 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17
bit no. DIS/DTC data Content

1 1 Accumulation exchange Internet facsimile simple mode (TTC standard JT-T37) 0
2 On hold 0
3 Real time Internet facsimile (TTC standard JT-T38) 0
4 Third generation mobile communication network 0
5 On hold 0
6 ITU-T Recommendation V.8 ability 1 Function enabled
7 Frame size 0=256 Octet priority 1=64 Octet priority 0 ECM frame size=256
8 On Hold 0
2 9 Transfer of facsimile document 0 No standard for polling transmission
10 Receive fax operation 1 Ability
11 Data Signal Speed 0000=2.4kbps V.27terFB 0010=Unused 0001=Unused 0011=Unused 0 V.27terFB
12 0100=V.27ter 0100=On hold 0101=On hold 0111=On hold 0 *When the V8 mode (S-G3) starts, this
1000=V.29 1010=Unused 1001=Unused 1001=Unused bit becomes invalid (0000).
13 1100=V.27ter,V29 1110=Unused 1101=V.27ter,V29,V17 1111=On hold 0
14 0
15 Line density (delicate FINE) R8 x 7.7 l/mm or 200 x 200 dpi 1 Ability
16 Encoding method (MR) 0 Ability
3 17 Recording width ability 00=A4 10=A4/B4 0 A4/B4/A3
18 01=A4/B4/A3 11=Invalid 0
19 Ability to record length 00=A4(297mm) 10=A4(297mm) and B4(364mm) 0 No limit
20 01=No limit 11=Invalid 1
21 The receiver's minimum scanning time capability 000=20/20ms 100=5/5ms 101=40/20ms 1 20/20ms
22 001=40/40ms 011=10/5ms 111=0/0ms 1
010=10/10ms 110=2-/10,s
23 1
24 Extended field 1 Extension

Confidential
 Example of DIS　 8020C28AC480D5838018 　FCS=80 　FIF=20

C2 8A C4 80 D5 83 80 18
hex C 4 8 0 D 5
bin 1 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 0 1
bit no. 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33 48 47 46 45 44 43 42 41

4 25 On hold 0
26 Uncompressed mode 0
27 Error correction mode (ECM) 1 Ability
28 Set to 0 0
29 On hold 0
30 On hold 0
31 Encoding method (MMR T.6) 1 Ability
32 Extended field 1 Extended
5 33 Invalid field signal capability 0
34 Multiple Polling Capability (DIS) Multiple polling instructions (DIC) 0
35 Polling sub-address capability (DIS) PSA Polling sub -address transmission (DTC) 0
36 Encoding method (T.43) 0
37 Plain interleave 0
38 32 k ADPCM speech coding (TTC JT-G726) 0
39 Hold for using the extended audio encoded. 0
6 41 Line density (high delicate / S-FINE) R8 x 15.4 l/mm 1 Ability
42 Line density(300) 300 x 300 dpi 0
43 Line density (Ultrahigh delicate / E-FINE) R16 x 15.4 l/mm or 400 x 400 dpi 1 Ability
44 Inch system resolution selection 0
45 Milli-system resolution selection 1 Milli-system resolution selection
46 Minimum scan line time capability at high linear density 0:T15.4=T7.7 1:T15.4=1/2 T7.7 0
47 Selected professional ability (DIS) Select polling sending (DTC) 1 Ability

Confidential

C2 8A C4 80 D5 83 80 18
hex 8 3 8 0 1 8
bin 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 1
bit no. 56 55 54 53 52 51 50 49 64 63 62 61 60 59 58 57 72 71 70 69 68 67 66 65

7 49 Sub-address Ability 1 Ability
50 Password / sending identification ability (DIS) Password sending (DTC) 1 Ability
51 Preparation for data file transfer (polling) 0
52 On hold 0
53 Binary file transfer (BFT) 0
54 Document transfer mode (DTM) 0
55 EDIFACT transfer mode (EDI) 0
8 57 Basic transfer mode (DTM) 0
58 On hold 0
59 Preparation for transferring (polling) documents in character / mixed mode 0
60 Character mode 0
61 On hold 0
62 mixed mode 0
63 On hold 0
9 65 Processable Mode 26 0
66 Digital network capability 0
67 Full duplex /half duplex capability 0:Half duplex control 1: Half duplex/full duplex control 0
68 Encoder mode (JPEG) 1 Ability
69 Full color mode 1 Ability
70 Set to 0 0
71 12 bit pixel / element 0

Confidential

C2 8A C4 80 D5 83 80 18
hex
bin 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
bit no. 80 79 78 77 76 75 74 73

10 73 No sub-sampling (1:1:1)
74 Nonstandard irradiation light
75 Non-standard color gamut range
76 North American(215.9 ×279.4 mm) letter capacity
77 North American (215.9 × 355.6 mm) legal ability
78 Coding mode (JBIG single layer sequential coding T.85) basic ability
79 Coding mode (JBIG single layer sequential coding T.85) Optional L = 0 ability
80 Extended field

Confidential
 Ability bit table of DCS  Example of DCS 830042F844 FCS=83 FIF=00 42 F8 44

To refer to the bit allocation table and data, rearrange the following high
order bits for every 2 bytes of data.
hex 0 0 4 2 F 8
bin 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0
bit no. 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17

1 1 Accumulation exchange Internet facsimile simple mode (TTC standard JT-T37) 0
2 On hold 0
3 Real time Internet facsimile (TTC standard JT-T38) 0
4 Third generation mobile communication network 0
5 On hold 0
6 Invalid 0
7 Invalid 0
8 On hold 0
2 9 Set to 0 0 No polling transmission standard
10 Received fax data 1 Ability
11 Data signal speed 0000=2.4kbps V.27ter 0010=Invalid 0001=14.4kbps V.17 0011=On hold 0 V.27terFB
12 0100=4.8kbps V.27ter 0100=Invalid 0101=12kbps V.17 0111=On hold 0 *When the V8 mode (S-G3) starts, this
1000=9.6kbps V.29 1010=On hold 1001=9.6kbps V.17 1001=On hold bit becomes invalid (0000).
13 1100=7.2kbps V.29 1110=On hold 1101=7.2kbps V.17 1111=On hold 0
14 0
15 Line density (delicate FINE) R8 x 7.7 l/mm or 200 x 200 dpi 1 R8 x 7.7 l/mm
16 Encoding method (MR) 0
3 17 Recording width ability 00=A4(297mm) 10=A4/B4 0 A4
18 01=A4/B4/A3 11=Invalid 0
19 Ability to record length 00=A4(297mm) 10=A4(297mm) and B4(364mm) 0 No limit
20 01=No limit 11=Invalid 1
21 The receiver's minimum scanning time 000=20/20ms 100=5/5ms 101=40/20ms 1 0ms
22 (Line density = Std/Fine) 001=40/40ms 011=10/5ms 111=0/0ms 1
010=10/10ms 110=20/10ms
23 1

Confidential
 Example of DCS 830042F844 FCS=83 FIF=00 42 F8 44

hex 4 4
bin 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
bit no. 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33 48 47 46 45 44 43 42 41

4 25 On hold 0
26 Uncompressed mode 0
27 Error correction mode (ECM) 1 ECM
28 Frame size 0= 256 oct 1=-64 oct 0 Frame size 256 oct
29 On hold 0
30 On hold 0
31 Encoding method (MMR T.6) 1 MMR
32 Extended field 0 Non Extended
5 33 Invalid field signal capability
34 Set to 0
35 Set to 0
36 Encoding method (T.43)
37 Plain interleave
38 32 k ADPCM audio coding (TTC JT-G726)
39 Hold for using the extended audio encoded
40 Extended field
6 41 Line density (high delicate / S-FINE) R8 x 15.4 l/mm
42 Line density(300) 300 x 300 dpi
43 Line density (Ultrahigh delicate / E-FINE) R16 x 15.4 l/mm or 400 x 400 dpi
44 Select resolution type 0: inch system resolution 1:milimater resolution
45 unused
46 unused
47 Set to 0
48 Extended field

Confidential

hex
bin 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
bit no. 56 55 54 53 52 51 50 49 64 63 62 61 60 59 58 57 72 71 70 69 68 67 66 65

7 49 Send Sub-address
50 Sending function identification sending
51 Set to 0
52 On hold
53 Binary file transfer (BFT)
54 Document transfer mode (DTM)
55 EDIFACT transfer mode (EDI)
56 Extended field
8 57 Basic transfer mode (DTM)
58 On hold
59 Set to 0
60 Character mode
61 On hold
62 mixed mode
63 On hold
64 Extended field
9 65 Processable Mode 26
66 Digital network capability
67 Full duplex / half duplex capability 0:half duplex control 1:full duplex control
68 Encoder mode (JPEG)
69 Full color mode
70 Huffman code table for preferential use
71 12 bit pixel / element
72 Extended field

Confidential

hex
bin 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
bit no. 80 79 78 77 76 75 74 73

10 73 No sub-sampling (1:1:1)
74 Nonstandard irradiation light
75 Non-standard color gamut range
76 North American(215.9 ×279.4 mm) letter capacity
77 North American (215.9 × 355.6 mm) legal ability
78 Coding mode (JBIG single layer sequential coding T.85) basic ability
79 Coding mode (JBIG single layer sequential coding T.85) Optional L = 0 ability
80 Extended field

Confidential
 How to use command/response log

The following explains the T.30 Protocol commands/responses in fax log.
Communication procedure can be checked in details.
Table 6-8. Commands/responses log_ Sample Example (Type = Sending)
Time Commands/
Direction Data Description
(10ms) responses name
01136 -> CSI 402020202020202020343332312035353520323430 Received a caller subscriber ID (numeric ID).
The value of sender’s number registered in the receiver is transmitted.
The number is entered with ASCII character codes. (Same as TSI)
FCF=40
FIF=020202020202020343332312035353520323430
(ASCII character codes 20=space(S), 30 to 39=0 to 9, 2b=+)
ASCII conversion >“SSSSSSSS1234S555S240”
If the order is reversed, >”042 555 1234 “
01136 -> DIS 8020C28AC480D5838018 Received a digital identification signal. (receiving capability)
01257 <- TSI 432020202020202020202031333231313233353330 Sent a transmitting subscriber ID (numeric ID).
The value of sender’s number registered in the sender is transmitted.
The number is entered with ASCII character codes. (Same as CSI)
FCF=43
FIF=2020202020202020202031333231313233353330
(ASCII character codes 20=space (S), 30 to 39=0 to 9, 2b=+)
ASCII conversion >“SSSSSSSSSS1321123530”
If the order is reversed, >”0353211231 “
01265 <- DCS 830042F844 Received a digital identification signal. (Sending mode).
<- TCF Sent a training signal (V17/V29/V27ter only)
01268 -> CFR 84 Received a confirmation for receive signal.
01331 <- PIX FF Received the 1st page of image signal.
[33,600 bps(V.34) /MMR / A4 / 8x7.7 / 0(E:0)] The communication status is described within [ ].
Communication speed (Protocol): 33.6kbps(V.34)

Encoding method: MMR
Paper width: A4
Resolution: 8x7.7 (Fine)
Number of line (number of error line): 0(E:0) * when ECM = OFF

Confidential

Time Commands/
03130 <- PPS-EOP BF2F0000FD Received a end of procedure signal (the 1st page finished without next page).
FCF=BF2F?FIF=0000FD (00=1st page, 00=1st block, FD=254 frames)
If the number of frame exceeds 256, separates the page with PPS-NULL to send.
The frame size of PPS-NULL is always FF.
PPS-MPS is a signal of ECM mode. MPS is used in non-ECM mode.
03131 -> PPR BC00000000F8FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF Since there was an error in received PIX, specifies the error frame and requests
FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF retransmission. (A signal of ECM mode)
How to specify the error frame: Regard FFFF as one unit to represent 1 to 16 frames.
16 sets of FFFF mean 256 frames in total.
Since 254 frames were sent, entry 1 to the 255th to 256th frame.
Entry 1 to the reception error frame. The request starts from 0000 0000 F8FFF FFFF.
This means that 35 frames (1st to 35th) are succeeded, and 259 frames
(the 36th to 254th) are required to retransmit.
03239 <- PIX FF Received a frame retransmission request for the 1st page of image signal.
[33,600 bps(V.34) / MMR / A4 / 8x7.7 / 0(E:0)] Communication status is described within [ ].
Communication speed (Protocol): 33.6kbps(V.34)
Paper width: A4
Number of line (number of error line): 0(E:0) *. when ECM = OFF
04770 <- PPS-EOP BF2F0000DA Received a end of procedure signal (the 1st page finished without next page).
FCF=BF2F?FIF=0000DA (00=1st page, 00=1st block, DD = 219 frames)
04771 -> PPR BC0000000000000000000000F0FFFFFFFFFFFF Since there was an error in received PIX, specifies the error frame and requests
FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF retransmission. (A signal of ECM mode)
How to specify error frames: Regard FFFF as one unit to represent 1 to 16 frames.
16 sets of FFFF mean 256 frames in total.
Entry 1 to the reception error frame.
The request starts from 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 00F0 FFFF.
This means that 57 frames (36th to 92nd) are succeeded, and 162 frames
(the 93rd to 254th) are required to retransmit.

Confidential

Time Commands/
03239 <- PIX FF Received the 1st page of image signal.
[33,600 bps(V.34) / MMR / A4 / 8x7.7 / 960(E:1)] Communication status is described within [ ].
Communication speed (Protocol): 33.6kbps (V.34)
Paper width: A4
Number of line (number of error line): 960(E:1)
　⇒ An error occurs after receiving the 960th line.
06612 <- DCN FB The communication became impossible due to the error. It ended in failure by
receiving a disconnect command from the sender.
PROTOCL V.34 Displays the protocol set when starting communication (V.34/V.17/V.29)
SPEED 33.600Bps (3429) Displays the speed of the last communication.
Symbol rates are shown in ()
CODING MMR Displays the encoding method set when starting communication (MMR/MR/MH)

Confidential
 Outline of the Command Response Log

Table 6-9. Outline of the command response log
Item Content
Time (10ms) The time when sent/received the signal. The difference of both time means the time of the signal.
Example) 02467 -> PIX
03289 -> PPS-MPS 03289 – 02467 = 822 x 10 ms = approx. 8.2 s (time of image signal)
Direction Sending or Receiving direction for signals. This differs from that of the sending or receiving in fax communication.
When sending a fax, signals (including image signal) and response signal become sending and receiving respectively.
These are reversed when receiving a fax.
Command/Response Name Defined in the first 2 digits or 4 digits of data in the FCF (Facsimile Control Field).
See “1.4.5.2 Abbreviation list of fax communication (fax recommendation T.30)”.
Data Data is composed of FCF (Facsimile Control Field) and FIF (Facsimile Information Field).
The first 2 digits (8 bits) or 4 digits (16 bits) stands for FCF, the latter means FIF.
Example 1) 03289 -> PPS-MPS?BF4F000031
FCF=BF4F=PPS-MPS
FIF=00=PC (page counter) page 1 (0x00 to 0xFF=0 to 255= add 1 to make it 1 to 256 pages)
00=BC(block counter) Block in the page is 1 (0x00 to 0xFF=0 to 255= add 1 to make it 1 to 256 blocks)
31=FC(flame counter) number of frame 50 (0x00 to 0xFF=0 to 255=add 1 to make it 1 to 256 frames)
1 block consists of 256 frames.
If the number of frame exceeds 256,separates the page with PPS-NULL to send.
Example 2) PPS-NULL BF00xxxxFF

FCF=BF00
FIF=FIF of the first PPS-NULL in the 1st page:0000FF=1st page, 1st block, 256th frame
FIF=FIF of the 2nd PPS-NULL in the 1st page:0001FF=1st page, 2nd block, 256th frame
FIF=FIF of the first PPS-NULL in the 2nd page:0100FF=2nd page, 2nd block, 256th frame

Confidential
6.5.2.3 FAX Function Check Report  Output Sample

Self check of Fax function is available.
Perform Fax Function Check to check the basic items of fax function and line (1)
connection. (2)
 Check Procedure (3)
[FAX] ⇒ [(Menu)] ⇒ [FAX Settings] ⇒ [Check FAX Connection]
Manual
= Perform the check, then select [Print] to print the result.
NOTE : Remote check is also available using FAX Utility. (4)

(5)
(1) Title etc. Same as FAX log.

(2) Name, Fax Same as FAX log.
For the description of check item, see “Fax Function
Check Operation flow”.
(3) Check Items
“5. Dial Tone Detection” is also checked even when it
is disabled in Fax Settings.
(4) Status Displays the check result.
(5) Solution Displays the remedy.

Confidential
6.5.3 FAX Error Code 6.5.3.2 Error code list
6.5.3.1 Overview Error Code

Result of Error description TX/RX Phase
There are 2 types of error codes; 1) job’s error codes that are displayed in job communication Job history
report
history, 2) Fax communication’s error codes that are shown in fax report.
No tone Failure
203
Job’s error code Error Codes related to FAX
Speaking Failure
Displayed in job history. Displayed in fax related report (such
Display 204
as fax log, communication result
position No response Failure
report).
205
Unit Job Fax Communication
Port Failure
Target All jobs (Fax/Scan/Copy/Print) Fax job only inversion 206
Format A 3 digit number Text or 3 alphanumeric characters No circuit Failure
Before starting fax communication (Phase A, line connected): The same connection 207
contents of job and fax communication are displayed with different codes. 012 Failure Received document length exceeds TX C
Remark After starting fax communication (Phase B or later): “Failure 202” is 202 the set value
displayed for all jobs, “communication procedure error” is shown in fax 212 Failure (Modem): Data sending end error RX/TX
communication. 202
220 Failure An MCF is not sent after receiving RX D
202 data
400 Failure T1 timer timeout TX B
202
401 Failure Received a DCN after sending DCS. TX B
202
402 Failure Received a DCN during sending the TX B
202 phase B.
403 Failure Receiver dose not have polling RX B
202 sending capability. (POL)
404 Failure No response after sending DCS. TX B
202
405 Failure Fall back is not possible in sending. TX B
202
406 Failure A DCN is sent after receiving DCS/ RX/TX B
202 DTC. (POL)
407 Failure No response or received a DCN TX D
202 after sending Postcommand.

Confidential
Error Code Error Code

Result of Error description TX/RX Phase Result of Error description TX/RX Phase
communication Job history communication Job history
report report
408 Failure Received a RTN. TX D 459 Failure Training error occurs when RX C
202 202 receiving PIX.
409 Failure Received a PIN. TX D 490 Failure Number of error line exceeds the RX C
202 202 limit value when receiving PIX.
410 Failure Received a DCN during receiving RX D 494 Failure (Modem): Timeout during EOL RX C
202 phase D. 202
411 Failure Received a DCN after sending RX B 495 Failure Carrier disconnection during RX C
202 DTC. (POL) 202 receiving phase D
412 Failure Cannot receive DSN after sending RX B 496 Failure (Modem): Data sending start error TX B,C
202 FTT. 202
414 Failure No response after sending DTC. RX B 501 Failure (V.34) Modem inconsistency error V.34 B
202 (POL) 202 RX/TX
415 Failure No document for polling sending. TX B 502 Failure (V.34) Primary channel end error V.34 C
202 (POL) 202 RX/TX
416 Failure Cannot receive Postcommand RX D 503 Failure (V.34) Control channel end error V.34 B,C,D
202 202 RX/TX
417 Failure Sent RTN RX D 504 Failure (V.34) Polling sending request is RX B
202 202 rejected in step V.8 (POL)
420 Failure T1 timer timeout RX B 505 Failure (V.34) Rejected the polling sending TX B
202 202 request in step V.8 (POL)
422 Failure Settings of DIS/DTC are disabled. TX B 540 Failure (ECM) No response or received a TX D
202 202 DCN after sending CTC
427 Failure Received a DCN after sending DIS RX B 541 Failure (ECM) No response or received a TX D
202 202 DCN after sending EOR
433 Failure (Modem): Frame length error RX/TX B,D 542 Failure (ECM) No response or received a TX D
202 202 DCN after sending RR
434 Failure (Modem): Frame wait timeout RX/TX B,D 543 Failure (ECM) T5 timer timeout TX D
202 202
436 Failure Received a DCN after sending CFR/ RX C 544 Failure (ECM) Sent DCN after sending TX D
202 FTT 202 EOR.
438 Failure A DCN is sent after receiving DCS/ RX/TX B 550 Failure (ECM) (Modem): Timeout between RX C
202 DTC. (POL) 202 frames

Confidential
Error Code
Result of Error description TX/RX Phase
communication Job history
report
554 Failure (ECM) An ERR is sent after TX D

202 receiving EOR.
580 Failure The receiver dos not have F code TX B
202 (password) capability.
582 Failure The receiver (polling sending) does RX B
202 not have F code (password) (POL)
capability.
826 Failure SUB/SID or SEP/PWD does not RX/TX B
202 match. (POL)

Confidential
6.5.4 FAX Service Parameter  Make sure not to change the parameter before identifying
To support by country or trouble, this product is equipped with the service the phenomenon and cause of the trouble.
parameters in addition to user mode parameters. Make sure to identify the phenomenon and cause of the trouble
before changing the parameter. Otherwise, the essential trouble may
Start the “FAX Maintenance Mode” from the special mode to change settings be hidden that result in recurrence the trouble or cause of another
with the service parameters. problem.
According to the explanation in 6.7.6.1 Basics of FAX
troubleshooting (p.281), perform in the following procedure.
6.5.4.1 Outline of setting change in FAX Maintenance Mode
• Step1: Check the symptom
The following shows the procedure for settings change in FAX Maintenance • Step2: Identify the cause
Mode. • Step3: Correction
1. Enter “FAX Parameter Mode”. When the identification of the cause is difficult, check the symptom
as accurately as possible to acquire setting information of the
2. Start “FAX Parameter Settings”. product, then inquire at support center.
3. Select the item to be changed, then input the value.
 Initialize the FAX Service Parameter Setting
4. Press the [Power] button to turn off the power. When you want to initialize the FAX Service parameter only,
[FAX Parameter Mode] → Select [FAX All Data Initial].

Confidential
6.5.4.2 Parameter changing procedure 1-3.Push the [#]button after input the ID number, and confirm that
following screen is displayed on panel LCD.
1. Star the “FAX Maintenance Mode”.
UP: [2] / DOWN: [8]]
1-1.From Power Off Condition, push the [#] button and [Power] button SHIFT: [6] / Fin : [#]
until the message is displayed on Panel LCD.
*****
UP: [2] / DOWN: [8]]
SHIFT: [6] / Fin : [#] OK:FIN Retry:SHIFT
_
1-4.Push the [#]button on confirmation screen, and confirm that

“Authentication Mode” is started.
Authentication Mode
1-2.Input the ID Number by the following operation method. Run:[#] / Select:[2][8]
Operation method
1. FAX Support Mode
• Number input (move in ascending order): [2] button 2. FAX Maintenance Mode
• Number input (move in descending order): [8] button
• Input digit shift: 　　 [6] button
• Execute: [#] button
C H E C K Enter “72730” when starting the FAX Maintenance

P O IN T Mode.
1-5. Select the “FAX Maintenance Mode”, and push the [#] button.
Authentication Mode
Run:[#] / Select:[2][8]
_
1. FAX Support Mode
2. FAX Maintenance Mode

Confidential
2. Start the “FAX Parameter Settings” 3. Select the changing item, and enter the setting number.
2-1. Select the “FAX Parameter Setting”, and push [#] button. Enter the number of changing item (3 digit), and push the [#] button.
FAX Maintenance Mode
Run:[#] / Select:[2][8] C H E C K  If “---” is displayed on the right side of the number of
P O IN T changing number (3 digit), it is an item with no
parameter assignment.
1. Line Measurement Mode
2. FAX Parameter Settings  There are the following two types of setting change
items, and the changing method is different.
• Parameter of selection type: Select Setting value
• Parameter of input type: Enter Setting value
Regarding detail of changing method, refer to the

2-2.Following screen is displayed on Panel LCD. next pages.
Waiting until the screen is changed. (About 1 minute)
Preparing the selected Mode
Please Wait
FAX Parameter Setting
[000]
000 PARAMLIST PRINT
001 RAMEDIT PRINT
002 ---
003 ---
004 ---
005 PTCL LOG ON ERROR
006 PTCL LOG AUTO PRINT
007PTCL LOG MULTI SAVE
008 ---
009 ---
Select: [0-9] or [:]] / Enter:[#]

Confidential
 Example of setting change in selection type parameter 3. The following complete message is displayed.
 Initial setting value of “DIAL TONE DETECT” is changing from [On] when changing the parameter setting continuously, push the [#] button
to [Off] condition. and move to the parameter select screen.
When finish the parameter setting, push the [Power] button and turn
1. Input the applicable item’s number(060), and push the [#]button.
off the printer.
Input number [060]
060 DIAL TONE DETECT 060 DIAL TONE DETECT
061 DT DET TIME
Value after Current: Off
062 DT OFF IGNR TIME change
063 DT OFF IGNR TIME (PBX)
064 DT OFF PRE-PAUSE TIME
065 ---
066 --- Parameter is set
067 ---
068 --- Back to Parameter List: [#]
069 --- Finish: [Power]
Select:[0-9] or [*] / Enter:[#]
2. Setting change screen is displayed.

Select the “01. Off” by [*]button, and push the [#]button.
060 DIAL TONE DETECT

Current state Current: On
Select New Value

[00]
Selection items 00. On
01. Off
Select:[0-9] or[*] / Enter:[#]

Confidential
 Example of setting change in input type parameter 3. The following complete message is displayed.
 Initial setting value of “TX SIGNAL LEVEL” is changing from when changing the parameter setting continuously, push the [#] button
[-10dBm] to [-15dBm]. and move to the parameter select screen.
When finish the parameter setting, push the [Power] button and turn
1. Input the applicable item’s number, and push the [#]button.
off the printer.
Input number [120] 120 TX SIGNAL LEVEL
120 TX SIGNAL LEVEL Value after Current: 15[-dBm]
121 RX SIGNAL DET LEVEL change
122 TX EQUALIZER
123 RX EQUALIZE
124 ---
125 --- Parameter is set
126 ---
127 ---
128 --- Back to Parameter List:[#]
129 --- Finish: [Power]
Select:[0-9] or [*] / Enter:[#]
2. Setting change screen is displayed.

Input the setting value (15) by number key, and push the [#]button.

120 TX SIGNAL LEVEL
Current state Current: 10 [-dBm]
Input New Value
Input setting [ 15] ( 0 - 15 )

value
Settable range of
setting value Input: [0-9] / Set:[#]

Confidential
6.5.4.3 FAX Service Parameter Table

Table 6-10. FAX Service Parameter Table
No. Parameter Name Setting Range Initial value Unit Remark
000 PARAMLIST PRINT On Off
Off
001 RAMEDIT On Off
Off
002 ---
003 ---
004 ---
005 PTCL LOG ON ERROR On Off When set to ON, only the protocol monitor log of the communication error is
Off saved.
006 PTCL LOG AUTO PRINT On Off When set to on, the protocol monitor log is automatically printed after
Off communication.
007 PTCL LOG MULTI SAVE On Off When set to on, up to three protocol monitor logs are saved.
Off Available in combination with errors.
008 ---
009 ---
010 IR DETECT LEVEL 13~60 13 Vrms Minimum call signal detection level
It is possible to avoid troubles by changing the setting value in the case where
the call signal is erroneously detected due to the influence of noise.
However, if the set value is set too high, it is impossible to detect the calling
signal itself, so caution is required.
NTT line standard for call signal detection is 75 (65 to 83) Vms, but generally
ONU of PBX / optical line is lower than this standard.
When changing this value, the ringing signal is measured with an
oscilloscope, the ringing signal can be detected and no noise is detected. It is
necessary to search for set values.
[Supplement]
Conversion formula of effective value and call signal value measured by
oscilloscope
Rms value
011 IR DET FRQ MIN 11~21 12 Hz Set the lower limit value / upper limit value of the ringing signal detection
012 IR DET FRQ MAX 27~80 66 Hz frequency.
In the case of connection line PSTN, the initial value is detected in the range
of 12 to 66 Hz

Confidential

013 IR DET FRQ MIN (PBX) 11~21 11 Hz Set the lower limit value / upper limit value of the ringing signal detection
014 IR DET FRQ MAX (PBX) 27~80 80 Hz frequency.
In the case of connection line PBX, the initial value is detected in the range of
11 to 80 Hz
015 IR ON TIME MIN 9~30 15 x10ms Minimum time to recognize call signal ON
If it is shorter than this time, it does not judge it as a call signal and does not
answer incoming call.
(The ringing tone sounds when ON at 80 ms)
016 IR ON TIME MAX 50~80 80 x100ms Maximum time to recognize call signal ON
If it is longer than this time, it does not judge it as a call signal and does not
answer incoming call.(The ringing tone sounds)
017 IR OFF TIME MIN 6~10 10 x100ms Call signal off confirmation time
When the calling signal OFF time longer than this setting is detected, the
calling signal is counted as 1 time.
Do not count if the off interval is shorter than this.
Reference value for connection line PSTN.
018 IR OFF TIME MAX 40~125 40 x100ms If the off time is longer than this, it is judged that the call signal has
disappeared.
The call signal count is reset, the calling display disappears
019 IR OFF TIME MIN (PBX) 300~1000 600 ms Call signal off confirmation time
When the calling signal OFF time longer than this setting is detected,
the calling signal is counted as 1 time.
Reference value when connection count = PBX
020 RING DETECT COUNT 0~15 1 times Linked with [number of times of call] of fax setting
021 ---
022 ---
023 ---
024 ---
025 ---
026 ---
027 ---
028 ---
029 ---

Confidential

030 DIAL TYPE Tone Tone Linked with [Dial type] of fax setting
10PPS
20PPS
031 DIAL PAUSE TIME 1~255 30 x100ms Used to register a fax number in the address book.
Changing the pause waiting time to enter with the pause button.
032 FAX SIGNAL WAIT TIME 1~255 55 sec This function changes when the response of the partner fax is slow and
exceeds the response waiting time.
It is the same effect as putting a pose with a pause button after dialing.
033 BROADCAST INTVAL TIME 1~65536 6 sec When executing multiple destination sequential broadcasting, if it is only
sending set it short.
If you also want to receive, leave a longer interval to set incoming calls
longer.
Change “038 JOB INTERVALTIME” by a set.
034 REDIAL INTERVAL 0~15 3 min Linked with [Automatic Redial Interval] of fax setting
035 REDIAL COUNT 0~15 3 times Linked with [Number of automatic redials] of fax setting
036 FORWARD RETRAY INTERVAL 0~255 0 min In the fax to folder / fax to mail transfer, the transfer retry period and number
037 FORWARD RETRAY COUNT 0~255 0 times setting when a transfer error occurs (server side power off).
 Setting Example
• FORWARD RETRY INTERVAL = 30
• FORWARD RETRY COUNTER = 144
Retry 144 times with 30 minute cycle
Continue retry for 3 days
 Precautions for setting
When multiple transfer destinations are set, one transfer job is in a retry
wait state due to an error
Other jobs are not executed until the retry waiting job is completed (remain
in the execution waiting state)
038 JOB INTERVAL TIME 1~65536 6 sec In the case of an environment where a plurality of transmission jobs are
always accumulated as execution waiting jobs,
If you only send, set it to shorter.
If you also want to receive, leave a longer interval to set incoming calls
longer.
039 ---
040 DTMF HI SIG LVL 0~15 8 -dBm Adjustment of sending level of DTMF transmission (high group frequency)

Confidential

041 DTML LO SIG LVL (DIF) +2.0dB ~ -2.0dB Adjustment of sending level of DTMF transmission (low group
-5.5dB frequency)
Difference from high group frequency
 Example
High group frequency transmission level = -8dBm
Difference in low group frequency transmission level= -2dBm
→ Low group frequency transmission level= -10dBm
042 DTML SEND TIME 5~25 10 x10ms Transmission time of high group frequency DTMF transmission.
043 DTMF INTER-DIGIT TIME 5~25 12 x10ms Adjusting inter-digit pause time.
Dial speed can be increased by decreasing set value.
However, too late may cause dial tone false detection, incorrect connection.
Do not set it shorter than 70-70 ms.
Make sure to perform dial confirmation test after change to confirm that there
is no incorrect connection.
044 ---
045 ---
046 ---
047 ---
048 ---
049 ---
050 TONE DETECT LEVEL 28~43 28 -dBm Share with dial tone / busy tone.
051 TONE DET FRQ MIN 24~38 30 x10Hz
052 TONE DET FRQ MAX 47~67 50 x10Hz
053 TONE DET FRQ MIN (PBX) 245~350 245 Hz
054 TONE DET FRQ MAX (PBX) 470~670 670 Hz
055 ---
056 ---
057 ---
058 ---
059 AUTO LINE CHECK On On If there is no problem with telephone line or telephone line connection, set to
Off off when [automatic line check function] false detection [line unconnected] or
'line reverse insertion' error occurs.

Confidential

060 DIAL TONE DETECT On On
Off
061 DT DET TIME 5~25 10 x100ms In the initial setting, if the dial tone is detected for 1000 ms, it is judged that
there is a dial tone.
*The dial tone detection waiting time is fixed at 10s.
062 DT OFF IGNR TIME 5~28 28 x100ms The dial tone off time of this set value is regarded as a dial tone continuation.
‘Connection line = PSTN
063 DT OFF IGNR TIME (PBX) 50~280 280 ms The dial tone off time of this set value is regarded as continuation of dial tone.
‘Connection line = PBX
064 DT OFF PRE-PAUSE TIME 20~2550 30 x100ms When dial tone detection = OFF, pause of this setting value is entered before
dialing.
065 ---
066 ---
067 ---
068 ---
069 ---
070 BUSY TONE DETECT On On
Off
071 BT DET ON TIME MIN 5~65 40 x10ms Minimum time to recognize busy tone signal on.
Shorter than this time does not judge it to be a busy tone.
072 BT DET ON TIME MAX 30~100 60 x10ms Maximum time to recognize busy tone signal on.
Longer than this time does not judge it as a busy tone.
073 BT DET OFF TIME MIN 4~65 40 x10ms Busy tone signal off confirmation time.
Upon detecting the busy tone signal off time longer than this setting, the
number of busy tone signals is counted as one.
074 BT DET OFF TIME MAX 30~100 60 x10ms If the OFF time is longer than this, it is judged that the busy tone signal has
disappeared.
(Busy tone signal count is reset)
075 BT DET COUNT 2~4 4 times
076 ---
077 ---
078 ---

Confidential

079 ---
080 TCF CHECK Normal Normal Level of judgment of line training.
Long If you make it long, more train the line situation. (It makes fall back easier)
081 CED-DIS INTERVAL 75ms 75ms Set the signal interval time between the CED signal and the DIS signal
1sec selected at incoming call.
To disable the echo suppressor overseas communication, set it to 1s.
082 REMOTE RX DET TIME 1~255 3 x10ms Adjust detection time of remote reception push signal.
083 ERROR LINE MODE Rate Rate Switching of error judgment mode of No-ECM reception.
Line Select number of error lines or error line rate.
084 ERROR LINE NUM 0 line 0 line If this setting value is exceeded during reception, judge that the error is over
64 line and turn off the line.
128 line * “0 line” operates with internal initial value = “128 line”.
192 line
256 line
1024 line
2048 line
085 ERROR LINE RATE 0% 0% If this setting value is exceeded during reception, judge that the error is over
5% and turn off the line.
10% * “0%” operates with internal initial value = “10%".
15%
20%
086 ---
087 ---
088 ---
089 ---
090 RX COLOR SUPPORT Disable A4/B4/A3 Use this when you want to disable color reception.
A4 (Disable)
A4/B4 Drop the color reception capability bit from the DIS signal sent at the
A4/B4/A3 incoming call.
Since the transmitting side has no color receiving ability, color transmission is
not performed.
When you enable “A4” “A4 / B4” “B4 / A3” “A3” paper with fax, reduction
color reception capability bit from DIS signal sent at incoming call.

Confidential

091 RX PAPER WIDTH A4 Auto Regardless of the paper size set in the apparatus,
A4/B4 It is used when you want to specify the paper width to receive fax fixed.
A4/B4/A3 When changed, the receiving sheet width capability bit of the DIS signal to be
sent at the time of incoming call changes.
 Example of use
 When sending an A3 / B4 document on the sender side, judge whether
to transmit with A3 / B4 width or reduced size by looking at the
receiving paper width capability bit of the DIS signal of the receiver.
When the receiving sheet width capability bit = A 4, the image is
reduced / cut to A 4 and transmitted.
 A3 / B4 paper is not set on the device, but fax reception is done with A3
/ B4 and received as electronic data of A3 / B4 size by external memory
save / transfer
(Used when split printing is performed in full scale with substitution
output)
092 RX MAX LENGTH 1~65536 650 When the received original length exceeds this set value, the reception is
forcibly terminated.
093 ---
094 ---
095 ---
096 ---
097 ---
098 ---
099 ---
100 REDUCT/CUTOUT SEND Reduction Send Reduction Send Process setting when the transmission document width differs from the
CutOut Send LEFT recording width of the receiver at the time of transmission
CutOut Send CENTER  Reduction Send = Reduction and sending
CutOut Send Right  CutOut Send LEFT = Cut the Left end, and sending on original size.
 CutOut Send CENTER = Cut the both end, and sending on original size.
 CutOut Send Right = Cut the Right end, and sending on original size.
101 V.29 EP TONE On Off When sending V299600 / 7200 bps, add an echo suppressor tone.
Off It is used when a communication error has occurred due to the influence of
line echo of overseas communication.
102 1ST DIS IGNORE On Off Ignore the first DIS at the time of transmission and receive from the second
Off DIS.

Confidential

103 RTC (EOL x12) On Off Select RTC signal [EOL × 6 / EOL × 12] at the end of the PIX signal
Off (switch from high speed to low speed)
104 ---
105 ---
106 ---
107 ---
108 ---
109 ---
110 COMM MONITOR Until Detect Until Detect  Until Detect
Always The monitor turns on when sending out and turns off when it detects a
facsimile signal.
 Always
The monitor is always on.
Since it is possible to listen to the signal at fax communication from the
monitor speaker, it is used at the time of investigation of image defect
trouble.
After troubleshooting confirmation, remember to return to original.
111 MODEM MODE V.27ter V.34 Linking with communication mode of fax setting
V.17 V.34 requires ECM
V.29
V.34
112 CODING MH MMR MMR requires ECM
MR
MMR
113 ECM On On It is linked with error correction (ECM) of fax setting.
Off When ECM = OFF, V34 / MMR / color communication becomes invalid.
114 SIGNAL INTERVAL 100 ms 100 ms Procedure Adjust signal time between signals.
200 ms When an error occurs in communication procedure due to line echo / delay
300 ms etc.
115 ---
116 ---
117 ---
118 ---
119 ---

Confidential

120 TX SIGNAL LEVEL 0~15 10 -dBm If communication data error occurs, adjustment will improve symptoms.
121 RX SIGNAL DET LEVEL -48 dBm -43dBm When a communication data error occurs, if the line noise is high,
-43 dBm it is improved by lowering the sensitivity (-43 dBm → -38 dBm, -33 dBm)
-38 dBm
-33 dBm
122 TX EQUALIZER 0 dB 0 dB When a sending error occurs due to poor line characteristics.
1.8 dB
3.6 dB
7.2 dB
123 RX EQUALIZER 0 dB 3.6 dB When there is a reception error due to poor line characteristics.
1.8 dB
3.6 dB
7.2 dB
124 ---
125 ---
126 ---
127 ---
128 ---
129 ---
130 TX SPEED 2400 bps 14400 bps Setting transmission start speed in V17 / V29 / V27ter mode.
4800 bps
7200 bps
9600 bps
TC7200 bps
TC9600 bps
12000 bps
14400 bps
131 RX SPEED 2400 bps 14400 bps Setting the reception start speed of V17 / V29 / V27ter mode.
4800 bps
7200 bps
9600 bps
TC7200 bps
TC9600 bps
12000 bps
14400 bps

Confidential

132 V.34 TX SPEED 2400 bps 33600 bps Setting transmission start speed of V34 mode.
4800 bps
7200 bps
9600 bps
12000 bps
14400 bps
16800 bps
19200 bps
21600 bps
24000 bps
26400 bps
28800 bps
31200 bps
33600 bps
133 V.34 RX SPEED 2400 bps 33600 bps Setting the reception start speed of V34 mode.
4800 bps
7200 bps
9600 bps
12000 bps
14400 bps
16800 bps
19200 bps
21600 bps
24000 bps
26400 bps
28800 bps
31200 bps
33600 bps
134 V.34 TX SYM RATE 2400 sym/s 2743 sym/s Setting the transmission symbol rate of V34 mode
2743 sym/s
2800 sym/s
3000 sym/s
3200 sym/s
3429 sym/s
135 V.34 RX SYM RATE 2400 sym/s 2743 sym/s Setting the reception symbol rate of V34 mode.
2743 sym/s
2800 sym/s
3000 sym/s
3200 sym/s
3429 sym/s

Confidential

136 ---
137 ---
138 ---
139 ---

Confidential
6.5.5 Fax related user special parameters. 6.5.5.1 Emergency ejection of fax reception document (FAX to PC)
In this product, special parameters are prepared for the following users. Using the PC FAX reception function, urgently remove the received original
document file (.PDF) that can not be printed.
FAX to PC  Emergency ejection of received fax document PC fax reception can be taken out by both USB / network.
FAX to Memory When a facsimile received document becomes unprintable due to a The original file of fax reception is deleted from the product after transfer.
malfunction of the printer function, the fax reception original file
can be urgently taken out.
 FAX to PC  Work Procedure
Install FAX Utility on a PC connected to the product via USB or
network, and take out fax received original file using PC - FAX 1. Start “User Special Mode”.
reception function. 1-1.Turn off the power of the printer once, hold down the # button and
 FAX to Memory press and hold the power switch.
Remove the FAX received document to the USB external Long press until the following message appears on the panel LCD.
memory connected to the product.
1-2.Enter the ID number and activate “User Special Mode”.
C H E C K When using “user special mode”, confirm the ID number

P O IN T to the Service Support.
2. Press the [2] and [8] buttons, select “FAX to PC” from the menu and press
the [#] button to execute.
User Special Mode
Run: [#] / Select:[2][8]
1. Password Initialization
2. FAX to PC
3. FAX to Memory

Confidential
3. When the following screen is displayed, execute setting of PC FAX 6.5.5.2 Emergency ejection of received fax documents
reception from PC with USB or network connection with product. (FAX to Memory)
Using the USB memory, urgently remove fax received original file (.PDF) that can not
FAX to PC
be printed.
The received fax document file is transferred to the “￥ EPFAX RCV” folder
Change save mode from PC.
of the USB memory. (Folders are automatically generated)
The fax receiving document is deleted from the product after transfer.
 Work Procedure
4. After PC FAX reception setting is completed, “Ready” is displayed and
transfer is started. 1. Start “User Special mode”.
FAX to PC 1-1.Turn off the power of the printer once, hold down the # button and
press and hold the power switch.
Long press until the following message appears on the panel LCD.
Ready
1-2.Enter the ID number and activate “User Special Mode”.
C H E C K When using “user special mode”, confirm the ID number

P O IN T to the Service Support.
5. When the transfer is completed, the following message is displayed.
Press the [Power] button to turn off the product.
FAX to PC 2. Press the [2] and [8] buttons, select “FAX to Memory” from the menu and
press the [#] button to execute.
User Special Mode
Completed, Push [Power] Run: [#] / Select:[2][8]
1. Password Initialization
2. FAX to PC
3. FAX to Memory
After the transfer of the received original file is completed,

Turn on the power again and turn off PC FAX reception

Confidential
3. When the following message is displayed on the screen, connect the USB 6. When the transfer is completed, the following message is displayed on the
memory to the product. screen.
Press the “Power” button to turn off the product.
FAX to Memory
FAX to Memory
Insert a Memory Card.
Completed, Push [Power]
4. When the USB memory is detected, the following message is displayed,

so press the [#] button to create the folder.
(If this folder already exists in USB memory, this screen will be skipped)
FAX to Memory
No Folder, Create it [Start]
5. “Storing” is displayed and transfer is started.

FAX to Memory
Storing

Confidential
6.5.6 Fax related troubleshooting  Troubleshoot basic step details
6.5.6.1 Fax troubleshooting basics Step 1: Accurately understand and identify trouble symptoms.
In this step we check 5 points.
To troubleshoot fax troubleshooting with the following steps.
1. What is the symptom of the trouble?
 Troubleshooting basic step  Who is reporting the trouble?
(User, administrator, communication partner of the printer)
 Step 1: Accurately grasp and identify trouble symptoms.
 What kind of error code / error message are occurring?
 Step 2: Investigate the trouble error and specify the cause. (Communication management report, job history, protocol monitor log)
 Step 3: Correct the problem.  What kind of trouble is occurring?
(Please understand concretely that you can not transmit, can not receive, can not
send and receive, or the received image is dirty)
Example) Can not sending
In particular, step 1 is very important. 　　→ I can dial, but it can not connect with the other party.
　　　 Communication is started with the other party but communication
Fax related troubles occur not only in the trouble caused by the own machine,
error occurs.
but also due to troubles caused by the partner machine, troubles caused by the Communication is possible but the image is dirty
telephone line, troubles caused by usage, and the like occur in a combined 2. Where is the trouble occurring?
manner.  Occurred in printer, occurred in application, occurred in specific PC.
When trouble occurs, hear the customer trouble content / situation well  Printer / PC of customer site, printer of customer office, equipment of customer's
communication partner.
“Who is in trouble with what?” 3. When will the trouble occur?
“What is in trouble?”  When has it occurred?
“How can you satisfy our customers?”  Is it occurring at a specific time?
 Frequency of occurrence (always occurring, about once in 10 times).
Accurately understanding and identify.  Before trouble occurrence of environment.
Thereafter, step 2 is performed, and the process proceeds to step 3.  Has the environment changed before the problem occurred?
If troubleshooting in step 3 is skipped by skipping steps 1 and 2, the original (Firm update, replacing ink cartridge, changed telephone line, moved the
installation location)
trouble will not be known.
4. What kind of operations and conditions will cause trouble?
As a result, it may cause trouble recurrence and another trouble to be induced.  When trouble occurs, is it always the same operation?
 Does the problem occur only when a specific event occurs?
 Does the same problem occur with another device or another destination
communication?
5. Can you reproduce the trouble?
 Has the same trouble occurred also at the service base?
 Does the same problem occur with multiple devices and users?
 Can the trouble be reproduced by a specific operation or a specific opponent?

Confidential
Step 2: Determine the cause by investigating the error of the trouble.

When a fax related error occurs, it is not only displayed on the panel but also recorded
as a log / report.
Refer also to these logs / reports and investigate and identify the cause of the trouble.
 Survey and collect communication management reports, protocol monitor
logs, and job history displays.
(Enable error code to be displayed by setting “report format” of communication
management report to “detailed information”)
 In outgoing trouble / communication trouble, in “PCM RECORDER"
communication recording and incoming trouble, “Measure the call signal on the
oscilloscope” is done.
 Investigate the cause based on the survey results.
 It is essential to understand the phase of facsimile transmission / reception in the
investigation of fax communication error.
Investigate with reference to logs / reports as to whether each phase error of
transmission / reception is somewhere.
 Ask the smart charge center as necessary
Step 3: Resolve the problem
If the cause can be identified, implement the countermeasure.
Depending on the cause content, it can be restored by changing the setting of the user
/ service parameter.

Confidential
6.5.6.2 Equipment information necessary for fax trouble report. Report /Log name Remark Print Procedure
If it is difficult to identify the cause of the problem, contact the smart charge Consumables “Setup” → “Printing main body
center for the following information. information sheet status sheet” → “Consumables
information sheet”
 Symptom report of trouble Usage history sheet “Setup” → “Printing main body
(6.5.6.1 Fax troubleshooting basics by referring to basic step 1 of fax status sheet” → “Specification
troubleshooting.) history sheet”
Epson status sheet Network status sheet “Setup” → “Network
 Device setting information information” → “Check network
(Please see below for contents.) information” → “Print”
Report /Log name Remark Print Procedure Sending document, Communication time is
sample of received slow, picture quality is
Fax function setting list “FAX” → “Menu” → “Report” → document bad, etc
“Print” → “FAX function setting
list”
Communication Print with report type = “FAX” → “Menu” → “Report” →
management report “detailed information”. “Print” → “Communication
When symptoms rarely management report”.
occur, automatically  Report format
print and acquire “Setup” → “System
multiple sheets. administration setting” → “Fax
setting” → “Output setting” →
“Report format” → “Detailed
information”.
 Auto print
“Setup” → “System
administration setting” → “Fax
setting” → “Output setting” →
“Communication management
report automatic printing”→
“On (every 30 items)”
Protocol log Logs that are “FAX” → “Menu” → “Report” →
experiencing trouble “Print” → “Protocol log”
symptomatic errors are
preferred.
Printer information sheet “Setup” → “Printing main body
status sheet” → “Printer
information sheet”

Confidential
6.5.6.3 Troubleshooting from fax function diagnosis Diagnosis result Judgment contents Measure
By conducting fax function diagnosis for diagnosis of trouble, it is possible to The modular cable is When the modem on  Make sure that the modular cable
diagnose basic items of fax function, line connection. connected to the EXT hook of the from the telephone line jack is
port. equipment, the voltage connected to the LINE and the
When an error is displayed in the fax function diagnosis report, the following of the LINE port was module cable from the external
the method are implemented. the specified value, telephone (if connected) is
but if it is set to the off connected to the EXT.
hook, it becomes less → If the external telephone is
Diagnosis result Judgment contents Measure than the specified connected to the telephone line in
An error was found in Main base, fax based  As hardware defects are considered, voltage value of the reverse, correctly connect it again.
the printer. communication repair or product exchange (initial LINE port port.
problem failure) is carried out. (When multiple
modems are on hook,
It is not properly When the modem on  Confirm that the telephone line jack
the EXT port is
connected to the hook of the and the LINE port of the equipment
disconnected.)
telephone line. equipment, the voltage are properly connected with the
of the LINE port was modular cable. Line connection is The on-hook phone  When a splitter is connected, in case
less than the specified → The stuffing of the modular cable unstable. was measured and it of separation, connect the telephone
value. is broken. was below the line and the device directly and re-
If contact failure or disconnection, specified value. connect the fax function.
exchange cable.  If it is connected to the TA, check if
 Calculate the line voltage with a it improves by restarting TA.
tester. No dial tone is can not detect the dial  If you hear sound and intermittent
(DC 48V at normal time) detected. tone. sound by pressing the “on hook”
 Connect the external telephone to button, set the connection line to
the telephone line jack without “private branch exchange (PBX)”
going through the device and check and perform the diagnostic test
whether telephone reaction, again.
incoming call, and call can be made  You hear a continuous tone sound
normally. by pressing the “On Hook” button,
→ If there is an abnormality in the but set “Dial tone detection” to
telephone line, ask the telephone “OFF” when the tone is small.
line contractor for confirmation.

Confidential
6.5.6.4 Troubleshooting from error code Error code display Judgment contents Measure
The trouble can be specified to some extent by the error code of the No circuit connection No line voltage from before  Make sure that the
communication management report. transmission telephone line is properly
connected to the LINE port.
 Connect the phone and
C H E C K In order to display the error code in the communication
check if you can dial by
P O IN T management report, it is necessary to make the following dialing or dialing a dial
setting. tone.
Check the line voltage with
 [Setup] → [System administration settings] → [Fax
a tester.
settings] → [Output settings] → [Report format] (48 V DC at on-hook)
= [Detailed information]
Busy Busy tone is detected when  Check if the phone number
dialing is wrong.
 Phase A trouble (calling system)
 Check whether another
Error code display Judgment contents Measure signal is erroneously
detected as a busy tone.
No tone Dial tone can not be detected  Connect the phone and In case of erroneous
when dialing. check whether the dial tone detection Confirm the signal
from the switchboard is that is erroneously detected
heard, continuous tone or by recording, and set the
intermittent tone. busy tone detection function
 Check if it is PSTN line or to “OFF” in [FAX
PBX line. Maintenance Mode].
In case of PBX line, change Or adjust the detection
connection line setting to method.
PBX and check again.
No reply I can not detect the fax number  Make sure that the phone
If you can hear the dial tone
from the other machine after number is wrong.
but can not detect it, record
dialing.  Confirm that the fax signal
it and check the signal and
adjust the detection method is coming back from the
in [FAX Maintenance other party.
Mode].
At this time, the [OFF]
setting of dial tone detection
has a risk of false detection.
Avoid as much as possible.
Port back push Before calling (on hook) there  Check whether the LINE
was a line voltage but the line port and the EXT port are
voltage was gone when calling connected in reverse or
(off hook). check the telephone
connection

Confidential
 Phase B to D trouble
Error code display Judgment contents Measure
Error ××× A communication error  Output the communication
occurred after line connection. management report and
check the error occurrence
status.
In a fax machine that uses a
subscribed telephone line,
communication errors may
occur if the status of the
picked up telephone line is
bad, and if it is re-
communicated by automatic
redial, it will grab a good
telephone line and send it
normally.
Since a communication
management report is
necessary for trend survey, a
communication
management report is
automatically printed.
Have the customer keep it.
Have the customer keep it.
 By outputting the
communication protocol
monitor log at the time of
error occurrence, it is
possible to investigate
where an error occurred in
the communication.
In “FAX Maintenance
Mode”, set “error only”
“automatic printing” as
necessary.
 Check the error occurrence
status by acquiring the
recording data of the
communication at the time
of error occurrence

Confidential
CHAPTER
7
REPAIR WORK
Confidential
7.1 Adjustment and Inspection Work PARTS YOU SHOULD BEWARE OF DURING REPAIR
To prevent injury during disassembly/reassembly of the product, the parts with a

7.1.1 Precautions of repairing the product potential danger when handling them are listed below. Take extra care during
disassembly/reassembly.
DISCHARGING THE STORED ELECTRICITY
 ADF/SCN
Immediately after powering off the printer, electricity is stored in the electric circuit of
printer. You may get injured if your hand get caught when the opened Scanner/ADF Unit
If you disassemble the printer in this state, you may get an electric shock. And also, the has been suddenly closed. Therefore, do not disassemble/reassemble the printer
electrical parts may be damaged. with the Scanner/ADF Unit open.
Therefore, make sure to perform the following operation of discharging the stored
electricity before disassembling the printer. ADF/SCN
 Procedure
1. Power Off the printer, and disconnect the AC Cable form the printer.
2. Push the Power button until Power LED is turned off.
The Power LED lights for a few seconds when the power supply
button is pushed. Make sure to push the Power button until Power
LED is turned off.
(When the Power LED is turned off or the Power LED does not
light even if the Power button is pressed, this operation is finished)
Figure 7-2. Caution part for ADF/SCN
 Sharp edges of metal plates around the Inksystem

Make sure to wear gloves during repair. Be especially careful not to get injured by
the sharp edges when lifting the mechanism unit.
Power LED lights when power
supply button is pushed.
Figure 7-1. Releasing method of the stored electricity
Repair work Adjustment and Inspection Work 267

Confidential
7.1.2 Repair Workflow

The workflow for repair work is shown below.
START
Troubleshooting
1 Identify the causes. 1 See Chapter 6 Troubleshooting (p. 112) and troubleshoot the problem.
Repair work
No
2 Preparation necessary? See ’7.2.3 Required Adjustments’ (p.281) and check if the preparation is
2
necessary.
Yes
See ’7.2.4 Adjustment and Inspection Details’ (p.284) for the procedures.
3 Prepare for repair. 3
Outline/workflow/procedure are described in details respectively.
See ’7.3 Repair Work Procedures’ (p.332) and check the disassembly/assembly
4 Replace the parts.
4 procedures. Operation time for each disassembly/assembly or adjustment/
inspection is described in their procedure outline.
No See ’7.2.3 Required Adjustments’ (p.281) and check whether adjustment is

5 Adjustment necessary? 5
necessary.
Yes
See ’7.2.4 Adjustment and Inspection Details’ (p.284) for the procedures.
Perform the adjustment. 6
6 Outline/workflow/procedure are described in details respectively.
Final check printing Perform the final check of the print state by printing the Nozzle Check Pattern in
7 7
the service support mode.
Yes
Any problems?
No
END
Figure 7-3. Repair Workflow

Confidential
7.1.3 Tools and Jigs  Jigs
The following tools and jigs are required for repairing the printer. EPSON
Name Availability Remarks
Part Code
 Tools
Thickness Gauge ✓ ---
EPSON
Name Availability Remarks Teflon tape ✓ 1706715
Part Code
LEAK TESTER SHEET ✓ 1684353
(+) Phillips screwdriver #1 ✓ 1080530
(+) Phillips screwdriver #2 ✓ --- Note 1 : Some of the tools listed above are commercially available.
Flathead screwdriver ✓ --- 2 : EPSON provides the tools listed with EPSON part code
Flathead Precision ✓ ---

screwdriver
Torque screwdriver ✓ ---
Tweezers ✓ ---
Longnose pliers ✓ ---
Cleaning stick ✓ 1709718
Acetate tape ✓ 1003963
Tape ✓ --- Secure the cover open
sensor (at adjustment)

Confidential
7.2 Adjustment and Inspection Work
7.2.1 Adjustment and Inspection Overview

This product has adjustments and inspections that are performed by mechanically adjusting and inspecting the printer mechanisms (mechanical adjustments and inspections), and
adjustments and inspections that are performed by using an adjustment program (software adjustments and inspections). The adjustment program is incorporated into the main unit
of this product, and each adjustment menu can be used by starting the product in the service support mode. This section explains the adjustments, inspections, and maintenance
required during repair work.
 Adjustment and inspection types
 Mechanical adjustments and inspections
Items to be physically adjusted and inspected on the product main unit.
 Software adjustments and inspections (service support mode)
• Before repair operation
Perform the work for parts that require preparatory work prior to performing part replacement (repair work).
• Main parts adjustment
Sequentially display the required adjustment items for part replacement. Only the five main parts (Printhead, Ink Supply Unit, Inksystem Assy, Rear ASF Assy, and
Main Board Assy) are supported.
• Individual adjustment mode
Used to individually select and execute the adjustment items. Perform adjustment in this mode for parts other than the five main parts.
 Maintenance (service support mode)
Used to perform maintenance operations such as ink filling and cleaning.

Confidential
7.2.2 Adjustment and Inspection List

 Mechanical adjustments and inspections
Adjustment name Program No. Purpose Adjustment procedure overview Tools/media Reference
Set the clearance of the gap between the Place a thickness gauge in the specified
Mechanical  Thickness gauge
PG Check --- nozzle surface of the print head and the location and then move the carriage unit over P. 284
adjustment  Teflon tape
platen to an appropriate amount. the thickness gauge and check the clearance.
Prevent ink leaks, make sure there is no ink When installing the Printhead, insert the leak
Mechanical
Leak Check --- leaking from the Printhead. check jig and determine whether or not there  Leak check jig P. 291
inspection
is a leak by whether or not ink adheres to it.
 Software adjustments and inspections
Time Adjustment
Program Tools/
Adjustment name Purpose Adjustment procedure overview (in units of procedure
No. media
seconds) details
Judge whether or not the Printhead needs to Select “Before Repair Operation: MENU”-
be replaced when missing nozzles, unstable “B90 Print Head” from the service support
discharge, or misalignment discharge mode menu and execute the item.
Printhead B90 --- 1:00 P. 323
occurs.
If replacement is required, perform the
Before repair preparation required for replacement.
operation Perform the operation required before Select “Before Repair Operation: MENU”-
Ink Supply Unit B91 replacing the Ink Supply Unit. “B91 Ink Supply Unit” from the service --- 0:50 P. 324
support mode menu and execute the item.
Perform the operation required before Select “Before Repair Operation: MENU”-
Ink System Assy B92 replacing the Inksystem Assy. “B92 Ink System Assy” from the service --- 1:20 P. 324
support mode menu and execute the item.
Sequentially display the adjustments Select “Main parts adjustment seq:
required after Printhead replacement. MENU”-“B80 Print Head Seq” from the
Print Head Seq B80 service support mode menu and execute the --- 18:05 P. 325
item to perform the adjustments required
Main parts after Printhead replacement.
adjustment Sequentially display the adjustments Select “Main parts adjustment seq:
required after Ink Supply Unit replacement. MENU”-“B81 Ink Supply Unit Seq” from
Ink Supply Unit Seq B81 the service support mode menu and execute --- 10:50 P. 326
the item to perform the adjustments required
after the ink supply unit replacement.

Confidential
Time Adjustment
Program Tools/
No. media
seconds) details
required after Inksystem Assy replacement. MENU”-“B82 Ink System Assy Seq” from
Ink System Assy Seq B82 the service support mode menu and execute --- 4:55 P. 326
after the Inksystem Assy replacement.
required after Rear ASF Assy replacement. MENU”-“B83 Rear ASF Unit Seq” from
Main parts
Rear ASF Unit Seq B83 the service support mode menu and execute --- 1:40 P. 327
adjustment
after the Rear ASF Assy replacement.
required after the Main Board Assy MENU”-“B84 Main Board Seq” from the
Main Board Seq B84 replacement. service support mode menu and execute the --- 1:20 P. 327
item to perform the adjustments required
after the main board replacement.
When replacing the Printhead, obtain the ID Select “B10 Head ID Input” from the
incorporating the correction values for print service support mode menu and execute the
head production variations from the head, item.
Head ID Input B10 --- 0:35 P. 292
and write it to the EEPROM on the main After the ID is input, check that the correct
board. print head ID has been written in the same
menu.
Reset the PW deterioration correction Select “B14 Initialize-PW Sensor” from the
Initialize-PW
Mech Ready/ B14 counter for the corresponding part. service support mode menu and execute the --- 0:40 P. 293
Sensor
Initialize item.
Individual To show the list of following counter values Select “B16 Counter Reset” from the
Adjustment and to reset the counter as necessary. service support mode menu and execute the
 PF/EJ Counter corresponding counter reset.
Counter Reset B16  Rear ASF Counter --- 0:45 P. 293
 Feed Roller C1 Counter
Check that there are no speed variations or Select “B21 CR Scale Check” from the
CR Scale periodic variations in the CR operation due service support mode menu and execute the
Mech Check B21 --- 0:45 P. 294
Check to damage or deterioration of the CR scale item.
surface.

Confidential
Time Adjustment
Program Tools/
No. media
seconds) details
For poor assembling detection when Select “B23 PE Sensor Check” from the
replacing the PE sensor part, pass paper service support mode menu and execute the
PE Sensor
B23 through and check that the chattering after item. --- 0:40 P. 295
Check
detection of the paper trailing edge by the
PE sensor stops within the set time.
Mech Check Check that the temperature and humidity Select “B24 Temp/hum. Sensor” from the
sensors are operating normally. service support mode menu and execute the
Temp/hum. item, and then determine whether or not the
B24 --- 0:35 P. 295
Sensor sensor operation is normal or abnormal
based on the displayed temperature and
humidity information.
Check that an abnormal signal that will Select “B26 Nozzle Noise Check” from the
Nozzle Noise cause a Nozzle diagnostic function problem service support mode menu and execute the
B26 --- 0:35 P. 296
Check is not occurring as a result of a part failure item.
or poor assembling.
Set the rank for setting the optimal Select “B27 Nozzle Rank Categorise” from
Individual Nozzle Rank judgment threshold value of each nozzle to the service support mode menu and execute
B27 --- 1:29 P. 296
Adjustment Categorise ensure Nozzle diagnostic function detection the item.
accuracy.
Check that Nozzle diagnostic function is Select “B28 Nozzle Detect Check” from the
Nozzle Detect
B28 operating normally. service support mode menu and execute the --- 0:38 P. 297
Check
item.
Printing Check Check Pattern Print check patterns to check that there is no Select “B29 Check Pattern Print (Plain)” or
B29 --- 1:30 P. 297
Print (Plain) problem with the final print quality. “B34 Check Pattern Print (Matte)” from the
service support mode menu and execute the Photo
Check Pattern item to print the check patterns.
B34 matte 3:10 P. 298
Print (Matte)
paper
Print patterns for checking the banding level Select “B30 RGB Pattern” from the service
RGB Pattern B30 of each color. support mode menu and execute the item to --- 0:55 P. 298
print the banding level check patterns.
Print patterns for checking for missing Select “B32 Nozzle Check Pattern” from
Nozzle Check nozzles. the service support mode menu and execute
B32 --- 0:50 P. 300
Pattern the item to print the nozzles missing check
patterns.

Confidential
Time Adjustment
Program Tools/
No. media
seconds) details
CR Motor Measure product variations to set the Automatically measure the correction value
B40 --- 1:25
Correct appropriate correction values. Also, make a and perform the operation load check by
PF Motor pass/fail judgment by calculating whether or selecting a motor correct from the service
B41 --- 0:40
Correct not the operation load is within the expected support mode menu and executing the item.
ASF Motor range from the motor current value.
B42 --- 0:30
Correct C1
ASF/LIFT
Mech Adjust P. 301
Motor Correct B66 --- 0:30
C2
ASF/LIFT
Motor Correct B67 --- 0:30
C3
IS Motor
B69 --- 0:45
Correct
Mechanically correct the print offset due to Select “B43 Head angular Adj. Mech” from
part product variations and tilting at the time the service support mode menu and execute
of Printhead attachment. the item to print the adjustment pattern.
Photo
Individual Head angular Determine the adjustment value from the
B43 matte 2:35 P. 302
Adjustment Adj. Mech adjustment pattern based on the judgment
paper
criteria and then perform adjustment by
turning the adjustment dial provided on the
carriage unit.
Use software to correct the vertical or Select “B44 Head angular Adj. Soft” from
horizontal tilting that occurs at the time of the service support mode menu and execute
print attachment. the item to print the adjustment pattern.
Printing Adjust Head angular
B44 Determine the adjustment value from the --- 1:37 P. 308
Adj. Soft
adjustment pattern based on the judgment
criteria and then enter the adjustment value
on the Head angular Adj. Soft screen.
Correct the impact offset caused by a Select “B45 PTS Acc./Dec. Adjust” from
difference in the speed of the low-speed part the service support mode menu and execute
and acceleration/deceleration part of the the item to print the adjustment pattern.
PTS Acc./Dec.
B45 CR. Determine the adjustment value from the --- 6:40 P. 306
Adjust
on the PTS Acc./Dec. Adjust screen.

Confidential
Time Adjustment
Program Tools/
No. media
seconds) details
Use software to correct the print timing for Select “B46 Bi-D Adjust” from the service
aligning the print position between the support mode menu and execute the item to
outward path and return path when print the adjustment pattern.
Bi-D Adjust B46 bidirectional printing. Determine the adjustment value from the --- 4:40 P. 309
on the Bi-D Adjust screen.
Use software to correct the print timing for Select “B48 Bi-D Band Adjust” from the
aligning the print position between the service support mode menu and execute the
outward path and return path when item to print the adjustment pattern.
Bi-D Band
B48 bidirectional printing in band feed mode. Determine the adjustment value from the --- 3:10 P. 311
Adjust
on the Bi-D Band Adjust screen.
Use software to correct the offset due to Select “B49 PW Sensor Correct” from the
sensor characteristics and attachment service support mode menu and execute the
variations. item to print the adjustment pattern.  Photo
PW Sensor matte
Individual B49 Determine the adjustment value from the 3:15
Printing Adjust Correct paper
Adjustment adjustment pattern based on the judgment  Ruler
on the PW Sensor Correct screen.
Use software to correct the print timing so Select “B50 Print Start Pos. (ASF)” from
that the main scanning direction print start the service support mode menu and execute
position becomes the target value. the item to print the adjustment pattern.
Print Start
B50 Determine the adjustment value from the Ruler 1:15
Pos.(ASF) P. 312
on the Print Start Pos. (ASF) screen.
Select “B51 Print Start Pos. (Rear ASF)”
from the service support mode menu and
execute the item to print the adjustment
Print Start Pos. pattern.
B51 Ruler 1:15
(Rear ASF) Determine the adjustment value from the
on the Print Start Pos. (Rear ASF) screen.

Confidential
Time Adjustment
Program Tools/
No. media
seconds) details
Use software to correct the paper detection Select “B52 PE Adjust (ASF)” from the
position offset caused by variations in the service support mode menu and execute the
PE sensor attachment position and item to print the adjustment pattern.
PE Adjust
B52 Printhead position. Determine the adjustment value from the Ruler 0:45
(ASF)
on the PE Adjust (ASF) screen.
P. 317
Select “B53 PE Adjust (Rear ASF)” from
the service support mode menu and execute
the item to print the adjustment pattern.
PE Adjust
B53 Determine the adjustment value from the Ruler 0:45
(Rear ASF)
Individual on the PE Adjust (Rear ASF) screen.
Printing Adjust
Adjustment Use software to correct the variation in the Select “B54 Feed Adjust” from the service
actual feed amount of paper caused by support mode menu and execute the item to
production variations of the PF/EJ rollers. print the adjustment pattern.
Photo matte
Feed Adjust B54 Determine the adjustment value from the 1:35 P. 314
paper
on the Feed Adjust screen.
Correct the paper feed error that occurs due Select “B55 Band Feed Adjust” from the
to mechanical variations or media feed service support mode menu and execute the
characteristics in band feed mode. item to print the adjustment pattern.
Band Feed
B55 Determine the adjustment value from the --- 4:25 P. 315
Adjust
on the Band Feed Adjust screen.

Confidential
Time Adjustment
Program Tools/
No. media
seconds) details
Correct the impact offset caused by a Select “B61 PTS ACC/Dec. Adjust (S)”
difference in the speed of the low-speed part from the service support mode menu and
and acceleration/deceleration part of the execute the item to print the adjustment
CR. pattern.
PTS ACC./Dec. Adjust (S) B61 --- 2:03 P. 318
Perform adjustment in only a specific Determine the adjustment value from the
adjustment area and perform automatic adjustment pattern based on the judgment
calculation for other than that area to criteria and then enter the adjustment value
determine the correction value. from the PTS ACC./Dec. Adjust (S) screen.
Use software to correct the print timing for Select “B62 Bi-D Adjust (S)” from the
aligning the print position between the service support mode menu and execute the
outward path and return path when item to print the adjustment pattern.
Bi-D Adjust (S) B62 bidirectional printing. Perform adjustment Determine the adjustment value from the --- 2:00 P. 319
in only a specific adjustment area and adjustment pattern based on the judgment
perform automatic calculation for other than criteria and then enter the adjustment value
that area to determine the correction value. from the Bi-D Adjust (S) screen.
Simple
Use software to correct the print timing for Select “B63 Bi-D Band Adjust (S)” from
Adjustment
aligning the print position between the the service support mode menu and execute
outward path and return path when the item to print the adjustment pattern.
bidirectional printing in band feed mode. Determine the adjustment value from the
Bi-D Band Adjust (S) B63 --- 1:26 P. 320
Perform adjustment in only a specific adjustment pattern based on the judgment
adjustment area and perform automatic criteria and then enter the adjustment value
calculation for other than that area to from the Bi-D Band Adjust (S) screen.
determine the correction value.
Correct the paper feed error that occurs due Select “B64 Band Feed Adjust (S)” from the
to mechanical variations or media feed service support mode menu
characteristics in band feed mode. and execute the item to print the adjustment
Perform adjustment in only a specific pattern.
Band Feed Adjust (S) B64 --- 1:11 P. 322
adjustment area and perform automatic Determine the adjustment value from the
calculation for other than that area to adjustment pattern based on the judgment
determine the correction value. criteria and then enter the adjustment value
from the Band Feed Adjust (S) screen.

Confidential
 Maintenance
Time Adjustment
Program
Adjustment name Purpose Adjustment procedure overview Tools (in units of procedure
No.
seconds) details
Fill the Printhead and ink channels with ink to Select “Ink Fill” from the service support mode
Head Ink Fill C01 enable printing. (Perform this after Printhead menu and execute the item to check the --- 3:35
replacement.) discharge state with the nozzle check patterns.
Fill the Printhead and ink channels with ink to
Ink Fill P. 328
enable printing.
Initial Fill C02 (Perform this after replacement of the ink --- 8:50
supply path parts between the Ink Supply Unit
and Printhead.)
CL1 C03 Perform this to recover from missing dots or Select a head cleaning item from the service 2:10
CL2 C04 print defects of the Printhead. support mode menu and execute the item to 3:00
check the discharge state with the nozzle check
Head Cleaning CL3 C05 --- 4:20 P. 329
patterns.
Strong CL C06 5:50
Refresh CL C07 5:50
Discharge ink to release the pressure applied to Select “C08 Head Ink Discharge” from the
the ink inside the supply path from the head for service support mode menu and execute the
Head Ink Discharge C08 the purpose of preventing ink leaks after item. --- 1:45
Printhead replacement. (However, this is not
P. 329
required after normal Printhead replacement.)
Discharge the ink inside the supply path from Select “C09 Supply Ink Discharge” from the
Supply Ink
C09 the Ink Supply Unit to the Printhead and replace service support mode menu and execute the --- 3:05
Ink Discharge Discharge
it with air. item.
Discharge the waste ink remaining in the Select “C10 Suction Pump Ink Discharge” from
Suction Pump Ink
C10 suction pump (Inksystem Assy). the service support mode menu and execute the --- 1:10 P. 330
Discharge
item.
Detect and display the head thermistor Select “C11 Head Thermistor Check” from the
Head Thermistor
C11 temperature, and display the guaranteed service support mode menu and execute the --- 0:35 P. 330
Check
temperature range of NVT operation. item.
Status Sheet Print C20 Print the Status Sheet. Refer to ’9.3 Status Sheet Information’ (p.703). --- 1:45 P. 331

Confidential
 USB Data Swap
Time Adjustment
Program
No.
seconds) details
Data Back Up --- When a failure of the Main Board Assy occurs or Refer to ’8.4 USB Data Swap’ (p.685). --- 1:05
Main Board Data Restore --- swapping the printer, transfer information from the --- 1:30
Replace failed printer or board to the new board/swapped
Data Delete from
--- printer via the USB flash drive. --- 0:45
USB
P. 685
Data Back Up --- --- 1:05
Data Restore --- --- 1:30
Swap Mech Unit
Data Delete from
--- --- 0:45
USB
 Printer Status Information
Time Adjustment
Program
No.
seconds) details
When printing cannot be made due to Fatal Error Refer to’8.3 Printer Status Information’
Printer Status Information --- etc., check the firmware version and the history of (p.684). --- --- P. 684
recent errors.
 USB FW Update
Time Adjustment
Program
No.
seconds) details
Update the firmware using a USB flash drive since Refer to’8.5 Firmware Update Using USB
USB FW Update --- updating cannot be made without network Flash Drive’ (p.691). --- --- P. 691
connection or where the PC cannot be connected.

Confidential
 Counter Reset
Time Adjustment
Program
No.
seconds) details
Reset the counter after replacing the periodic Refer to’8.6 Periodic Replacement Parts’
replacement parts shown below. (p.695).
Counter Reset B16  Feed Roller C1 --- 0:45 P. 695
 Feed Roller C2, 3
 Rear ASF Assy

Confidential
7.2.3 Required Adjustments C H E C K  Meaning of the marks used in Table7-1 are as follows.
P O IN T • “RP”: Required only when replacing
The following table lists the required adjustment items depending upon the parts being
• “RM”: Required when removing and/or replacing
repaired or replaced. Find the part(s) you removed or replaced, and check which
• Blank: No adjustment is required
adjustment(s) must be carried out.
 If there are multiple adjustment items for a replaced part, be
sure to carry them out in the priority order indicated in the
table.
Table 7-1. Adjustment Correspondence Table

Main Optional Cassette
ASP Ref No.
200 501 502 503 504 507 508 510 513 514 515 516 520 522 700 703 704 708 719 750 764 768 781 790 796
Paper Guide Upper Assy

PF Encoder Board Assy
Separation Roller Assy

Ink Supply Tube Assy
Priority order

(Data Back Up OK)
(Data Back Up NG)
Pickup Roller Assy
Temperature and
Main Board Assy
Main Board Assy
Humidity Sensor
Paper Cassette 1
Paper Cassette 2
Star Wheel Assy
Drive Gear Assy
Ink Supply Unit

Head FFC Assy
CR Motor Assy
Inksystem Assy
Rear ASF Assy

PE Lever Assy
Retard Roller
Retard Roller
Printhead
Rear Unit
Relevant parts
CR Scale
PF Scale
CR Unit
Program
Adjustment item
No.
Before repair operation: MENU
1 Printhead (p. 323) B90 RM RM RM
2 Ink Supply Unit (p. 324) B91 RM
3 Ink System Assy (p. 324) B92 RM
USB Data Swap: MENU

Main Board Replace: MENU
4 Data Back Up --- RP RP
Individual Action Check: MENU

5 CR Unlock Power OFF A02 RP
Mechanical adjustments
6 PG Adjustment (p. 284) --- RM RM
Adjustment: MENU
Main Parts Adjustment Seq: MENU
7 Printhead Seq (p. 325) B80 RM RM RM
8 Ink Supply Unit Seq (p. 326) B81 RM
9 Rear ASF Unit Seq (p. 327) B83 RM
10 Main Board Seq (p. 327) B84 RM RM

Confidential

ASP Ref No.
200 501 502 503 504 507 508 510 513 514 515 516 520 522 700 703 704 708 719 750 764 768 781 790 796


Priority order

(Data Back Up OK)
(Data Back Up NG)
Pickup Roller Assy
Temperature and
Main Board Assy
Main Board Assy
Humidity Sensor
Paper Cassette 1
Paper Cassette 2
Drive Gear Assy
Star Wheel Assy
Ink Supply Unit

Head FFC Assy
CR Motor Assy
Inksystem Assy
Rear ASF Assy

PE Lever Assy
Retard Roller
Retard Roller
Rear Unit
Printhead
Relevant parts
CR Scale
PF Scale
CR Unit
Program
Adjustment item
No.
Adjustment: MENU (continued)
Individual Adjustment: MENU
Mech Ready/Initialize: MENU
11 Initialize-PW Sensor (p. 293) B14 RP
Mech Check: MENU

12 CR Scale Check (p. 294) B21 RM RM
13 PE Sensor Check (p. 295) B23 RM RM
14 Temp/hum. Sensor (p. 295) B24 RM RP
Mech Adjust: MENU

15 CR Motor Correct (p. 301) B40 RM RM RM RM
16 PF Motor Correct (p. 301) B41 RM
17 ASF Motor Correct C1 (p. 301) B42 RM RM
ASF/LIFT Motor Correct C2

18 B66 RM RP
(p. 301)
ASF/LIFT Motor Correct C3
19 B67 RM RP
(p. 301)
20 IS Motor Correct (p. 301) B69 RM
Printing Adjust: MENU

21 Head angular Adj. Mech (p. 302) B43 RM
22 Head angular Adj. Soft (p. 308) B44 RM RM RM RM
23 PTS Acc./Dec. Adjust (p. 306) B45 RM RM RM RM
24 Bi-D Adjust (p. 309) B46 RM RM RM RM
25 Bi-D Band Adjust (p. 311) B48 RM RM RM RM
26 PW Sensor Correct (p. 312) B49 RM RM RM RM RM
27 Print Start Pos. (ASF) (p. 312) B50 RM RM RM RP RP RM RM RP RM

Confidential

ASP Ref No.
200 501 502 503 504 507 508 510 513 514 515 516 520 522 700 703 704 708 719 750 764 768 781 790 796


Priority order

(Data Back Up OK)
(Data Back Up NG)
Pickup Roller Assy
Temperature and
Main Board Assy
Main Board Assy
Humidity Sensor
Paper Cassette 1
Paper Cassette 2
Drive Gear Assy
Star Wheel Assy
Ink Supply Unit

Head FFC Assy
CR Motor Assy
Inksystem Assy
Rear ASF Assy

PE Lever Assy
Retard Roller
Retard Roller
Rear Unit
Printhead
Relevant parts
CR Scale
PF Scale
CR Unit
Program
Adjustment item
No.
Adjustment: MENU (continued)
Individual Adjustment: MENU (continued)
Printing Adjust: MENU (continued)
28 Print Start Pos.(Rear ASF) (p. 312) B51 RM RM RM RM RM
29 PE Adjust (ASF) (p. 317) B52 RM RM RM RM RM
30 PE Adjust (Rear ASF) (p. 317) B53 RM RM RM RM RM
31 Feed Adjust (p. 314) B54 RM RM RM RM RM
32 Band Feed Adjust (p. 315) B55 RM RM RM RP RP RM RM RP
Maintenance: MENU
Head Cleaning: MENU
33 Strong CL (p. 329) C06 RM
USB Data Swap: MENU

34 Data Restore --- RP
Counter Reset
35 Counter Reset (p. 293) B16 RP RP RP RP

36 Ink Leak Sensor A59 RM

Confidential
7.2.4 Adjustment and Inspection Details  Preparing the thickness gauge
7.2.4.1 Mechanical Adjustments and Inspections  The Printhead of this printer has an integral structure of
the Printhead Cover and Printhead nozzle surface.
PG CHECK Therefore, if the thickness gauge touches the nozzle
surface in the same way as performed in the traditional
C H E C K The standard range of the PG is as follows.
procedure, the nozzle surface may be damaged. When
P O IN T  Standard: 1.60 ± 0.10 mm checking the platen gap, make sure to apply Teflon tape
(thickness: 0.08 mm) on all the thickness gauges used for
checking the PG/PG Adjustment in advance.
 Tools  Use commercially available Teflon tape of 0.08 mm in
 Thickness gauges (thickness: 1.42 mm/1.62 mm) thickness.
 Teflon tape (part code: 1706715)  When applying Teflon tape on the thickness gauges, make
 Flow of checking the PG sure no bubbles or foreign material remain under the
tape.
START
" Preparing the thickness gauge (p. 284)"
" Checking the PG (p. 286)"
PG is within No Bubbles Foreign materials

the standard?
Yes " Preparation for the PG

adjustment (p. 287)"
" PG Adjustment (p. 289)"
END
Figure 7-4. Flow of checking the PG/PG Adjustment

Confidential
 Application procedure of Teflon tape

1. Clean the surfaces of the thickness gauge by using alcohol, and make sure
no dirt or contamination remains on the surfaces.
2. Apply Teflon tape on the thickness gauge as shown below.
Teflon tape
Fold the tape at the edge and trim it at the center in the
thickness direction.
Thickness gauge
Figure 7-5. Preparing Thickness Gauge (1)

Teflon tape
3. Fold the excess portions of Teflon tape along the edges of the thickness Thickness gauge
gauge, and trim the portions at about the center in the thickness direction
of the sides.
Before trimming
C H E C K When trimming the Teflon tape, the Teflon tape can be easily cut
P O IN T out by guiding the half thickness gauge.
After trimming
 Make sure to wear the heavy gloves to prevent the cutter

from cutting the hand when trimming the Teflon tape. Figure 7-6. Preparing Thickness Gauge (2)
 When trimming, cut in the opposite direction, away from
the hand holding the gauge. 4. Make sure any tears or burrs on the applied Teflon tape, then the
preparation of thickness gauges is complete.

Confidential
 Checking the PG 3. Move the CR unit to the thickness gauge and check that the nozzle surface of the
Printhead does not touch the thickness gauge.
When performing the PG adjustment, make sure of the following. If it touches the thickness gauge, the PG is narrower than the standard value so
 Move the CR Unit by pulling the CR timing belt. adjust the PG.
 Be careful not to damage the nozzle surface of the 4. Move the CR unit to the center part of the printer, and place the 1.70 mm thickness
Printhead with the thickness gauge. gauge (1.62 mm thickness gauge + 0.08 mm Teflon tape) at the position shown in
 When make the Printhead touch the thickness gauge, be Figure 7-7.
careful not to let the Printhead run onto the gauge. 5. Move the CR unit to the thickness gauge and check that the nozzle surface of the
Printhead touches the thickness gauge.
1. Move the CR unit to the center of the printer.
If does not touch the thickness gauge, the PG is wider than the standard value so
2. Place the 1.50 mm thickness gauge (1.42 mm thickness gauge + 0.08 mm Teflon adjust the PG.
tape) at the position shown in Figure 7-7.
Full digit side HP side
Thickness gauge
Figure 7-7. Placement of the Thickness Gauge

Confidential
 Preparation for the PG adjustment 1. Remove the Paper Cassette. (p. 556)
 If you have a stubby screwdriver, this preparation is not 2. Remove the four screws securing the Front Housing (Front ×2, Top ×2) and the
C H E C K
P O IN T necessary. screw securing the cable guide (screw on the front only).
Front
PG Adjustment Cam
Front Housing
Stubby Screwdriver : Screw
Top (Left) Top (Right)

Cable Guide
Figure 7-8. Stubby screwdriver
 If you haven’t a stubby screwdriver, remove the Front Housing
from the printer in the following steps to access the PG
Adjustment Cam by using a screwdriver.
: Screw : Screw
Figure 7-9. Preparation for the PG adjustment (1)
3. Disconnect the three cables from the connectors on the Relay Board to move the
Front Housing
PG Adjustment Cam
Cable Guide.
Left side Cable Guide
Cables
Relay Board

Confidential
4. Disconnect the FFCs and cables shown below from the connectors on the Main 5. Remove the Head FFC from the tabs on the Front Housing.
Board while lifting the front side of the Cable Guide.
6. Remove the Front Housing.
C H E C K When disconnecting the Panel FFC (CN42), make sure to unlock

Top (From rear)
P O IN T the connector lock beforehand.
Head FFC
 Head FFC (CN66, CN67) Front Housing
 Panel FFC (CN42)
 Speaker cable (CN3) (Only WF-C579R/C579Ra)
 Cover Open Sensor cable (CN609)
 USB Interface Board cable (CN33)
Top (Left) Cable Guide Tabs

CN609 Connector Lock
Main Board
CN3
CN42 CN66 CN67
Left side
Main Board
CN33

Confidential
 PG Adjustment 2. Set the PG adjustment cam positioned on the left and right at a home position
(The hole positioned at the central part of a scale plate is down).
When performing the PG adjustment, make sure of the following.
 Move the CR Unit by pulling the CR timing belt.
 Be careful not to damage the nozzle surface of the
Printhead with the thickness gauge.
 When make the Printhead touch the thickness gauge, be
careful not to let the Printhead run onto the gauge.
1. Loosen the two fixing screws of the PG adjustment cam positioned on the left
and right, and the four fixing screws of the CR guide frame. The hole positioned at the central
part of a scale plate is down.

Left PG Right PG
Adjustment cam Adjustment cam Figure 7-14. PG Adjustment (2)
3. Move the CR unit to the center of the printer.
4. Place the 1.50 mm thickness gauge (1.42 mm thickness gauge + 0.08 mm
Teflon tape) at position A shown in Figure 7-15.
B A
Figure 7-13. PG Adjustment (1)
Thickness gauge
Figure 7-15. Placement of Thickness Gauge

Confidential

C H E C K PG changes about 0.2 mm by moving the PG adjustment cam by
Teflon tape) at position A shown in Figure 7-15.
P O IN T one notch.
8. Move the CR unit to the thickness gauge and check that the nozzle surface of
the Printhead touches the thickness gauge.
• If touches the thickness gauge: Proceed to Step 9.
5. Move the CR unit to the thickness gauge and check that the nozzle surface of • If does not touch the thickness gauge: Perform the adjustment in the
the Printhead does not touch the thickness gauge. procedure below.
• If does not touch the thickness gauge: Proceed to Step 6. 8-1. Move the CR unit to the center part of the printer.
• If touches the thickness gauge: Perform the adjustment in the
procedure below. 8-2.Move the PG adjustment cam on the right side by one notch smaller.
5-1.Move the CR unit to the center part of the printer. 8-3. Move the CR unit to the thickness gauge again and check that the nozzle
surface of the print head touches the thickness gauge.
5-2.Move the PG adjustment cam on the right side by one notch larger.
• If does not touch the thickness gauge, repeat the work of Step 8-1 to
Step 8-3 until the nozzle surface touches the thickness gauge.
Teflon tape) at position B shown in Figure 7-15.
• Even for the Full digit side, follow the same procedure to adjust the PG
adjustment cam on the left side until the nozzle surface of the Printhead
does not touch the thickness gauge.
PG: Small
PG: Large
10. Tighten the four fixing screws of the CR guide frame.
11. Move the PG adjustment cam positioned on the left and right at the original
When you move the PG adjustment cam, make sure to position as shown below, and tighten the two fixing screws.
set its scale at the contacting position with the Frame.
Figure 7-16. Moving the PG Adjustment Cam Full digit side Left PG Right PG HP side
Adjustment cam Adjustment cam
5-3.Move the CR unit to the thickness gauge again and check that the nozzle
surface of the Printhead does not touch the thickness gauge.
• If it touches the thickness gauge, repeat the work of Step 5-1 to Step 5-3
until the nozzle surface does not touch the thickness gauge.
Teflon tape) at position B shown in Figure 7-15.
• Even for the Full digit side, follow the same procedure to adjust the PG
adjustment cam on the left side until the nozzle surface of the Printhead
does not touch the thickness gauge. Figure 7-17. Fixing the PG adjustment cam

Confidential
INK LEAK CHECK 2. Check the ink adherence state on the cloudy surface of the jig to determine
whether or not there is an ink leak.
An ink leak check is required when disconnecting the Ink Supply Tube from the
Printhead.  Judgment criterion of leak check
Check whether or not ink is adhered at a position of 2 mm or more from the
The judgment method of the ink leak check is described below. leading edge of the cloudy surface of the jig.
C H E C K The jig for the leak check (leak tester sheet front) need to be • Pass (no ink leak)
P O IN T attached during the part replacement work. For the procedure to When ink adherence is less than 2 mm from the leading edge of the jig
attach the jig, refer to " Printhead (p. 504)" and " Ink Supply Tube
• Fail (ink leak)
Assy (p. 490)".
When ink adherence is 2 mm or more from the leading edge of the jig
 Leak check procedure 2mm
1. Pull out the jig for the leak check. Jig
Leading edge
Cloudy surface
Jig (Leak tester sheet front)
NG OK
Figure 7-19. Judgment Criterion of Leak Check
C H E C K If the result is determined to be a fail (ink leak), refer to

P O IN T “Printhead” (p. 504), reassemble and perform the ink leak check
Figure 7-18. Leak Check Procedure (1)
again.

Confidential
7.2.4.2 Software Adjustments and Inspections B10 HEAD ID INPUT

Perform the Software Adjustments and Inspections after turning on the printer in “  Overview
Service support mode (p. 105)".
When replacing the Printhead, obtain the ID incorporating the correction
In this section, the procedure is explained using the display screens values for print head production variations from the head, and write it to
C H E C K
P O IN T of WF-C579R/C579Ra in the service support mode. the EEPROM on the main board.
The buttons used in the service support mode differ between WF-  Work Procedure
C579R/C579Ra and WF-C529R, so follow the instructions
displayed on the LCD screen. 1. Start the service support mode.
(Refer to “ 5.2 Service mode startup (p. 107)")
B10 Head ID Input
2. Select “B10 Head ID Input” refer to “ How to select an Adjustment item (p.
Update? 292)".
Yes: 　　　 [2] Instruction 3. Execute the Head ID Input following the instruction on the screen. (It is input
No: 　　 [8] automatically)
B10 Head ID Input B10 Head ID Input
Figure 7-20. Instruction Update? Finish Other Error

appears if failed.
HOW TO SELECT AN ADJUSTMENT ITEM Yes: 　　　 [2] Push[#]Button

No: 　　 [8]
Select and execute the corresponding adjustment item using either procedure below.
 Selecting by entering the program number
1. Select “B00 Input B No.-Adjustment” from the Adjustment menu. Figure 7-21. B10 Head ID Input Screen
2. Press the [#] button (WF-C579R/C579Ra) or the [OK] button (WF-C529R)
and software number key is displayed on LCD. C H E C K If Head ID Input cannot be performed, head failure occurs.
P O IN T Therefore, replace the Printhead with a new one.
3. Enter the numerical figures of the program number on “ 7.2.2 Adjustment
and Inspection List (p. 271)".
4. Press the [OK] button.
 Selecting from menu
From the Adjustment menu, select and open the target menu item in order
referring to the adjustment name column in “ 7.2.2 Adjustment and Inspection
List (p. 271)".

Confidential
B14 INITIALIZE-PW SENSOR B16 COUNTER RESET
 Overview  Overview
Reset the PW deterioration correction counter for the corresponding part. Reset the following counter values when corresponding parts are replaced.
 Work Procedure  PF/EJ Counter
1. Start the service support mode.  Rear ASF Counter
(Refer to “ 5.2 Service mode startup (p. 107)")  Feed Roller C1 Counter
2. Select “B14 Initialize-PW Sensor” refer to “ How to select an Adjustment item  Feed Roller C2 Counter
(p. 292)" and then the initializing of the PW deterioration correction counter is
 Feed Roller C3 Counter
executed.
 Work Procedure
1. Start the service support mode.
2. Select “B16 Counter Reset” refer to “ How to select an Adjustment item (p.
292)".
3. Select the counter you wish to initialize and reset it following the instruction on
the screen.
B16 Counter Reset

Please select the counter.
PF/EJ Counter **
Rear ASF Counter **
Feed Roller C1 Counter ** Current values appear
Feed Roller C2 Counter **
Feed Roller C3 Counter **
SELECT: [2][8]
Reset:[6] Back:[*]
Figure 7-22. B16 Counter Reset Screen (1)

Confidential
4. An initialization screen of the selected counter is displayed. Execute the B21 CR SCALE CHECK
initialization following the instruction on the screen.
 Overview
B16 Counter Reset
Check that there are no speed variations or periodic variations in the CR
operation due to damage or deterioration of the CR scale surface.
xxxxxxxxxxxxxx Selecting counter name  Work Procedure
Value : **
Current value appears
Reset Value ? 2. Select “B21 CR Scale Check” refer to “ How to select an Adjustment item (p.
292)".
Done : [2]
3. The check result is displayed on the panel. If there is an abnormality, “NG” is
Cancel: [8] displayed.
Figure 7-23. B16 Counter Reset Screen (2) B21 CR Scale Check
If NG is displayed,
　 Check: 　　 OK check, clean, or replace the
CR scale.
　 Push[#] Button
Figure 7-24. B21 CR Scale Check Screen

Confidential
B23 PE SENSOR CHECK B24 TEMP/HUM. SENSOR
For poor assembling detection when replacing the PE sensor part, pass Check that the temperature and humidity sensors are operating normally.
paper through and check that the chattering after detection of the paper
 Judgment
trailing edge by the PE sensor stops within the set time.
 0°C or higher to 60°C or lower
 Paper and feed tray Operating normal if environmental temp/hum. are displayed.
• Paper size: A4  0°C or lower
• Paper type: Plain paper Broken cable or connection failure of the temperature and humidity sensor
• Paper feed tray: Paper Cassette (C1) cables.
 Work Procedure  60°C or higher
The temperature and humidity sensor is broken or its cable has been short-
1. Load paper into the paper feed tray. circuited.
2. Start the service support mode.  Work Procedure
3. Select “B23 PE Sensor Check” refer to “ How to select an Adjustment item (p.
292)".
2. Select “B24 Temp/hum. Sensor” refer to “ How to select an Adjustment item (p.
4. For the display other than “OK”, reassemble the PE Lever Assy or PE Sensor.
292)".
B23 PE Sensor Check 3. Check the output values of the temperature and humidity sensors and confirm
whether or not they are normal.
Sensor Check: 　 OK If NG or --- is displayed,
Push[#]Button reassemble the PE Lever Assy or 4. Touch the temperature sensor and check that there is a change to the output value.
PE Sensor.
5. If no good, check the connection state of the temperature and humidity sensors. If
there is a problem, replace the temperature and humidity sensors with new one.
Temp/hum. Sensor
Figure 7-25. B23 PE Sensor Check Screen Temperature: ** 　 °C Temperature and humidity that
Humidity: 　　 ** 　 % Temperature and Humidity
sensor is detected are displayed.
Push[#]Button
Figure 7-26. B24 Temp/hum. Sensor Screen

Confidential
B26 NOZZLE NOISE CHECK B27 NOZZLE RANK CATEGORISE
Check that an abnormal signal that will cause a Nozzle diagnostic function Set the rank for setting the optimal judgment threshold value of each
problem is not occurring as a result of a part failure or poor assembling. nozzle to ensure Nozzle diagnostic function detection accuracy.
 Work Procedure  Work Procedure
1. Start the service support mode. 1. Start the service support mode.
(Refer to “ 5.2 Service mode startup (p. 107)") (Refer to “ 5.2 Service mode startup (p. 107)")
2. Select “B26 Nozzle Noise Check” refer to “ How to select an Adjustment item (p. 2. Select “B27 Nozzle Rank Categorise” refer to “ How to select an Adjustment
292)". item (p. 292)".
3. The check result is displayed on the panel. If NG, check whether the Printhead and 3. The check result is displayed on the panel. If “Error” is displayed, perform the
Head FFC are correctly reassembled. When they are damaged, replace them with head cleaning and confirm all nozzles discharge ink normally, and then execute
new ones. this adjustment again.
B26 Nozzle Noise Check B27 Nozzle Rank Categorise
NVT Noise: 　　 OK NVTRank: 　　 OK
Push[#]Button Push[#]Button
Figure 7-27. B26 Nozzle Noise Check Screen Figure 7-28. B27 Nozzle Rank Categorise Screen

Confidential
B28 NOZZLE DETECT CHECK B29 CHECK PATTERN (PLAIN)
Check that Nozzle diagnostic function is operating normally. Print check patterns to check that there is no problem with the final print
quality.
 Work Procedure
 Paper and feed tray
• Paper size: A4, Letter
• Paper type: Plain paper
2. Select “B28 Nozzle Detect Check” refer to “ How to select an Adjustment item • Paper feed tray: Paper Cassette (C1)
(p. 292)".
 Work Procedure
3. The check result is displayed on the panel. If “Error” is displayed, perform the 1. Start the service support mode.
head cleaning and confirm all nozzles discharge ink normally, and then execute (Refer to “ 5.2 Service mode startup (p. 107)")
this adjustment again.
2. Select “B29 Check Pattern (Plain)” refer to “ How to select an Adjustment item
B28 Nozzle Detect Check (p. 292)".
3. Load paper into the paper feed tray.
NVT Detect: 　　 OK
4. Confirm the current setting and print the adjustment pattern.
Push[#]Button When changing the print setting, select and change the item following the
instruction on the screen.
5. Check the check patterns.
B29 Check Pattern (Plain)

Figure 7-29. B28 Nozzle Detect Check OK Screen
Current Setting
Feed Tray: 　　　 Cassette 1
Paper Size: A4
Paper Type: 　　　 Plain
Select Item: [2][8]

Change Value: [4][6]
Print: [#] Button

Print Cancel: [*] Button
Figure 7-30. B29 Check Pattern (Plain) Screen

Confidential
B34 CHECK PATTERN (MATTE) B30 RGB PATTERN
Print check patterns to check that there is no problem with the final print Print patterns for checking the banding level of each color.
quality.
 Paper and feed tray • Paper size: A4, Letter
• Paper size: A4 • Paper type: Plain paper, Business plain paper
• Paper type: Photo matte paper • Paper feed tray: Paper Cassette (C1) to paper cassette (C3), Rear ASF
• Paper feed tray: Paper Cassette (C1)
 Work Procedure
2. Select “B34 Check Pattern (Matte)” refer to “ How to select an Adjustment item
(p. 292)".
When changing the print setting, select and change the item following the
5. Check the check patterns.
B34 Check Pattern (Matte)
Current Setting
Paper Size: A4
Paper Type: 　　　 Photo Mat Paper Figure 7-32. RGB pattern
Select Item: [2][8]  Judgment
Change Value: [4][6] Visually check the banding levels of the check pattern to confirm that there
is no problem.
Print: [#] Button
Figure 7-31. B34 Check Pattern (Matte) Screen

Confidential
 Work Procedure 5. Check the check patterns. If not good, refer to the following table and take the
1. Start the service support mode. corresponding measure.
No. Symptom Suspected cause Measure
2. Select “B30 RGB Pattern” refer to “ How to select an Adjustment item (p. 1 Multiple white bands are Nozzles missing Perform head cleaning.
292)". occurring.
3. Load paper into the paper feed tray. 2 The banding level differs LUT_POL Perform user adjustment
depending on the color. adjustment value is (LUT_POL adjustment).
4. Confirm the current setting and print the adjustment pattern. incorrect.
When changing the print setting, select and change the item following the 3 White banding or black banding Adjustment is Perform band feed
instruction on the screen. is occurring over the entire incorrect. adjustment again.
pattern.
B30 RGB Pattern Printing
4 White banding or black banding Adjustment is Perform band feed
is occurring at the top and middle incorrect. adjustment again.
Current Setting
of the pattern.
5 White banding or black banding Adjustment is Perform band feed
Paper Size: A4
is occurring at the bottom edge. incorrect. adjustment again.
Select Item: [2][8]

Print: [#] Button

Figure 7-33. B30 RGB Pattern Screen

Confidential
B32 NOZZLE CHECK PATTERN  Judgment

Visually check the check patterns to confirm that there are no nozzles
 Overview missing.
Print patterns for checking for missing nozzles.
 Work Procedure
 Paper and feed tray 1. Start the service support mode.
• Paper size: A4, Letter (Refer to “ 5.2 Service mode startup (p. 107)")
2. Select “B32 Nozzle Check Pattern” refer to “ How to select an Adjustment item
• Paper feed tray: Paper Cassette (C1) to paper cassette (C3), Rear ASF
(p. 292)".
B32 Nozzle Check Pattern
Current Setting
Paper Size: A4
Select Item: [2][8]

　
Print: [#] Button
Figure 7-35. B32 Nozzle Check Pattern Screen

5. Check the check pattern. If there are nozzles missing, perform cleaning.
Figure 7-34. Nozzle Check pattern

Confidential
MOTOR DISPERSION CORRECT 4. The results are displayed after correction ends. If there is any NG item, check the
corresponding motor connection. If there is a problem, replace it with a new one.
 Overview
Measure product variations to set the appropriate correction values. Also, B40 CR Motor Correct
make a pass/fail judgment by calculating whether or not the operation load
CR Measure: 　　　 OK
is within the expected range from the motor current value.
Cycle: 　　　　　　 OK
 Target adjustments APG Offset: 　　　 OK
 B40 CR Motor Correct
　 Push[#]Button
 B41 PF Motor Correct
 B42 ASF Motor Correct C1
 B66 ASF/LIFT Motor Correct C2 Figure 7-36. B40 CR Motor Correct OK Screen
 B67 ASF/LIFT Motor Correct C3
 B69 IS Motor Correct
C H E C K ASF Motor Correct and ASF/LIFT Motor Correct need to be

P O IN T performed in the state with the paper cassette pulled out, so pull out
the paper cassette before performing correction.
 Work Procedure
2. Select “Mech Adjust:MENU” refer to “ How to select an Adjustment item (p.
292)".
3. On the displayed screen, select the item of the Motor dispersion correct menu
corresponding to the replaced part, and execute it.

Confidential
B43 HEAD ANGULAR ADJ. MECH  Judgment
 Overview Make adjustments so that the spacing between the pattern lines when the
Mechanically correct the print offset due to part product variations and tilting at adjustment value is “0” becomes equal.
the time of Printhead attachment.  Preparation
 Paper and feed tray Head angular mecha adjustment must be performed when the ADF/SCN Unit has
 Paper size: A4 been opened.
 Paper type: Photo matte paper Therefore, in order to set the ADF/SCN Open Sensor to the closed state, secure it
 Paper feed tray: Rear ASF with tape.
ADF/SCN Open Sensor
Tape
Figure 7-38. Preparation
Figure 7-37. B43 Head angular adj. mech pattern

Confidential
 Procedure Flowchart  Method of the Head Angular Adjustment

ヘッドthe
Start 傾き調整開始
adjustment (Refer to “ 5.2 Service mode startup (p. 107)")
2. Select “B43 Head Angular Adj. Mech” refer to “ How to select an Adjustment
Start the service support
item (p. 292)".
Print the adjustment
mode. pattern.
Select “B43 Head Angular
Adj. Mech” and print the Confirm the adjustment
Yes
adjustment pattern. pattern, Line space is the instruction on the screen.
most equal when the
adjustment value is “0”?
Check the adjustment Adjustment B43 Head Angular Adj.Mech
pattern, and forecast the No is finished.
adjustment value when the
line space becomes equal. Current Setting
Confirm the misalignment
direction. Feed Tray: 　　　 RASF
Paper Size: A4
Line space is the most Press the execute button, Paper Type: 　　　 Photo Matte Paper
Yes the CR unit moves to the
equal when the
adjustment value is “0”? center position.
Select Item: [2][8]
No Adjustment Loosen the Printhead
is finished.
fixing screws by 90°. 　
Press the execute button, Print: [#] Button
the CR unit moves to the Print Cancel: [*] Button
center position. Move the Adjustment dial
for 1 step to the
misalignment direction. Figure 7-40. B43 Head angular adj. mech Screen (1)
Remove the Head Upper 5. Check the adjustment pattern and determine the adjustment value based on the
Cover
Tighten the screws.
judgment procedure.
Loosen the Printhead

fixing screws by 90°.
Rotate the adjustment dial

by forecast value.
Tighten the screws.
Figure 7-39. B43 Head angular adj. mech procedure flowchart

Confidential
6. After printing the adjustment pattern, a confirmation screen shown below appears.
C H E C K The following two types of patterns are printed in the
If the adjustment is needed, follow the instructions on the screen. The CR unit
P O IN T adjustment pattern.
moves to the maintenance position after the panel operation is complete.
 Coarse adjustment pattern
The adjusted value is printed by five steps If the tape of the ADF/SCN Open Sensor comes off during the
(-10, -5, 0, +5, +10). adjustment, the CR Unit moves to the home position without
 Detail adjustment pattern the cover, so it is very dangerous. Therefore, make sure that the
The adjusted value is printed by three steps ADF/SCN Open Sensor is securely fixed in advance.
(-5, -3, 0, +3, +5).
B43 Head Angular Adj.Mech

-10
Execute Head Adjustment?
-5
　 Execute: 　　　 [2]
　 Cancel: 　　 [8]
+5
Figure 7-43. B43 Head angular adj. mech Screen (2)
+10
Figure 7-41. B43 Head angular adj. mech pattern (Coarse adjustment pattern)
-5 -3 0 +3 +5
Figure 7-42. B43 Head angular adj. mech pattern (Detail adjustment pattern)

Confidential
7. Remove the two screws securing the Head Upper Cover, and remove it. 10. Check that the lines of the adjustment pattern of “0” are the most equal.
Turn the three Printhead fixing screws counterclockwise by 90 degrees to loosen
 When equal:
them.Turn the adjustment dial based on the adjustment value confirmed in Step 5.
The adjustment is completed.
 When not equal:
Check the misalignment direction (“+”direction/“-” direction). Then go to
Step 11.
Direction Direction
of “+” of “-” B43 Head Angular Adj.Mech
Head Adjustment Finish?
　 Finish: 　　　 [2]
　 Readjustment: 　　 [8]
Head Angular
Adjustment dial
: Screw
Figure 7-44. B43 Head angular adj. mech Figure 7-46. B43 Head angular adj. mech Screen (4)
8. Tighten the three Printhead fixing screws. 11. Perform Step 6 to Step 7 and move the adjustment dial 1 notch in the direction
confirmed in Step 10.
9. A confirmation screen shown below appears. Print the adjustment pattern again
following the instruction on the screen. 12. Tighten the screws and print the adjustment pattern again to check whether the
spacing between the pattern lines when the adjustment value is “0” is the evenest
B43 Head Angular Adj.Mech among the patterns. If not, repeat steps Step 10 to Step 12 until the spacing of the
pattern “0” becomes the evenest.
End of Head Adjustment?
Then, Execute End Operation
& Print.
　 Push [#] Button
Figure 7-45. B43 Head angular adj. mech Screen (3)

Confidential
 After performing the Head Angular Adj. Mech, make sure to B45 PTS ACC./DEC. ADJUST
confirm the operation of the cap of the ink system as follows.
If the cap does not return to original position, make sure to  Overview
replace the Inksystem Assy. because it can not be performed Correct the impact offset caused by a difference in the speed of the low-speed part
accurately capping, and printing failure occurs. and acceleration/deceleration part of the CR.
1. Push the Cap to rear side as shown below, and confirm to  Paper and feed tray
return to original position.
 Paper size: A4, Letter
 Paper type: Plain paper
 Paper feed tray: Paper cassette (C1) to paper cassette (C3)
Cap
Figure 7-47. Operation check of the Cap (1)

2. Push the rear of the cap to the home position, and confirm to
return to original position.
Cap
Figure 7-48. Operation check of the Cap (2)

Figure 7-49. B45 PTS Acc./Dec. Adjust pattern

Confidential
 Judgment 6. Enter the adjustment value following the instruction on the screen.
Select the pattern without any gap or overlapping in the center, left and right
patterns. B45 PTS Acc./Dec.Adjust
 Adjustment procedure
Adjust Setting 　　　　　 Area: -128 to 127
(Refer to “ 5.2 Service mode startup (p. 107)") 　 #1: ---
2. Select “B45 PTS Acc./Dec. Adjust” refer to “ How to select an Adjustment item #2: ---
(p. 292)".
Select: 　　 [2][8] 　　　　 Input: 　　 [6]
4. Confirm the current setting and print the adjustment pattern. 　 Cancel: 　 [*] 　　　　　 Finish: 　　 [#]
instruction on the screen. Figure 7-51. B45 PTS Acc./Dec. Adjust Screen (2)
7. Perform the completion operation to save the adjustment value to the printer.
B45 PTS Acc./Dec.Adjust
C H E C K If there is no pattern satisfying the judgment method among the

Current Setting
P O IN T adjustment patterns, there is a pattern satisfying the judgment
Feed Tray: 　　　 C1 method outside the scope of pattern printing. Therefore, select the
Paper Size: A4 best pattern and enter the adjustment value, following which again
Paper Type: 　　　 Plain print the adjustment pattern and determine the adjustment value.
Select Item: [2][8]

　
Print: [#] Button
Figure 7-50. B45 PTS Acc./Dec. Adjust Screen (1)

5. Check the adjustment pattern and determine the adjustment value based on the
judgment procedure.

Confidential
B44 HEAD ANGULAR ADJ. SOFT  Judgment
 Overview From among the printed patterns, select the pattern where the above and below
Use software to correct the vertical or horizontal tilting that occurs at the time of lines are the straightest.
print attachment.  Adjustment procedure
 Paper size: A4, Letter (Refer to “ 5.2 Service mode startup (p. 107)")
 Paper type: Plain Paper 2. Select “B44 Head Angular Adj. Soft” refer to “ How to select an Adjustment
item (p. 292)".
B44 Head Angular Adj. Soft
Current Setting
Feed Tray: 　　　 Cassette1
Paper Size: A4
Select Item: [2][8]

　
Print: [#] Button
Figure 7-53. B44 Head Angular Adj. Soft Screen (1)

judgment procedure.
Figure 7-52. B44 Head Angular Adj. Soft pattern

Confidential
6. Enter the adjustment value. B46 BI-D ADJUST
B44 Head Angular Adj. Soft  Overview

Use software to correct the print timing for aligning the print position between the
outward path and return path when bidirectional printing.
　 #1: ---  Paper size: A4, Letter
#2: ---
Select: 　　 [2][8] 　　　　 Input: 　　 [6]  Adjustment pattern
　 Cancel: 　 [*] 　　　　　 Finish: 　　 [#]
Figure 7-54. B44 Head Angular Adj. Soft Screen (2)


method outside the scope of pattern printing. Therefore, select the
best pattern and enter the adjustment value, following which again
print the adjustment pattern and determine the adjustment value.
Figure 7-55. B46 Bi-D Adjust pattern

Confidential
 Judgment 6. Enter the adjustment value.
Select the pattern for which there is no gap and overlapping of the left and right
patterns. B46 Bi-D Adjust
2. Select “B46 Bi-D Adjust” refer to “ How to select an Adjustment item (p. 292)". #2: ---

4. Confirm the current setting and print the adjustment pattern. Select: 　　 [2][8] 　　　　 Input: 　　 [6]
When changing the print setting, select and change the item following the 　 Cancel: 　 [*] 　　　　　 Finish: 　　 [#]
Figure 7-57. B46 Bi-D Adjust Screen (2)
B46 Bi-D Adjust
Current Setting
Feed Tray: 　　　 Cassette1 adjustment patterns, there is a pattern satisfying the judgment
P O IN T
Paper Size: A4 method outside the scope of pattern printing. Therefore, select the
Paper Type: 　　　 Plain best pattern and enter the adjustment value, following which again
Select Item: [2][8]
　
Print: [#] Button
Figure 7-56. B46 Bi-D Adjust Screen (1)

judgment procedure.

Confidential
B48 BI-D BAND ADJUST  Judgment
 Overview From among the printed patterns, select the pattern where the above and below
Use software to correct the print timing for aligning the print position between the lines are the straightest.
outward path and return path when bidirectional printing in band feed mode.  Adjustment procedure
 Paper size: A4, Letter (Refer to “ 5.2 Service mode startup (p. 107)")
 Paper type: Plain paper 2. Select “B48 Bi-D Band Adjust” refer to “ How to select an Adjustment item (p.
292)".
B48 Bi-D Band Adjust
Current Setting
Paper Size: A4
Select Item: [2][8]

　
Print: [#] Button
Figure 7-59. B48 Bi-D Band Adjust Screen (1)

judgment procedure.
Figure 7-58. B48 Bi-D Band Adjust pattern

Confidential
6. Enter the adjustment value. B49 PW SENSOR CORRECT/B50 PRINT START POS. (ASF)/B51 PRINT
START POS. (REAR ASF)
B48 Bi-D Band Adjust
 Overview
Adjust Setting 　　　　　 Area: -128 to 127  PW Sensor Correct

Use software to correct the offset due to sensor characteristics and attachment
variations.
　 #1: ---
#2: ---  Print Start Pos. (ASF/Rear ASF)
Use software to correct the print timing so that the main scanning direction
print start position becomes the target value.
Select: 　　 [2][8] 　　　　 Input: 　　 [6]  Paper and feed tray

　 Cancel: 　 [*] 　　　　　 Finish: 　　 [#]  PW Sensor Correct
Figure 7-60. B48 Bi-D Band Adjust Screen (2) • Paper size: A4
7. Perform the completion operation to save the adjustment value to the printer. • Paper type: Photo matte paper
• Paper feed tray: Rear ASF
C H E C K If there is no pattern satisfying the judgment method among the  Print Start Pos. (ASF)
method outside the scope of pattern printing. Therefore, select the • Paper size: A4, Letter
best pattern and enter the adjustment value, following which again • Paper type: Plain paper
print the adjustment pattern and determine the adjustment value. • Paper feed tray: Paper Cassette (C1)
 Print Start Pos. (Rear ASF)
• Paper feed tray: Rear ASF

Confidential
 Adjustment pattern  Judgment

 PW Sensor Correct
From the stepped patterns printed on the bottom, top, left, and right edges of
the paper, select the numerical value that is 5 mm from the edge of the paper
for each of them.
 Print Start Pos.
From the stepped patterns printed on the left edge of the paper, select the
numerical value 5 mm away from the edge of the paper.
2. Select “B49 PW Sensor Correct” or “B50 Print Start Pos. (ASF)” or “B51
Print Start Pos. (Rear ASF)” refer to “ How to select an Adjustment item (p.
292)".
B50 Print Start Pos. (ASF)
Current Setting
Paper Size: A4
Figure 7-61. B49 PW Sensor Correct pattern Paper Type: 　　　 Plain
Select Item: [2][8]

　
Print: [#] Button
Figure 7-62. B50 Print Start Pos. (ASF) Screen (1)

judgment procedure.

Confidential
6. Enter the adjustment value. B54 FEED ADJUST
B50 Print Start Pos. (ASF)

 Overview
Use software to correct the variation in the actual feed amount of paper caused by
production variations of the PF/EJ rollers.
　 #1: ---  Paper size: A4
 Paper type: Photo matte paper
 Paper feed tray: Rear ASF
Select: 　　 [2][8] 　　　　 Input: 　　 [6]  Adjustment pattern
　 Cancel: 　 [*] 　　　　　 Finish: 　　 [#]
Figure 7-63. B50 Print Start Pos. (ASF) Screen (2)


Figure 7-64. B54 Feed Adjust pattern

Confidential
 Judgment B55 BAND FEED ADJUST

Select the numerical value of the pattern that has no overlapping of the upper and  Overview
lower blocks and the least white bands. Correct the paper feed error that occurs due to mechanical variations or media feed
 Adjustment procedure characteristics in band feed mode.
1. Start the service support mode.  Paper and feed tray
(Refer to “ 5.2 Service mode startup (p. 107)")  Paper size: A4, Letter
2. Select “B54 Feed Adjust” refer to “ How to select an Adjustment item (p. 292)".  Paper type: Plain paper, Business plain paper
3. Load paper into the paper feed tray.  Paper feed tray: Paper cassette (C1) to paper cassette (C3), Rear ASF
4. Confirm the current setting and print the adjustment pattern.  Adjustment pattern
judgment procedure.
6. Enter the adjustment value.
B54 Feed Adjust
　 #1: ---
#2: ---
Select: 　　 [2][8] 　　　　 Input: 　　 [6]

　 Cancel: 　 [*] 　　　　　 Finish: 　　 [#]
Figure 7-65. B54 Feed Adjust Screen


Figure 7-66. B55 Band Feed Adjust pattern

Confidential
 Judgment 6. Enter the adjustment value.
Select the numerical value of the pattern that has no overlapping of the upper and
lower blocks and the least white bands. B55 Band Feed Adjust
2. Select “B55 Band Feed Adjust” refer to “ How to select an Adjustment item (p. #2: ---
292)".
Select: 　　 [2][8] 　　　　 Input: 　　 [6]
4. Confirm the current setting and print the adjustment pattern. 　 Cancel: 　 [*] 　　　　　 Finish: 　　 [#]
instruction on the screen. Figure 7-68. B55 Band Feed Adjust Screen (2)
B55 Band Feed Adjust

Current Setting
Feed Tray: 　　　 Cassette1 method outside the scope of pattern printing. Therefore, select the
Paper Size: A4 best pattern and enter the adjustment value, following which again
Paper Type: 　　　 Plain print the adjustment pattern and determine the adjustment value.
Select Item: [2][8]

　
Print: [#] Button
Figure 7-67. B55 Band Feed Adjust Screen (1)

judgment procedure.

Confidential
B52 PE ADJUST (ASF)/B53 PE ADJUST (REAR ASF) 4. Confirm the current setting and print the adjustment pattern.
 Overview instruction on the screen.
Use software to correct the paper detection position offset caused by variations in
the PE sensor attachment position and Printhead position. B52 PE Adjust (ASF)
 Paper and feed tray Current Setting

 PE Adjust (ASF) Feed Tray: 　　　 Cassette1
Paper Size: A4
• Paper type: Plain paper Paper Type: 　　　 Plain
• Paper feed tray: Paper Cassette (C1)
Select Item: [2][8]
 PE Adjust (Rear ASF) Change Value: [4][6]
• Paper size: A4, Letter 　
• Paper type: Plain paper Print: [#] Button
• Paper feed tray: Rear ASF Print Cancel: [*] Button
 Adjustment procedure Figure 7-69. B52 PE Adjust (ASF) Screen

5. The adjustment results are automatically saved in the printer.
2. Select “B52 PE Adjust (ASF)” or “B53 PE Adjust (Rear ASF)” refer to “ How
to select an Adjustment item (p. 292)".

Confidential
B61 PTS Acc./Dec. Adjust (S) 4. Confirm the current setting and print the adjustment pattern.
Correct the impact offset caused by a difference in the speed of the low-speed part B61 PTS Acc./Dec. Adjust (S)
and acceleration/deceleration part of the CR. Perform adjustment in only a specific
adjustment area and perform automatic calculation for other than that area to Current Setting
determine the correction value. Feed Tray: 　　　 Cassette1
Paper Size: A4
 Paper type: Plain paper Select Item: [2][8]
　
 Adjustment pattern Print: [#] Button
Same as B45 PTS Acc./Dec. Adjust (p. 306) Print Cancel: [*] Button
 Judgment Figure 7-70. B61 PTS Acc./Dec. Adjust (S) Screen (1)
Select the pattern for which there is no gap and overlapping of the left and right 5. Check the adjustment pattern and determine the adjustment value based on the
patterns. judgment procedure, and enter the adjustment value.
B61 PTS Acc./Dec. Adjust (S)
(Refer to “ 5.2 Service mode startup (p. 107)") Adjust Setting 　　　　　 Area: -128 to 127
2. Select “B61 PTS Acc./Dec. Adjust (S)” refer to “ How to select an Adjustment
item (p. 292)". 　 #1: ---
#2: ---
Select: 　　 [2][8] 　　　　 Input: 　　 [6]

　 Cancel: 　 [*] 　　　　　 Finish: 　　 [#]
Figure 7-71. B61 PTS Acc./Dec. Adjust (S) Screen (2)



Confidential
B62 BI-D ADJUST (S) 4. Confirm the current setting and print the adjustment pattern.
outward path and return path when bidirectional printing. Perform adjustment in B62 Bi-D Adjust (S)
only a specific adjustment area and perform automatic calculation for other than
that area to determine the correction value. Current Setting
Paper Size: A4
 Paper size: A4, Letter Paper Type: 　　　 Plain
Select Item: [2][8]
 Paper feed tray: Paper cassette (C1) to paper cassette (C3) Change Value: [4][6]
 Adjustment pattern 　
Same as B46 Bi-D Adjust (p. 309) Print: [#] Button
 Judgment
Select the pattern for which there is no gap and overlapping of the left and right Figure 7-72. B62 Bi-D Adjust (S) Screen (1)
patterns. 5. Check the adjustment pattern and determine the adjustment value based on the
judgment procedure.
2. Select “B62 Bi-D Adjust (S)” refer to “ How to select an Adjustment item (p.
292)".

Confidential
6. Enter the adjustment value. B63 BI-D BAND ADJUST (S)
B62 Bi-D Adjust (S)

 Overview
outward path and return path when bidirectional printing in band feed mode.
Adjust Setting 　　　　　 Area: -128 to 127 Perform adjustment in only a specific adjustment area and perform automatic
calculation for other than that area to determine the correction value.
　 #1: ---
#2: ---
Select: 　　 [2][8] 　　　　 Input: 　　 [6]
　 Cancel: 　 [*] 　　　　　 Finish: 　　 [#]
Figure 7-73. B62 Bi-D Adjust (S) Screen (2) Same as B48 Bi-D Band Adjust (p. 311)
7. Perform the completion operation to save the adjustment value to the printer.  Judgment
From among the printed patterns, select the pattern where the above and below
C H E C K If there is no pattern satisfying the judgment method among the lines are the straightest.
method outside the scope of pattern printing. Therefore, select the  Adjustment procedure
best pattern and enter the adjustment value, following which again 1. Start the service support mode.
print the adjustment pattern and determine the adjustment value. (Refer to “ 5.2 Service mode startup (p. 107)")
2. Select “B63 Bi-D Band Adjust (S)” refer to “ How to select an Adjustment item
(p. 292)".

Confidential

When changing the print setting, select and change the item following the adjustment patterns, there is a pattern satisfying the judgment
P O IN T
instruction on the screen. method outside the scope of pattern printing. Therefore, select the
B63 Bi-D Band Adjust (S)
Current Setting
Paper Size: A4
Select Item: [2][8]

　
Print: [#] Button
Figure 7-74. B63 Bi-D Band Adjust (S) Screen (1)

judgment procedure.
6. Enter the adjustment value.
B63 Bi-D Band Adjust (S)
　 #1: ---
#2: ---
Select: 　　 [2][8] 　　　　 Input: 　　 [6]

　 Cancel: 　 [*] 　　　　　 Finish: 　　 [#]
Figure 7-75. B63 Bi-D Band Adjust (S) Screen (2)


Confidential
B64 BAND FEED ADJUST (S) 4. Confirm the current setting and print the adjustment pattern.
Correct the paper feed error that occurs due to mechanical variations or media feed
characteristics in band feed mode. Perform adjustment in only a specific B64 Band Feed Adjust (S)
adjustment area and perform automatic calculation for other than that area to Current Setting
determine the correction value. Feed Tray: 　　　 Cassette1
Paper Size: A4
 Paper type: Plain paper, Business plain paper Select Item: [2][8]
 Paper feed tray: Paper cassette (C1) to paper cassette (C3), Rear ASF
　
 Adjustment pattern Print: [#] Button
Same as B55 Band Feed Adjust (p. 315) Print Cancel: [*] Button
 Judgment Figure 7-76. B64 Band Feed Adjust (S) Screen (1)
Select the numerical value of the pattern that has no overlapping of the upper and 5. Check the adjustment pattern and determine the adjustment value based on the
lower blocks and the least white bands. judgment procedure.
 Adjustment procedure 6. Enter the adjustment value.

1. Start the service support mode. B64 Band Feed Adjust (S)
2. Select “B64 Band Feed Adjust (S)” refer to “ How to select an Adjustment item Adjust Setting 　　　　　 Area: -128 to 127
(p. 292)".
　 #1: ---
Select: 　　 [2][8] 　　　　 Input: 　　 [6]

　 Cancel: 　 [*] 　　　　　 Finish: 　　 [#]
Figure 7-77. B64 Band Feed Adjust (S) Screen (2)



Confidential
B90 PRINTHEAD (PREPARATION BEFORE REPLACEMENT) 4. The Printhead replacement judgment cleaning is performed in accordance with the
nozzles missing state. Print the nozzle check pattern after replacement judgment
 Overview cleaning.
Judge whether or not the Printhead needs to be replaced when missing nozzles,
unstable discharge, or misalignment discharge occurs. If replacement is required, 5. Check the nozzle check pattern to confirm the nozzles missing state and then make
perform the preparation required for replacement. a judgment of whether to replace the Printhead.
 If the nozzles missing state is not resolved (state in which Printhead
This operation is necessary to performing the “B80 Printhead Seq” replacement is required):
correctly. Press the [2] button and go to Step 6.
Make sure to perform this operation before the Printhead
replacement.  When the nozzles missing state is resolved
(state in which recovery is possible by cleaning):
 Procedure Press the [8] button to end the preparation before Printhead replacement.

B90 Print Head
2. Select “B90 Printhead” from the Before Repair Operation menu. Need heads change?
3. Select whether or not to perform the Printhead replacement judgment (Printhead
replacement judgment cleaning). Yes: [2]
No: [8]
 When you wish to perform Printhead replacement immediately
(wish to not perform the Printhead replacement judgment):
Press the [2] button and go to Step 6.
 When you wish to not perform Printhead replacement immediately
(wish to perform the Printhead replacement judgment): Figure 7-79. B90 Printhead Screen (2)
Press the [8] button and go to Step 4. 6. Check that the following screen is displayed and then press the power button to
turn off the power. (The power turns off in the CR unlock state.)
B90 Printhead
B90 Print Head
Do you replace
the Printhead immediately Finish
without performing Please Power off
head repair judgment?
Push [Power]Button
Yes: [2]Button
No: [8]Button
Figure 7-78. B90 Printhead Screen (1) Figure 7-80. B90 Printhead Screen (3)

Confidential
B91 INK SUPPLY UNIT (PREPARATION BEFORE REPLACEMENT) B92 INK SYSTEM ASSY (PREPARATION BEFORE REPLACEMENT)
Perform the operation required before replacing the Ink Supply Unit. Perform the operation required before replacing the Inksystem Assy.
 Procedure  Procedure
2. Select “B91 Ink Supply Unit” from the Before Repair Operation menu. 2. Select “B92 Ink System Assy” from the Before Repair Operation menu.
3. Check that the following screen is displayed and then press the power button to 3. Discharge the ink in the exhaust pump following the instruction on the screen.
turn off the power. (Turn off the power in the CR unlock state.)
B92 Ink System Assy
B91 Ink Supply Unit
Discharge ink from Pump
Finish
Please Power off Push [#] Button
Push [Power] Button
Figure 7-82. B92 Ink System Assy Screen (1)

4. Check that the following screen is displayed and then press the power button to
turn off the power.
Figure 7-81. B91 Ink Supply Unit Screen
B92 Ink System Assy
Finish
Please Power off.
Push [Power]
Figure 7-83. B92 Ink System Assy Screen (2)

Confidential
B80 PRINT HEAD SEQ (ADJUSTMENT AFTER REPLACEMENT) 4. After ink filling completes, adjustment is executed in the following order.
1. Head angular Adj. Mech (p. 302)
 Overview
2. Head angular Adj. Soft (p. 308)
Sequentially display the adjustments required after Printhead replacement.
3. PTS Acc./Dec. Adjust (S) (p. 318)
“Preparation Before Replacement (B90 Printhead)” must be 4. Bi-D Adjust (S) (p. 319)
performed before Printhead replacement because this adjustment is 5. Bi-D Band Adjust (S) (p. 320)
designed accordingly. Make sure to perform “Adjustment After
Replacement (B80 Print head seq)” in the state that “Before Repair 6. Band Feed Adjust (S) (p. 322)
Operation (B90 Printhead)” is performed before replacing the
5. Perform check pattern printing (p. 300), check that there is no problem.
Printhead.
 Procedure
2. Select “B80 Head Replace Seq” refer to “ How to select an Adjustment item (p.
292)".
3. The inspections and ink filling are executed in the following sequence.
1. Head ID Input (p. 292)
2. CR Scale Check (p. 294)
3. Nozzle Noise Check (p. 296)
4. Ink Filling (p. 328)
5. Nozzle Check (p. 300)
 The printer selects the Ink Fill Level (Head Ink Fill or
Initial Fill) automatically by state of the “Before Repair
Operation (B90 Printhead)”.
 The case of not perform the “Before Repair Operation
(B90 Printhead)”, Ink fill necessity confirmation menu is
displayed.

Confidential
B81 INK SUPPLY UNIT SEQ (ADJUSTMENT AFTER REPLACEMENT) B82 INK SYSTEM ASSY SEQ (ADJUSTMENT AFTER REPLACEMENT)
Sequentially display the adjustments required after Ink Supply Unit replacement. Sequentially display the adjustments required after Inksystem Assy replacement.
“Preparation Before Replacement (B91 Ink Supply Unit)” must be “Preparation Before Replacement (B92 Ink System Assy)” must be
performed before Ink Supply Unit replacement because this performed before Inksystem Assy replacement because this
adjustment is designed accordingly. Make sure to perform adjustment is designed accordingly. Make sure to perform
“Adjustment After Replacement (B81 Ink Supply Unit)” in the state “Adjustment After Replacement (B82 Ink System Assy Seq)” in the
that “Preparation Before Replacement (B91 Ink Supply Unit)” is state that “Preparation Before Replacement (B92 Ink System
performed before replacing the Ink Supply Unit. Assy)” is performed before replacing the Inksystem Assy.
2. Select “B81 Ink Supply Unit Seq” refer to “ How to select an Adjustment item 2. Select “B82 Ink System Assy Seq” refer to “ How to select an Adjustment item
(p. 292)". (p. 292)".
3. The inspections and ink filling are executed in the following sequence. 3. The inspections and ink filling are executed in the following sequence.
1. Ink Leak Sensor (p. 219) 1. IS Motor Correct (p. 301)
2. Ink Fill (Initial Fill) (p. 328) 2. Ink Fill (Initial Fill) (p. 328)

Confidential
B83 REAR ASF UNIT SEQ (ADJUSTMENT AFTER REPLACEMENT) B84 MAIN BOARD SEQ (ADJUSTMENT AFTER REPLACEMENT)
Sequentially display the adjustments required after Rear ASF Assy replacement. Sequentially display the adjustments required after Main Board Assy replacement.
2. Select “B83 Rear ASF Unit Seq” refer to “ How to select an Adjustment item (p. 2. Select “B84 Main Board Seq” refer to “ How to select an Adjustment item (p.
292)". 292)".
3. The following adjustments are performed. 3. The following inspections are performed.
1. Counter Reset (Rear ASF Counter) (p. 293) 1. Ink Leak Sensor (p. 219)
2. Print Start Pos. (Rear ASF) (p. 312) 2. Nozzle Noise Check (p. 296)

Confidential
7.2.4.3 Maintenance C01 HEAD INK FILL/C02 INITIAL FILL (INK FILL)
The maintenance should be performed after starting the printer in “ 5.2 Service mode  Overview
startup (p. 107)".
 Head Ink Fill
HOW TO SELECT ITEMS FROM THE MAINTENANCE MENU Fill the Printhead and ink channels with ink to enable printing. (Perform this
after Printhead replacement.)
Select and execute the corresponding maintenance item using either procedure below.  Initial Fill
 Selecting by entering the program number Fill the Printhead and ink channels with ink to enable printing. (Perform this
after replacement of the ink supply path parts between the Ink Supply Unit
1. Select “C00 Input C No.-Maintenance” from the Maintenance menu. and Printhead.)
2. Press the [#] button or the [OK] button (WF-C529R) and software number
key is displayed on LCD.  Procedure
3. Enter the numerical figures of the program number on “ 7.2.2 Adjustment 1. Start the service support mode.
and Inspection List (p. 271)". (Refer to “ 5.2 Service mode startup (p. 107)")
4. Press the [OK] button.
2. Select “C01 Head Ink Fill” or “C02 Initial Fill” refer to “ How to select items
 Selecting from menu from the maintenance menu (p. 328)".
From the maintenance menu, refer to the adjustment name line in “ 7.2.2
Adjustment and Inspection List (p. 271)", and select the menu items in order to
open the target adjustment screen.

Confidential
C03 CL1/C04 CL2/C05 CL3/C06 STRONG CL/C07 (HEAD CLEANING) C08 HEAD INK DISCHARGE/C09 SUPPLY INK DISCHARGE (INK DISCHARGE)
Perform this to recover from missing dots or print defects of the Printhead.
 Head Ink Discharge
 Procedure Discharge ink to release the pressure applied to the ink inside the supply path
from the head for the purpose of preventing ink leaks after Printhead
1. Start the service support mode. replacement. (However, this is not required after normal Printhead
(Refer to “ 5.2 Service mode startup (p. 107)") replacement.)
2. Select “C03 CL1”, “C04 CL2”, “C05 CL3”, “C06 Strong CL” or “C06  Supply Ink Discharge
Refresh CL” refer to “ How to select items from the maintenance menu (p. Discharge the ink inside the supply path from the ink supply unit to the
328)". Printhead and replace it with air.
 Procedure
2. Select “C08 Head Ink Discharge” or “C09 Supply Ink Discharge” refer to “
How to select items from the maintenance menu (p. 328)".

Confidential
C10 SUCTION PUMP INK DISCHARGE (INK DISCHARGE) C11 HEAD THERMISTOR CHECK
Discharge the waste ink remaining in the suction pump (Inksystem Assy). Detects and displays the head thermistor’s temperature. Also, displays the
guaranteed operating temperature range for NVT.
 Procedure
 Procedure
(Refer to “ 5.2 Service mode startup (p. 107)") 1. Start the service support mode.
2. Select “C10 Suction Pump Ink Discharge” refer to “ How to select items from
the maintenance menu (p. 328)". 2. Select “C11 Head Thermistor Check” refer to “ How to select items from the
maintenance menu (p. 328)".
3. Check whether the displayed head thermistor temperature is within the specified
range.
C11 Head Thermistor Check
　 Temperature: 　　　　 ** C
　　
　　 OK Range: 5C- 40C Detected head thermistor’s
temperature appears here.
Push [#]Button
Figure 7-84. C11 Head Thermistor Check Screen

Confidential
C20 STATUS SHEET PRINT
 Overview
Print the Status Sheet. Refer to “ 9.3 Status Sheet Information (p. 703)" for details.
 Paper feed tray: Paper cassette (C1) to paper cassette (C3), Rear ASF
 Procedure
2. Select “C20 Status Sheet Print” refer to “ How to select items from the
maintenance menu (p. 328) ".
C20 Status Sheet Print
Current Setting
Paper Size: A4
Duplex print: 　　　 OFF
Select Item: [2][8]

　
Print: [#] Button
Figure 7-85. C20 Status Sheet Print Screen

Confidential
7.3 Repair Work Procedures
7.3.1 Parts/Components Location

No. Part/Component No. Part/Component No. Part/Component No. Part/Component
1 Housing Left (p. 350) 4 Rear Top Cover (p. 350) 7 Paper Support (p. 356) 10 Foot (p. 389)
2 ADF/SCN Open Sensor (p. 350) 5 ASF Cover (p. 356) 8 Housing Right (p. 350) 11 Ink Supply Unit Front Cover (p. 375)
Ink Supply Unit Lower Housing Assy
3 Housing Top (p. 350) 6 Housing Rear (p. 356) 9 12 Lock Lever (p. 389)
(p. 389)
4
5
3
2 6
7
1
12 8
9
11
10 10
Figure 7-86. Housing (WF-C579R)
Repair work Repair Work Procedures 332

Confidential

1 Housing Left (p. 361) 4 Front Cover (p. 361) 7 ASF Cover (p. 366) 10 Housing Right (p. 366)
2 Printer Cover Open Sensor (p. 366) 5 Front Cover Retainer Plate (p. 361) 8 Paper Support (p. 366) 11 ---
3 Housing Top (p. 366) 6 Housing Rear (p. 366) 9 Rear Back Cover (p. 361) 12 ---
7
6
5
8
4
3
2
9
10
Figure 7-87. Housing (WF-C529R)

Confidential

Ink Pack Tray BK/ Ink Pack Tray CL
1 Decompression Pump Assy (p. 405) 4 Ink Supply Unit (p. 375) 7 Ink Leak Sensor Assy (p. 375) 10
(p. 375)
Temperature and Humidity Sensor (p.
2 CRCM FFC (p. 375) 5 8 Ink Porous Pad, 2 (p. 389) 11 ---
375)
3 CRCM Board Assy (p. 405) 6 Ink Tube Guide Holder (p. 389) 9 Ink Porous Pad, 3 (p. 389) 12 ---
3
2
7
10
9 8
Figure 7-88. Ink Supply Mechanism

Confidential

1 Separation Pad (p. 427) 4 ADF LD Roller Spring (p. 427) 7 Hinge Assy (p. 419) 10 Document Mat (p. 419)
2 Separation Pad Spring (p. 427) 5 ADF LD Roller Assy (p. 427) 8 ADF Document Support (p. 427) 11 ADF Front Cover (p. 419)
3 ADF LD Roller (p. 427) 6 ADF Rear Cover (p. 419) 9 ADF/SCN Unit (p. 419) 12 ---
6 7
5
4
10
11
Figure 7-89. ADF/SCN (WF-C579R only)

Confidential

1 Relay Board Assy (p. 435) 4 Main Board Assy (p. 444) 7 Speaker Assy* (p. 435) 10 ---
2 USB Interface Board* (p. 435) 5 Power Supply Assy (p. 444) 8 SD Memory (p. 444) 11 ---
3 WiFi Board (p. 435) 6 FAX Board Assy* (p. 435) 9 PDL Board (p. 444) 12 ---
* : WF-C579R only
6
5
9
8
7
Figure 7-90. Electrical Components (1)

Confidential

1 Panel Assy (p. 459) 3 Numpad Board Assy (p. 459) 5 Relay Cable (Panel to Main) (p. 468) 7 ---
2 Relay Cable (Panel to Main) (p. 459) 4 Panel Assy (p. 468) 6 --- 8 ---
2 5
1 4
WF-C579R WF-C529R
Figure 7-91. Electrical Components (2)

Confidential

1 Inksystem Assy (p. 478) 3 Maintenance Box Cover (p. 478) 5 Ink Porous Pad, 1 (p. 478) 7 ---
Maintenance Box Detection Sensor
2 4 Ink Porous Pad, 4 (p. 478) 6 --- 8 ---
Assy (p. 478)
3
1
Figure 7-92. Ink System Mechanism

Confidential

1 Head FFC Assy (p. 504) 4 Printhead (p. 504) 7 CR Unit (p. 518) 10 Ink Supply Tube Assy (p. 490)
2 CR Driven Pulley Assy (p. 518) 5 CR Motor Assy (p. 518) 8 Head Screw Assy (p. 504) 11 ---
3 CR Scale (p. 490) 6 CR Scale Torsion Spring (p. 490) 9 Seal Joint Head (p. 490) 12 ---
3
2
4
1
9
10 8
Figure 7-93. Carriage Mechanism

Confidential

Paper Guide Upper Assy Spring (p.
1 Stacker Assy (p. 539) 4 PF Scale (p. 539) 7 10 PE Lever Assy (p. 567)
567)
2 Paper Cassette 1 (p. 552) 5 PF Encoder Board Assy (p. 539) 8 Rear Unit (p. 552) 11 ---
3 Star Wheel Assy (p. 539) 6 Rear ASF Assy (p. 557) 9 Paper Guide Upper Assy (p. 567) 12 ---
6
5 7
4
1
8
10
Figure 7-94. Paper Feed Mechanism (1)

Confidential

Feed Sensor Detection Lever Spring Cassette Paper Detection Sensor (p.
1 Drive Gear Assy (p. 604) 5 ASF Drive Gear Assy (p. 588) 9 13
(p. 588) 588)
Rear ASF Paper Detection Sensor (p.
2 Rear Unit Detection Sensor (p. 539) 6 10 Feed Sensor (p. 588) 14 PE Sensor (p. 604)
557)
3 Rear ASF Solenoid (p. 557) 7 Pickup Roller Assy (p. 552) 11 Retard Roller (p. 552) 15 Drive Gear Shaft (p. 604)
Retard Roller Extension Spring (p.
4 Cassette Detection Sensor (p. 588) 8 Feed Sensor Detection Lever (p. 588) 12 16 ---
552)
3 4
5
2
6
7
1
8
9
15 14 13 12 11 10
Figure 7-95. Paper Feed Mechanism (2)

Confidential

Optional Paper Cassette Main Board
1 ASF Encoder Assy (p. 644) 7 Hopper Position Sensor (p. 662) 13 Foot (p. 662) 19
Assy (p. 644)
Cassette Paper Detection Lever (p.
2 E-ring (plastic) (p. 638) 8 14 Rear Cover (p. 644) 20 Left Cover (p. 644)
654)
3 One-way Clutch Assy (p. 638) 9 Separation Roller Assy (p. 638) 15 Right Cover (p. 644) 21 Hopper Drive Assy (p. 644)
Cassette Paper Detection Sensor (p.
4 Paper Feed Roller Spring (p. 638) 10 Vertical Feed Roller (p. 638) 16 22 ---
662)
5 Feed Sensor (p. 662) 11 Cassette Detection Sensor (p. 662) 17 Drawer Lower Connector (p. 654) 23 ---
6 Paper Feed Detection Lever (p. 638) 12 Sensor Cable (p. 654) 18 Drawer Upper Connector (p. 662) 24 ---
4
3
10 11 12
2 9 13
8
1 7
6
21
20
13 14
19 15
18 16
13
17
13
Figure 7-96. Optional Paper Cassette Unit (1)

Confidential

Retard Roller Extension Spring (p.
1 Paper Cassette 2 (p. 671) 3 Lift Up Sector Gear 40T (p. 671) 5 7 ---
671)
2 Lift Up Gear 30T (p. 671) 4 Retard Roller (p. 671) 6 --- 8 ---
1 2
5 3
4
Figure 7-97. Optional Paper Cassette Unit (2)

Confidential
7.3.2 Preparation for servicing CR UNLOCK (HARDWARE)
7.3.2.1 Unlocking the CR Unit 1. Remove the Housing Right.

WF-C579R: 7.3.4.1 Housing (WF-C579R) (1) (p. 350)
CR Unlock can be performed in two methods as given below. WF-C529R: 7.3.4.4 Housing (WF-C529R) (2) (p. 366)
CR UNLOCK (SERVICE SUPPORT MODE) 2. Rotate the gear of the Inksystem Assy in the direction of the arrow, and move the
CR Unit to the 80-digit side.
1. Start the printer in service support mode.
(Refer to <Bule_10>"5.2 Service mode startup" (p. 107))
CR Unit
2. Select “CR Unlock Power Off” from service support mode top menu.
Service Support Mode Top

Up/Down:[2][8] Shift:[4][6]
Back:[*] Run:[#]
Before Repair Operation:MENU
Adjustment:MENU Gear
Maintenance:MENU
Printer Status Information FFC
USB Data Swap:MENU
CR Unlock Power Off
USB FW Update
Counter Reset
Debug Log Get Mode:MENU
Inksystem Assy
Figure 7-98. Service support mode top menu
Figure 7-99. Unlocking the CR Unit
When rotating the gear of the Inksystem Assy, take extra care not
to damage or disconnect the FFC by touching it.

Confidential
7.3.2.2 Removing the Maintenance Box 7.3.2.3 Removing the Ink Pack
1. Disengage the hook, and remove the Maintenance Box Cover. 1. Slide the Lock Lever in the direction of the arrow, then Open the Ink Supply Unit
Front Cover.
2. Remove the Maintenance Box.
Lock Lever
Hook
Ink Supply Unit Front Cover
Figure 7-101. Opening the Ink Supply Unit Front Cover

2. Push the Ink Pack Tray, then remove it.
Maintenance Box Cover
Ink Pack Tray
Figure 7-102. Removing the Ink Pack Tray
Maintenance Box
Figure 7-100. Removing the Maintenance Box

Confidential
3. Remove the Ink Pack.
Ink Pack
Ink Pack Tray
Figure 7-103. Removing the Ink Pack

Confidential
7.3.3 How to Read This Chapter  Disassembly Procedure Page
CONTENTS EXPLANATION Guide Part or Component Final Procedure

The capital letters Indicates a target part to Pink-colored guide indicates
 Section Top Page represent parts/ be removed, or work to that the disassembly of the part
components, and the be performed with the represented by the capital
number indicates the instructions in this box. letter ends here.
order of disassembly.
EPSON WF-C579R/WF-C529R Revision A
7.3.4 Repair Work Details

7.3.4.1 Housing (WF-C579R) (1)
OUTLINE
A1 B1 C1 A2 B2 C2
Time Rear Cover (Back) Rear Top Cover
Part or Component Guide
D1 E1 D2 E2
Disassembly/ Adjustment/
Total
Reassembly Inspection
Rear Top
Rear Top Cover A 1 min 35 sec --- 1 min 35 sec
Housing Right B 2 min 36 sec --- 2 min 36 sec
Housing Top C 5 min 12 sec --- 5 min 12 sec
ADF/SCN Open Sensor D 6 min 45 sec --- 6 min 45 sec

Rear Top Cover
Housing Left E 2 min 47 sec --- 2 min 47 sec
Rear Cover (Back)
Dowel and Dowel and

Housing Right positioning hole positioning hole
Housing Left
No. Screw Type

No. Screw Type
S4 C.B.P-TITE-SCREW-3x10-F.ZN-3C
1. Remove the four screws (S4: ), then remove the Rear Cover (Back). 1. Remove the two screws (S4: ), then remove the Rear Top Cover.
Attach the two dowels of the Rear Cover (Back) to the positioning holes on the
Housing Left and Housing Right.

Confidential
Part Name/Guide Repair work Repair Work Procedures 352

Confidential
Disassembly procedure of the listed parts or components are given in the section.
Procedure
The capital letters in the “Guide” column are shown in the disassembly procedure
Describes the disassembly procedure.
pages with a number. Follow the disassembly instructions on the pages with a capital
When reassembling, follow the disassembly procedure in reverse order.
letter for your target part in numerical order.

Confidential
3. Find the “Guide” (the capital letter) in the disassembly procedure pages. Then follow the
EXAMPLE FOR READING DISASSEMBLY PROCEDURE
instructions on the pages with the Guide indication in numerical order.
1. Find your target part or component in the table.
2. See the Guide column, and remember the Guide (a capital letter) for the part/component. Example: To remove the Main Board Assy, find pages with the “A”
guide. If A1, A2, A11, and A12 are found, start from the A1
Example: The Guide for the Main Board Assy is “A”.
page, then proceed in numerical order.
7.3.4.11 Electrical Components (2)
OUTLINE
A1 B1 A2 B2
Time C1 D1
Rear Cover (Back)
C2 D2
Rear Top Cover
Part or Component Guide Disassembly/ Adjustment/ Rear Top
Total
Main Board Assy A 21 min 43 sec 3 min 52 sec 25 min 35 sec

Rear Top Cover
Power Supply Assy B 14 min 35 sec 6 min 20 min 35 sec

A11 B11 A12
PS Ground Plate Main Board Assy
Rear Cover (Back)
PDL Board C --- --- ---

Dowel and Dowel and
Left

Housing Left
D
Double- Double-
SD Memory --- --- --- No. Screw Type
PS Ground Plate No.
S4
Screw Type
C.B.P-TITE-SCREW-3x10-F.ZN-3C
sided tape CRCM FFC Sheet sided tape

Double- CRCM FFC Double-
No. Screw Type Confidential
sided tape sided tape
S5 C.B.S-TITE-SCREW-3x6-F.ZN-3C
1. Remove the two screws (S4: , S5: ), then remove the PS Ground Plate. 1. Peel off the CRCM FFC.
2. Peel off the CRCM FFC Sheet.

Confidential

Confidential
DEFINITION OF ORIENTATION OF THE PRINTER
Throughout this manual, orientation descriptions shown below are used.
Top
Left Rear
Front Right
Bottom
Figure 7-104. Definition of Orientation of the Printer

Confidential
7.3.4 Repair Work Details

7.3.4.1 Housing (WF-C579R) (1)
OUTLINE
Time
Part or Component Guide Disassembly/ Adjustment/
Total
Rear Top Cover A 1 min 35 sec --- 1 min 35 sec
Housing Right B 2 min 36 sec --- 2 min 36 sec
Housing Top C 5 min 12 sec --- 5 min 12 sec
ADF/SCN Open Sensor D 6 min 45 sec --- 6 min 45 sec
Housing Left E 2 min 47 sec --- 2 min 47 sec

Confidential
DISASSEMBLY FLOWCHART
Start
A1 B1 C1 Rear Cover (Back)

D1 E1 (→P. 352)
A2 B2 C2 Rear Top Cover

D2 E2 (→P. 352)
B3 C3 Maintenance Box E3 Housing Left

D3 Cover(→P. 353) (→P. 355)
B4 C4 Housing Right
D4 (→P. 353)
C5 Housing Left
D5 (→P. 354)
C6 Housing Top
D6 (→P. 354)
ADF/SCN Open Sensor

D7 (→P. 355)

Confidential
A1 B1 C1 A2 B2 C2
Rear Cover (Back) Rear Top Cover
D1 E1 D2 E2
Rear Top
Rear Top Cover
Rear Cover (Back)
Dowel and Dowel and

Housing Left
No. Screw Type

No. Screw Type

Confidential
B3 C3 B4 C4
Maintenance Box Cover Housing Right
D3 D4
Rear Rear
Hook
Maintenance Box Cover Hook
Tab
No. Screw Type

Housing Right S4 C.B.P-TITE-SCREW-3x10-F.ZN-3C
1. Disengage the hook, and remove the Maintenance Box Cover. 1. Open the ADF/SCN Unit.
2. Remove the four screws (S4: ) that secure the Housing Right.
3. Lift the Housing Right to release the two hooks on the front side of the Housing Right, then
remove the Housing Right.
Insert the four tabs of the Housing Right to the positioning holes on the Ink Supply
Unit.

Confidential
C5 C6
Housing Left Housing Top
D5 D6
Rear
Hooks
Housing Upper
Top
Hooks
Tab
No. Screw Type
Housing Left No. Screw Type
S4 C.B.P-TITE-SCREW-3x10-F.ZN-3C S4 C.B.P-TITE-SCREW-3x10-F.ZN-3C
1. Open the ADF/SCN Unit. 1. Remove the six screws (S4: ), then remove the Housing Upper.
2. Remove the three screws (S4: ) that secure the Housing Left.
3. Lift the Housing Left to release the two hooks on the front side of the Housing Left.
4. Disengage two hooks on the rear side of the Housing Left, and remove the Housing Left.
Insert the eight tabs on the Housing Left to the positioning holes of the Housing Upper
and the Ink Supply Unit.

Confidential
ADF/SCN Open Sensor Housing Left

D7 E3
Connector (CN609) Rear
Hooks
Cable
ADF/SCN Open Sensor
Hook (long)
Hooks
Tab
ADF/SCN Open Housing Left No. Screw Type
Sensor Hook (short)
The length of the two hooks on the ADF/SCN Open Sensor differs. See the following 1. Open the ADF/SCN Unit.
and make sure to release the shorter hook first when removing the ADF/SCN Open 2. Remove the three screws (S4: ) that secure the Housing Left.
Sensor. 3. Lift the Housing Left to release the two hooks on the front side of the Housing Left.
1. Disconnect the cable from the connector (CN609) on the Main Board Assy.
2. Disengage the hook by pushing up the ADF/SCN Open Sensor.

Confidential
7.3.4.2 Housing (WF-C579R) (2)
OUTLINE
Time
Total
ASF Cover A 1 min 41 sec --- 1 min 41 sec
Housing Rear B 1 min 44 sec --- 1 min 44 sec
---
Paper Support C 1 min 44 sec 1 min 44 sec

Confidential
Start
Start
A1 B1 Rear Cover (Back)

C1 (→P. 358)
A2 B2 ASF Cover C2 Paper Support

(→P. 358) (→P. 360)
B3 Paper Support
(→P. 359)
B4 Housing Rear
(→P. 359)

Confidential
A1 B1 A2 B2
Rear Cover (Back) ASF Cover
C1
Rear
ASF Cover
Shaft and Shaft and

groove groove
Rear Cover (Back)
Dowel and Dowel and Rear Housing

Housing Left
No. Screw Type

1. Remove the four screws (S4: ), then remove the Rear Cover (Back). 1. Release the two shafts of the ASF Cover from the grooves on the Rear Housing, then
remove the ASF Cover.

Confidential
B3 B4
Paper Support Housing Rear
Paper Support
Tab and
groove Rear Housing
Tab and
groove
Rear Housing
1. Release the two tabs of the Paper Support from the grooves on the Rear Housing, then
remove the Paper Support.

Confidential
Paper Support
C2
Paper Support
Tab and
groove
Tab and
groove
Rear Housing
1. Release the two tabs of the Paper Support from the grooves on the Rear Housing, then
remove the Paper Support.

Confidential
7.3.4.3 Housing (WF-C529R) (1)
OUTLINE
Time
Total
Rear Back Cover A 1 min 20 sec --- 1 min 20 sec
Front Cover Retainer

B 2 min 30 sec --- 2 min 30 sec
Plate
Front Cover C 2 min 34 sec --- 2 min 34 sec
Housing Left D 3 min 35 sec --- 3 min 35 sec

Confidential
Start
Start
A1 B1 Rear Back Cover

C1 D1 (→P. 363)
B2 ASF Cover Assy

C2 D2 (→P. 364)
B3 Front Cover Retainer

C3 D3 Plate (→P. 364)
Front Cover
C4 D4 (→P. 365)
Housing Left
D5 (→P. 365)

Confidential
Rear Back Cover

A1 B1
Rear Back Cover
Rear
C1 D1
Housing Right Rear Back Cover Housing Left
Top ASF Cover

Assy
Dowel Dowel
No. Screw Type

Rear Unit S4 C.B.P-TITE-SCREW-3x10-F.ZN-3C
1. Remove the Rear Unit. 4. Remove the Rear Back Cover downward.
2. Remove the two screws (S4: ) that secure the ASF Cover Assy. Attach the two dowels of the Rear Back Cover to the positioning holes on the Housing
3. Remove the four screws (S4: ) that secure the Rear Back Cover. Left and the Housing Right.

Confidential
B2 B3
ASF Cover Assy Front Cover Retainer Plate
C2 D2 C3 D3
Front Cover Retainer Plate
ASF Cover Assy
Front Cover
Retainer Plate
Tabs
Front
Cover
No. Screw Type

1. Remove the ASF Cover Assy in the direction of the arrow. 1. Open the Front Cover.
Insert the four tabs of the ASF Cover Assy to the positioning holes of the Front Cover 2. Remove the six screws (S4: ), then remove the Front Cover Retainer Plate.
Retainer Plate.

Confidential
Front Cover Housing Left

C4 D4 D5
Rear
Front Cover
Hooks
Hooks
Housing Left
No. Screw Type

Tab
1. Remove the Front Cover upward. 1. Remove the five screws (S4: ) that secure the Housing Left.
2. Lift the Housing Left upward to release the two hooks each on the front side and rear side of
the Housing Left, and then remove the Housing Left.
Insert the four tabs of the Housing Left to the positioning holes of the Ink Supply Unit.

Confidential
7.3.4.4 Housing (WF-C529R) (2)
OUTLINE
Time
Total
Housing Right A 3 min 36 sec --- 3 min 36 sec
Housing Top B 6 min 1 sec --- 6 min 1 sec
Printer Cover Open

C 6 min 9 sec --- 6 min 9 sec
Sensor
ASF Cover D 1 min 30 sec --- 1 min 30 sec
Housing Rear E 1 min 30 sec --- 1 min 30 sec
Paper Support F 1 min 30 sec --- 1 min 30 sec

Confidential
Start
Start
A1 B1 C1 Rear Back Cover

D1 E1 F1 (→P. 368)
A2 B2 C2 ASF Cover Assy

D2 E2 F2 (→P. 369)
A3 B3 C3 Front Cover Retainer D3 ASF Cover F3 Paper Support

Plate (→P. 369) E3 (→P. 373) (→P. 374)
A4 B4 C4 Front Cover E4 Paper Support

(→P. 370) (→P. 373)
A5 B5 C5 Maintenance Box Cover E5 Housing Rear

(→P. 370) (→P. 374)
A6 B6 C6 Housing Right
(→P. 371)
B7 C7 Housing Left
(→P. 371)
B8 C8 Housing Top
(→P. 372)
C9 Printer Cover Open Sensor

(→P. 372)

Confidential
Rear Back Cover

A1 B1 C1
Rear Back Cover
Rear
D1 E1 F1
Top ASF Cover

Assy
Dowel Dowel
No. Screw Type


Confidential
A2 B2 C2 A3 B3 C3
D2 E2 F2
ASF Cover Assy
Front Cover
Retainer Plate
Tabs
Front
Cover
No. Screw Type

Retainer Plate.

Confidential
A4 B4 C4 A5 B5 C5
Front Cover Maintenance Box Cover
Rear
Hook
Front Cover
1. Remove the Front Cover upward. 1. Disengage the hook, and remove the Maintenance Box Cover.

Confidential
A6 B6 C6 B7 C7
Housing Right Housing Left
Rear Rear
Hooks
Housing Right
Hooks
Housing Left
Tab
Hooks
No. Screw Type No. Screw Type
Tab
1. Remove the five screws (S4: ) that secure the Housing Right. 1. Remove the five screws (S4: ) that secure the Housing Left.
2. Lift the Housing Right upward to release the two hooks on the front side of the Housing 2. Lift the Housing Left upward to release the two hooks each on the front side and rear side of
Right, and then remove the Housing Right. the Housing Left, and then remove the Housing Left.
Insert the four tabs of the Housing Right to the positioning holes of the Ink Supply Insert the four tabs of the Housing Left to the positioning holes of the Ink Supply Unit.
Unit.

Confidential
B8 C8 C9
Housing Top Printer Cover Open Sensor
Connector (CN609)
Cable
Housing Top Printer Cover

Open Sensor
Hook (long)
No. Screw Type

S4 C.B.P-TITE-SCREW-3x10-F.ZN-3C Printer Cover Open Sensor Hook (short)
1. Remove six screws (S4: ), then remove the Housing Top. The length of the two hooks on the Printer Cover Open Sensor differs. See the
following and make sure to release the shorter hook first when removing the Printer
Cover Open Sensor.
1. Disconnect the cable from the connector (CN609) on the Main Board Assy.
2. Disengage the hook by pushing up the Printer Cover Open Sensor.

Confidential
ASF Cover Paper Support

D3 E3 E4
Tab and
ASF Cover Groove
Paper
Shaft
Tab and
Shaft Groove
Housing Rear
Housing Rear
1. Disengage two shafts of the ASF Cover from the holes of the Housing Rear, then remove 1. Disengage two tabs of the Paper Support from the grooves of the Housing Rear, and remove
the ASF Cover. the Paper Support.

Confidential
Housing Rear Paper Support

E5 F3
Tab and
Groove
Paper
Tab and
Groove
Housing Rear
Housing Rear
1. Disengage two tabs of the Paper Support from the grooves of the Housing Rear, and remove
the Paper Support.

Confidential
7.3.4.5 Ink Supply Mechanism (1)
OUTLINE
Time
Total
Ink Supply Unit A 15 min 41 sec 11 min 40 sec 27 min 21 sec
Temperature and
B 16 min 41 sec 12 min 15 sec 28 min 56 sec
Humidity Sensor
Ink Pack Tray BK/
C 8 sec --- 8 sec
Ink Pack Tray CL
Ink Leak Sensor Assy D 16 min 1 sec 11 min 40 sec 27 min 41 sec
Ink Supply Unit Front

E --- --- ---
Cover
CRCM FFC F --- --- ---

Confidential
Start
Start
A1 B1 Rear Cover (Back) C1 Ink Pack Tray BK/ E1 Ink Supply Unit Front
D1 F1 (→P. 377) Ink Pack Tray CL Cover (→P. 387)
(→P. 386)
A2 B2 Rear Top Cover
D2 F2 (→P. 377)
A3 B3 Housing Left A10 B10 Magnetic Valve Assy, B

D3 F3 (→P. 378) D10 F10 (→P. 382)
A4 B4 Maintenance Box Cover A11 B11 Plate

D4 F4 (→P. 378) D11 F11 (→P. 383)
A5 B5 Housing Right A12 B12 Guide Cover

D5 F5 (→P. 379) D12 F12 (→P. 383)
A6 B6 Housing Top A13 B13 Ink Supply Unit

D6 F6 (→P. 379) D13 F13 (→P. 384)
A7 B7 ADF/SCN Unit B14 Temperature and Humidity D14 Ink Leak Sensor Assy F14 CRCM FFC
D7 F7 (→P. 380) Sensor (→P. 386) (→P. 387) (→P. 388)
A8 B8 Cable Guide
D8 F8 (→P. 381)
A9 B9 Peel off the CRCM FFC

(→P. 382) C H E C K  As for the procedure indicated by , refer to 7.3.4.4 Housing (WF-
D9 F9
P O IN T C529R) (2) (p. 366) in the case of the WF-C529R Series, and remove
the parts from the Rear Back Cover to the Housing Top.
 The procedure indicated by is applicable only in the WF-C579R
series.

Confidential
A1 B1 A2 B2
D1 F1 D2 F2
Rear Top
Rear Top Cover
Rear Cover (Back)
Dowel and Dowel and

Housing Left
No. Screw Type

No. Screw Type

Confidential
A3 B3 A4 B4
Housing Left Maintenance Box Cover
D3 F3 D4 F4
Rear Rear
Hook
Hooks

Hooks
Tab
1. Open the ADF/SCN Unit. 1. Disengage the hook, and remove the Maintenance Box Cover.

Confidential
A5 B5 A6 B6
Housing Right Housing Top
D5 F5 D6 F6
Rear
Housing Upper
Top
Hook
Tab

Housing Right S4 C.B.P-TITE-SCREW-3x10-F.ZN-3C S4 C.B.P-TITE-SCREW-3x10-F.ZN-3C
Unit.

Confidential
ADF/SCN Unit
A7 B7
ADF/SCN Unit
D7 F7
Left SCN USB cable
Clamp
ADF/SCN Unit
Rumiror
CN100
SCN PS cable
Terminal of
grounding cable CN799
No. Screw Type

Connector lock
Hook
C H E C K When disconnecting the SCN PS cable from the connector (CN799), make sure to 3. Open the ADF/SCN Unit.
P O IN T
unlock the connector lock beforehand. 4. Remove the two screws (S4: ), then remove the ADF/SCN Unit in the direction of the
arrow.
1. Disconnect the SCN PS cable (CN799) and the SCN USB cable (CN100) from the Main
 Before screwing the ADF/SCN Unit, make sure the hinges are properly attached in place.
Board.
 If the ADF/SCN Unit is opened when the hinges are NOT secured, the unit may be damaged.
2. Remove the terminal of grounding cable from the frame of the Main Board.
 Route the SCN USB cable through the three hooks and the clamp as shown above.
 Make sure to secure the SCN PS cable and the grounding cable with the rumiror.

Confidential
Cable Guide
A8 B8
Cable Guide
D8 F8
PS Cable
Solenoid cable Cable Guide

Guides
Cable Guide
Guide
Hook
ASF motor cable Rear Unit Detection Sensor cable/

Rear ASF Paper Detection Sensor cable
No. Screw Type

1. Release the all cable from the Cable Guide.  Route the PS cable through the two guides and hook on the Cable Guide.
2. Remove the two screws (S4: ), and remove the Cable Guide.  Route the solenoid cable through the six hooks ( ) on the Cable Guide.
 Route the Rear Unit Detection Sensor cable and Rear ASF Paper Detection Sensor cable
through the three hooks ( ) and the three hooks ( )on the Cable Guide.
 Route the ASF Motor cable through the guide on the Cable Guide.

Confidential
A9 B9 A10 B10
Peel off the CRCM FFC Magnetic Valve Assy, B
D9 F9 D10 F10
Back
Main Board
CRCM FFC
Magnetic Valve Assy, B
Left Plate
CN68 CN66 CN67
Double-sided tape CRCM FFC Sheet

Double-sided tape
Rib and hole
No. Screw Type

S13 SCREW, JOINT, HEAD
1. Remove the screw (S13: ), then remove the Magnetic Valve Assy, B.
Double-sided tape CRCM FFC Double-sided tape  When attaching the Magnetic Valve Assy, B, make sure to align the rib with the hole on the
plate.
 Make sure the Magnetic Valve Assy, B is secured with the screw.
1. Peel off the CRCM FFC.

2. Peel off the CRCR FFC Sheet.
3. Disconnect the FFCs (CN67,CN66, CN68) from the Main Board.
4. Disconnect the CRCM FFC from the Main Board.

Confidential
A11 B11 A12 B12

Plate Guide Cover
D11 F11 D12 F12
Plate
Guide Cover
S6
Plate
Ink Supply
Tube Assy Dowel and positioning hole No. Screw Type
No. Screw Type S3 C.C.P-TITE-SCREW-3x12-F.ZN-3C
Hexagon nut S6 C.B.(S-P1)SCREW,2.5X18,F/ZN-3C S4 C.B.P-TITE-SCREW-3x10-F.ZN-3C
1. Remove the two screws (S6: ), and remove the Plate. 1. Remove the two screws (S3: , S4: ), and remove the Guide Cover in the direction of the
arrow.
 When installing the Ink Supply Tube Assy to the Ink Supply Unit, make sure to tighten the
screws using a torque driver with the specified torque.
 Screw tightening torque: 0.25±0.03N⋅m
 The S6 screw and the Hexagon nut (H.N.-1,2.5,F/ZN-3C) is supplied as ASP.
 When attaching the plate, make sure to align the dowel on the Ink Supply Tube Assy and the
positioning hole on the plate.

Confidential
Ink Supply Unit

A13 B13
Ink Supply Unit
D13 F13 Rear Top
Left Relay Board

CN55
CN10
CN54
CN22
CN11
CN12
CN30
Decompression
Pump cable
CN31
CN2 Top
Decompression
Pump cable Hole
⋅ Ink End Sensor (C/M) (CN30)

⋅ Ink End Sensor (Bk/Y) (CN31)
⋅ Ink Leak Sensor 1 (CN11) ⋅ Drawer Connector (CN2)
⋅ Ink Leak Sensor 2 (CN12) ⋅ Front Cover Open Sensor (CN22)
⋅ Ink Leak Sensor 3 (CN54) No. Screw Type
⋅ Ink Leak Sensor 4 (CN55)
⋅ Temperature and Humidity Sensor(CN10) Tab Ferrite core S4 C.B.P-TITE-SCREW-3x10-F.ZN-3C
1. Disconnect the cables from the connectors (CN2, CN10, CN11, CN12, CN22, CN30, 3. Pull the Decompression Pump cable out from the hole of the Frame Base, and release the
CN31, CN54, CN55) on the Relay Board. ferrite core of the Decompression pump cable from the Frame Base.
2. Release the cables from the five tabs on the Frame Base. 4. Disconnect the Decompression pump cable from the connector of the Main Board.
5. Remove the eight screws (S4: ) that secure the Ink Supply Unit.

Confidential
Ink Supply Unit Ink Supply Unit
Right Left Tube

PF scale Rib
Joint of ink tube
positioning holes
Handle part
Joint
Printer
Joint
Metal frame
Ink Supply Unit Ink Supply Unit Handle part

As ink may adhere in the following steps, prepare a waste cloth or the like in advance.  When lifting the main body, you wear gloves. Because there is a danger of cutting hands with
the sharp metal enclosed by magenta circles,
 Lift carefully so as not to touch the PF scale on the left side of the main body. If you touch the
6. Remove the Ink Supply Tube Assy from the Joint. PF scale, clean it with a clean cloth.
7. Grasp the handle parts indicated by the green square part on the left and right sides of the
printer and lift it vertically to remove the printer from the Ink Supply Unit.
When disassembling/assembling, misalignment between tube of the Ink Supply Tube
and the joint part of the tube affects ink supply. When assembling, make sure to rotate
the tube to check if it is secured with the joint part. Also, make sure the rib of the tube
and the joint part is attached vertically as shown in the figure above.

Confidential
B14 C1 Ink Pack Tray BK/

Temperature and Humidity Sensor
Ink Pack Tray CL
Rear
Lock
Temperature and Humidity Sensor Lever
Ink Pack
Tray BK
Ink Pack
Tray CL
Cable
Ink Supply Unit
No. Screw Type

1. Remove the screw (S4: ) that secures the Temperature and Humidity Sensor. 1. Move the Lock Lever in the direction of the arrow, then open the Ink Supply Unit Front
2. Disconnect the cable from the connector, then remove the Temperature and Humidity Cover.
Sensor. 2. Push the Ink Pack Tray BK and Ink Pack Tray CL, then remove them.

Confidential
Ink Leak Sensor Assy Ink Supply Unit Front Cover

D14 E1
Ink Tube Guide Holder
Lock
Ink Porous Pad Lever Shaft and hole
Hook
Hook
Connector
Shaft and hole

Hooks Ink Leak Sensor Assy
Dowel and positioning hole
1. Disconnect the cable from the connector. 1. Move the Lock Lever in the direction of the arrow, then open the Ink Supply Unit Front
2. Disengage four hooks, then remove the Ink Leak Sensor. Cover.
2. Take out the two axes from the housing holes while bending the Ink Supply Unit Front
When attaching the Ink Leak Sensor Assy, make sure to align the positioning hole of
Cover, and then remove the Ink Supply Unit Front Cover.
the Ink Leak Sensor Assy with the dowel of the Ink Tube Guide Holder.

Confidential
CRCM FFC
F14
Rear
Ferrite core
CRCM FFC
CRCM Board Assy
CN1
Ink Supply Unit
1. Disconnect the CRCM FFC from the connector (CN1) on the CRCM Board Assy.
2. Pull the CRCM FFC from the ferrite core.
3. Peel off the CRCM FFC from the frame.

Confidential
OUTLINE
Time
Total
Ink Tube Guide Holder A 16 min 20 sec 11 min 40 sec 28 min
Ink Porous Pad, 3 B 16 min 51 sec 11 min 40 sec 28 min 31 sec
Ink Supply Unit Lower

C 17 min 48 sec 11 min 40 sec 29 min 28 sec
Housing Assy
Lock Lever D 18 min 21 sec 11 min 40 sec 30 min 1 sec
Foot E 15 min 51 sec 11 min 40 sec 27 min 31 sec
Ink Porous Pad, 2 F --- --- ---

Confidential
Start
A1 B1 C1 Rear Cover (Back) A10 B10 C10 Magnetic Valve Assy, B

D1 E1 F1 (→P. 391) D10 E10 F10 (→P. 396)
A2 B2 C2 Rear Top Cover A11 B11 C11 Plate

(→P. 391) D11 E11 F11 (→P. 397)
D2 E2 F2
A3 B3 C3 Housing Left A12 B12 C12 Guide Cover

(→P. 392) D12 E12 F12 (→P. 397)
D3 E3 F3
A4 B4 C4 A13 B13 C13 Ink Supply Unit

(→P. 392) D13 E13 F13 (→P. 398)
D4 E4 F4
D5 E5 F5 (→P. 393)
A14 Ink Leak Sensor Assy C14 Ink Supply Main Body E14 Foot
A6 B6 C6 Housing Top B14 (→P. 400) D14 (→P. 402) (→P. 404)
D6 E6 F6 (→P. 393) F14
A15 Ink Tube Guide Holder C15 Ink Supply Unit Lower
A7 B7 C7 ADF/SCN Unit
B15 (→P. 400) D15 Housing Assy (→P. 403)
D7 E7 F7 (→P. 394)
F15
A8 B8 C8 Cable Guide B16 Ink Porous Pad, 3 D16 Lock Lever F16 Ink Porous Pad, 2
D8 E8 F8 (→P. 395) (→P. 401) (→P. 403) (→P. 404)
A9 B9 C9 Peel off the CRCM FFC

D9 E9 F9 (→P. 396)
C H E C K  As for the procedure indicated by , refer to 7.3.4.4 Housing (WF-C529R)
P O IN T (2) (p. 366) in the case of the WF-C529R Series, and remove the parts from the
Rear Back Cover to the Housing Top.
 The procedure indicated by is applicable only in the WF-C579R series.

Confidential
A1 B1 C1 A2 B2 C2
D1 E1 F1 D2 E2 F2
Rear Top
Rear Top Cover
Rear Cover (Back)
Dowel and Dowel and

Housing Left
No. Screw Type

No. Screw Type

Confidential
A3 B3 C3 A4 B4 C4
D3 E3 F3 D4 E4 F4
Rear Rear
Hook
Hooks

Hooks
Tab

Confidential
A5 B5 C5 A6 B6 C6
D5 E5 F5 D6 E6 F6
Rear
Housing Upper
Top
Hook
Tab

Unit.

Confidential
ADF/SCN Unit
A7 B7 C7
ADF/SCN Unit
D7 E7 F7
Left SCN USB cable
Clamp
ADF/SCN Unit
Rumiror
CN100
SCN PS cable
Terminal of
No. Screw Type

Connector lock
Hook
P O IN T
arrow.
Board.

Confidential
Cable Guide
A8 B8 C8
Cable Guide
D8 E8 F8
PS Cable

Guides
Cable Guide
Guide
Hook

No. Screw Type


Confidential
A9 B9 C9 A10 B10 C10

D9 E9 F9 D10 E10 F10
Back
Main Board
CRCM FFC
Left Plate
CN68 CN66 CN67

Double-sided tape
Rib and hole
No. Screw Type

plate.


Confidential
A11 B11 C11 A12 B12 C12

Plate Guide Cover
D11 E11 F11 D12 E12 F12
Plate
Guide Cover
S6
Plate
Ink Supply
arrow.

Confidential
Ink Supply Unit

A13 B13 C13
Ink Supply Unit
D13 E13 F13 Rear Top
Left Relay Board

CN55
CN10
CN54
CN22
CN11
CN12
CN30
Decompression
Pump cable
CN31
CN2 Top
Decompression
Pump cable Hole


Confidential
Right Left Tube

PF scale Rib
Joint of ink tube
positioning holes
Handle part
Joint
Printer
Joint
Metal frame


Confidential
A14 B14 A15 B15

Ink Leak Sensor Assy Ink Tube Guide Holder
Ink Porous Pad

Hook
Tab and positioning hole Ink Tube Guide
Holder
Ink Tube
Hook
Connector
Hooks
Hooks Ink Leak Sensor Assy
Cable
No. Screw Type

Dowel and positioning hole S5 C.B.S-TITE-SCREW-3x6-F.ZN-3C
1. Disconnect the cable from the connector. 1. Release the cable from the three hooks on the Ink Tube Guide Holder.
2. Disengage four hooks, then remove the Ink Leak Sensor. 2. Release the four Ink Tube from the Ink Tube Guide Holder.
When attaching the Ink Leak Sensor Assy, make sure to align the positioning hole of 3. Remove the screw (S5: ), then remove the Ink Tube Guide Holder.
the Ink Leak Sensor Assy with the dowel of the Ink Tube Guide Holder. Attach the tab of the Ink Tube Guide Holder to the positioning hole of the frame.

Confidential

B16
Ink Porous Pad, 3
Ink Porous Pad, 3
Marking
Ink Tube Guide
Holder
Guide Ink Supply Unit
Align the marking on the ink tubes with the guide of the Ink Tube Guide Holder 1. Peel off the Ink Porous Pad, 3 from the Ink Supply Unit, then remove the Ink Porous Pad, 3.
shown in the figure above.

Confidential
Ink Supply Main Body

C14
D14 F14 Acetate tape
Slit Dowel and

positioning hole
Front Cover Open

Sensor cable
Dowel and notch Front Cover Open
Sensor Assy Ink Supply Unit Lower
Housing Assy
Housing Assy
No. Screw Type

S2 C.B.P-TITE(P2)SCREW,3X12,F/ZN-3C
S11 C.C.P-TITE-SCREW-3x8-F.ZN-3C Dowel and positioning hole
1. Release the cable from the slit on the Ink Supply Unit Lower Housing Assy.  Route the cable on the Ink Supply Main Body and secure it with acetate tape in the position
2. Remove the screw (S2: ), then remove the Front Cover Open Sensor Assy. shown above.
 When attaching the Ink Supply Main Body, make sure to align the dowel with the positioning
3. Remove the six screws(S11: ), then remove the Ink Supply Main Body from the Ink
hole.
Supply Unit Lower Housing Assy.
When attaching the Front Cover Open Sensor Assy, make sure to align the two dowels
on the Ink Supply Unit Lower Housing Assy with the positioning hole/slit on the
Front Cover Open Sensor Assy.

Confidential
C15
Ink Supply Unit Lower Housing Assy Lock Lever
D15 F15 D16
Lock Lever Holder
Lock Lever
Ink Supply Unit Lower Housing Assy No. Screw Type

1. Remove the screw (S4: ), then remove the Lock Lever Holder and Lock Lever.

Confidential
Foot Ink Porous Pad, 2

E14 F16

Bottom of the Ink Supply Unit
Foot
Foot
Foot
Foot
Ink Porous Pad, 2
Double-sided tape
1. Turn over the Ink Supply Unit, then remove the nine Foot. 1. Peel off the Ink Porous Pad, 2 from the Ink Supply Unit Lower Housing Assy, then remove
the Ink Porous Pad, 2.

Confidential
OUTLINE
Time
Total
Decompression Pump
A 17 min 47 sec 11 min 40 sec 29 min 27 sec
Assy
CRCM Board Assy B --- --- ---

Confidential
Start
A1 B1 Rear Cover (Back) A10 B10 Magnetic Valve Assy, B

(→P. 407) (→P. 412)
A2 B2 Rear Top Cover A11 B11 Plate

(→P. 407) (→P. 413)
A3 B3 Housing Left A12 B12 Guide Cover

(→P. 408) (→P. 413)
A4 B4 Maintenance Box Cover A13 B13 Ink Supply Unit

(→P. 408) (→P. 414)
A5 B5 Housing Right A14 B14 Ink Supply Main Body

(→P. 409) (→P. 416)
A6 B6 Housing Top A15 B15 Pressing Plate

(→P. 409) (→P. 417)
A7 B7 ADF/SCN Unit A16 B16 Upper Plate

(→P. 410) (→P. 417)
A8 B8 Cable Guide A17 Decompression Pump Assy B17 CRCM Board Assy
(→P. 411) (→P. 418) (→P. 418)
A9 B9 Peel off the CRCM FFC

(→P. 412)  As for the procedure indicated by , refer to 7.3.4.4 Housing
C H E C K
P O IN T (WF-C529R) (2) (p. 366) in the case of the WF-C529R Series, and
remove the parts from the Rear Back Cover to the Housing Top.
 The procedure indicated by is applicable only in the WF-C579R
series.

Confidential
A1 B1 A2 B2
Rear Top
Rear Top Cover
Rear Cover (Back)
Dowel and Dowel and

Housing Left
No. Screw Type

No. Screw Type

Confidential
A3 B3 A4 B4
Rear Rear
Hook
Hooks

Hooks
Tab

Confidential
A5 B5 A6 B6
Rear
Housing Upper
Top
Hook
Tab

Unit.

Confidential
ADF/SCN Unit
A7 B7
ADF/SCN Unit
Left SCN USB cable
Clamp
ADF/SCN Unit
Rumiror
CN100
SCN PS cable
Terminal of
No. Screw Type

Connector lock
Hook
P O IN T
arrow.
Board.

Confidential
Cable Guide
A8 B8
Cable Guide
PS Cable

Guides
Cable Guide
Guide
Hook

No. Screw Type


Confidential
A9 B9 A10 B10
Back
Main Board
CRCM FFC
Left Plate
CN68 CN66 CN67

Double-sided tape
Rib and hole
No. Screw Type

plate.


Confidential
A11 B11 A12 B12

Plate Guide Cover
Plate
Guide Cover
S6
Plate
Ink Supply
arrow.

Confidential
Ink Supply Unit

A13 B13
Ink Supply Unit
Rear Top
Left Relay Board

CN55
CN10
CN54
CN22
CN11
CN12
CN30
Decompression
Pump cable
CN31
CN2 Top
Decompression
Pump cable Hole


Confidential
Right Left Tube

PF scale Rib
Joint of ink tube
positioning holes
Handle part
Joint
Printer
Joint
Metal frame


Confidential

A14 B14
Acetate tape
Slit Dowel and

positioning hole
Front Cover Open

Sensor cable
Dowel and notch Front Cover Open
Sensor Assy Ink Supply Unit Lower
Housing Assy
Housing Assy
No. Screw Type

S2 C.B.P-TITE(P2)SCREW,3X12,F/ZN-3C
S11 C.C.P-TITE-SCREW-3x8-F.ZN-3C Dowel and positioning hole
1. Release the cable from the slit on the Ink Supply Unit Lower Housing Assy.  Route the cable on the Ink Supply Main Body and secure it with acetate tape in the position
2. Remove the screw (S2: ), then remove the Front Cover Open Sensor Assy. shown above.
 When attaching the Ink Supply Main Body, make sure to align the dowel with the positioning
3. Remove the six screws(S11: ), then remove the Ink Supply Main Body from the Ink
hole.
Supply Unit Lower Housing Assy.
When attaching the Front Cover Open Sensor Assy, make sure to align the two dowels
on the Ink Supply Unit Lower Housing Assy with the positioning hole/slit on the
Front Cover Open Sensor Assy.

Confidential
A15 B15 A16 B16

Pressing Plate Upper Plate
CRCM FFC
Pressing Plate
Upper Plate
CN1
Dowel
S5 C.B.S-TITE-SCREW-3x6-F.ZN-3C S5 C.B.S-TITE-SCREW-3x6-F.ZN-3C
1. Remove the two screws (S5: ), and remove the Pressing Plate. 1. Disconnect the CRCM FFC from the connector (CN1) on the CRCM Board Assy.
2. Remove the two screws (S5: ).
3. Disengage the dowels on both left and right side of the Upper Plate, then remove the Upper
Plate.

Confidential
A17 B17
Decompression Pump Assy CRCM Board Assy
Rear
Cartridge Detection FFC
Joint
CN3
Guide
CN2 CRCM Board Assy
Guide
Cable Decompression Pump Assy
Acetate tape CN4

CN5
Guide
Tube
No. Screw Type
No. Screw Type
S12 C.B.S-TITE SCREW, 2.5X4,F/ZB-3C
S15 C.B.S-TITE(P4)SCREW,3X10,F/ZN-3C
1. Pull the decompression pump tube from the Joint. 1. Disconnect the Cartridge Detection FFC from the connectors on the CRCM Board Assy.
2. Release the decompression pump tube and decompression pump cable from the guides.
Black: CN2 Magenta: CN3 Yellow: CN4 Cyan: CN5
3. Remove the three screws (S15: ), then remove the Decompression Pump Assy.
2. Remove the four screws (S12: ), then remove the CRCM Board Assy.

Confidential
7.3.4.8 ADF/SCN (1) (WF-C579R only)
OUTLINE
Time
Total
ADF/SCN Unit A 4 min --- 4 min
Document Mat B 4 min 18 sec --- 4 min 18 sec
Hinge Assy C 6 min 56 sec --- 6 min 56 sec
ADF Front Cover D 6 min 47 sec --- 6 min 47 sec
ADF Rear Cover E 9 min 40 sec --- 9 min 40 sec

Confidential
Start
Start

D1 E1 (→P. 421)

D2 E2 (→P. 421)
A3 B3 C3 Housing Left
D3 E3 (→P. 422)
D4 E4 (→P. 422)
B5 Open the ADF Unit C5 Hinge Assy

D5 E5 (→P. 423) (→P. 424)
B6 Document Mat D6 ADF Front Cover E6 ADF Rear Cover

(→P. 424) (→P. 425) (→P. 425)

Confidential
A1 B1 C1 A2 B2 C2
D1 E1 D2 E2
Rear Top
Rear Top Cover
Rear Cover (Back)
Dowel and Dowel and

Housing Left
No. Screw Type

No. Screw Type

Confidential
A3 B3 C3 A4 B4 C4
Housing Left ADF/SCN Unit
D3 E3 D4 E4
Left SCN USB cable

Rear
Clamp
Hooks
Rumiror
CN100
SCN PS cable
Terminal of
Hooks
Tab
Connector lock
Hook
1. Open the ADF/SCN Unit. C H E C K When disconnecting the SCN PS cable from the connector (CN799), make sure to
P O IN T
2. Remove the three screws (S4: ) that secure the Housing Left. unlock the connector lock beforehand.
Board.

Confidential
ADF/SCN Unit
B5
Open the ADF Unit
D5 E5
ADF/SCN Unit
ADF lock lever

ADF Unit
No. Screw Type

3. Open the ADF/SCN Unit. 1. Push the ADF lock lever in the direction of the arrow, and open the ADF Unit.
4. Remove the two screws (S4: ), then remove the ADF/SCN Unit in the direction of the
arrow.

Confidential
B6 C5
Document Mat Hinge Assy
Document Mat
Hinge Assy (Left) Hinge Assy (Right)
No. Screw Type

1. Remove the Document Mat. C H E C K When removing the Main Board Assy on the way to the target part, remove the Hinge
P O IN T
Assy (Left) only.
1. Remove the each screw (S4: ), and remove the two Hinge Assy.

Confidential
ADF Front Cover ADF Rear Cover

D6 E6
ADF Front Cover Dowels
Dowels
ADF Lower
Cover
ADF Base
Holes
Holes
ADF Front Cover

Hooks
ADF Right
Cover
No. Screw Type
No. Screw Type S4 C.B.P-TITE-SCREW-3x10-F.ZN-3C
1. Remove the two screws (S4: ) that secure the ADF Front Cover. 1. Remove the two screws (S4: ), then remove the ADF Lower Cover.
2. Disengage two hooks, then remove the ADF Front Cover in the direction of the arrow. 2. Remove the two screws (S4: ), then remove the ADF Right Cover.
Attach the four dowels to the holes of the ADF Base.

Confidential
ADF Rear Cover
Dowels Bottom
ADF Rear Cover Hook
Bottom
No. Screw Type

3. Remove the screw (S4: ) that secures the ADF Rear Cover.
4. Disengage the hook of the ADF Rear Cover, then remove the ADF Rear Cover.
Attach the two dowels of the ADF Rear Cover to the holes on the ADF Base.

Confidential
7.3.4.9 ADF/SCN (2) (WF-C579R only)
OUTLINE
Time
Total
ADF LD Roller Assy A 4 min 24 sec --- 4 min 24 sec
Separation Pad B 4 min 14 sec --- 4 min 14 sec
Separation Pad Spring C 4 min 18 sec --- 4 min 18 sec
ADF LD Roller Spring D --- --- ---
ADF LD Roller E 6 min 22 sec --- 6 min 22 sec
ADF Document Support F 4 min 14 sec --- 4 min 14 sec

Confidential
Start
Start

D1 E1 F1 (→P. 429)

D2 E2 F2 (→P. 429)
D3 E3 F3 (→P. 430)
D4 E4 F4 (→P. 430)
A5 B5 C5 ADF LD Roller Assy

D5 E5 F5 (→P. 431)
B6 Separation Pad D6 ADF LD Roller Spring F6 ADF Document Support

C6 (→P. 432) E6 (→P. 433) (→P. 434)
C7 Separation Pad Spring E7 ADF LD Roller

(→P. 432) (→P. 434)

Confidential
A1 B1 C1 A2 B2 C2
D1 E1 F1 D2 E2 F2
Rear Top
Rear Top Cover
Rear Cover (Back)
Dowel and Dowel and

Housing Left
No. Screw Type

No. Screw Type

Confidential
A3 B3 C3 A4 B4 C4
Housing Left ADF/SCN Unit
D3 E3 F3 D4 E4 F4
Left SCN USB cable

Rear
Clamp
Hooks
Rumiror
CN100
SCN PS cable
Terminal of
Hooks
Tab
Connector lock
Hook
1. Open the ADF/SCN Unit. C H E C K When disconnecting the SCN PS cable from the connector (CN799), make sure to
P O IN T
2. Remove the three screws (S4: ) that secure the Housing Left. unlock the connector lock beforehand.
Board.

Confidential
ADF/SCN Unit
A5 B5 C5
ADF LD Roller Assy
D5 E5 F5
Flathead
screwdriver
Dowel
ADF/SCN Unit (White)
ADF LD Roller Assy
Dowel
Dowel
No. Screw Type

3. Open the ADF/SCN Unit. 1. Open the ADF LD Roller Assy.

4. Remove the two screws (S4: ), then remove the ADF/SCN Unit in the direction of the 2. Disengage the two dowels, one each on the left and right sides, while pressing the dowel
arrow. (white) with a flathead screwdriver, and then remove the ADF LD Roller Assy.

Confidential
B6 C6 C7
Separation Pad Separation Pad Spring
Tab
Separation Pad
Leg of spring
Hook Hook
Separation Pad Spring

ADF Base
Dowels
1. Disengage two hooks of the Separation Pad. 1. Remove the Separation Pad Spring.
2. Disengage two dowels of the Separation Pad, then remove the Separation Pad. Set the leg of the Separation Pad Spring under the tab on the ADF Base.

Confidential
ADF LD Roller Spring

D6 E6
ADF Upper Paper Guide
ADF Upper Paper Guide ADF Cover Fixing Plate
Paper Feed Roller Shaft

ADF Sub
Cover
Groove and bearing

Hooks
No. Screw Type

1. Remove the two screws (S4: ) that secure the ADF Upper Paper Guide. 4. Pull the Paper Feed Roller Shaft in the direction of the arrow.
2. Disengage two hooks, and remove the ADF Upper Paper Guide from the ADF Cover and Set the groove the Paper Feed Roller Shaft on the bearing of the ADF Upper Paper
ADF Sub Cover. Guide.
3. Remove the screw (S4: ), then remove the Fixing Plate.
5. Remove the ADF LD Roller Spring.

Confidential
ADF LD Roller ADF Document Support

E7 F6
Stopper ADF Document Support
Dowel
ADF LD Roller ADF Upper Paper Guide

Dowel
1. Lift the ADF LD Roller to release the stopper of the ADF LD Roller from the ADF Upper 1. Disengage the two dowels of the ADF Document Support while bending it, then remove the
Paper Guide, then remove the ADF LD Roller. ADF Document Support.

Confidential
OUTLINE
Time
Total
Speaker Assy* A 7 min 29 sec --- 7 min 29 sec
WiFi Board B 3 min 15 sec --- 3 min 15 sec
FAX Board Assy* C 4 min 23 sec --- 4 min 23 sec
USB Interface Board* D 3 min 15 sec --- 3 min 15 sec
Relay Board Assy E 5 min 19 sec --- 5 min 19 sec
* : WF-C579R only

Confidential
Start
Start C H E C K As for the procedure indicated by, refer to 7.3.4.4
P O IN T Housing (WF-C529R) (2) (p. 366) in the case of the WF-
C529R Series, and remove the parts from the Rear Back
A1 B1 C1 Rear Cover (Back) Cover to the Housing Top.
D1 E1 (→P. 437)

D2 E2 (→P. 437)
D3 E3 (→P. 438)
A4 Maintenance Box Cover a

(→P. 438)
A5 Housing Right
(→P. 439)
A6 Housing Top
(→P. 439)
A7 Speaker Assy*2
(→P. 440)
B4 WiFi Board C4 FAX Board Assy*2 D4 USB Interface E4 Relay Board Assy
(→P. 440) (→P. 441) Board*1 (→P. 442) (→P. 442)
*1: Depending on the axial length of the driver, damage may occur on the screw head due to oblique cutting.
In such a case, remove the USB Interface Board after removing the Main Board Assy.
*2 : WF-C579R only.

Confidential
A1 B1 C1 A2 B2 C2
D1 E1 D2 E2
Rear Top
Rear Top Cover
Rear Cover (Back)
Dowel and Dowel and

Housing Left
No. Screw Type

No. Screw Type

Confidential
A3 B3 C3 A4
D3 E3
Rear Rear
Hook
Hooks

Hooks
Tab

Confidential
A5 A6
Rear
Housing Upper
Top
Hook
Tab

Unit.

Confidential
A7 B4
Speaker Assy WiFi Board
CRCM FFC
Top
CRCM FFC Sheet
Main Board Assy
Double-sided
tape Double-sided
tape
CN3 Cable Speaker Assy
Hook on the Wifi Board Holder
Speaker Holder
Cable
Slit

S4 C.B.P-TITE-SCREW-3x10-F.ZN-3C WiFi Board Connector S4 C.B.P-TITE-SCREW-3x10-F.ZN-3C
1. Disconnect the cable from the connector (CN3) on the Main Board Assy. 1. Peel off the CRCM FFC from the CRCM FFC Sheet.
2. Release the cable from seven slits on the Frame Base. 2. Peel off the CRCM FFC Sheet.
3. Remove the two screws (S4: ), then remove the Speaker Holder. 3. Disconnect the cable from the connector on the WiFi Board.
4. Remove the Speaker Assy. 4. Remove the screw (S4: ), then remove the WiFi Board.
Make sure to route the cable connecting the Wifi Board and the Main Board through
the hook on the Wifi Board Holder.

Confidential
FAX Board Assy

C4
FAX Board Assy
Acetate tape
Shield Plate
CN1
CN4
FAX Board
FAX FFC
Double-sided tape
Acetate tape
No. Screw Type

FAX Board Assy
No. Screw Type
1. Peel off the Fax FFC from the FAX Board Assy. 4. Remove the three screws (S5: ) that secure the Shield Plate.
2. Remove the three screws (S5: ), and slide the FAX Board Assy in the direction of the 5. Peel off a piece of acetate tape, and remove the Shield Plate.
arrow. 6. Disconnect the FFC from the connector (CN1, CN4) on the FAX Board Assy.
3. Peel off a piece of acetate tape, then remove the FAX Board Assy.

Confidential
USB Interface Board Relay Board Assy

D4 E4
CRCM FFC
Housing Front
CRCM FFC Sheet
Double-sided tape
Double-sided tape
USB Interface Board
CN33
No. Screw Type

1. Disconnect the cable from CN33 of the Main Board. 1. Peel off the CRCM FFC from the CRCM FFC Sheet.
2. Remove the two screws (S4: ), then remove the USB Interface Board. 2. Peel off the CRCM FFC Sheet.
Make sure to align the positioning holes on the USB Interface Board with the dowels
on the Housing Front.

Confidential
Relay Board Assy Relay Board Assy
Grounding cable
Left
Relay Board
Relay Board Assy
Shield Plate
No. Screw Type

S4 C.B.P-TITE-SCREW-3x10-F.ZN-3C No. Screw Type
S5 C.B.S-TITE-SCREW-3x6-F.ZN-3C S5 C.B.S-TITE-SCREW-3x6-F.ZN-3C
3. Disconnect the cables and FFCs from all connectors on the Relay Board Assy. 6. Remove the four screws (S5: ), and remove the Relay Board from the Shield Plate.
4. Remove the grounding cable from the Frame.
5. Remove the four screws (S4: x2, S5: x2), then remove the Relay Board Assy.

Confidential
OUTLINE
Time
Total
Main Board Assy A 21 min 43 sec 3 min 52 sec 25 min 35 sec
Power Supply Assy B 14 min 35 sec 6 min 20 min 35 sec
PDL Board C --- --- ---
SD Memory D --- --- ---

Confidential
Start
Start
a
Preparation for Data Back Up C4 PDL Board

Dissembling (→P. 686) (→P. 457)
D4
A1 B1 Rear Cover (Back)

(→P. 446) SD Memory
C1 D1 (→P. 458)
D5

C2 D2 (→P. 446)
A3 B3 Housing Left
(→P. 447) A10 B10 Cable Guide
C3 D3
(→P. 451)
A4 B4 Maintenance Box Cover a

A11 B11 PS Ground Plate
(→P. 447)
(→P. 452)
A5 B5 Housing Right
A12 Main Board Assy B12 Rear ASF Assy
(→P. 448)
(→P. 452) (→P. 455)
A6 B6 Housing Top
(→P. 448) After Data Restore B13 Rear ASF Upper Guide
assembling (→P. 688) Assy (→P. 456)
A7 B7 ADF/SCN Unit B14 Power Supply Assy

(→P. 449) (→P. 456)
A8 B8 Hinge Assy  As for the procedure indicated by , refer to 7.3.4.4

C H E C K
(→P. 450) P O IN T Housing (WF-C529R) (2) (p. 366) in the case of the
WF-C529R Series, and remove the parts from the Rear
A9 B9 Hinge Lower Cover Back Cover to the Housing Top.
(→P. 450)  The procedure indicated by is applicable only in the
WF-C579R series.

Confidential
A1 B1 A2 B2
C1 D1 C2 D2
Rear Top
Rear Top Cover
Rear Cover (Back)
Dowel and Dowel and

Housing Left
No. Screw Type

No. Screw Type

Confidential
A3 B3 A4 B4
C3 D3
Rear Rear
Hook
Hooks

Hooks
Tab

Confidential
A5 B5 A6 B6
Rear
Housing Upper
Top
Hook
Tab

Unit.

Confidential
ADF/SCN Unit
A7 B7
ADF/SCN Unit
Left SCN USB cable
Clamp
ADF/SCN Unit
Rumiror
CN100
SCN PS cable
Terminal of
No. Screw Type

Connector lock
Hook
P O IN T
arrow.
Board.

Confidential
A8 B8 A9 B9
Hinge Assy Hinge Lower Cover
Hinge Lower Hinge Lower

Hinge Assy (Left) Hinge Assy (Right) Cover (Left) Cover (Right)
Hinge Lower Cover

C H E C K When removing the Main Board Assy on the way to the target part, remove the Hinge C H E C K When removing the Main Board Assy on the way to the target part, remove the Hinge
P O IN T P O IN T
Assy (Left) only. Assy (Left) only.
1. Remove the each screw (S4: ), and remove the two Hinge Assy. 1. Remove the each three screws (S4: ), and remove the two Hinge Lower Cover.

Confidential
Cable Guide
A10 B10
Cable Guide
PS Cable

Guides
Cable Guide
Guide
Hook

No. Screw Type


Confidential
A11 B11 A12

PS Ground Plate Main Board Assy
Left
Double- Double-
PS Ground Plate sided tape CRCM FFC Sheet sided tape

No. Screw Type sided tape sided tape
1. Remove the two screws (S4: , S5: ), then remove the PS Ground Plate. 1. Peel off the CRCM FFC.
Depending on destination area, the Grounding cable of the power supply unit is 2. Peel off the CRCM FFC Sheet.
attached to the hole in the middle of the PS Ground Plate. If you removed the
Grounding cable, please attach it to the hole in the middle of the PS Ground Plate at
reassembly.

Confidential
Main Board Assy Main Board Assy
Back Connector lock Close CR motor cable Back

CN3
CN42 Clamps
Open
CN68 CN66 CN67 CN8
CN55 CN9 CN44 CN110 PE sensor cable Relay FFC

CN80 CN74 CN58 CN609 Ferrite core Clamp
CN33
CN77 CN75 CN73 CN72
FAX FFC
CN31
CN50 CN52 CN2
Double-sided tape
C H E C K When disconnecting the Panel FFC (CN42), make sure to unlock the connector lock 4. Peel off the Fax FFC from the Shield Plate, and Pull the Fax FFC out from the ferrite core.
P O IN T
beforehand. (WF-C579R only)
5. Release the PE sensor cable from the clamp.
3. Disconnect the following connectors from the board. (* are WF-C579R only) 6. Peel off the Relay FFC from the Shield Plate.
7. Release the CR motor cable from two clamps.
• CN2 • CN3* • CN8 • CN9 • CN31 • CN33*
• CN42 • CN44* • CN50 • CN52 • CN55 • CN58
• CN66 • CN67 • CN68 • CN72 • CN73 • CN74
• CN75 • CN77 • CN80 • CN110 • CN609

Confidential
Rear Inside
Main Board Assy
CN52
Hook
Main Board Assy
Double-sided tape
PF Encoder FFC
No. Screw Type

PF Scale S5 C.B.S-TITE-SCREW-3x6-F.ZN-3C
S10 C.B.S-TITE.P4.SCREW-3X8-F.ZN-3
8. Remove the following screws that secure the Main Board Assy. Secure the PF Encoder FFC with double-sided tape as shown above.
 WF-C579R: 9 pcs (S4: x4, S5: x2, S10: x1, S5: x2)
 WF-C529R: 7 pcs (S4: x4, S5: x2, S10: x1)
In the next step, be careful not to damage the PF Scale.
9. Disengage the hole of the Main Board Assy from the hook of the CR Guide Frame, then
remove the Main Board Assy upward.

Confidential
Rear ASF Assy

B12
Rear ASF Assy
Cable Guide
Solenoid cable
Rear ASF Assy
Rear ASF Paper

Detection Sensor cable
Relay Board
CN56
No. Screw Type

CN51 S4 C.B.P-TITE-SCREW-3x10-F.ZN-3C
1. Disconnect the cables from the connectors (CN51, CN56) on the Relay Board. 3. Remove the four screws (S4: ), and remove the Rear ASF Assy.
2. Release the solenoid cable and Rear ASF Paper Detection Sensor cable from the Cable
Guide.
 Route the solenoid cable through the five hooks ( ) on the Cable Guide.
 Route the Rear ASF Paper Detection Sensor cable through the three hooks ( ) on the Cable
Guide.

Confidential
B13 B14
Rear ASF Upper Guide Assy Power Supply Assy
FFC
PS Cable
Top
Ferrite Core Ferrite Core
Hooks
Slit Power Supply Assy Slit
AC Cable Hook Slit Hook Guide
Rea ASF Upper Guide Assy
Rear
Rear ASF Upper Guide Assy AC Inlet
No. Screw Type

No. Screw Type
1. Remove the screw (S4: ) that secures the AC Inlet. 1. Remove the screw (S4: ), then remove the Power Supply Assy.
2. Release the FFC from three hooks on the Rear ASF Upper Guide Assy.  Route the AC Cable through the two slits, two hooks and guide on the Rea ASF Upper Guide
3. Remove the four screws (S4: ), then remove the Rear ASF Upper Guide Assy. Assy.
 Route the PS Cable through the slit on the Rea ASF Upper Guide Assy.

Confidential
PDL Board
PDL Board
C4
Left
Left
CRCM FFC
FFC
CRCM FFC Sheet
Double-sided tape
Double-sided tape
PDL Board Assy
CN102
No. Screw Type

1. Peel off the CRCM FFC from the CRCM FFC Sheet. 3. Disconnect the FFC from the connector (CN102) on the PDL Board Assy.
2. Peel off the CRCM FFC Sheet. 4. Remove the screw (S5: ), then remove the PDL Board Assy.

Confidential
PDL Board
SD Memory
D4
PDL Board
Holder SD Memory
Shield Plate
PDL Board PDL Board

No. Screw Type
5. Remove the two screws (S5: ), then remove the PDL Board from the Shield Plate. 1. Slide the Holder in the direction of the arrow.
2. Raise the holder, then remove the SD Memory from the PDF Board.

Confidential
7.3.4.12 Electrical Components (3) (WF-C579R)
OUTLINE
Time
Total
Panel Assy A 5 min 36 sec --- 5 min 36 sec
Numpad Board Assy B 9 min 10 sec --- 9 min 10 sec
Relay Cable (Panel to

Main)

Confidential
Start
Start

(→P. 461)

(→P. 461)
(→P. 462)
A4 B4 C4 Maintenance Box Cover

(→P. 462)
(→P. 463)
A6 B6 C6 Housing Top
(→P. 463)
A7 B7 C7 Cable Guide
(→P. 464)
A8 B8 C8 Panel Assy
(→P. 465)
B9 C9 Panel Housing
(→P. 466)
B10 Numpad Board Assy C10 Relay Cable (Panel to Main)

(→P. 466) (→P. 467)

Confidential
A1 B1 A2 B2
C1 C2
Rear Top
Rear Top Cover
Rear Cover (Back)
Dowel and Dowel and

Housing Left
No. Screw Type

No. Screw Type

Confidential
A3 B3 A4 B4
C3 C4
Rear Rear
Hook
Hooks

Hooks
Tab

Confidential
A5 B5 A6 B6
C5 C6
Rear
Housing Upper
Top
Hook
Tab

Unit.

Confidential
Cable Guide
A7 B7
Cable Guide
C7
PS Cable

Guides
Cable Guide
Guide
Hook

No. Screw Type


Confidential
Panel Assy
A8 B8
Panel Assy
C8
Close
Right Panel Holder

FFC Tab
Open
Ferrite core
Bearing Panel Assy

Main Board
Assy
Double-sided tape
CN42
Shaft
Connector lock
No. Screw Type

C H E C K When disconnecting the FFC, make sure to unlock the connector lock beforehand. 4. Remove the two screws (S4: ), then remove the Right Panel Holder.
P O IN T
5. Release the shaft of the Panel Assy from bearing, then remove the Panel Assy.
1. Disconnect the FFC from the connector (CN42) on the Main Board Assy.
2. Peel off the FFC from the Frame Base.
3. Release the FFC from two tabs on the Frame Base.
Set the ferrite core of the FFC in the point shown above.

Confidential
B9 B10
Panel Housing Numpad Board Assy
C9
Panel FFCCover
Cover
Numpad Board Assy Panel Board
Relay Cable Double-sided tape CN311
OK NG
Panel Housing Hole Panel FFC Cover
Relay Cable Cover

Hooks Relay Cable Hook
No. Screw Type
No. Screw Type S4 C.B.P-TITE-SCREW-3x10-F.ZN-3C
1. Remove the six screws (S4: ) that secure the Panel Housing. 1. Peel off the Relay Cable Cover, and disconnect the FFC from the connector (CN311) on the
2. Disengage three hooks on the Panel Housing, and remove the Panel Housing. Panel Board.
3. Remove the Panel FFC Cover. 2. Remove the screw (S4: ), and remove the Relay Cable Cover.
3. Remove the four screws (S4: ), and remove the Numpad Board Assy.
Install the Panel FFC Cover as shown above.
4. Pull the Relay Cable out from the hole of the Panel Housing.

Confidential
Relay Cable (Panel to Main)

C10
Relay Cable
CN101
Connector lock
Panel Board
Close Open
C H E C K When disconnecting the FFC, make sure to unlock the connector lock beforehand.
P O IN T
1. Disconnect the Relay Cable from the connector (CN101) on the Panel Board.

Confidential
7.3.4.13 Electrical Components (4) (WF-C529R)
OUTLINE
Time
Total
Panel Assy A --- --- ---
Relay Cable (Panel to Main) B --- --- ---

Confidential
Start
Start
A1 Rear Back Cover

B1 (→P. 470)
A2 ASF Cover Assy

B2 (→P. 471)
A3 Front Cover Retainer

B3 Plate (→P. 471)
A4 Front Cover
B4 (→P. 472)
A5 Maintenance Box Cover A9 Cable Guide

B5 (→P. 472) B9 (→P. 474)
A6 Housing Right A10 Panel Assy

B6 (→P. 473) B10 (→P. 475)
A7 Housing Left
Panel Housing
B7 (→P. 473) (→P. 476)
B11
A8 Housing Top
B8 (→P. 474)
B12 (→P. 477)

Confidential
Rear Back Cover

A1 B1
Rear Back Cover
Rear
Top ASF Cover

Assy
Dowel Dowel
No. Screw Type


Confidential
A2 B2 A3 B3
ASF Cover Assy
Front Cover
Retainer Plate
Tabs
Front
Cover
No. Screw Type

Retainer Plate.

Confidential
A4 B4 A5 B5
Front Cover Maintenance Box Cover
Rear
Hook
Front Cover
1. Remove the Front Cover upward. 1. Disengage the hook, and remove the Maintenance Box Cover.

Confidential
A6 B6 A7 B7
Housing Right Housing Left
Rear Rear
Hooks
Housing Right
Hooks
Housing Left
Tab
Hooks
Tab
1. Remove the five screws (S4: ) that secure the Housing Right. 1. Remove the five screws (S4: ) that secure the Housing Left.
2. Lift the Housing Right upward to release the two hooks on the front side of the Housing 2. Lift the Housing Left upward to release the two hooks each on the front side and rear side of
Right, and then remove the Housing Right. the Housing Left, and then remove the Housing Left.
Insert the four tabs of the Housing Right to the positioning holes of the Ink Supply Insert the four tabs of the Housing Left to the positioning holes of the Ink Supply Unit.
Unit.

Confidential
A8 B8 A9 B9
Housing Top Cable Guide
Cable Guide
Housing Top

1. Remove six screws (S4: ), then remove the Housing Top. 1. Release the all cable from the Cable Guide.
2. Remove the two screws (S4: ), and remove the Cable Guide.

Confidential
Cable Guide
A10 B10
Panel Assy
Close
PS Cable

Guides FFC Tab
Open
Ferrite core
Guide
Main Board
Assy
Hook
Double-sided tape
CN42
Connector lock
The disassembling procedure for the Panel
C H E C K
P O IN T
Assy of the WF-C579R is explained here.
The appearance of the Panel Assy differs
between WF-C529R and WF-C579R, however,
the disassembly and assembly procedure itself
is the same.
 Route the PS cable through the two guides and hook on the Cable Guide. 1. Disconnect the FFC from the connector (CN42) on the Main Board Assy.
 Route the solenoid cable through the six hooks ( ) on the Cable Guide.
C H E C K When disconnecting the FFC, make sure to unlock the connector lock beforehand.
 Route the Rear Unit Detection Sensor cable and Rear ASF Paper Detection Sensor cable P O IN T
2. Peel off the FFC from the Frame Base.
3. Release the FFC from two tabs on the Frame Base.
Set the ferrite core of the FFC in the point shown above.

Confidential
Panel Assy
B11
Panel Housing
Panel FFC Cover
Right Panel Holder
OK NG
Bearing Panel Assy Hook Panel FFC Cover

Hook Panel Housing Hole
Shaft
Relay Cable Hooks

Hooks
4. Remove the two screws (S4: ), then remove the Right Panel Holder. 1. Remove the five screws (S4: ) that secure the Panel Housing.
5. Release the shaft of the Panel Assy from the bearing, then remove the Panel Assy. 2. Disengage five hooks on the Panel Housing, then remove the Panel Housing.
3. Remove the Panel FFC Cover.
Attach the Panel FFC Cover as shown above.
4. Pull the Relay Cable out from the hole of the Panel Housing.

Confidential
B12
Relay Cable
CN1 Connector lock
Panel Board Close Open
C H E C K When disconnecting the Relay Cable, make sure to unlock the connector lock
P O IN T
beforehand.
1. Disconnect the Relay Cable from the connector (CN1) on the Panel Board.

Confidential
7.3.4.14 Inksystem
OUTLINE
Time
Total
Inksystem Assy A 12 min 8 sec 6 min 15 sec 18 min 23 sec
Ink Porous Pad, 1 B 12 min 14 sec --- 12 min 14 sec
Maintenance Box Cover C 6 sec --- 6 sec
Maintenance Box Detection

D 9 min 49 sec --- 9 min 49 sec
Sensor Assy
Ink Porous Pad, 4 E --- --- ---

Confidential
Start
Start
A1 B1 Rear Cover (Back) C1 Maintenance Box Cover

E1 (→P. 480) D1 (→P. 487)
A2 B2 Rear Top Cover D2 Ink Porous Pad, 4

E2 (→P. 480) (→P. 487)
A3 B3 Housing Left
E3 (→P. 481)
A4 B4 Maintenance Box Cover

E4 (→P. 481)
A5 B5 Housing Right
E5 (→P. 482)
A6 B6 Housing Top
E6 (→P. 482)
A7 B7 ADF/SCN Unit
E7 (→P. 483)
A8 B8 Slide the Wasted Ink Duct

E8 Holder (→P. 484)
A9 E9 C H E C K  As for the procedure indicated by , refer to 7.3.4.4

Inksystem Assy Maintenance Box Detection
P O IN T Housing (WF-C529R) (2) (p. 366) in the case of the
B9 (→P. 484) Sensor Assy (→P. 488)
Back Cover to the Housing Top.
B10 Ink Porous Pad, 1  The procedure indicated by is applicable only in the
(→P. 486) WF-C579R series.

Confidential
A1 B1 A2 B2
E1 E2
Rear Top
Rear Top Cover
Rear Cover (Back)
Dowel and Dowel and

Housing Left
No. Screw Type

No. Screw Type

Confidential
A3 B3 A4 B4
E3 E4
Rear Rear
Hook
Hooks

Hooks
Tab

Confidential
A5 B5 A6 B6
E5 E6
Rear
Housing Upper
Top
Hook
Tab

Unit.

Confidential
ADF/SCN Unit
A7 B7
ADF/SCN Unit
E7
Left SCN USB cable
Clamp
ADF/SCN Unit
Rumiror
CN100
SCN PS cable
Terminal of
No. Screw Type

Connector lock
Hook
P O IN T
arrow.
Board.

Confidential
A8 B8 A9 B9
Slide the Wasted Ink Duct Holder Inksystem Assy
E8
Hook
Wasted Ink Tube
Tube clamp
Wasted Ink Duct Holder
Wasted Ink Duct Holder
No. Screw Type

1. Remove the two screws (S4: ) that secure the Wasted Ink Duct Holder. C H E C K Before removing the Inksystem Assy, release the carriage lock, and then move the CR
P O IN T
2. Disengage the hook, and slide the Wasted Ink Duct Holder to rear. Unit to center of the printer.
In the next step, waste ink may spill from the Wasted Ink Tube. Prepare waste cloths
or similar in advance.
1. Slide the tube clamp, and remove the Wasted Ink Tube from the Wasted Ink Duct Holder.

Confidential
Inksystem Assy Inksystem Assy
Top Hook Pump Encoder Sensor
FFC
Grounding cable
Slit
Upper Cap FFC Cover Upper Cap FFC Cover
FFC
Grounding cable Upper Cap Frame Relay connector
Tabs
Cable
S5 C.B.S-TITE-SCREW-3x6-F.ZN-3C S4 C.B.P-TITE-SCREW-3x10-F.ZN-3C
2. Remove the three screws (S5: ), then remove the Upper Cap Frame. 4. Disengage hook, then remove the Upper Cap FFC Cover.
Secure the grounding cables together with the screws. Route the FFC through the slit on the Upper Cap FFC Cover.
3. Disconnect the cable from the relay connector. 5. Disconnect the FFC from the Pump Encoder Sensor.
6. Release the FFC from the three tabs on the Inksystem Assy.

Confidential
Inksystem Assy
B10
Ink Porous Pad, 1
Ink Porous
Pad, 1
Inksystem Assy Guide
Wasted Ink Tube
Slit
Inksystem Assy
No. Screw Type

Pump motor cable
7. Remove the four screws (S4: ), and remove the Inksystem Assy. 1. Remove the Ink Porous Pad, 1.
 Route the Wasted Ink Tube through the guide on the Inksystem Assy.
 Route the pump motor cable through the slit on the Inksystem Assy.

Confidential
C1
Maintenance Box Cover Ink Porous Pad, 4
D1 D2
Rear Rear
Hook
Ink Porous Pad, 4
1. Disengage the hook, and remove the Maintenance Box Cover. 1. Peel off the Ink Porous Pad, 4.

Confidential
Maintenance Box Detection Sensor Assy

E9 Main Board Assy Connector Hooks
Maintenance Box Detection

Sensor Holder FFC Paper Feed Sensor Unit FFC
Top
FFC Main Frame Assy
FFC
No. Screw Type Maintenance Box

S4 C.B.P-TITE-SCREW-3x10-F.ZN-3C Detection Sensor
Double-sided tape
1. Remove the two screws (S4: ) that secure the Maintenance Box Detection Sensor Holder. 2. Disconnect the FFC of the Maintenance Box Detection Sensor from the connector on the
Main Board.
3. Release the FFC from four hooks on the Paper Feed Sensor Unit.
4. Peel off the FFC from the Main Frame Assy and maintenance box slot.

Confidential
FFC
Maintenance Box
Upper Cover
Gap
Paper Feed Sensor Unit
Maintenance Box
Detection Sensor Assy
5. Remove the Maintenance Box Detection Sensor Assy from the maintenance box slot.
Route in such a way that the FFC terminal (contact surface) is at the side of the Paper
Feed Sensor Unit from the gap of the Maintenance Box Upper Cover.

Confidential
7.3.4.15 Carriage Mechanism (1)
OUTLINE
Time
Total
CR Scale Torsion Spring A 7 min 23 sec --- 7 min 23 sec
CR Scale B 8 min 15 sec 2 min 25 sec 10 min 40 sec
Ink Supply Tube Assy C 15 min 21 sec 4 min 45 sec 20 min 6 sec
Seal Joint Head D 9 min 12 sec 4 min 45 sec 13 min 57 sec

Confidential
Start
Start C H E C K  As for the procedure indicated by , refer to 7.3.4.4
A1 B1 Rear Cover (Back) Cover to the Housing Top.
C1 D1 (→P. 492)  The procedure indicated by is applicable only in the WF-
C579R series.
C2 D2 (→P. 492)
A3 B3 Housing Left
C3 D3 (→P. 493)
A4 B4 Maintenance Box Cover C7 D7 ADF/SCN Unit

C4 D4 (→P. 493) (→P. 496)
A5 B5 Housing Right C8 D8 Head Upper Cover

C5 D5 (→P. 494) (→P. 497)
A6 B6 Housing Top C9 D9 Magnetic Valve Assy

C6 D6 (→P. 494) (→P. 497)
A7 B7 CR Scale Torsion Spring C10 Magnetic Valve Assy, B D10 Seal Joint Head
(→P. 495) (→P. 497) (→P. 502)
B8 CR Scale C11 Plate

(→P. 495) (→P. 498)
C12 Ink Supply Tube Assy

(→P. 499)

Confidential
A1 B1 A2 B2
C1 D1 C2 D2
Rear Top
Rear Top Cover
Rear Cover (Back)
Dowel and Dowel and

Housing Left
No. Screw Type

No. Screw Type

Confidential
A3 B3 A4 B4
C3 D3 C4 D4
Rear Rear
Hook
Hooks

Hooks
Tab

Confidential
A5 B5 A6 B6
C5 D5 C6 D6
Rear
Housing Upper
Top
Hook
Tab

Unit.

Confidential
A7 B7 B8
CR Scale Torsion Spring CR Scale
Full side Hook Side view CR Encoder Home side

Sensor
CR Scale
CR Scale Torsion Spring CR Scale Hook
CR Unit CR Scale
Main Frame
Marking
1. Remove the CR Scale Torsion Spring from the CR Scale. 1. At the full side, remove the CR Scale from hook on the frame.
2. Remove the CR Scale Torsion Spring from the Main Frame. 2. Pull the CR Scale out from the CR Encoder Sensor.
3. At the home side, turn the CR Scale 90 degrees upward, and remove it from the hook on the
frame.
When attaching the CR Scale, make sure the marking of it comes to the lower side at
the home side.
When attaching the CR Scale, make sure to engage it with the hook on the full side
frame first, then engage it with the hook on the home side frame.

Confidential
ADF/SCN Unit
ADF/SCN Unit
C7 D7
Left SCN USB cable
Clamp
ADF/SCN Unit
Rumiror
CN100
SCN PS cable
Terminal of
No. Screw Type

Connector lock
Hook
P O IN T
arrow.
Board.

Confidential
Head Upper Cover Magnetic Valve Assy

C8 D8 C9 D9
Tabs and positioning holes
Head Upper Cover CR Unit
Magnetic Valve Assy
Ink Tube
Joint Cover
Hook Rib
No. Screw Type

S7 C.B.P-TITE-SCREW-3x10-F.ZB-3C No. Screw Type
Film S4 C.B.P-TITE-SCREW-3x10-F.ZN-3C S13 SCREW, JOINT, HEAD
1. Remove the two screws (S7: ), and remove the Head Upper Cover. 1. Remove the screw (S13: ), then remove the Magnetic Valve Assy.
Attach the two tabs on the Head Upper Cover to the positioning holes of the CR Unit. Make sure the Magnetic Valve Assy is secured with the screw.
2. Remove the two screws (S4: ), and remove the Ink Tube Joint Cover.
3. Remove the film from the hook on the Ink Tube Joint Cover.
Set the film under the rib of the Ink Tube Joint Cover.

Confidential
Magnetic Valve Assy, B Plate

C10 C11
Plate
Plate
S6
Rib and hole
Plate

Ink Supply
Tube Assy Dowel and positioning hole
S13 SCREW, JOINT, HEAD Hexagon nut S6 C.B.(S-P1)SCREW,2.5X18,F/ZN-3C
1. Remove the screw (S13: ), then remove the Magnetic Valve Assy, B. 1. Remove the two screws (S6: ), and remove the Plate.
 When attaching the Magnetic Valve Assy, B, make sure to align the rib with the hole on the  When installing the Ink Supply Tube Assy to the Ink Supply Unit, make sure to tighten the
plate. screws using a torque driver with the specified torque.
 Make sure the Magnetic Valve Assy, B is secured with the screw.  Screw tightening torque: 0.25±0.03N⋅m

Confidential

C12
Tube Clamp Tube Holder Hook Ink Supply Tube Assy
87.5 ± 1 mm
Plate
Marking Hook

No. Screw Type
S8 C.B.EP-TITE SCREW,2.6X17(B=14),F/ZN-3C
In the following steps, ink may spill from the Ink Supply Tube Assy. Prepare waste 2. Remove the Ink Supply Tube Assy from the Tube Clamp.
cloths or similar in advance. At the marking point on the Ink Supply Tube Assy, attach the Ink Supply Tube Assy
to the Tube Clamp. If the marking is not visible, refer to the drawing above to attach
1. Remove the two screws (S8: ), and remove the Ink Supply Tube Assy from the Printhead. the Ink Supply Tube Assy.
 When attaching the plate, make sure to align the dowels on the Ink Supply Tube Assy with 3. Remove the Tube Holder while pressing the hooks outward.
the positioning holes on the plate.
 The screws that securing the plate (C.B.EP-TITE SCREW,2.6X17(B=14),F/ZN-3C) is
supplied as ASP.

Confidential
Ink Supply Tube Assy Ink Supply Tube Assy
Rear Right
Bottom
Joint
Left Front
No. Screw Type

4. Remove the screw (S4: ). Make sure to clean the Ink tube joint part of Printhead to perform the Ink Leak Check
5. Remove the Ink Supply Tube Assy from the Joint, and remove the Ink Supply Tube Assy. correctly.
When attaching the Ink Supply Tube Assy, make sure to clean the Ink tube joint part
of Printhead using cleaning stick (code: 1709718).
If ink is remained to ink tube joint part of Printhead, Ink Leak Check can not perform
correctly.
Therefore cleaning the ink surely.

Confidential
 Types of Ink Leak Measurement Jig Rear side
Part Name Part Code Photo Remark

LEAK TESTER 1684353
Smoked
SHEET FRONT Face
The smoked face is
put toward the upside.
10mm
Front side LEAK TESTER SHEET FRONT
90°
Rear side
Ink Leak Measurement Jig
90°
In this product, Ink Leak Check is necessary to prevent the ink leakage due to 1. Set the ink leak measurement jig to the Print Head.
assembly mistake. 2. Set the Ink Supply Tube Assy to the Printhead.
Therefore, make sure to install the ink leak measurement jig when installing the Ink
Tube to Printhead.  The smoked face of ink leak measurement jig is put toward the upside.
Before using the Leak Check Jig, push the ink leak measurement jig along the folds  When installing the Ink Supply Tube Assy, make sure to tighten the screws using a torque
until the fold angle become 90 degrees. driver with the specified torque.

Confidential
Seal Joint Head

D10
Plate

No. Screw Type
After ink charging, follow the instructions on the Ink leak check (p.291) to remove the In the following steps, ink may adhere from the Ink Supply Tube Assy. Prepare waste
LEAK TESTER SHEET FRONT, then perform Leak Check Judgment. cloths or similar in advance.
1. Remove the two screws (S8: ), and remove the Ink Supply Tube Assy from the Printhead.
 When attaching the plate, make sure to align the dowels on the Ink Supply Tube Assy with
supplied as ASP.

Confidential
Seal Joint Head
Wiping area
Printhead Connector
Seal Joint Head
2. Remove the Seal Joint Head between the Ink Supply Tube Assy and Printhead.
 If ink is remained to ink tube joint part of Ink Supply Unit, Ink Leak Check can not perform
correctly. Therefore cleaning the ink surely.
 When replacing the Printhead, replace the seal joint head with the new one because it cannot
be reused.
 Check the seal joint head is not double-installed.
 Check the seal joint head is inserted all the way.
 Check the foreign object does not adhere on the seal joint head.

Confidential
OUTLINE
Time
Total
Head Screw Assy A 8 min 31 sec --- 8 min 31 sec
Printhead B 10 min 38 sec 19 min 5 sec 29 min 43 sec
Head FFC Assy C 14 min 13 sec 17 min 1 sec 31 min 14 sec

Confidential

Start
A1 B1 Rear Cover (Back) Cover to the Housing Top.
C1 (→P. 506)  The procedure indicated by is applicable only in the WF-
C579R series.
C2 (→P. 506)
A3 B3 Housing Left
C3 (→P. 507)
A8 B8 Head Upper Cover
C8 (→P. 510)
C4 (→P. 507)
A9 B9 Magnetic Valve Assy
C9 (→P. 510)
A5 B5 Housing Right
C5 (→P. 508) A10 B10 Head Screw Assy
C10 (→P. 511)
A6 B6 Housing Top
C6 (→P. 508) B11 Printhead
C11 (→P. 512)
A7 B7 ADF/SCN Unit
C7 (→P. 509) C12 Cable Guide
(→P. 515)
C13 Head FFC Assy

(→P. 516)

Confidential
A1 B1 A2 B2
C1 C2
Rear Top
Rear Top Cover
Rear Cover (Back)
Dowel and Dowel and

Housing Left
No. Screw Type

No. Screw Type

Confidential
A3 B3 A4 B4
C3 C4
Rear Rear
Hook
Hooks

Hooks
Tab

Confidential
A5 B5 A6 B6
C5 C6
Rear
Housing Upper
Top
Hook
Tab

Unit.

Confidential
ADF/SCN Unit
A7 B7
ADF/SCN Unit
C7
Left SCN USB cable
Clamp
ADF/SCN Unit
Rumiror
CN100
SCN PS cable
Terminal of
No. Screw Type

Connector lock
Hook
P O IN T
arrow.
Board.

Confidential
A8 B8 A9 B9
C8 C9
Magnetic Valve Assy
Ink Tube
Joint Cover
Hook Rib
No. Screw Type


Confidential
Head Screw Assy

A10 B10
Head Screw Assy
C10
Head Screw
3 1
Plate
Head Screw

No. Screw Type
In the following steps, ink may adhere from the Ink Supply Tube Assy. Prepare waste 2. Remove the three Head Screws.
cloths or similar in advance. Tighten the screws in order given above.
1. Remove the two screws (S8: ), and remove the Ink Supply Tube Assy from the Printhaed.
 When attaching the Plate, make sure to align the dowels on the Ink Supply Tube Assy with
the positioning holes on the Plate.
 The screws that secure the Plate (C.B.EP-TITE SCREW,2.6X17(B=14),F/ZN-3C) are
supplied as ASP.

Confidential
Printhead
B11
Printhead
C11 Head FFC
Printhead Connectors Left Right

Head FFC Assy
Double-sided tape Double-sided tape
Head FFC
Lower left Lower right
Right
Connectors Upper left
Printhead Upper right

Lower right
① A (p. 513)
2
Do not touch the nozzle surface of the Printhead.
Upper right
1. Peel off the Head FFC Assy from the Printhead, then remove the Printhead.
2. Disconnect the Head FFC Assy from the four connectors of the Printhead.
Connect the Head FFC in the following steps.
1. Fold the FFCs as shown above.
2. Connect the FFCs to the connectors on the right side.

Confidential
Printhead Printhead
Left
4
Lower left
3
(p. 512) A
Upper left Seal Joint Head

Ink Tube Connector
Wiping area
Left
Make sure to clean the Ink tube joint part of Ink Supply Unit by using the Cleaning
stick.
 If ink is remained to ink tube joint part, Ink Leak Check can not perform correctly. Therefore
cleaning the ink surely.
3. Connect the FFCs to the connectors on the left side.  Replace the seal joint head with the new one because it cannot be reused.

Confidential
Printhead Printhead

LEAK TESTER 1684353
Smoked
SHEET FRONT Face
The smoked face is
10mm
90°
Rear side
90°

Confidential
Printhead
Cable Guide
C12
Cable Guide
No. Screw Type

After ink charging, follow the instructions on the Ink leak check (p.291) to remove the 1. Release the all cable from the Cable Guide.
LEAK TESTER SHEET FRONT, then perform Leak Check Judgment. 2. Remove the two screws (S4: ), and remove the Cable Guide.

Confidential
Cable Guide
Head FFC Assy

C13
Left
PS Cable CR Unit CR Encoder Sensor
Head FFC Assy
Guides
Guide
Hook

Tab Slit
 Route the PS cable through the two guides and hook on the Cable Guide. 1. Disconnect the Head FFC Assy from the connector on the CR Encoder Sensor.
 Route the solenoid cable through the six hooks ( ) on the Cable Guide. 2. Pull the Head FFC Assy out from the slit of the CR Unit.
through the three hooks ( ) and the three hooks ( )on the Cable Guide. Route the Head FFC Assy under the tab of the CR Unit.

Confidential
Head FFC Assy
Tabs Ferrite core
CN68/CN66/CN67
Head FFC Assy
Main Board
Assy
3. Release the Head FFC Assy from the seven tabs on the Frame Base.
4. Disconnect the Head FFC Assy from the connectors (CN66, CN67, CN68) on the Main
Board Assy.
Set the ferrite core of the Head FFC Assy in the point shown above.

Confidential
OUTLINE
Time
Total
CR Driven Pulley Assy A 26 min 37 sec --- 26 min 37 sec
CR Unit B --- --- ---
CR Motor Assy C 33 min 24 sec 32 min 2 sec 65 min 26 sec

Confidential
Start
Start a
A1 B1 Rear Cover (Back) A10 B10 Cable Guide B18 Printhead

C1 (→P. 520) C10 (→P. 525) C18 (→P. 533)
A2 B2 Rear Top Cover A11 B11 Rear ASF Assy B19 Frame Plate
C2 (→P. 520) C11 (→P. 526) C19 (→P. 536)
A3 B3 Housing Left A12 B12 PS Ground Plate B20 Main Frame Assy
(→P. 521) (→P. 527) C20 (→P. 537)
C3 C12
A4 B4 Maintenance Box Cover A13 B13 B21 CR Unit C21 CR Motor Assy
Rear ASF Upper Guide
C4 (→P. 521) Assy (→P. 527) (→P. 538) (→P. 538)
C13
A5 B5 Housing Right A14 CR Driven Pulley Assy B14 Main Board Assy
C5 (→P. 522) (→P. 528) (→P. 528)
C14
A6 B6 Housing Top B15 Head Upper Cover

C6 (→P. 522) C15 (→P. 531)
A7 B7 ADF/SCN Unit B16 Magnetic Valve Assy

(→P. 523) C16 (→P. 532)
C7
A8 B8 Hinge Assy B17 Head Screw Assy

(→P. 524) C17 (→P. 532)
C8
a
A9 B9 Hinge Lower Cover
C9 (→P. 524)
C H E C K  As for the procedure indicated by , refer to 7.3.4.4 Housing (WF-C529R) (2) (p. 366) in
P O IN T the case of the WF-C529R Series, and remove the parts from the Rear Back Cover to the
Housing Top.

Confidential
A1 B1 A2 B2
C1 C2
Rear Top
Rear Top Cover
Rear Cover (Back)
Dowel and Dowel and

Housing Left
No. Screw Type

No. Screw Type

Confidential
A3 B3 A4 B4
C3 C4
Rear Rear
Hook
Hooks

Hooks
Tab

Confidential
A5 B5 A6 B6
C5 C6
Rear
Housing Upper
Top
Hook
Tab

Unit.

Confidential
ADF/SCN Unit
A7 B7
ADF/SCN Unit
C7
Left SCN USB cable
Clamp
ADF/SCN Unit
Rumiror
CN100
SCN PS cable
Terminal of
No. Screw Type

Connector lock
Hook
P O IN T
arrow.
Board.

Confidential
A8 B8 A9 B9
C8 C9

Hinge Lower Cover

P O IN T P O IN T

Confidential
Cable Guide
A10 B10
Cable Guide
C10
PS Cable

Guides
Cable Guide
Guide
Hook

No. Screw Type


Confidential
Rear ASF Assy

A11 B11
Rear ASF Assy
C11
Cable Guide
Solenoid cable
Rear ASF Assy
Rear ASF Paper

Relay Board
CN56
No. Screw Type

Guide.
Guide.

Confidential
A12 B12 A13 B13

PS Ground Plate Rear ASF Upper Guide Assy
C12 C13
FFC
Top
PS Ground Plate
Hooks
Rear

1. Remove the two screws (S4: , S5: ), then remove the PS Ground Plate. 1. Remove the screw (S4: ) that secures the AC Inlet.
Depending on destination area, the Grounding cable of the power supply unit is 2. Release the FFC from three hooks on the Rear ASF Upper Guide Assy.
attached to the hole in the middle of the PS Ground Plate. If you removed the 3. Remove the four screws (S4: ), then remove the Rear ASF Upper Guide Assy.
reassembly.

Confidential
A14 B14
CR Driven Pulley Assy Main Board Assy
C14
CR Driven Pulley Assy Front Left
Double- Double-
CR Timing Belt
Rear

Extension Spring
1. Slide the CR Driven Pulley Assy in the direction of the arrow to remove the CR Timing 1. Peel off the CRCM FFC.
Belt from the CR Driven Pulley Assy. 2. Peel off the CRCM FFC Sheet.
2. Remove the Extension Spring, then remove the CR Driven Pulley Assy.

Confidential
Back Connector lock Close CR motor cable Back

CN3
CN42 Clamps
Open
CN68 CN66 CN67 CN8
CN55 CN9 CN44 CN110 PE sensor cable Relay FFC

CN80 CN74 CN58 CN609 Ferrite core Clamp
CN33
CN77 CN75 CN73 CN72
FAX FFC
CN31
CN50 CN52 CN2
Double-sided tape
C H E C K When disconnecting the Panel FFC (CN42), make sure to unlock the connector lock 4. Peel off the Fax FFC from the Shield Plate, and Pull the Fax FFC out from the ferrite core.
P O IN T
beforehand. (WF-C579R only)
5. Release the PE sensor cable from the clamp.
3. Disconnect the following connectors from the board. (* are WF-C579R only) 6. Peel off the Relay FFC from the Shield Plate.
• CN2 • CN3* • CN8 • CN9 • CN31 • CN33*
• CN42 • CN44* • CN50 • CN52 • CN55 • CN58
• CN66 • CN67 • CN68 • CN72 • CN73 • CN74
• CN75 • CN77 • CN80 • CN110 • CN609

Confidential
Rear Inside
Main Board Assy
CN52
Hook
Main Board Assy
Double-sided tape
PF Encoder FFC
No. Screw Type

8. Remove the following screws that secure the Main Board Assy. Secure the PF Encoder FFC with double-sided tape as shown above.
 WF-C579R: 9 pcs (S4: x4, S5: x2, S10: x1, S5: x2)
 WF-C529R: 7 pcs (S4: x4, S5: x2, S10: x1)
In the next step, be careful not to damage the PF Scale.

Confidential
B15 B16
C15 C16
Magnetic Valve Assy
Ink Tube
Joint Cover
Hook Rib
No. Screw Type


Confidential
Head Screw Assy

B17
Head Screw Assy
C17
Head Screw
3 1
Plate
Head Screw

No. Screw Type
In the following steps, ink may adhere from the Ink Supply Tube Assy. Prepare waste 2. Remove the three Head Screws.
cloths or similar in advance. Tighten the screws in order given above.
supplied as ASP.

Confidential
Printhead
B18
Printhead
C18 Head FFC
Printhead Connectors Left Right

Head FFC Assy
Head FFC
Right
Connectors Upper left
Printhead Upper right

Lower right
① A (p. 513)
2
Do not touch the nozzle surface of the Printhead.
Upper right
Connect the Head FFC in the following steps.

Confidential
Printhead Printhead
Left
4
Lower left
3
(p. 512) A
Upper left Seal Joint Head

Ink Tube Connector
Wiping area
Left
Make sure to clean the Ink tube joint part of Ink Supply Unit by using the Cleaning
stick.
 If ink is remained to ink tube joint part, Ink Leak Check can not perform correctly. Therefore
cleaning the ink surely.
3. Connect the FFCs to the connectors on the left side.  Replace the seal joint head with the new one because it cannot be reused.

Confidential
Printhead Printhead

LEAK TESTER 1684353
Smoked
SHEET FRONT Face
The smoked face is
10mm
90°
Rear side
90°

Confidential
Printhead
B19
Frame Plate
C19
Frame Plate
No. Screw Type

After ink charging, follow the instructions on the Ink leak check (p.291) to remove the 1. Remove the screw (S4: ), and remove the Frame Plate.
LEAK TESTER SHEET FRONT, then perform Leak Check Judgment.

Confidential
Main Frame Assy

B20
Main Frame Assy
C20
Ferrite core
Rear
Tabs
Head FFC Assy Ferrite core
CR motor cable
Double-sided tape Main Frame Assy Double-sided tape
Extension Spring
Front CR Timing Belt
No. Screw Type

S14 C.B.P-TITE-SCREW-3X16-FZN3C
CR Driven Pulley Assy
1. Release the Head FFC Assy from the seven tabs on the Frame Base. 4. Peel off the CSIC FFC from the frame.
Set the Ferrite Core of the Head FFC Assy in the point shown above. 5. Remove the three screws (S14: x2, S5: x1), then remove the Main Frame Assy.
 Fix CSIC FFC on the frame at the location shown in the figure above by using double-sided
tape at two locations.
2. Slide the CR Driven Pulley Assy in the direction of the arrow to remove the CR Timing  Route the CR Motor Cable with reference to the figure above.
Belt from the CR Driven Pulley Assy.
3. Remove the Extension Spring.

Confidential
B21
CR Unit CR Motor Assy
C21
Main Frame Cable holder
CR Unit
CR Motor Assy Clamps Cable
Bottom
Front Main Frame Assy
No. Screw Type

APG Slider S18 C.P.SCREW,3X4,F/ZN-3C
1. Slide the CR Unit in the direction of the arrow to remove it from the Main Frame. 1. Release the cable from four clamps on the Main Frame Assy.
Slide the CR Unit to the groove on the Main Frame while pressing the APG Slider in 2. Remove the two screws (S18: ), then remove the CR Motor Assy from the Main Frame
the direction of the arrow. Assy.
Install the CR Motor Assy with its cable holder facing upward.

Confidential
7.3.4.18 Paper Feed Mechanism (1)
OUTLINE
Time
Total
Stacker Assy A 6 sec --- 6 sec
PF Encoder Board Assy B 3 min 32 sec --- 3 min 32 sec
PF Scale C 2 min 47 sec --- 2 min 47 sec
Star Wheel Assy D 7 min 37 sec --- 7 min 37 sec
Rear Unit Detection

E 14 min 9 sec --- 14 min 9 sec
Sensor

Confidential
Start
Start
B1 C1 Rear Cover (Back) A1 Stacker Assy

D1 E1 (→P. 541) (→P. 541) a
B2 C2 Rear Top Cover E10 Cable Guide

D2 E2 (→P. 542) (→P. 548)
B3 C3 Housing Left E11 Rear ASF Assy

D3 E3 (→P. 542) (→P. 549)
Maintenance Box Cover B4 PF Encoder Board Assy E12 PS Ground Plate

D4 E4 (→P. 544) C4 (→P. 543) (→P. 550)
Housing Right C5 PF Scale E13 Rear ASF Upper Guide Assy

D5 E5 (→P. 544) (→P. 543) (→P. 550)
Housing Top E14 Rear Unit Detection Sensor

D6 E6 (→P. 545) (→P. 551)
ADF/SCN Unit D7 Star Wheel Assy

E7 (→P. 546) (→P. 545)
Hinge Assy
E8 (→P. 547)
Hinge Lower Cover C H E C K  As for the procedure indicated by , refer to 7.3.4.4

(→P. 547) P O IN T Housing (WF-C529R) (2) (p. 366) in the case of the WF-
E9
Cover to the Housing Top.
a  The procedure indicated by is applicable only in the WF-
C579R series.

Confidential
A1 B1 C1
Stacker Assy Rear Cover (Back)
D1 E1
Rear
Rear Cover (Back)
Dowel and Dowel and

Stacker Assy Housing Right positioning hole positioning hole
Housing Left
No. Screw Type

1. Remove the Stacker Assy in the direction of the arrow. 1. Remove the four screws (S4: ), then remove the Rear Cover (Back).

Confidential
B2 C2 B3 C3
Rear Top Cover Housing Left
D2 E2 D3 E3
Top Rear
Hooks
Rear Top Cover
Hooks
Tab
No. Screw Type Housing Left No. Screw Type
1. Remove the two screws (S4: ), then remove the Rear Top Cover. 1. Open the ADF/SCN Unit.

Confidential
B4 C4 C5
PF Encoder Board Assy PF Scale
Left
PF Scale
Left
PF Scale
Positioning holes
FFC
No. Screw Type

Dowels
S9 C.B.S-TITE SCREW,2X8,F/ZN-3C
1. Remove the screw (S9: ) that secures the PF Encoder Board Assy. 1. Peel off the PF Scale.
2. Disconnect the FFC from the connector on the PF Encoder Board Assy. The PF Scale cannot be reused once it is removed. Make sure to replace it with a new
3. Remove the PF Encoder Board Assy while avoiding collision with the PF Scale. one.
Attach the two dowels on the PF Encoder Board Assy to the positioning holes of the
frame.

Confidential
Maintenance Box Cover Housing Right

D4 E4 D5 E5
Rear Rear
Hook
Maintenance Box Cover Hook
Tab
No. Screw Type

Housing Right S4 C.B.P-TITE-SCREW-3x10-F.ZN-3C
1. Disengage the hook, and remove the Maintenance Box Cover. 1. Open the ADF/SCN Unit.
Unit.

Confidential
Housing Top Star Wheel Assy

D6 E6 D7
CR Unit
Housing Upper Star Wheel Assy
Top
No. Screw Type
Grounding Spring
S16 C.B.P-TITE (S-P1)SCREW,3X12,F/ZN-3C
No. Screw Type

1. Remove the six screws (S4: ), then remove the Housing Upper. 1. Remove the Grounding Spring.
2. Remove the two screws (S16: ) that secure the Star Wheel Assy.
3. Remove the Star Wheel Assy while sliding the CR Unit left and right.
Attach the Grounding Spring as shown above.

Confidential
ADF/SCN Unit
ADF/SCN Unit
E7
Left SCN USB cable
Clamp
ADF/SCN Unit
Rumiror
CN100
SCN PS cable
Terminal of
No. Screw Type

Connector lock
Hook
P O IN T
arrow.
Board.

Confidential

E8 E9

Hinge Lower Cover

P O IN T P O IN T

Confidential
Cable Guide
Cable Guide
E10
PS Cable

Guides
Cable Guide
Guide
Hook

No. Screw Type


Confidential
Rear ASF Assy
Rear ASF Assy

E11
Cable Guide
Solenoid cable
Rear ASF Assy
Rear ASF Paper

Relay Board
CN56
No. Screw Type

Guide.
Guide.

Confidential

E12 E13
FFC
Top
PS Ground Plate
Hooks
Rear

reassembly.

Confidential
Rear Unit Detection Sensor

E14
Back
Hook (long)
Rear Unit Detection Sensor Mechanical Contact Sensor Hook (short)
Connector Hook
Cable
Rear ASF Upper

Slit Guide Assy
1. Release the cable from the hook and slit on the Rear ASF Upper Guide Assy.
The length of the two hooks on mechanical contact sensor differs. See the following
and make sure to release the shorter hook first when removing the mechanical contact
sensor.
2. Disconnect the cable from the connector of the Rear Unit Detection Sensor.
3. Disengage hook by pushing up the sensor.

Confidential
OUTLINE
Time
Total
Rear Unit A 6 sec --- 6 sec
Retard Roller Extension

B 29 sec --- 29 sec
Spring
Retard Roller C 47 sec --- 47 sec
Paper Cassette 1 D 6 sec 3 min 40 sec 3 min 46 sec
Pickup Roller Assy E 22 sec --- 22 sec
C H E C K  Replace the Retard Roller and the Pickup Roller Assy at the
P O IN T same time.
 Time required for replacement in the set is as follows.
Disassembly/ Disassembly/
Total
Reassembly Reassembly
1 min 9 sec 45 sec 1 min 54 sec

Confidential
Start
Start
A1 B1 Rear Unit D1 Paper Cassette 1

C1 E1 (→P. 554) (→P. 556)
B2 Feed Roller Cover E2 Pickup Roller Assy

C2 (→P. 554) (→P. 556)
B3 Retard Roller Extension

C3 Spring (→P. 555)
C4 Retard Roller
(→P. 555)

Confidential
A1 B1 C1 B2 C2
Rear Unit Feed Roller Cover
E1
Back
Feed Roller Cover
Buttons
Hooks
Rear Unit
1. Remove the Rear Unit in the direction of the arrow while pressing the buttons inward. 1. Disengage two hooks of the Feed Roller Cover while pushing them inward, then remove the
Feed Roller Cover.

Confidential
B3 C3 C4
Retard Roller Extension Spring Retard Roller
Retard Roller
Shaft and bearing Shaft and bearing
Retard Roller Extension Spring
1. Remove the Retard Roller Extension Spring. 1. Remove the Retard Roller.
Attach the two bearings of the Retard Roller to the shafts of the Frame Base.

Confidential
Paper Cassette 1 Pickup Roller Assy

D1 E2
Lever
Pickup Roller Assy
Lever
Lever
Shafts
Paper Cassette 1
1. Pull out the Paper Cassette 1. 1. Rotate the Pickup Roller Assy in the direction of the arrow while pushing three levers.
2. Disengage two bearing of the Pickup Roller Assy from the shafts of the Frame Base, then
remove the Pickup Roller Assy.

Confidential
OUTLINE
Time
Total
Rear ASF Assy A 10 min 25 sec 1 min 40 sec 12 min 5 sec
Rear ASF Paper Detection

B 14 min 11 sec --- 14 min 11 sec
Sensor
Rear ASF Solenoid C 11 min 40 sec --- 11 min 40 sec

Confidential
Start
P O IN T Housing (WF-C529R) (2) (p. 366) in the case of the
A1 B1 Rear Cover (Back) Back Cover to the Housing Top.
C1 (→P. 559)  The procedure indicated by is applicable only in the
WF-C579R series.
C2 (→P. 559)
A3 B3 Housing Left
C3 (→P. 560)

C4 (→P. 560)
A5 B5 Housing Right
C5 (→P. 561)
A6 B6 Housing Top
C6 (→P. 561)
A7 B7 ADF/SCN Unit
C7 (→P. 562)
A8 B8 Hinge Assy
C8 (→P. 563)
A9 B9 Hinge Lower Cover B11 Plate

C9 (→P. 563) C11 (→P. 565)
A10 B10 Rear ASF Assy B12 Rear ASF Paper Detection C12 Rear ASF Solenoid
C10 (→P. 564) Sensor (→P. 565) (→P. 566)

Confidential
A1 B1 A2 B2
C1 C2
Rear Top
Rear Top Cover
Rear Cover (Back)
Dowel and Dowel and

Housing Left
No. Screw Type

No. Screw Type

Confidential
A3 B3 A4 B4
C3 C4
Rear Rear
Hook
Hooks

Hooks
Tab

Confidential
A5 B5 A6 B6
C5 C6
Rear
Housing Upper
Top
Hook
Tab

Unit.

Confidential
ADF/SCN Unit
A7 B7
ADF/SCN Unit
C7
Left SCN USB cable
Clamp
ADF/SCN Unit
Rumiror
CN100
SCN PS cable
Terminal of
No. Screw Type

Connector lock
Hook
P O IN T
arrow.
Board.

Confidential
A8 B8 A9 B9
C8 C9

Hinge Lower Cover

P O IN T P O IN T

Confidential
Rear ASF Assy

A10 B10
Rear ASF Assy
C10
Cable Guide
Solenoid cable
Rear ASF Assy
Rear ASF Paper

Relay Board
CN56
No. Screw Type

Guide.
 Route the Rear ASF Paper Detection Sensor cable through the three hooks ( ) on
the Cable Guide.

Confidential
B11 B12
Plate Rear ASF Paper Detection Sensor
C11
Plate
Rear ASF Assy
Rear ASF Paper

Detection Sensor
Cable
Rear ASF Paper
Hook Detection Sensor cable
Acetate tape
Hole Hooks
Grooves
No. Screw Type

1. Peel off a piece of acetate tape, and release the Rear ASF Paper Detection Sensor cable 1. Disconnect the cable from the connector of the Rear ASF Paper Detection Sensor.
from the hole, hook and two grooves on the Rear ASF Assy. 2. Disengage four hooks, and remove the Rear ASF Paper Detection Sensor.
2. Remove the four screws (S4: ), and remove the Plate.

Confidential
Rear ASF Solenoid

C12
Bottom
Cable Slit
Slits
Hook
Extension Spring
Hole Rear ASF Solenoid
No. Screw Type

1. Release the solenoid cable from the hole, hook and six slits on the Rear ASF Assy.
3. Remove the screw (S4: ), and remove the Rear ASF Solenoid.

Confidential
OUTLINE
Time
Total
PE Lever Assy A 32 min 47 sec 31 min 2 sec 63 min 49 sec
Paper Guide Upper Assy B 33 min 25 sec 31 min 2 sec 64 min 27 sec

C 33 min 16 sec 31 min 2 sec 64 min 18 sec
Spring

Confidential
Start
Start C H E C K  As for the procedure indicated by , refer to
P O IN T 7.3.4.4 Housing (WF-C529R) (2) (p. 366) in the
case of the WF-C529R Series, and remove the parts
A1 B1 Rear Cover (Back) A10 B10 Cable Guide from the Rear Back Cover to the Housing Top.
C1 (→P. 569) C10 (→P. 574)  The procedure indicated by is applicable only in
the WF-C579R series.
A2 B2 Rear Top Cover A11 B11 Rear ASF Assy
C2 (→P. 569) C11 (→P. 575)
A3 B3 Housing Left A12 B12 PS Ground Plate

C3
(→P. 570) (→P. 576)
C12
A4 B4 Maintenance Box Cover A13 B13 A18 B18 Printhead

Rear ASF Upper Guide
(→P. 570) Assy (→P. 576) C18 (→P. 581)
C4 C13
A5 B5 Housing Right A14 B14 Main Board Assy A19 B19 Frame Plate
C5 (→P. 571) (→P. 577) C19 (→P. 585)
C14
A6 B6 Housing Top A15 B15 Head Upper Cover A20 B20 Main Frame Assy
C6 (→P. 571) (→P. 579) C20 (→P. 585)
C15
A7 B7 ADF/SCN Unit A16 B16 Magnetic Valve Assy a

C7 (→P. 572) C16 (→P. 580)
A8 B8 Hinge Assy A17 B17 Head Screw Assy

C8 (→P. 573) C17 (→P. 580)
A9 B9 Hinge Lower Cover

(→P. 573) a
C9
A21 PE Lever Assy B21 Paper Guide Upper C21 Paper Guide Upper Assy
(→P. 586) Assy (→P. 587) Spring (→P. 587)

Confidential
A1 B1 A2 B2
C1 C2
Rear Top
Rear Top Cover
Rear Cover (Back)
Dowel and Dowel and

Housing Left
No. Screw Type

No. Screw Type

Confidential
A3 B3 A4 B4
C3 C4
Rear Rear
Hook
Hooks

Hooks
Tab

Confidential
A5 B5 A6 B6
C5 C6
Rear
Housing Upper
Top
Hook
Tab

Unit.

Confidential
ADF/SCN Unit
A7 B7
ADF/SCN Unit
C7
Left SCN USB cable
Clamp
ADF/SCN Unit
Rumiror
CN100
SCN PS cable
Terminal of
No. Screw Type

Connector lock
Hook
P O IN T
arrow.
Board.

Confidential
A8 B8 A9 B9
C8 C9

Hinge Lower Cover

P O IN T P O IN T

Confidential
Cable Guide
A10 B10
Cable Guide
C10
PS Cable

Guides
Cable Guide
Guide
Hook

No. Screw Type


Confidential
Rear ASF Assy

A11 B11
Rear ASF Assy
C11
Cable Guide
Solenoid cable
Rear ASF Assy
Rear ASF Paper

Relay Board
CN56
No. Screw Type

Guide.
the Cable Guide.

Confidential
A12 B12 A13 B13

C12 C13
FFC
Top
PS Ground Plate
Hooks
Rear

reassembly.

Confidential
Main Board Assy

A14 B14
Main Board Assy
C14 Back Connector lock Close
CN3
CN42
Left
Open
Double- Double-
CN68 CN66 CN67 CN8
CN55 CN9 CN44 CN110
CN80 CN74 CN58 CN609

CN33
CN77 CN75 CN73 CN72
CN31
CN50 CN52 CN2

1. Peel off the CRCM FFC. C H E C K When disconnecting the Panel FFC (CN42), make sure to unlock the connector lock
P O IN T
2. Peel off the CRCM FFC Sheet. beforehand.
3. Disconnect the following connectors from the board. (* are WF-C579R only)
• CN2 • CN3* • CN8 • CN9 • CN31 • CN33*

• CN42 • CN44* • CN50 • CN52 • CN55 • CN58
• CN66 • CN67 • CN68 • CN72 • CN73 • CN74
• CN75 • CN77 • CN80 • CN110 • CN609

Confidential
CR motor cable Back Rear Inside
Clamps
Hook
PE sensor cable Relay FFC Main Board Assy

Ferrite core Clamp
FAX FFC
No. Screw Type

Double-sided tape S5 C.B.S-TITE-SCREW-3x6-F.ZN-3C
4. Peel off the Fax FFC from the Shield Plate, and Pull the Fax FFC out from the ferrite core. 8. Remove the following screws that secure the Main Board Assy.
(WF-C579R only)  WF-C579R: 9 pcs (S4: x4, S5: x2, S10: x1, S5: x2)
5. Release the PE sensor cable from the clamp.  WF-C529R: 7 pcs (S4: x4, S5: x2, S10: x1)
6. Peel off the Relay FFC from the Shield Plate. In the next step, be careful not to damage the PF Scale.

Confidential
Main Board Assy

A15 B15
Head Upper Cover
C15

Main Board Assy
Head Upper Cover

CN52
Ink Tube
Joint Cover
Double-sided tape
PF Encoder FFC
Hook Rib
No. Screw Type

S7 C.B.P-TITE-SCREW-3x10-F.ZB-3C
Film S4 C.B.P-TITE-SCREW-3x10-F.ZN-3C
Secure the PF Encoder FFC with double-sided tape as shown above. 1. Remove the two screws (S7: ), and remove the Head Upper Cover.
Attach the two tabs on the Head Upper Cover to the positioning holes of the CR Unit.

Confidential
A16 B16 A17 B17

Magnetic Valve Assy Head Screw Assy
C16 C17
CR Unit
Magnetic Valve Assy
Plate

S13 SCREW, JOINT, HEAD S8 C.B.EP-TITE SCREW,2.6X17(B=14),F/ZN-3C
1. Remove the screw (S13: ), then remove the Magnetic Valve Assy. In the following steps, ink may adhere from the Ink Supply Tube Assy. Prepare waste
Make sure the Magnetic Valve Assy is secured with the screw. cloths or similar in advance.
supplied as ASP.

Confidential
Head Screw Assy

A18 B18
Printhead
C18
Head Screw
2
Head FFC Assy Printhead Connectors
3 1
Connectors
Head Screw Printhead
2. Remove the three Head Screws. Do not touch the nozzle surface of the Printhead.
Tighten the screws in order given above.

Confidential
Printhead Printhead
Left
Head FFC 4
Lower left
3
(p. 512) A
Left Right Upper left
Head FFC
Left
Right
Upper left
Upper right
Lower right
① A (p. 513)
2
Upper right
Connect the Head FFC in the following steps. 3. Connect the FFCs to the connectors on the left side.

Confidential
Printhead Printhead
 Types of Ink Leak Measurement Jig

LEAK TESTER 1684353
Smoked
SHEET FRONT Face
Seal Joint Head
Ink Tube Connector 10mm
Wiping area
90°
90°
Make sure to clean the Ink tube joint part of Ink Supply Unit by using the Cleaning In this product, Ink Leak Check is necessary to prevent the ink leakage due to
stick. assembly mistake.
 If ink is remained to ink tube joint part, Ink Leak Check can not perform correctly. Therefore Tube to Printhead.
cleaning the ink surely. Before using the Leak Check Jig, push the ink leak measurement jig along the folds
 Replace the seal joint head with the new one because it cannot be reused. until the fold angle become 90 degrees.

Confidential
Printhead Printhead
Rear side
The smoked face is

Rear side
1. Set the ink leak measurement jig to the Print Head. After ink charging, follow the instructions on the Ink leak check (p.291) to remove the
2. Set the Ink Supply Tube Assy to the Printhead. LEAK TESTER SHEET FRONT, then perform Leak Check Judgment.
 The smoked face of ink leak measurement jig is put toward the upside.
 When installing the Ink Supply Tube Assy, make sure to tighten the screws using a torque
driver with the specified torque.

Confidential
A19 B19 A20 B20

Frame Plate Main Frame Assy
C19 C20
Rear
Tabs
Frame Plate
Extension Spring
No. Screw Type

S4 C.B.P-TITE-SCREW-3x10-F.ZN-3C CR Driven Pulley Assy
1. Remove the screw (S4: ), and remove the Frame Plate. 1. Release the Head FFC Assy from the seven tabs on the Frame Base.
Set the Ferrite Core of the Head FFC Assy in the point shown above.
2. Slide the CR Driven Pulley Assy in the direction of the arrow to remove the CR Timing

Confidential
Main Frame Assy

A21
PE Lever Assy
Ferrite core
CR motor cable
Front No gap Main Frame

PE Lever Assy
No. Screw Type

No. Screw Type
S14 C.B.P-TITE-SCREW-3X16-FZN3C Sensor Holder S5 C.B.S-TITE-SCREW-3x6-F.ZN-3C
4. Peel off the CSIC FFC from the frame. 1. Remove the screw (S5: ), and remove the PE Lever Assy from the Main Frame.
5. Remove the three screws (S14: x2, S5: x1), then remove the Main Frame Assy. Confirm there are no gaps between the Sensor Holder and the Main Frame.
 Fix CSIC FFC on the frame at the location shown in the figure above by using double-sided
tape at two locations.
 Route the CR Motor Cable with reference to the figure above.

Confidential
B21
Paper Guide Upper Assy Paper Guide Upper Assy Spring
C21
Hook
Hooks
Main Frame Assy Main Frame Assy
Paper Guide Upper Assy Paper Guide Upper Assy Spring Paper Guide Upper Assy
1. Disengage four hooks of the Paper Guide Upper Assy, and remove the Paper Guide Upper 1. Remove the three Paper Guide Upper Assy Spring from each two hooks on the Main Frame
Assy from the Main Frame Assy. Assy using a Longnose pliers.

Confidential
OUTLINE
Time
Total
Feed Sensor A --- --- ---
Cassette Detection Sensor B --- --- ---
Feed Sensor Detection Lever C --- --- ---
Feed Sensor Detection Lever

D --- --- ---
Spring
ASF Drive Gear Assy E 17 min 10 sec 11 min 40 sec 28 min 50 sec
Cassette Paper Detection

F --- --- ---
Sensor

Confidential
Start
a
A1 B1 C1 Rear Cover (Back) A9 B9 C9 Peel off the CRCM FFC
D1 E1 F1 (→P. 590) D9 E9 F9 (→P.C1595) E15 ASF Drive Gear Assy
F15 (→P. 602)
A2 B2 C2 Rear Top Cover A10 B10 C10 Magnetic Valve Assy, B
(→P. 590) D10 E10 F10 (→P.C1595)
D2 E2 F2 F16 Cassette Paper Detection
Sensor (→P. 603)
A3 B3 C3 A11 B11 C11 Plate
Housing Left
(→P. 591) D11 E11 F11 (→P.C1
596)
D3 E3 F3
A12 B12 C12 Guide Cover

A4 B4 C4 Maintenance Box Cover (→P.C1
596)
D12 E12 F12
D4 E4 F4 (→P. 591)
A13 B13 C13 Ink Supply Unit
A5 B5 C5 Housing Right D13 E13 F13 (→P.C1
597)
D5 E5 F5 (→P. 592)
A14 B14 C14 Retard Roller Assy
A6 B6 C6 Housing Top D14 E14 F14 (→P. 599)
D6 E6 F6 (→P. 592)
A15 C15 Feed Sensor Assy B15 Cassette Detection Sensor a
A7 B7 C7 D15 (→P.C1
599) (→P. 600)
ADF/SCN Unit
D7 E7 F7 (→P. 593)
A16 Feed Sensor C16 Feed Sensor Detection Lever
(→P. 600) D16 (→P. 601)
A8 B8 C8 Cable Guide
D8 E8 F8 (→P. 594) D17 Feed Sensor Detection Lever
Spring (→P. 601)
C H E C K  As for the procedure indicated by , refer to 7.3.4.4 Housing (WF-C529R) (2) (p. 366)
P O IN T in the case of the WF-C529R Series, and remove the parts from the Rear Back Cover to the
Housing Top.

Confidential
A1 B1 C1 A2 B2 C2
D1 E1 F1 D2 E2 F2
Rear Top
Rear Top Cover
Rear Cover (Back)
Dowel and Dowel and

Housing Left
No. Screw Type

No. Screw Type

Confidential
A3 B3 C3 A4 B4 C4
D3 E3 F3 D4 E4 F4
Rear Rear
Hook
Hooks

Hooks
Tab

Confidential
A5 B5 C5 A6 B6 C6
D5 E5 F5 D6 E6 F6
Rear
Housing Upper
Top
Hook
Tab

Unit.

Confidential
ADF/SCN Unit
A7 B7 C7
ADF/SCN Unit
D7 E7 F7
Left SCN USB cable
Clamp
ADF/SCN Unit
Rumiror
CN100
SCN PS cable
Terminal of
No. Screw Type

Connector lock
Hook
P O IN T
arrow.
Board.

Confidential
Cable Guide
A8 B8 C8
Cable Guide
D8 E8 F8
PS Cable

Guides
Cable Guide
Guide
Hook

No. Screw Type


Confidential
A9 B9 C9 A10 B10 C10

D9 E9 F9 D10 E10 F10
Back
Main Board
CRCM FFC
Left Plate
CN68 CN66 CN67

Double-sided tape
Rib and hole
No. Screw Type

plate.


Confidential
A11 B11 C11 A12 B12 C12

Plate Guide Cover
D11 E11 F11 D12 E12 F12
Plate
Guide Cover
S6
Plate
Ink Supply
arrow.

Confidential
Ink Supply Unit

A13 B13 C13
Ink Supply Unit
D13 E13 F13 Rear Top
Left Relay Board

CN55
CN10
CN54
CN22
CN11
CN12
CN30
Decompression
Pump cable
CN31
CN2 Top
Decompression
Pump cable Hole


Confidential
Right Left Tube

PF scale Rib
Joint of ink tube
positioning holes
Handle part
Joint
Printer
Joint
Metal frame


Confidential
A14 B14 C14 A15 C15

Retard Roller Assy Feed Sensor Assy
D14 E14 F14 D15
Rear
Rear
Feed Sensor Assy
Retard Roller Assy
Bottom Feed Sensor Assy

Backside of Feed Sensor Assy
Cable
Dowel and positioning hole Feed Sensor cable Feed Sensor
No. Screw Type Hook No. Screw Type

Frame Base
S4 C.B.P-TITE-SCREW-3x10-F/ZN-3C Notch S4 C.B.P-TITE-SCREW-3x10-F/ZN-3C
1. Remove the three screws (S4: ), then remove the Retard Roller Assy. In the next step, do not remove the Feed Sensor Assy too far since the Feed Sensor is
When attaching the retard Roller Assy, make sure to align the positioning hole on the inside the Feed Sensor Assy, and the cable is connected to the Feed Sensor.
Retard Roller Assy with the dowels on the Frame Base.
1. Remove the two screws (S4: ), then remove the Feed Sensor Assy
Pull out the Feed Sensor cable from the slit on the Feed Sensor Assy, then route the
cable through the two hooks and notch shown above.

Confidential
A16 B15
Feed Sensor Cassette Detection Sensor
Rear
Rear
Feed Sensor cable
Hooks (x2)
Hooks (x2)
Bottom Cassette Detection Sensor

Hook (long)
Connector Feed Sensor
Cassette Detection Sensor Hook (short)

Connector Cable
Notch
1. Release the four hooks to remove the Feed Sensor. Length of each hook on the Cassette Detection Sensor differs. When removing the
2. Disconnect the Feed Sensor cable from the connector, then remove the Feed Sensor. Cassette Detection Sensor, release the shorter hook referring to the figure above.
Route the Feed Sensor cable through the three notches shown above.
1. Release the shorter hook on the Cassette Detection Sensor to remove the Cassette Detection
Sensor.
2. Release the cable from the connector, then remove the Cassette Detection Sensor.

Confidential
C16
Feed Sensor Detection Lever Feed Sensor Detection Lever Spring
D16 D17
Rear
Frame Base
Feed Sensor Detection Lever Spring

Feed Sensor Detection Lever Spring
Hole
Hole
Feed Sensor Detection Lever
Rib Feed Sensor Detection Lever
1. Release the foot of the Feed Sensor Detection Lever Spring from the rib. 1. Remove the Feed Sensor Detection Lever Spring from the Feed Sensor Detection Lever.
2. Pull the Feed Sensor Detection Lever out from the Frame Base while warping the Feed
Sensor Detection Lever.

Confidential
ASF Drive Gear Assy
ASF Drive Gear Assy

Bottom
E15 F15
Rear
Drive Gear Shaft
Cassette Paper
Detection Sensor
Bottom
Cable
Connector
ASF Drive Gear Assy ASF Drive Gear
No. Screw Type

S4
Hook
C.B.P-TITE-SCREW-3x10-F/ZN-3C
Notch
1. Remove the two screws (S4: ) that secure the ASF Drive Gear Assy. In the next step, do not remove the ASF Drive Gear Assy too far since the Cassette
Paper Detection Sensor is inside the ASF Drive Gear Assy, and the cable is connected
to the Cassette Paper Detection Sensor.
2. Release the cable from the two hooks and notch, then disconnect the cable from the
connector of the Cassette Paper Detection Sensor.
3. Remove the ASF Drive Gear Assy from the Drive Gear Shaft, then remove the ASF Drive
Gear Assy.
Route the Cassette Paper Detection Sensor cable through the two hooks and notch
shown above.

Confidential
Cassette Paper Detection Sensor

F16
ASF Drive Gear Assy
Hook
1. Release the four hooks to remove the Cassette Paper Detection Sensor.

Confidential
OUTLINE
Time
Total
PE Sensor A --- --- ---
Drive Gear Shaft B 15 min 53 sec 11 min 40 sec 27 min 33 sec
Drive Gear Assy C 38 min 57 sec 40 min 12 sec 79 min 9 sec

Confidential
Start
Start
A1 Rear Cover (Back) A9 Hinge Lower Cover A17 Head Screw Assy A23 Ink Supply Tube Assy
B1 (→P. 607) B9 (→P. 611) B17 (→P. 618) B23 (→P. 625)
C1 C9 C17 C23
a
A2 Rear Top Cover A10 Cable Guide A18 Printhead
B2 (→P. 607) B10 (→P. 612) B18 (→P. 619)
C2 C10 C18
A3 Housing Left A11 Rear ASF Assy A19 Frame Plate

B3 (→P. 608) B11 (→P. 613) B19 (→P. 623)
C3 C11 C19
A4 Maintenance Box Cover A12 PS Ground Plate A20 Main Frame Assy
B4 (→P. 608) B12 (→P. 614) B20 (→P. 623)
C4 C12 C20
A5 Housing Right A13 Rear ASF Upper Guide A21 Magnetic Valve Assy, B
(→P. 609) B13 Assy (→P. 614) B21 (→P. 624)
B5
C5 C13 C21
A6 Housing Top A14 Main Board Assy A22 Plate

(→P. 609) B14 (→P. 615) B22 (→P. 625)
B6
C14 C22
C6
A7 ADF/SCN Unit A15 Head Upper Cover

B7 (→P. 610) B15 (→P. 617)
C7 C15
C H E C K  As for the procedure indicated by , refer to 7.3.4.4
A8 A16 P O IN T Housing (WF-C529R) (2) (p. 366) in the case of the WF-
Hinge Assy Magnetic Valve Assy
C529R Series, and remove the parts from the Rear Back Cover
B8 (→P. 611) B16 (→P. 618)
to the Housing Top.
C8 C16  The procedure indicated by is applicable only in the WF-
C579R series.

Confidential
A24 Ink Tube Hold Plate

B24 (→P. 629)
C24
A25 Paper Feed Unit

B25 (→P. 630)
C25
B26 Peel off the CRCM FFC A26 PE Sensor

C26 (→P. 631) (→P. 631)
B27 Guide Cover

C27 (→P. 632)
B28 Ink Supply Unit

C28 (→P. 632)
B29 Retard Roller Assy

C29 (→P. 632)
B30 ASF Drive Gear Assy

C30 (→P. 635)
B31 Drive Gear Shaft Holder

C31 (→P. 636)
B32 Drive Gear Shaft

C32 (→P. 636)
C33 Drive Gear Assy

(→P. 637)

Confidential
A1 B1 A2 B2
C1 C2
Rear Top
Rear Top Cover
Rear Cover (Back)
Dowel and Dowel and

Housing Left
No. Screw Type

No. Screw Type

Confidential
A3 B3 A4 B4
C3 C4
Rear Rear
Hook
Hooks

Hooks
Tab

Confidential
A5 B5 A6 B6
C5 C6
Rear
Housing Upper
Top
Hook
Tab

Unit.

Confidential
ADF/SCN Unit
A7 B7
ADF/SCN Unit
C7
Left SCN USB cable
Clamp
ADF/SCN Unit
Rumiror
CN100
SCN PS cable
Terminal of
No. Screw Type

Connector lock
Hook
P O IN T
arrow.
Board.

Confidential
A8 B8 A9 B9
C8 C9

Hinge Lower Cover

P O IN T P O IN T

Confidential
Cable Guide
A10 B10
Cable Guide
C10
PS Cable

Guides
Cable Guide
Guide
Hook

No. Screw Type


Confidential
Rear ASF Assy

A11 B11
Rear ASF Assy
C11
Cable Guide
Solenoid cable
Rear ASF Assy
Rear ASF Paper

Relay Board
CN56
No. Screw Type

Guide.
the Cable Guide.

Confidential
A12 B12 A13 B13

C12 C13
FFC
Top
PS Ground Plate
Hooks
Rear

reassembly.

Confidential
Main Board Assy

A14 B14
Main Board Assy
C14 Back Connector lock Close
CN3
CN42
Left
Open
Double- Double-
CN68 CN66 CN67 CN8
CN55 CN9 CN44 CN110
CN80 CN74 CN58 CN609

CN33
CN77 CN75 CN73 CN72
CN31
CN50 CN52 CN2

1. Peel off the CRCM FFC. C H E C K When disconnecting the Panel FFC (CN42), make sure to unlock the connector lock
P O IN T
2. Peel off the CRCM FFC Sheet. beforehand.
3. Disconnect the following connectors from the board. (* are WF-C579R only)
• CN2 • CN3* • CN8 • CN9 • CN31 • CN33*

• CN42 • CN44* • CN50 • CN52 • CN55 • CN58
• CN66 • CN67 • CN68 • CN72 • CN73 • CN74
• CN75 • CN77 • CN80 • CN110 • CN609

Confidential
CR motor cable Back Rear Inside
Clamps
Hook
PE sensor cable Relay FFC Main Board Assy

Ferrite core Clamp
FAX FFC
No. Screw Type

Double-sided tape S5 C.B.S-TITE-SCREW-3x6-F.ZN-3C
4. Peel off the Fax FFC from the Shield Plate, and Pull the Fax FFC out from the ferrite core. 8. Remove the following screws that secure the Main Board Assy.
(WF-C579R only)  WF-C579R: 9 pcs (S4: x4, S5: x2, S10: x1, S5: x2)
5. Release the PE sensor cable from the clamp.  WF-C529R: 7 pcs (S4: x4, S5: x2, S10: x1)
6. Peel off the Relay FFC from the Shield Plate. In the next step, be careful not to damage the PF Scale.

Confidential
Main Board Assy

A15 B15
Head Upper Cover
C15

Main Board Assy
Head Upper Cover

CN52
Ink Tube
Joint Cover
Double-sided tape
PF Encoder FFC
Hook Rib
No. Screw Type

S7 C.B.P-TITE-SCREW-3x10-F.ZB-3C
Film S4 C.B.P-TITE-SCREW-3x10-F.ZN-3C
Secure the PF Encoder FFC with double-sided tape as shown above. 1. Remove the two screws (S7: ), and remove the Head Upper Cover.
Attach the two tabs on the Head Upper Cover to the positioning holes of the CR Unit.

Confidential
A16 B16 A17 B17

Magnetic Valve Assy Head Screw Assy
C16 C17
CR Unit
Magnetic Valve Assy
Plate

S13 SCREW, JOINT, HEAD S8 C.B.EP-TITE SCREW,2.6X17(B=14),F/ZN-3C
1. Remove the screw (S13: ), then remove the Magnetic Valve Assy. In the following steps, ink may adhere from the Ink Supply Tube Assy. Prepare waste
Make sure the Magnetic Valve Assy is secured with the screw. cloths or similar in advance.
supplied as ASP.

Confidential
Head Screw Assy

A18 B18
Printhead
C18
Head Screw
2
Head FFC Assy Printhead Connectors
3 1
Connectors
Head Screw Printhead
2. Remove the three Head Screws. Do not touch the nozzle surface of the Printhead.
Tighten the screws in order given above.

Confidential
Printhead Printhead
Left
Head FFC 4
Lower left
3
(p. 512) A
Left Right Upper left
Head FFC
Left
Right
Upper left
Upper right
Lower right
① A (p. 513)
2
Upper right
Connect the Head FFC in the following steps. 3. Connect the FFCs to the connectors on the left side.

Confidential
Printhead Printhead

LEAK TESTER 1684353
Smoked
SHEET FRONT Face
Seal Joint Head
Ink Tube Connector 10mm
Wiping area
90°
90°
Make sure to clean the Ink tube joint part of Ink Supply Unit by using the Cleaning In this product, Ink Leak Check is necessary to prevent the ink leakage due to
stick. assembly mistake.
 If ink is remained to ink tube joint part, Ink Leak Check can not perform correctly. Therefore Tube to Printhead.
cleaning the ink surely. Before using the Leak Check Jig, push the ink leak measurement jig along the folds
 Replace the seal joint head with the new one because it cannot be reused. until the fold angle become 90 degrees.

Confidential
Printhead Printhead
Rear side
The smoked face is

Rear side

Confidential
A19 B19 A20 B20

Frame Plate Main Frame Assy
C19 C20
Rear
Tabs
Frame Plate
Extension Spring
No. Screw Type

S4 C.B.P-TITE-SCREW-3x10-F.ZN-3C CR Driven Pulley Assy
1. Remove the screw (S4: ), and remove the Frame Plate. 1. Release the Head FFC Assy from the seven tabs on the Frame Base.
Set the Ferrite Core of the Head FFC Assy in the point shown above.
2. Slide the CR Driven Pulley Assy in the direction of the arrow to remove the CR Timing

Confidential
Main Frame Assy

A21 B21
C21
Ferrite core

CR motor cable
Plate
Rib and hole
No. Screw Type

S14 No. Screw Type
C.B.P-TITE-SCREW-3X16-FZN3C
S5 C.B.S-TITE-SCREW-3x6-F.ZN-3C S13 SCREW, JOINT, HEAD
4. Peel off the CSIC FFC from the frame. 1. Remove the screw (S13: ), then remove the Magnetic Valve Assy, B.
5. Remove the three screws (S14: x2, S5: x1), then remove the Main Frame Assy.  When attaching the Magnetic Valve Assy, B, make sure to align the rib with the hole on the
 Fix CSIC FFC on the frame at the location shown in the figure above by using double-sided plate.
tape at two locations.  Make sure the Magnetic Valve Assy, B is secured with the screw.
 Route the CR Motor Cable with reference to the figure above.

Confidential
A22 B22 A23 B23

Plate Ink Supply Tube Assy
C22 C23
Plate
Plate
S6
Plate
Ink Supply
Tube Assy Dowel and positioning hole Dowel and positioning hole
No. Screw Type
No. Screw Type
Hexagon nut S8 C.B.EP-TITE SCREW,2.6X17(B=14),F/ZN-3C
S6 C.B.(S-P1)SCREW,2.5X18,F/ZN-3C
1. Remove the two screws (S6: ), and remove the Plate. In the following steps, ink may spill from the Ink Supply Tube Assy. Prepare waste
 When installing the Ink Supply Tube Assy to the Ink Supply Unit, make sure to tighten the cloths or similar in advance.
 Screw tightening torque: 0.25±0.03N⋅m 1. Remove the two screws (S8: ), and remove the Ink Supply Tube Assy from the Printhead.
 When attaching the plate, make sure to align the dowels on the Ink Supply Tube Assy with
supplied as ASP.

Confidential
Tube Clamp Tube Holder Hook Ink Supply Tube Assy
87.5 ± 1 mm
Marking Hook
Joint
No. Screw Type

2. Remove the Ink Supply Tube Assy from the Tube Clamp. 4. Remove the screw (S4: ).
At the marking point on the Ink Supply Tube Assy, attach the Ink Supply Tube Assy 5. Remove the Ink Supply Tube Assy from the Joint, and remove the Ink Supply Tube Assy.
to the Tube Clamp. If the marking is not visible, refer to the drawing above to attach
the Ink Supply Tube Assy.
3. Remove the Tube Holder while pressing the hooks outward.

Confidential

Rear Right
LEAK TESTER 1684353
Smoked
SHEET FRONT Face
10mm
Bottom
90°
90°
Left Front
Make sure to clean the Ink tube joint part of Printhead to perform the Ink Leak Check In this product, Ink Leak Check is necessary to prevent the ink leakage due to
correctly. assembly mistake.
When attaching the Ink Supply Tube Assy, make sure to clean the Ink tube joint part Therefore, make sure to install the ink leak measurement jig when installing the Ink
of Printhead using cleaning stick (code: 1709718). Tube to Printhead.
If ink is remained to ink tube joint part of Printhead, Ink Leak Check can not perform Before using the Leak Check Jig, push the ink leak measurement jig along the folds
correctly. until the fold angle become 90 degrees.
Therefore cleaning the ink surely.

Confidential
Rear side
The smoked face is

Rear side

Confidential
Ink Tube Holder Plate

A24 B24
C24
Upper Cap Frame
Grounding
cable 2
Grounding
cable 1
Hook
S5 C.B.S-TITE-SCREW-3x6-F.ZN-3C S4 C.B.P-TITE-SCREW-3x10-F/ZN-3C
1. Remove the two screws (S5: ), then remove the Upper Cap Frame. 2. Remove the four screws (S4: ), then remove the Ink Tube Holder Plate.
 Secure the grounding cables together with the screws. When attaching the Ink Tube Holder Plate, make sure to align the dowels and the
 Route the grounding cable 1 through the two hooks shown above. positioning holes shown above.

Confidential
Paper Feed Unit

A25 B25
Paper Feed Unit
C25
Housing Front
Paper Feed Unit Interference point
Paper Feed Unit
PF Scale
No. Screw Type

S16 C.B.P-TITE (S-P1)SCREW,3X12,F/ZN-3C
1. Remove the six screws (S16: ). Be careful not to touch the PF Scale on the left side of the printer when lifting up the
When attaching the Paper Feed Unit, make sure to align the dowels and positioning Paper Feed Unit. If you touched the PF Scale, wipe it with a clean cloth.
holes shown above.
2. Release the dowel by lifting up the rear side of the Paper Feed Unit, then remove the Paper
Feed Unit while avoiding collision with the interference point of the Housing Front.

Confidential
A26 B26
PE Sensor Peel off the CRCM FFC
C26
Back
Main Board
CRCM FFC
PE Sensor
Left
CN68 CN66 CN67

Double-sided tape
Cable
PE Sensor
Hook
1. Release the four hooks to remove the PE Sensor.

2. Disconnect the cable from the connector of the PE Sensor, then remove the PE Sensor. Double-sided tape CRCM FFC Double-sided tape
Route the PE Sensor cable as shown above.


Confidential
B27 B28
Guide Cover Ink Supply Unit
C27 C28
Left Relay Board

CN55
CN10
CN54
CN22
CN11
CN12
Guide Cover CN30
CN31
CN2

No. Screw Type ⋅ Ink Leak Sensor 2 (CN12) ⋅ Front Cover Open Sensor (CN22)
S3 C.C.P-TITE-SCREW-3x12-F.ZN-3C ⋅ Ink Leak Sensor 3 (CN54)
S4 C.B.P-TITE-SCREW-3x10-F.ZN-3C ⋅ Temperature and Humidity Sensor(CN10) Tab
1. Remove the two screws (S3: , S4: ), and remove the Guide Cover in the direction of the 1. Disconnect the cables from the connectors (CN2, CN10, CN11, CN12, CN22, CN30,
arrow. CN31, CN54, CN55) on the Relay Board.
2. Release the cables from the five tabs on the Frame Base.

Confidential
Rear Top Right
Decompression
Pump cable
Top
Joint
Decompression
Pump cable Hole
No. Screw Type

Ferrite core S4 C.B.P-TITE-SCREW-3x10-F.ZN-3C Ink Supply Unit
3. Pull the Decompression Pump cable out from the hole of the Frame Base, and release the As ink may adhere in the following steps, prepare a waste cloth or the like in advance.
ferrite core of the Decompression pump cable from the Frame Base.
4. Disconnect the Decompression pump cable from the connector of the Main Board.
5. Remove the eight screws (S4: ) that secure the Ink Supply Unit. 6. Remove the Ink Supply Tube Assy from the Joint.

Confidential
Ink Supply Unit

B29
Retard Roller Assy
Left
PF scale
Tube
Rib
C29
Rear
Joint of ink tube
positioning holes
Handle part
Joint
Printer
Retard Roller Assy
Metal frame
No. Screw Type
Frame Base
S4 C.B.P-TITE-SCREW-3x10-F/ZN-3C
Ink Supply Unit Ink Supply Tube Assy Handle part
 When lifting the main body, you wear gloves. Because there is a danger of cutting hands with 1. Remove the three screws (S4: ), then remove the Retard Roller Assy.
When attaching the retard Roller Assy, make sure to align the positioning hole on the
PF scale, clean it with a clean cloth. Retard Roller Assy with the dowels on the Frame Base.

Confidential
ASF Drive Gear Assy

B30
ASF Drive Gear Assy
Bottom
C30
Rear
Drive Gear Shaft
Cassette Paper
Detection Sensor
Bottom
Cable
Connector
ASF Drive Gear Assy ASF Drive Gear
No. Screw Type

S4
Hook
C.B.P-TITE-SCREW-3x10-F/ZN-3C
Notch
1. Remove the two screws (S4: ) that secure the ASF Drive Gear Assy. In the next step, do not remove the ASF Drive Gear Assy too far since the Cassette
Paper Detection Sensor is inside the ASF Drive Gear Assy, and the cable is connected
to the Cassette Paper Detection Sensor.
2. Release the cable from the two hooks and notch, then disconnect the cable from the
connector of the Cassette Paper Detection Sensor.
3. Remove the ASF Drive Gear Assy from the Drive Gear Shaft, then remove the ASF Drive
Gear Assy.
Route the Cassette Paper Detection Sensor cable through the two hooks and notch
shown above.

Confidential
B31 B32
Drive Gear Shaft Holder Drive Gear Shaft
C31 C32
Drive Gear Assy

Drive Gear Assy
Drive Gear Shaft Holder
Drive Gear Shaft Holder Drive Gear Shaft Holder

Hook
Dowel Drive Gear Shaft
Gear with the narrow width
1. Remove the Drive Gear Shaft Holder in the direction of the arrow. 1. Remove the Drive Gear Shaft.
When installing the Drive Gear Shaft Holder, attach the dowel of the Drive Gear Shaft Attach the gear with the narrow width side of the Drive Gear Shaft to the Drive Gear
Holder to the hole on the Drive Gear Assy, then secure it with the hook. Assy.

Confidential
Drive Gear Assy

C33
Top
Rib Drive Gear Assy
ASF Motor
ASF Motor cable
Acetate tape
Ferrite core
Frame Base
No. Screw Type

S4 C.B.P-TITE-SCREW-3x10-F/ZN-3C
1. Remove the two screws (S4: ) that secure the Drive Gear Assy.
2. Peel off a piece of acetate tape, then remove the ferrite core from the groove of the Frame
Base.
3. Remove the Drive Gear Assy.
To avoid the ASF Motor cable contacting the shaft of the ASF Motor, make sure to
route the lead wire (black) of the ASF Motor cable through the rib on the Frame Base.

Confidential
7.3.4.24 Optional Paper Cassette Unit (1)
OUTLINE
Time
Total
Separation Roller Assy A 42 sec 45 sec 1 min 27 sec
Paper Feed Detection

Lever
E-ring (plastic) C 1 min 38 sec --- 1 min 38 sec
One-way Clutch Assy D 1 min 46 sec --- 1 min 46 sec
Paper Feed Roller Spring E --- --- ---
Vertical Feed Roller F 2 min 24 sec --- 2 min 24 sec
C H E C K  Replace the Separation Roller Assy and the Retard Roller of

P O IN T Optional Paper Cassette Unit at the same time.
Total

Confidential
Start
Start
A1 B1 C1 Optional Paper Cassette

D1 E1 F1 Unit (→P. 640)
A2 B2 C2 Paper Cassette 2
D2 E2 F2 (→P. 640)
A3 Separation Roller Assy B3 C3 D3 Paper Feed Detection Lever

(→P. 641) E3 F3 (→P. 641)
C4 D4 E-ring (plastic)
E4 F4 (→P. 642)
D5 One-way Clutch Assy

E5 F5 (→P. 642)
E6 F6 Paper Feed Roller Spring

(→P. 643)
F7 Vertical Feed Roller

(→P. 643)

Confidential
A1 B1 C1 A2 B2 C2
Optional Paper Cassette Unit Paper Cassette 2
D1 E1 F1 D2 E2 F2
Positioning pins
Positioning pins
Dowel
Dowel Optional Paper Cassette
Paper Cassette 2
Drawer Connector Optional Paper Cassette
1. Lift the printer, then remove the Optional Paper Cassette. 1. Pull out the Paper Cassette 2, then remove the Paper Cassette 2 from the Optional Paper
Cassette.
When attaching the Optional Paper Cassette, be sure to align the positioning pins (x2)
and the dowels so as to avoid damage to the Drawer Connector.

Confidential
A3 B3 C3
Separation Roller Assy Paper Feed Detection Lever
D3 E3 F3
Cassette Paper
Detection Lever
Groove of shaft
Separation Roller
Rear
Flag section
Paper Feed Detection Lever
Separation Roller Slit
Tabs
Rear Cover Shape of the spring
Leg of the Paper

Feed Roller spring
When performing work, hold the tabs to avoid touching the roller surface. 1. Open the Rear Cover.
2. Remove the leg of the Paper Feed Roller Spring from the Paper Feed Detection Lever.
Since the narrow part of the Paper Feed Detection Lever may be bleached and damaged,
1. Extend the tabs in the direction of the arrows and release them from the groove of the
remove the Paper Feed Detection Lever by ensuring that it does not get twisted.
shafts, and then pull out and remove each Separation Roller (x2).
3. As shown in the figure above, with the Paper Feed Detection Lever in the rotated state, remove
the Paper Feed Detection Lever from the Vertical Feed Roller in the direction of the arrow.
When attaching the Paper Feed Detection Lever, be sure to align the flag section of
the Paper Feed Detection Lever with the slit shown in the figure above.

Confidential
C4
E-ring (plastic) One-way Clutch Assy
D4 E4 F4 D5 E5 F5
Left
Rear left
One-way Clutch Assy

E-ring (plastic) Vertical Feed Roller
1. Remove the E-ring (plastic) from the left end of the Vertical Feed Roller. 1. Remove the One-way Clutch Assy from the Vertical Feed Roller.
When attaching the One-way Clutch Assy, make sure the arrow mark is facing outside
as shown in the figure above.

Confidential
Paper Feed Roller Spring Vertical Feed Roller

E6 F6 F7
Straight leg of Rear right

Slit Paper Feed
Roller Spring Vertical Feed Roller
Shape of the spring

Rear
Paper Feed
Roller Spring Bearing A Hole of the Hopper Drive Frame

Bearing B
Hole of frame
Hole of frame
Bearing B E-ring (plastic)
1. Remove the straight leg of the Paper Feed Roller Spring from the slit of the frame. 1. Remove the E-ring (plastic), then remove the bearing B from the Vertical Feed Roller.
2. Slide the Vertical Feed Roller in the direction of the arrow, and remove the bearing B from 2. Remove the Vertical Feed Roller from the hole of the frame, then remove it.
the hole in the frame.
3. Remove bearing A from the Vertical Feed Roller, and then remove the Vertical Feed Roller
from the hole in the Hopper Drive Frame.
4. Pull out and remove the Paper Feed Roller Spring from the Vertical Feed Roller.
When attaching the Paper Feed Roller Spring, insert the straight leg of the Paper Feed
Roller Spring in the slit of the frame.

Confidential
OUTLINE
Time
Total
Rear Cover A 1 min 34 sec --- 1 min 34 sec
Left Cover B 2 min 54 sec --- 2 min 54 sec
Hopper Drive Assy C 6 min 51 sec --- 6 min 51 sec
ASF Encoder Assy D 8 min 28 sec --- 8 min 28 sec
Right Cover E 3 min 29 sec --- 3 min 29 sec
Optional Paper Cassette

F 8 min 34 sec --- 8 min 34 sec
Main Board Assy

Confidential
Start
Start
A1 B1 C1 Optional Paper Cassette Unit

D1 E1 F1 (→P. 646)
D2 E2 F2 (→P. 646)
A3 B3 C3 Rear Lower Cover Assy

D3 E3 F3 (→P. 647)
A4 B4 C4 Rear Cover
D4 E4 F4 (→P. 647)
B5 C5 Left Cover E5 Right Cover

D5 F5 (→P. 648) (→P. 652)
C6 E-ring (plastic) F6 Optional Paper Cassette

D6 (→P. 649) Main Board Assy (→P. 653)
C7 One-way Clutch Assy

D7 (→P. 650)
C8 Hopper Drive Assy

D8 (→P. 650)
ASF Encoder Assy

D9 (→P. 651)

Confidential
A1 B1 C1 A2 B2 C2
D1 E1 F1 D2 E2 F2
Positioning pins
Positioning pins
Dowel
Paper Cassette 2
Cassette.

Confidential
A3 B3 C3 A4 B4 C4
Rear Lower Cover Assy Rear Cover
D3 E3 F3 D4 E4 F4
Rear
Rear Lower Cover Assy

Tab
Holes
Rear Cover
Ribs
1. Pick the tab, and remove the Rear Lower Cover Assy in the direction of the arrow. 1. Open the Rear Cover.
When installing the Rear Lower Cover Assy, attach the two ribs of the Rear Lower
Cover Assy to the holes of the frame.

Confidential
Rear Cover
B5 C5
Left Cover
Rear Hole 1 Hook Dowe D5 F5
Top
Rear Frame Left Cover

Hole 2
Rear Cover Band Hooks
Dowel B Dowel
Rear Cover
Band
Dowel B
Left
Groove of frame Dowel A
Rear Cover

Remove dowel A along the groove. S4 C.B.P-TITE-SCREW-3x10-F.ZN-3C S4 C.B.P-TITE-SCREW-3x10-F.ZN-3C
2. Remove the screw (S4: ) that secure the Rear Cover Band to the Rear Frame. 1. Remove the three screws (S4: ).
3. Push the Rear Cover in the direction of the arrow, and remove dowel A of the Rear Cover 2. Disengage the dowel and two hooks at the top.
from the hole in the frame.
4. Remove dowel A of the Rear Lower Cover along the groove of the frame.
5. Remove dowel B of the Rear Lower Cover from the hole in the frame, and then remove the
Rear Cover.
 When attaching the Rear Lower Cover, first of all, attach dowel B in the hole of the frame.
 When attaching the Rear Cover Band, make sure to align the dowel with the hole1 first, then
engage the hook to the hole 2, and finally secure with the screw.

Confidential
Left Cover
C6
E-ring (plastic)
D6
Left Cover Left
Hooks
3. Rotate in the direction of the arrow, disengage the hooks (x2) on the rear side, and then 1. Remove the E-ring (plastic) from the left end of the Vertical Feed Roller.
remove the Left Cover.

Confidential
C7 C8
One-way Clutch Assy Hopper Drive Assy
D7 D8
Rear left Upper Grounding

Left Plate Bearing
Hopper Drive Assy

One-way Clutch Assy
The Upper Grounding

Dowel and Plate and bearing must
positioning hole be in contact
Grounding Sheet
Grounding Sheet
No. Screw Type

Grounding cable Groove of frame S4 C.B.P-TITE-SCREW-3x10-F.ZN-3C
1. Remove the One-way Clutch Assy from the Vertical Feed Roller. 1. Remove the screw (S4: ) that secures the grounding cable, then remove the grounding
cable and Grounding Sheet.
When attaching the One-way Clutch Assy, make sure the arrow mark is facing outside
as shown in the figure above. 2. Remove the screw (S4: ), then remove the Upper Grounding Plate.
 Attach the grounding cable and Grounding sheet with reference to the figure above.
 When attaching the Upper Grounding Plate, be sure to align the positioning hole of the Upper
Grounding Plate and the dowel of the frame.
 Make sure the tip of the Upper Grounding Plate is in contact with the bearing.
 Route the grounding cable in the groove of the frame shown in the figure above.

Confidential
Hopper Drive Assy
ASF Encoder Assy

Left side
D9
Bearing
Left
Hopper Drive Assy ASF Encoder Assy
ASF Encoder Assy
Hole
Dowels
ASF Encoder Scale
Dowel
Hopper Drive Frame No. Screw Type
No. Screw Type
S5 S17 C.B.P-TITE-SCREW-2X6-F.ZN-3C
C.B.S-TITE-SCREW-3x6-F.ZN-3C
3. Release the Bearing A from the Vertical Feed Roller. Perform work ensuring that the ASF Encoder Scale is not damaged.
4. Remove the four screws (S4: x2, S5: x2), then remove the Hopper Drive Frame.
When attaching the Hopper Drive Assy, align the dowels (x3) with the holes in the
1. Remove the screw (S17: ), then remove the ASF Encoder Assy.
Hopper Drive Frame.
 When attaching the ASF Encoder Sensor, be sure to align the dowels of the ASF Encoder
Assy with the holes on the frame.
 After attaching the ASF Encoder Assy, make sure the ASF Encoder Assy is not in contact
with the ASF Encoder Scale.

Confidential
Right Cover
Right Cover
E5
Top
Right Cover
Hooks
Dowel Hooks
Right
Right Cover
No. Screw Type

1. Remove the three screws (S4: ). 3. Rotate in the direction of the arrow, disengage the hooks (x2) on the rear side, and then
2. Disengage the dowel and three hooks at the top. remove the Right Cover.

Confidential
Optional Paper Cassette Main Board Assy
Optional Paper Cassette Main Board Assy

F6
Jam Cover Detection ASF Encoder Cable (CN6)
Sensor Cable (CN5)
Drawer Upper connector
Left Cable (CN1)
Drawer Lower Connector

Lift Phase Sensor Cable (CN2)
Cable (CN6)
Optional Paper Cassette

Main Board Assy
Sensors Cable (CN7)
ASF Motor Cable (CN13)

Lift Motor Cable (CN12)
No. Screw Type

S5 C.B.S-TITE-SCREW-3x6-F.ZN-3C Groove
Rib
1. Remove all connectors connected to the Optional Paper Cassette Main Board Assy.  Route the cables connected to the Optional Paper Cassette Main Board Assy with reference
2. Remove the four screws (S5: ), and then remove the Optional Paper Cassette Main Board to the figure above.
Assy.  The Feed Sensor, Cassette Detection Sensor, Cassette Detection Sensor, and Hopper Position
Sensor are connected to CN7.

Confidential
OUTLINE
Time
Total
Drawer Lower Connector A 3 min 19 sec --- 3 min 19 sec

Lever
Sensor Cable C 6 min 34 sec --- 6 min 34 sec

Confidential
Start
Start
A1 B1 Optional Paper Cassette Unit

C1 (→P. 656)
A2 B2 Paper Cassette 2
C2 (→P. 656)
A3 Rear Lower Cover Assy B3 Cassette Paper Detection

C3 (→P. 657) Lever (→P. 660)
A4 Rear Cover
C4 (→P. 657)
A5 Left Cover
C5 (→P. 658)
A6 Drawer Lower Connector C6 Middle Frame

(→P. 659) (→P. 660)
C7 Sensor Cable
(→P. 661)

Confidential
A1 B1 A2 B2
C1 C2
Positioning pins
Positioning pins
Dowel
Paper Cassette 2
Cassette.

Confidential
A3 A4
Rear Lower Cover Assy Rear Cover
C3 C4
Rear

Tab
Holes
Rear Cover
Ribs
1. Pick the tab, and remove the Rear Lower Cover Assy in the direction of the arrow. 1. Open the Rear Cover.
When installing the Rear Lower Cover Assy, attach the two ribs of the Rear Lower
Cover Assy to the holes of the frame.

Confidential
Rear Cover
A5
Left Cover
Rear Hole 1 Hook Dowe C5
Top
Rear Frame Left Cover

Hole 2
Rear Cover Band Hooks
Dowel B Dowel
Rear Cover
Band
Dowel B
Left
Groove of frame Dowel A
Rear Cover

Remove dowel A along the groove. S4 C.B.P-TITE-SCREW-3x10-F.ZN-3C S4 C.B.P-TITE-SCREW-3x10-F.ZN-3C
2. Remove the screw (S4: ) that secure the Rear Cover Band to the Rear Frame. 1. Remove the three screws (S4: ).
3. Push the Rear Cover in the direction of the arrow, and remove dowel A of the Rear Cover 2. Disengage the dowel and two hooks at the top.
from the hole in the frame.
4. Remove dowel A of the Rear Lower Cover along the groove of the frame.
5. Remove dowel B of the Rear Lower Cover from the hole in the frame, and then remove the
Rear Cover.
 When attaching the Rear Lower Cover, first of all, attach dowel B in the hole of the frame.
 When attaching the Rear Cover Band, make sure to align the dowel with the hole1 first, then
engage the hook to the hole 2, and finally secure with the screw.

Confidential
Left Cover
A6
Left Cover
Hook
Hooks Hook
Connector of Drawer Lower Connector
cable
Left
3. Rotate in the direction of the arrow, disengage the hooks (x2) on the rear side, and then 1. Release the hooks (x2) by using the flathead precision screwdriver or the like, then remove
remove the Left Cover. the Drawer Lower Connector from the frame.
2. Release the hooks (x2) on the Drawer Lower Connector, disconnect the connector of the
Drawer Lower Connector cable, then remove the Drawer Lower Connector.

Confidential
B3
Cassette Paper Detection Lever Middle Frame
C6
Bottom
Dowels and positioning holes
Bearing Bearing
section section
Cassette Paper Detection Lever
Middle Frame
No. Screw Type

1. Widen the bearing sections of the Cassette Paper Detection Lever as shown above, then 1. Remove the two screws (S4: ), then remove the Middle Frame.
remove the Cassette Paper Detection Lever.
When installing the Middle Frame, attach the two dowels of the frame to the two
positioning holes of the Middle Frame.

Confidential
Sensor Cable
Sensor Cable
C7
Rear
Left
Hole on frame Sensor Cable (CN7)
Feed Sensor
Hopper Position Cassette Paper

Sensor Detection Sensor
Cassette Detection Sensor
Sensor Cable
1. Disconnect the Sensor Cable from the connector of the following sensors. 3. Disconnect the Sensor Cable from the connector of the Optional Paper Cassette Main Board
 Feed Sensor Assy (CN7).
 Cassette Detection Sensor 4. Pull out and remove the Sensor Cable from the hole on the frame.
 Cassette Paper Detection Sensor
 Hopper Position Sensor
2. Release the Sensor Cable from the groove on the Rear Frame.
Route the Sensor Cable through the groove on the Rear Frame, notch, and hook
referring to the figure shown above.

Confidential
OUTLINE
Time
Total
Feed Sensor A 3 min 6 sec --- 3 min 6 sec
Drawer Upper Connector B 49 sec --- 49 sec

Sensor
Foot D 34 sec --- 34 sec
Hopper Position Sensor E 1 min 30 sec --- 1 min 30 sec
Cassette Detection Sensor F 1 min 23 sec --- 1 min 23 sec

Confidential
Start
Start
A1 C1 Optional Paper Cassette Unit B1 Drawer Upper Connector D1 Foot

E1 F1 (→P. 664) (→P. 668) (→P. 669)
A2 C2 Paper Cassette 2
E2 F2 (→P. 664)
A3 Paper Feed Detection Lever C3 Middle Frame

(→P. 665) E3 F3 (→P. 668)
A4 E-ring (plastic) C4 Cassette Paper Detection E4 Hopper Position Sensor F4 Cassette Detection Sensor
(→P. 665) Sensor (→P. 669) (→P. 670) (→P. 670)
A5 One-way Clutch Assy

(→P. 666)
A6 Paper Feed Roller Spring

(→P. 666)
A7 Vertical Feed Roller

(→P. 667)
A8 Feed Sensor
(→P. 667)

Confidential
A1 C1 A2 C2
E1 F1 E2 F2
Positioning pins
Positioning pins
Dowel
Paper Cassette 2
Cassette.

Confidential
A3 A4
Paper Feed Detection Lever E-ring (plastic)
Cassette Paper Left

Detection Lever
Rear
Flag section
Paper Feed Detection Lever
Slit
Rear Cover Shape of the spring
Leg of the Paper

Feed Roller spring
1. Open the Rear Cover. 1. Remove the E-ring (plastic) from the left end of the Vertical Feed Roller.
2. Remove the leg of the Paper Feed Roller Spring from the Paper Feed Detection Lever.
Since the narrow part of the Paper Feed Detection Lever may be bleached and damaged,
remove the Paper Feed Detection Lever by ensuring that it does not get twisted.
3. As shown in the figure above, with the Paper Feed Detection Lever in the rotated state, remove
the Paper Feed Detection Lever from the Vertical Feed Roller in the direction of the arrow.
When attaching the Paper Feed Detection Lever, be sure to align the flag section of
the Paper Feed Detection Lever with the slit shown in the figure above.

Confidential
A5 A6
One-way Clutch Assy Paper Feed Roller Spring
Straight leg of
Rear left Slit Paper Feed
Roller Spring
Shape of the spring

Rear
One-way Clutch Assy
Paper Feed
Roller Spring Bearing A Hole of the Hopper Drive Frame
Hole of frame
Bearing B
1. Remove the One-way Clutch Assy from the Vertical Feed Roller. 1. Remove the straight leg of the Paper Feed Roller Spring from the slit of the frame.
When attaching the One-way Clutch Assy, make sure the arrow mark is facing outside 2. Slide the Vertical Feed Roller in the direction of the arrow, and remove the bearing B from
as shown in the figure above. the hole in the frame.
3. Remove bearing A from the Vertical Feed Roller, and then remove the Vertical Feed Roller
from the hole in the Hopper Drive Frame.
4. Pull out and remove the Paper Feed Roller Spring from the Vertical Feed Roller.
When attaching the Paper Feed Roller Spring, insert the straight leg of the Paper Feed
Roller Spring in the slit of the frame.

Confidential
A7 A8
Vertical Feed Roller Feed Sensor
Rear right Rear

Feed Sensor
Feed Sensor
Bearing B
Cable
Hole of frame
Hook
E-ring (plastic)
1. Remove the E-ring (plastic), then remove the bearing B from the Vertical Feed Roller. 1. Disconnect the cable from the connector of the Feed Sensor.
2. Remove the Vertical Feed Roller from the hole of the frame, then remove it. 2. Release the four hooks, then remove the Feed Sensor.

Confidential
B1 C3
Drawer Upper Connector Middle Frame
E3 F3
Hooks Dowels and positioning holes
Connector of the Upper

Drawer Connector cable
Drawer Upper Connector
Middle Frame
Hooks
No. Screw Type
1. Disengage the hooks (x2) by using a precision screwdriver, etc., and then remove the 1. Remove the two screws (S4: ), then remove the Middle Frame.
Drawer Upper Connector from the frame.
When installing the Middle Frame, attach the two dowels of the frame to the two
2. Disengage the hooks (x2) of the Drawer Upper Connector, remove the connectors on the positioning holes of the Middle Frame.
Drawer Connector cable, and then remove the Drawer Upper Connector.

Confidential
C4
Cassette Paper Detection Sensor Foot
D1
Top
Optional Paper Cassette Unit
Foot
Foot
Foot Foot

Sensor cable
Hook
1. Disengage four hooks using precision screw driver or similar tool, then remove the Cassette 1. Turn the Optional Paper Cassette Unit upside down, then remove the nine Foot.
Paper Detection Sensor from frame.
2. Disconnect the cassette paper Detection Sensor cable from the connector, then remove the
Cassette Paper Detection Sensor.

Confidential
Hopper Position Sensor Cassette Detection Sensor

E4 F4
Top
Connector
Hopper Position Sensor
Hopper Position Sensor cable

Hook (long)
Cassette Detection Sensor Hook (short)

Hook
1. Release the hooks (x4) by using the flathead precision screwdriver or the like, then remove Length of each hook on the Cassette Detection Sensor differs. When removing the
the Hopper Position Sensor from the frame. Cassette Detection Sensor, release the shorter hook referring to the figure above.
2. Disconnect the connector of the Hopper Position Sensor cable, then remove the Hopper
Position Sensor. 1. Release the cable from the connector of the Cassette Detection Sensor.
2. Release the shorter hook on the Cassette Detection Sensor, then remove the Cassette
Detection Sensor.

Confidential
OUTLINE
Time
Total
Paper Cassette 2 A 12 sec 30 sec 42 sec
Retard Roller Extension

Spring
Retard Roller C 1 min 36 sec 45 sec 2 min 21 sec
Lift Up Sector Gear 40T D 1 min 6 sec --- 1 min 6 sec
Lift Up Gear 30T E 1 min 10 sec --- 1 min 10 sec
C H E C K  Replace the Separation Roller Assy and the Retard Roller of

P O IN T Optional Paper Cassette Unit at the same time.
Total

Confidential
Start
Start
D1 E1 (→P. 673)
B2 C2 Retard Roller Extension D2 Hopper

Spring (→P. 673) E2 (→P. 674)
C3 Retard Roller D3 Lift Up Sector Gear 40T

(→P. 674) E3 (→P. 675)
E4 Lift Up Gear 30T

(→P. 675)

Confidential
A1 B1 C1 B2 C2
Paper Cassette 2 Retard Roller Extension Spring
D1 E1
Paper Cassette 2
Retard Roller
Retard Roller
Extension Spring
Hooks
Optional Paper Cassette Unit
Paper Cassette 2
1. Pull the Paper Cassette 2, then remove it from the Optional Paper Cassette Unit. 1. Disengage two hooks of the Extension Spring, then remove the Retard Roller Extension
Spring.

Confidential
C3
Retard Roller Hopper
D2 E2
Paper cassette
Retard Roller Rib Dowel Dowel Rib
Step 1
Gap
Paper Cassette 2
Hook (left)
Hook (right)
Paper cassette
Hopper
Step 2 Backside of paper cassette Step 3 Backside of paper cassette
Hook (right)
Hook (left)
Retard Roller
1. Stand the paper cassette, then insert the flathead precision screwdriver to the gap between 1. Lift up the Retard Roller side of the Hopper while extending the Paper Cassette 2 toward
the Retard Roller and the paper cassette as shown above. the outside, and then remove the Hopper from the rib of the Paper Cassette 2.
2. While inserting the flathead precision screwdriver into the gap, insert the other flathead 2. Release the Hopper from two dowels on the Paper Cassette 2, then remove the Hopper.
precision screwdriver to the right hook section on the backside of the paper cassette to
release the hook.
3. While inserting the flathead precision screwdriver into the gap, insert the other flathead
precision screwdriver to the left hook section on the backside of the paper cassette to
release the hook.
4. Remove the Retard Roller from the paper cassette

Confidential
Lift Up Sector Gear 40T Lift Up Gear 30T

D3 E3 E4
Paper Cassette 2 Paper Cassette 2
OPT Lift Plate

Lift Up Gear 30T
Lift Up Gear 30T

Bottom Lift Up Sector Gear 40T A side B side
No. Screw Type

1. At bottom side, remove the screw (S4: ). 1. Remove the Lift Up Gear 30T.
2. Pull the Lift Up Sector Gear 40T in the direction of the arrow, then remove the Lift Up Attach the Lift Up Gear 30T by facing the B side shown in the figure above toward
Sector Gear 40T from the OPT Lift Plate. the outside.

Confidential
CHAPTER
8
MAINTENANCE/INSPECTION
Confidential
8.1 Cleaning INKSYSTEM ASSY (WIPER AND CAP)
Excepting the Printhead, there is no parts or components that need to be  Tools

cleaned on a regular basis. Clean the printer as need arises. When cleaning,  Pure water
make sure to observe the methods and cautions described below.  Polyester swab (code: 1709718)
8.1.1 Cleaning Method  Cleaning procedure
 Do not wipe transparent parts with a cloth moistened with 1. Remove the Rear Cover (Back) (p.358), Maintenance Box Cover (p.370),
alcohol or diluted alcohol. Doing so may make the Housing Right (p.366).
transparent parts cloudy.
2. Unlock the CR Unit.
 When wiping paper dust off the LD Roller/Pickup Roller,
do not wipe against the grain of the roller surface. (for more detail, refer to 7.3.2.1 Unlocking the CR Unit (p.344))
3. Move the CR Unit in the middle of the printer manually.
EXTERIOR PARTS SUCH AS HOUSING
Wipe the surface using a soft clean cloth moistened with water. Use of an
unwoven cloth is recommended for coated or transparent part to prevent
damaging the surface.
CR Unit
INSIDE THE PRINTER
Use a vacuum cleaner for removing paper dust.
RUBBER OR PLASTIC ROLLERS IN THE PAPER FEED

MECHANISM SUCH AS LD ROLLER/PICKUP ROLLER
If paper dust adhered to the roller surface drops the frictional force and causes
paper feed problems, moisten a cloth with water and wring the water out, then
wipe the dust off the roller using the cloth.
SCANNER GLASS
Figure 8-1. Moving the CR Unit
Wipe the scanner glass using a soft clean cloth.
When oil stain or stubborn stains are attached, clean with a small amount of
glass cleaner attached to a soft cloth.
Maintenance/inspection Cleaning 677

Confidential
4. Rotate the gear of the Inksystem Assy in the direction of the arrow to move 5. Clean the wiper and the cap part using the Polyester swab moistened with
the wiper to wiping position. pure water.
 Cleaning the wiper
Wiper Wiper Clean the top end and right side of the Wiper by moving the Polyester swab
in the direction of the arrows as shown in the figure below.
Top
Wiper
Right
Inksystem Assy Wiper
FFC
Gear
Figure 8-3. Cleaning the Wiper
Figure 8-2. Preparation of Cleaning the Wiper
 If the Polyester swab is moved in a direction other than
When rotating the gear, make sure not to damage the FFC. that indicated by the arrows in the figure above, the
Wiper may shift. Therefore, always be sure to move it in
the direction of the arrows.
 Be very careful when cleaning the Wiper as it is made of
rubber and may be easily damaged.

Confidential
 Cleaning the Cap part 6. After cleaning the wiper and cap part is completed, rotate the gear of the
Inksystem Assy in the direction of the arrow to retract the wiper.
Clean the Cap surface by moving the Polyester swab in the direction of the
arrows as shown in the figure below.
Wiper Wiper
Figure 8-4. Cleaning the Cap part
Do not forcibly press the Polyester swab as the Cap surface

may be easily damaged.
Inksystem Assy
FFC Gear
Figure 8-5. Retracting the Wiper
When rotating the gear, make sure not to damage the FFC.

Confidential
7. Reboot the printer without moving the CR Unit to the home position. 8.2 Lubrication
The type and amount of the grease used to lubricate the printer parts are
By rebooting the printer, wiper storage and CR unit home
determined based on the results of the internal evaluations. Therefore, refer to
position detection is performed in initial starting sequence.
8.2.1 Lubrication Points and Instructions (p.681), and apply the specified type
If the CR Unit is moved to the home position manually, and amount of the grease to the specified part of the printer mechanism.
B proper position cannot be detected, and the nozzle face of the
Printhead may collide against the Wiper and get damaged.  Grease
Therefore, make sure to reboot the printer.
Type Name EPSON Part Code Supplier
Grease G-71 1304682 EPSON

 Tools
Name Availability EPSON Part Code
Injector ✓* ---
Brush ✓* ---
Note: Use tools whose specifications are specified in "8.2.1 Lubrication Points and
Instructions" (p.681).
Maintenance/inspection Lubrication 680

Confidential
8.2.1 Lubrication Points and Instructions <Lubrication Point>

Application point
EJ Roller
EJ Roller
<Lubrication Point>
PF Roller <Type>
PF Roller
G-97
<Type>
G-97 <Application Amount>
Appropriate amount
<Application Amount>
φ 1 mm × 5 mm (3mg) <Remarks>
Apply with injector.
<Remarks>
After application, spread
Apply with injector. grease by rotating EJ
After application, spread 2 mm Roller one time.
grease by rotating PF 2 mm
Roller one time.
Figure 8-8. Lubrication of EJ Roller

Application point Main Frame
<Lubrication Point>
Contact point with CR
Figure 8-6. Lubrication of PF Roller Unit on Main Frame and
on CR Guide Frame (Front
side and bottom side)
<Lubrication Point>
PF Pulley
PF Pulley <Type>
1 G-97
<Type>
G-97 <Application Amount>
CR Guide 1. 0.7g (2 line × 300 mm)
Frame 2. 0.3g (1 line × 300 mm)
φ 1 mm × 2 mm (two points)
<Remarks>
<Remarks>
 Apply with injector. After
application, spread by
2
moving CR Unit to the
right and to the left (from
0-digit side to 80-digit
side) three times slowly.
 If clumps of grease are
Application point seen on both sides of the
Application point frame, remove them.
Figure 8-7. Lubrication of PF Pulley
Figure 8-9. Lubrication of contact point with CR Unit (1)

Confidential
Main Frame
<Lubrication Point> <Lubrication Point>
CR Driven Pulley
Contact point with CR Unit CR Driven Pulley
on Main Frame and on CR
<Type>
Guide Frame (Back side)
G-71
<Type>
G-97
φ 1 mm × 1 mm
<Remarks>
1. 0.7g (2 line × 300 mm)
2. 0.3g (1 line × 300 mm)
1 Take care that grease does
<Remarks> not adhere to the rotating
 Apply with injector. After area.
application, spread by
moving CR Unit to the
right and to the left (from Application point
0-digit side to 80-digit
2 side) three times slowly. Figure 8-11. Lubrication of CR Driven Pulley
 If clumps of grease are
seen on both sides of the
Application point <Lubrication Point>
frame, remove them. CR Driven Pulley Holder
CR Driven Pulley Holder
Figure 8-10. Lubrication of contact point with CR Unit (2)
<Type>
G-71
Appropriate amount
(two points)
<Remarks>
Application point
Figure 8-12. Lubrication of CR Driven Pulley Holder(1)

Confidential
<Lubrication Point> <Lubrication Point>

Application point
CR Driven Pulley Holder Contact point between
Paper Feed Unit and EJ
<Type>
Roller
G-71
<Type>
1. G-96
φ 1 mm × 1 mm (8 points)
2. G-97
CR Driven Pulley Holder <Remarks>
1. Appropriate amount
Paper Feed Unit
2. φ 2 mm × 5 mm
1 2 <Remarks>
4 mm 1. Apply with Flux
Dispenser.
Application point 2. Apply with injector.
5 mm
 Rub off excess grease.
Figure 8-13. Lubrication of CR Driven Pulley Holder (2) 3 mm 2 mm
<Lubrication Point> Figure 8-15. Lubrication of Paper Feed Unit (2)

Contact point between
1 3 Paper Feed Unit and PF
Roller
2
<Type>
G-97
1. φ 3 mm × 15 mm
2. φ 1 mm × 15 mm
3. φ 3 mm × 15 mm
<Remarks>
 Apply with injector.
 Rub off excess grease.
Paper Feed Unit Application point
Figure 8-14. Lubrication of Paper Feed Unit (1)

Confidential
8.3 Printer Status Information 3. The printer status information is displayed as shown below.

This printer allows you to check the current firmware version and the latest FW version
FW Version: CE20I7
error histories when printing cannot be made due to Fatal Error or the like.
1 Printer Fatal: ---
C H E C K Types of the error history are as follows.
P O IN T  Printer Fatal Errors (The last 3 error histories) Error History
 Scanner Fatal Errors (The last 3 error histories) 1 Scanner Fatal: ---
 System Errors (The last 2 error histories) 2 Scanner Fatal: ---
3 Scanner Fatal: ---
HOW TO CHECK THE PRINTER STATUS INFORMATION 1 System Error: 303201
2 System Error: 300105
Back to Menu: [#]
(Refer to "5.2 Service mode startup" (p. 107))
2. Select “Printer Status Information” from service support mode top menu.
Service Support Mode Top Figure 8-17. Printer Status Information Screen (2)
0
Up/Down:[2][8] Shift:[4][6] C H E C K If there is no error history, “---” is displayed.

Back:[*] Run:[#] P O IN T
Adjustment:MENU
Maintenance:MENU
USB Data Swap:MENU
CR Unlock Power Off
USB FW Update
Counter Reset
Figure 8-16. Printer Status Information Screen (1)
Maintenance/inspection Printer Status Information 684

Confidential
8.4 USB Data Swap  List of the information to be transferred
Figure 8-18. List of the information to be transferred

8.4.1 Overview Replacing Main Swapping
You use this menu when Main Board Assy failure occurred or when swapping Board printer
Transferring information Classification
the printer. By using this menu, you can transfer information from the failed (No printer (Replacing printer
mechanism mechanism)
printer/board to the new board/swapped printer via a USB flash drive. replacement)
Serial Number ✓ ✓
MAC Address ✓ ✓
Destination Information ✓ ✓
Customize Information ✓ ✓
Printer Model Information ✓ ✓
UI Setting ✓ ✓
Number of Sheets Printed /
✓ ✓
Number of Sheets Scanned
Error History ✓ ✓ User information
Open Platform Setting Data ✓ ✓
Adjustment Value ✓ ✓
Usage History ✓ ✓
Network Data ✓ ✓
Fax Data ✓ ✓
Address Book ✓ ✓
Scan To XX Favorite Setting ✓ ✓
User information (PCD) ✓ ✓
Printer mechanism Adjustment Printer
✓ ---
Value (PCD) mechanism
information
Nozzle Rank History ✓ ---
Maintenance/inspection USB Data Swap 685

Confidential
8.4.2 Detail of procedure 4. Select Data Back Up.
Transfers the information by following the procedure given below. Main Board Replace: MENU
1. Read out the information from the failed printer or board via the USB flash Back:[*] Run:[#]
drive. (Refer to " Data Backup procedure" (p. 686))
2. Replace the failed board or swap the printer. Data Back Up
3. Write the data stored in the USB flash drive to the new board/swapped printer. Data Restore
Data Delete from USB
(Restore) (Refer to " Data Restore Procedure" (p. 688))
DATA BACKUP PROCEDURE

(Refer to "5.2 Service mode startup" (p. 107))
2. Select USB Data Swap:MENU from the service support mode top menu. Figure 8-20. USB Data Backup Screen (2)
3. When replacing the main board, select Main Board Replace:MENU.
When swapping the printer, select Swap Mech Unit:MENU.
Service Support Mode Top USBMem Data Swap:MENU

Before Repair Operation:MENU Swap Mech Unit: MENU
Adjustment:MENU
Maintenance:MENU
USB Data Swap:MENU
CR Unlock Power Off
USB FW Update
Counter Reset
Figure 8-19. USB Data Backup Screen (1)

Confidential
5. The following screen will be displayed. Before pushing the execution button, 6. Push the execution button and execute the data backup.
connect the USB flash drive to the USB port.
Data Back Up
Data Back Up
Backup Now.
Start BoardChange Data Backup to Please wait...
USBMem?
Don’t remove USBMem.
YES: [#]
Don’t power off.
NO: [*]

Figure 8-21. USB Data Backup Screen (3) Do not remove the USB flash drive nor turn the printer’s
USB port power off during the data backup.
USB flash drive

USB flash drive
WF-C579R/ WF-C529R
Figure 8-22. USB port

Confidential
7. When the following screen is displayed, turn the power off, and then replace the
DATA RESTORE PROCEDURE
main board or swap the printer.
Data Back Up (Refer to "5.2 Service mode startup" (p. 107))
Backup Finish!!. 2. Select “USB Data Swap:MENU” from service support mode top menu.
Please Power Off
3. Select Main Board Replace:MENU when replacing the main board.
Select Swap Mech Unit:MENU when swapping the printer.
Service Support Mode Top USBMem Data Swap:MENU

Before Repair Operation:MENU Swap Mech Unit: MENU
Adjustment:MENU
Maintenance:MENU
Figure 8-24. USB Data Backup Screen (5) Printer Status Information
USB Data Swap:MENU
C H E C K If the following message is displayed, the backup data is CR Unlock Power Off
P O IN T already saved to the USB flash drive and it cannot be USB FW Update
overwritten. Therefore, delete the backup data from data Counter Reset
delete menu (USB data deletion), and execute the data backup
again. Figure 8-26. USB Data Restore Screen (1)
Data Back Up 4. Select Data Restore.
File Write Error. Main Board Replace: MENU

Please Power Off Up/Down:[2][8] Shift:[4][6]
Back:[*] Run:[#]
Data Back Up
Data Restore
Data Delete from USB
Figure 8-27. USB Data Restore Screen (2)

Confidential
5. The following screen will be displayed. Before pushing the execution button, 6. Push the execution button and execute the data restore.
connect the USB flash drive to the USB port.
Data Restore
Data Restore
Restore Now.
Please wait...
Start BoardChange Data
Restore from USBMem? Don’t remove USBMem.
Don’t power off.
YES: [#]
NO: [*]

Figure 8-28. USB Data Restore Screen (3) Do not remove the USB flash drive nor turn the printer’s
power off during the data restore.
USB port
USB flash drive

USB flash drive
WF-C579R/ WF-C529R
Figure 8-29. USB port

Confidential
7. Turn the power off when the following screen is displayed.
Data Restore
Restore Finish!!.
Please Poweroff.

C H E C K If the following message is displayed when restoring the data,
P O IN T the backup data is not saved to the USB flash drive.
Therefore, perform the data backup again.
Data Restore
Error!!
File is not found.

Please Power OFF

Confidential
8.5 Firmware Update Using USB Flash Drive 8.5.2 Procedure for firmware update using a USB flash
drive.
8.5.1 Overview
PREPARATION OF USB FLASH DRIVE FOR FIRMWARE UPDATE
Updating the firmware using the USB flash drive is available for this printer so
that updating can be done in an environment without any network connection 1. Connect the USB flash drive to the PC and create a folder per product named as
given below right under the USB flash drive.
or where the PC cannot be connected.
• WF-C579R/C579Ra:FWG726TL
 When updating the firmware, perform the update with • WF-C529R: FWG728TL
the permission of the user.  Folder name must be specified name.
 Use the USB flash drive without encrypt function and  Make sure to create the folder right under the USB flash drive.
should perform “preparation of USB flash drive for
firmware update” below before visiting the installation
site. Any USB flash drive format can be used.
Figure 8-33. Firmware Update Using USB Flash Drive (1)
Maintenance/inspection Firmware Update Using USB Flash Drive 691

Confidential
2. Put the firmware data and the license data into the folder.
PERFORMING FIRMWARE UPDATE
 Make sure to put both the firmware data (EFU file) and the license data (TXT
data) in the folder. Also, do not put any other data into the folder. C H E C K Required time varies depending on the amount of the update
P O IN T content, the option's connection state, etc.
 Make sure the firmware data and the license data are named as follows. If not,
confirm the firmware data is genuine and for this printer, and then rename it
as follows. (Reference: name of the firmware data of PX-M7070FX is
FWF483TL.efu)
1. Turn the printer on in the service support mode.
• Firmware data: WF-C579R/C579Ra->FWG726TL (Refer to "5.2 Service mode startup" (p. 107))
WF-C529R->FWG728TL
• License data: license.txt 2. Select “USB FW Update” from the service support mode top menu.
 Since there is limitation on the combination of firmware data and the license Service Support Mode Top
data, use them in the combination when distributed. Up/Down:[2][8] Shift:[4][6]
Back:[*] Run:[#]
Adjustment:MENU
Maintenance:MENU
USB Data Swap:MENU
CR Unlock Power Off
USB FW Update
Counter Reset


Confidential
3. After the screen below is displayed, connect the USB flash drive where the 4. Firmware update start confirmation screen below is displayed, and then the current
firmware is saved to the USB port and press the execution button. firmware version and the update firmware version are indicated.
After checking the firmware versions, press the execution button to perform the
USB Memory FW Update
update.
Connect USB Memory USB Memory FW Update
Then, push [#] Current Ver. :

Update Ver. :
Update?
Done: Push [#]
Cancel: 　 Push [*]

USB port
Do not remove the USB flash drive nor turn the printer’s
power off during the firmware update.
USB flash drive

USB flash drive
WF-C579R/ WF-C529R

Confidential
5. Firmware update progress screen is displayed. During this process, the power
lamp flashes repeatedly. C H E C K How to check the printer's firmware version
P O IN T  User mode
USB Memory FW Update
• Nozzle Check Pattern
Now FW Updating... • Status Sheet
Please wait.
• “Firmware Update” menu
User screen->Settings->General Settings->System
Administration->Firmware Update

6. After the firmware update is complete, the screen below is displayed.
After the screen below is displayed, press the power button to end the firmware
update, and turn the power off.
Confirm the printer’s power is completely off, then remove the USB flash drive.
EPSON PRINTER
Program Update Mode
FINISHED MAIN
ROM Version : ************
ROM1 FIXSUM : ****
ROM2 FIXSUM : ****
ROM3 FIXSUM : ****
 Service support mode

• Service status sheet
• Printer Status Information (p.684)

Confidential
8.6 Periodic Replacement Parts 8.6.2 Resetting the Counter of Periodic Replacement Parts
8.6.1 Overview (Refer to "5.2 Service mode startup" (p. 107))
2. From the service support mode top menu, select “Counter Reset”.
The parts listed below need to be replaced periodically.
Service Support Mode Top
 Make sure to replace the Pickup Roller Assy of the
Printer and the Retard Roller of the Printer together, and
Back:[*] Run:[#]
replace the Separation Roller Assy of the optional cassette Individual Action Check: MENU
and the Retard Roller of the optional cassette together. Before Repair Operation:MENU
 After replacing them, make sure to reset the counter for Adjustment:MENU
the parts using the service support mode. Maintenance:MENU
Table 8-1. List of Periodic Replacement Parts USB Data Swap:MENU
CR Unlock Power Off
ASP Threshold value
Part name USB FW Update
Code Near-End End Counter Reset
Main Pickup Roller Assy 1736257 145,500 sheets 150,000 sheets Debug Log Get Mode:MENU
Retard Roller Assy 1758322 145,500 sheets 150,000 sheets Figure 8-41. Resetting the Counter Screen (1)
Rear ASF Assy 1747620 48,500 sheets 50,000 sheets 3. Select the part you replaced and reset the counter.
Optional Feed Roller 1737026 145,500 sheets 150,000 sheets
Cassette Example: When resetting the PF/EJ Counter
Separation Roller 1737026 145,500 sheets 150,000 sheets
C2, C3
Retard Roller 1758371 145,500 sheets 150,000 sheets B16 Counter Reset B16 Counter Reset
* : The Separation Roller Assy of the Optional Paper Cassette is the same as the Feed Please select the counter.
PF/EJ Counter
Roller of the Optional Paper Cassette.
Value : 159
PF/EJ Counter 159
Rear ASF Counter 36
Feed Roller C1 Counter 108 Reset Value ?
Feed Roller C2 Counter 0
Feed Roller C3 Counter 0 Done : [2]
Cancel: [8]
SELECT: [2][8]
Reset:[6] Back:[*]
Figure 8-42. Resetting the Counter Screen (2)
Maintenance/inspection Periodic Replacement Parts 695

Confidential
CHAPTER
9
APPENDIX
Confidential
9.1 Connection Diagram
ADF Relay Board ADF PE Sensor
ADF ADF Motor

ADF DOC Sensor
ADF Encoder
(WF-C579R/ ADF Solenoid CIS Module
Scanner SCN Motor

SCN Encoder
(WF-C579R/
Scanner Board CIS Module
Maintenance Box
Detection Sensor Assy (CSIC) FAX Board
ADF/SCN Open Sensor (WF-C579R/C579Ra)
Power Supply Board (WF-C579R/ PE Sensor Printer Cover Open Sensor (WF-C579R/C579Ra)
CN609 CN56 Rear ASF Solenoid
ASF Motor CN80 CN1
CN110 Speaker (WF-C579R/ Rear ASF Paper Detection Sensor
ASF Encoder
CN74 CN9 CN44 CN53 C579Ra) Cassette Detection Sensor
CN55
CN67 CN66 CN3 CN53 CN51 Cassette Paper Detection Sensor
CN42 CN55 CN52

Rear Unit CN10
CN68 Panel Board Detection CN22 CN54
Sensor
CN20
Main Board
CN30
Ethernet CN100 CN33 CN11 CN31
USB Interface
CN8 (WF-C579R/C579Ra)
CN75 CN73 CN12

USB
CN34 CN31
CN2
CN77 CN72 Wi-Fi
Board
PDL Board Relay Board Assy
CN799 CR Encoder
CN50 CN52 CN2 Printhead
CR Motor Feed Sensor PW Sensor
IS Encoder SD Memory
Printer I/S Motor
PF Motor
PF Encoder
Temperature and Humidity Sensor Ink Leak Sensor 4

Ink Pack Sensor C (CSIC)
Front Cover Open Sensor Ink Leak Sensor 3
Decompression Motor Ink Pack Sensor M (CSIC)
CRCM Ink Leak Sensor 1 Ink End Sensor (Bk, Y)
Ink Pack Sensor Y (CSIC) Board
Ink Leak Sensor 2 Ink End Sensor (C, M)
RIPS Unit Ink Pack Sensor Bk (CSIC)

Drawer Connector
ASF Encoder
Jam Cover Detection Sensor
CN6 Optional Paper Cassette

CN5
Lift Phase Sensor
Main Board Assy
CN4
CN1
Feed Sensor CN7
CN2

CN12 CN13
Hopper Position Sensor
Optional Paper Cassette Unit Lift Motor

ASF Motor
Drawer Connector
Appendix Connection Diagram 697

Confidential
9.2 Part Names Conversion Table Ref# ASP Name Name used in This Manual
PHOTO INTERRUPTER
506 Cassette Paper Detection Sensor
9.2.1 WF-C579R/C579Ra (PE ASSY.;IEI)
507 CARRIAGE ASSY.,ASP CR Unit
Ref# ASP Name Name used in This Manual
508 INK SYSTEM,ASSY.;IEI Inksystem Assy
100 HOUSING,UPPER Housing Upper
509 POROUS PAD,CAP,LOWER Ink Porous Pad, 1
101 PANEL ASSY,CG77.;ASP Panel Assy
510 FFC HEAD,ASSY.;IEI Head FFC Assy
102 HOUSING,LEFT;C Housing Left
511 C.B.(S-P1)SCREW,2.5X18,F/ZN-3C C.B.(S-P1)SCREW,2.5X18,F/ZN-3C
104 HOUSING,RIGHT Housing Right
HOLDER, PULLEY,
105 COVER,INK EJECT,ASP Maintenance Box Cover 512 DRIVEN,ASSY.;IEI
107 HINGE,ASSY.,SC Hinge Assy 513 MOTOR,ASSY.,CR CR Motor Assy

108 HARNESS Relay Cable (Panel to Main) 514 HOLDER LEVER PE ASSY PE Lever Assy
110 HOUSING,REAR Housing Rear HOLDER,STAR,WHEEL,ASSY,CG77.
515 Star Wheel Assy
111 COVER,ASF ASF Cover ;IEI
112 COVER,ASF,FRONT;C Rear Top Cover 516 PAPER,GUIDE,UPPER,ASSY.;IEI Paper Guide Upper Assy
113 PAPER SUPPORT Paper Support 517 EXTENSION SPRING,11.11 Paper Guide Upper Assy Spring
114 BOARD ASSY.,PANEL Numpad Board Assy 518 HOLDER CONECTOR,ASSY.;IEI Maintenance Box Detection Sensor Assy
200 MAINBOARD ASSY.,CG77,ASP Main Board Assy 519 H.N.-1,2.5,F/ZN-3C H.N.-1,2.5,F/ZN-3C
300 POWER SUPPLY,ASSY.;B;IEI Power Supply Assy 520 TUBE,ASSY.,SUPPLY,IEI Ink Supply Tube Assy
352 WIRELESS LAN USB MODULE WiFi Board 521 SEAL,JOINT,HEAD Seal Joint Head
353 FAX ASSY.;B;IEI Fax Board Assy 522 ASF DRIVE,ASSY.;IEI Drive Gear Assy
354 BOARD ASSY.,MAIN PDL Board Assy 523 SHAFT,DRIVE,PICK UP Drive Gear Shaft
355 BOARD ASSY.,SUB Relay Board Assy 524 HOUSING,ASF,ASSY.B;IEI ASF Drive Gear Assy
356 FLASH MEMORY SD Memory 525 LEVER,DETECTOR,FE Feed Sensor Detection Lever
501 BOARD ASSY.,SUB,CF24,ASP PF Encoder Board Assy 526 TORSION SPRING,0.193 Feed Sensor Detection Lever Spring
502 SCALE,PF,ASP PF Scale 528 POROUS PAD,HOUSING,LOWER Ink Porous Pad, 4
503 HOUSING,PICKUP,ASSY Pickup Roller Assy 700 PRINT HEAD,IG238V;ASP Printhead
504 HOLDER,RETARD,ES,B,ASSY Retard Roller 701 STACKER ASSY Stacker Assy
505 EXTENSION SPRING,1.379 Retard Roller Extension Spring 702 SOLENOID,RASF,ASSY Rear ASF Solenoid
PHOTO INTERRUPTER 703 DUPLEX,ASSY,CG03;IEI Rear Unit
506 PE Sensor
(PE ASSY.;IEI) 704 SCALE,CR CR Scale
PHOTO INTERRUPTER 705 SPEAKER ASSY.;IEI Speaker Assy
506 (PE ASSY.;IEI)
Feed Sensor
707 SCREW HEAD ASSY Head Screw Assy
Appendix Part Names Conversion Table 698

Confidential
Ref# ASP Name Name used in This Manual Ref# ASP Name Name used in This Manual
708 RASF,ASSY Rear ASF Assy 905 FRAME LD ASSY ADF LD Roller
709 HARNESS USB Interface Board 906 COVER,FRONT,ADF,ASP ADF Front Cover
710 LEAF SENSOR,P599 ADF/SCN Open Sensor 907 MAT,COVER,DOCUMENT Document Mat
710 LEAF SENSOR,P599 Rear Unit Detection Sensor 908 EXTENSION SPRING,1.28,LD,ADF ADF LD Roller Spring
710 LEAF SENSOR,P599 Cassette Detection Sensor COMPRESSION
909 SPRING,1.22,PAD,ADF
Separation Pad Spring
C.B.EP-TITE SCREW,2.6X17(B=14),F/ C.B.EP-TITE SCREW,2.6X17(B=14),F/
712 ZN-3C ZN-3C
714 TORTION SPRING,13.11 CR Scale Torsion Spring
719 CASSETTE,1st BIN,ASSY Paper Cassette 1
720 PHOTO INTERRUPTER Rear ASF Paper Detection Sensor
750 RIPS UNIT, ASSY,ASP Ink Supply Unit
751 IS DECOMP PUMP,ASSY.,IEI Decompression Pump Assy
752 HOUSING,RIPS ASSY.,ASP Ink Supply Unit Lower Housing Assy
753 COVER,FRONT,RIPS Ink Supply Unit Front Cover
754 TRAY,INK PACK,CL,ASP Ink Pack Tray CL
755 TRAY,INK PACK,BK,ASP Ink Pack Tray BK
756 POROUS PAD,INK,DETECTION;E Ink Porous Pad, 2
762 GUIDE,TUBE,INK HOLDER,UPPER Ink Tube Guide Holder
763 LOCK,LEVER,RIPS Lock Lever
SENSOR,TEMPERATURE,HUMIDIT
764 Y,HSHCAA106F
Temperature and Humidity Sensor
765 FOOT Foot

766 CABLE,CRCM CRCM FFC
767 POROUS PAD,INK,DETECTION;D Ink Porous Pad, 3
768 BOARD ASSY.,SNS Ink Leak Sensor Assy
769 CR CONTACT MODULE CRCM Board Assy
900 ADF/SCN UNIT,ASP ADF/SCN Unit
901 DOCUMENT SUPPORT ADF ASSY ADF Document Support
902 COVER,ADF ASSY.,ASP ADF LD Roller Assy
903 PAD,ADF ASSY.,SEC Separation Pad
904 COVER,REAR,ADF ADF Rear Cover

Confidential
9.2.2 WF-C529R Ref# ASP Name Name used in This Manual

508 INK SYSTEM,ASSY.;IEI Inksystem Assy
509 POROUS PAD,CAP,LOWER Ink Porous Pad, 1
100 HOUSING,UPPER Housing Top
510 FFC HEAD,ASSY.;IEI Head FFC Assy
101 PANEL ASSY,CG79,ASP Panel Assy
511 C.B.(S-P1)SCREW,2.5X18,F/ZN-3C C.B.(S-P1)SCREW,2.5X18,F/ZN-3C
102 HOUSING,LEFT;B Housing Left
HOLDER, PULLEY,
104 HOUSING,RIGHT Housing Right 512 DRIVEN,ASSY.;IEI
105 COVER,INK EJECT,ASP Maintenance Box Cover 513 MOTOR,ASSY.,CR CR Motor Assy
108 HARNESS Relay Cable (Panel to Main) 514 HOLDER LEVER PE ASSY PE Lever Assy
110 HOUSING,REAR Rear Back Cover HOLDER,STAR,WHEEL,ASSY,CG77.
515 Star Wheel Assy
111 COVER,ASF,CG06,ASP ASF Cover ;IEI
112 HOUSING,TOP Front Cover Retainer Plate 516 PAPER,GUIDE,UPPER,ASSY.;IEI Paper Guide Upper Assy
113 PAPER SUPPORT Paper Support 517 EXTENSION SPRING,11.11 Paper Guide Upper Assy Spring
115 COVER,PRINTER,CG79,ASP Front Cover 518 HOLDER CONECTOR,ASSY.;IEI Maintenance Box Detection Sensor Assy
116 HOUSING,ASF Housing Rear 519 H.N.-1,2.5,F/ZN-3C H.N.-1,2.5,F/ZN-3C
200 MAINBOARD ASSY.,CG79,ASP Main Board Assy 520 TUBE,ASSY.,SUPPLY,IEI Ink Supply Tube Assy
300 POWER SUPPLY,ASSY.;B;IEI Power Supply Assy 521 SEAL,JOINT,HEAD Seal Joint Head
352 WIRELESS LAN USB MODULE WiFi Board 522 ASF DRIVE,ASSY.;IEI Drive Gear Assy
354 BOARD ASSY.,MAIN PDL Board Assy 523 SHAFT,DRIVE,PICK UP Drive Gear Shaft
355 BOARD ASSY.,SUB Relay Board Assy 524 HOUSING,ASF,ASSY.B;IEI ASF Drive Gear Assy
356 FLASH MEMORY SD Memory 525 LEVER,DETECTOR,FE Feed Sensor Detection Lever
501 BOARD ASSY.,SUB,CF24,ASP PF Encoder Board Assy 526 TORSION SPRING,0.193 Feed Sensor Detection Lever Spring
502 SCALE,PF,ASP PF Scale 528 POROUS PAD,HOUSING,LOWER Ink Porous Pad, 4
503 HOUSING,PICKUP,ASSY Pickup Roller Assy 700 PRINT HEAD,IG238V;ASP Printhead
504 HOLDER,RETARD,ES,B,ASSY Retard Roller 701 STACKER ASSY Stacker Assy
505 EXTENSION SPRING,1.379 Retard Roller Extension Spring 702 SOLENOID,RASF,ASSY Rear ASF Solenoid
PHOTO INTERRUPTER 703 DUPLEX,ASSY,CG03;IEI Rear Unit
506 PE Sensor
(PE ASSY.;IEI) 704 SCALE,CR CR Scale
PHOTO INTERRUPTER 707 SCREW HEAD ASSY Head Screw Assy
506 (PE ASSY.;IEI)
Feed Sensor
708 RASF,ASSY Rear ASF Assy
PHOTO INTERRUPTER
506 (PE ASSY.;IEI)
Cassette Paper Detection Sensor 710 LEAF SENSOR,P599 Rear Unit Detection Sensor
507 CARRIAGE ASSY.,ASP CR Unit 710 LEAF SENSOR,P599 Cassette Detection Sensor

Confidential
Ref# ASP Name Name used in This Manual 9.2.3 Optional Paper Cassette Unit
710 LEAF SENSOR,P599 Printer Cover Open Sensor
C.B.EP-TITE SCREW,2.6X17(B=14),F/ C.B.EP-TITE SCREW,2.6X17(B=14),F/
712 ZN-3C ZN-3C 775 COVER,LEFT,OPT,ASP Left Cover
714 TORTION SPRING,13.11 CR Scale Torsion Spring 776 BOARD ASSY.,MAIN Optional Paper Cassette Main Board Assy
719 CASSETTE,1st BIN,ASSY Paper Cassette 1 777 BOARD ASSY.,ENCORDER,ASF ASF Encoder Assy
720 PHOTO INTERRUPTER Rear ASF Paper Detection Sensor
778 DRAWER CONECTOR 1-1612257-4 Drawer Upper Connector
750 RIPS UNIT, ASSY,ASP Ink Supply Unit
751 IS DECOMP PUMP,ASSY.,IEI Decompression Pump Assy 779 DRAWER CONECTOR 1-1612256-4 Drawer Lower Connector
752 HOUSING,RIPS ASSY.,ASP Ink Supply Unit Lower Housing Assy 780 FOOT Foot
753 COVER,FRONT,RIPS Ink Supply Unit Front Cover 781 CASSETTE,2ND BIN ASSY.,OPT,ASP Paper Cassette 2
754 TRAY,INK PACK,CL,ASP Ink Pack Tray CL
782 TORTION SPRING,13.11 Paper Feed Roller Spring
755 TRAY,INK PACK,BK,ASP Ink Pack Tray BK
783 LEVER,DETECTOR,FE,OPT Paper Feed Detection Lever
756 POROUS PAD,INK,DETECTION;E Ink Porous Pad, 2
762 GUIDE,TUBE,INK HOLDER,UPPER Ink Tube Guide Holder 784 E-RING,4,L/NA E-ring (plastic)
763 LOCK,LEVER,RIPS Lock Lever 785 ONEWEI CLUTCH ASSY.,ASP One-way Clutch Assy
SENSOR,TEMPERATURE,HUMIDIT
764 Y,HSHCAA106F
Temperature and Humidity Sensor 786 PHOTO INTERRUPTER Feed Sensor
765 FOOT Foot 786 PHOTO INTERRUPTER Cassette Paper Detection Sensor
766 CABLE,CRCM CRCM FFC 786 PHOTO INTERRUPTER Hopper Position Sensor
767 POROUS PAD,INK,DETECTION;D Ink Porous Pad, 3
788 ROLLER ASSY,VERTICAL,OPT Vertical Feed Roller
768 BOARD ASSY.,SNS Ink Leak Sensor Assy
789 COVER,REAR,OPT,ASSY.,ASP Rear Cover
769 CR CONTACT MODULE CRCM Board Assy
790 ROLLER ASSY.,SEPARATE Separation Roller Assy
791 LEVER,PAPER DETECTOR,CASSETTE Cassette Detection Lever
792 HARNESS,FRAME,REAR,OPT Sensor Cable
793 (ASP OPT DRIVE VERTICAL) Hopper Drive Assy
794 CAM,SECTOR GEAR,40,HOPPER,OPT Lift Up Sector Gear 40T
795 SPUR GEAR,30,CASSETTE Lift Up Gear 30T

Confidential

796 HOLDER RETARDS,ASSY Retard Roller
797 EXTENSION SPRING,1.379,RETARD Retard Roller Extension Spring
798 COVER,RIGHT,OPT Right Cover

Confidential
9.3 Status Sheet Information

The following status sheets can be printed from the printer.
This section explains about each item printed on the status sheets.
 Overview of Status Sheets
 Configuration Status Sheet (p.704)
Printer settings information
 Supply Status Sheet (p.708):
Supported model numbers of consumables or periodic replacement
parts, and the total number of sheets fed into the printer.
 Usage History Sheet (p.710):
Usage history such as the total number of printed pages per function.
 Service Status Sheet (p.712):
In addition to the information included in the above three sheets,
information required for servicing is also provided.
Appendix Status Sheet Information 703

Confidential
 Status Sheet Items

 Configuration Status Sheet
Item Explanation
Device ID Device ID (product name) is displayed.
Serial Number The serial number of the product is displayed.
MAC Address MAC address of the product is displayed.
Memory Capacity Capacity of the memory inside the product is displayed.
< Hardware >
Hardware Configuration Card Reader Status Connection condition of a device for user authentication is displayed.
Firmware Version of the firmware is displayed.
Main Firmware Version of the main firmware is displayed.
< Version >
Network Firmware Version of the NW firmware is displayed.
QPIT Version of the QPIT is displayed.
Language Language used for indication is displayed.
Mute Whether the setting is enabled or not is displayed.
Button Press
Error Notice
Receive Completion
Notice
< Sound >* Sound level setting (0 to 10) is displayed.
Normal Mode Send Completion Notice
Basic Settings
Print Completion Notice
Ring Tone
Receiver
Sound Type Selected sound type is displayed.
Sleep Timer Whether the sleep timer is enabled or not is displayed.
Selected setting is displayed.
Power Off Timer
(not set, 30 min., 1 hr., 2 hr.,4 hr., 8 hr., 12 hr.)
Auto Error Solver Whether the auto error solver options are enabled or not is displayed.
Memory Device Whether the external memory setting is enabled or not is displayed.
Memory Device Interface*
Printer File Sharing Connection preference setting (USB /Network) is displayed.
Settings Ink Drying Time The Ink Drying Time when duplex printing is displayed.
Thick Paper Setting (ON/OFF) is displayed.
Quiet Mode Setting (ON/OFF) is displayed.

Confidential
Item Explanation
Paper Size
Cassette 1
Paper Type
Cassette 2 Paper Size
(printed only when cassette 2
is equipped) Paper Type
Paper size and type settings of each of the cassettes and whether the auto
Paper Cassette
Cassette 3 Paper Size paper size detection feature is enabled or not are displayed.
(printed only when cassette 3
is equipped) Paper Type
Paper Size
Rear paper Feed
Paper Source Paper Type
Settings Cassette 1 - Cassette 3, MP
Copy*
Tray
Cassette 1 - Cassette 3, MP
Fax* Setting of auto select for each cassette (ON/OFF) is displayed.
Tray
Cassette 1 - Cassette 3, MP
Auto Selection Other
Tray
A4/Letter Auto Switching Setting (ON/OFF) is displayed.
MP Tray Priority Setting (ON/OFF) is displayed.
Paper Size Notice Setting (ON/OFF) is displayed.
Paper Type Notice Setting (ON/OFF) is displayed.
Top Offset
Left Offset
The offset setting (-30 to 30) is displayed.
Top Offset in Back
Print Settings Universal Print Settings
Left Offset in Back
Check Paper Width Setting (ON/OFF) is displayed.
Skip Blank Page Setting (ON/OFF) is displayed.

Confidential
Item Explanation
Color Mode The color setting (Color or Mono) is displayed.
Document Open Password Whether the password setting is enabled or not is displayed.
Printing Whether printing scanned document is permitted or not is displayed.
Permissions Password
Editing Whether editing scanned document is permitted or not is displayed.
Resolution Scan resolution setting is displayed.
2-Sided Printing Scan setting (simplex/duplex) is displayed.
Binding position of documents (left/top/--- (in case of one-side scanning)) is
Binding Direction
displayed.
Remove Shadow Shadow remove setting (ON/OFF) is displayed.
The frame width setting (0 to 40 mm/---(in case of the shadow remove
<Common settings> Surround
setting is disabled)) is displayed.
The center width setting (0 to 40 mm/---(in case of the shadow remove
Center
Remove Punch Holes Remove punch holes setting (ON/OFF) is displayed.
Scan The erasing position setting (left edge/right edge/top edge/bottom edge/---
Settings* Erasing Position
(in case of the remove punch holes setting is disabled)) is displayed.
The erasing amount setting (0 to 20 mm/--- (in case of the remove punch
Erase Amount
holes setting is disabled)) is displayed.
Orientation (Original) Document orientation setting (portrait/landscape) is displayed.
Document Type Document type setting (text/text & photo/photo) is displayed.
Density The density setting (-4 to 4) is displayed.
Subject The subject of email is displayed.
File Format File format setting is displayed.
Scan area Original document size setting is displayed.
Compression Ratio Compression ratio setting (low/standard/high) is displayed.
< Scan to Email >
Attached File Max Size The maximum file size that can be attached to an email is displayed.
Filename Prefix File name prefix setting for scanned file is displayed.
Date The setting is displayed.
Time of Day The setting is displayed.

Confidential
Item Explanation
< Scan to Network Folder/FTP >
Scan File Format File format setting is displayed.
Settings* Scan area Original document size setting is displayed.
< Scan to Memory Device >
< Scan to Cloud >
Lock Setting Whether the setting is enabled or not is displayed.
Admin Settings Access Control Whether the setting is enabled or not is displayed.
Color Count Settings Whether the setting (auto detection or fix to color) is displayed.
Version The version is displayed.
Epson Open Platform Information
Product key The product key is displayed.
Note *: WF-C579R/C579Ra only.

Confidential
 Supply Status Sheet

Item Explanation
< Hardware >
< Version >
Remaining capacity
Black Part Number
Serial Number
Remaining capacity
Cyan Part Number
Serial Number Remaining capacity of ink, model number, and manufacturer's serial
< Ink packs >
Remaining capacity number of each ink pack is displayed.
Supply Status
Magenta Part Number
Serial Number
Remaining capacity
Yellow Part Number
Serial Number
Remaining capacity The Remaining capacity and model number of the Maintenance Box is
< Maintenance Box >
Part Number displayed.

Confidential
Item Explanation
Feed Roller 1
Feed Roller 2
(printed only when paper
Periodic Replacement Parts cassette 2 is equipped)
Number of Sheets Loaded Number of paper that can be fed from each Feed Roller.
Information Feed Roller 3
Supply Status
(printed only when paper
cassette 3 is equipped)
Rear Paper Feed
The version of the firmware of cassette 2, 3 are displayed.
Optional Cassette Information Cassette 2, 3 Firmware version
(only printed when optional cassette is equipped)

Confidential
 Usage History Sheet

Item Explanation
Capacity of the memory inside the product is
Memory Capacity
displayed.
< Hardware >
Hardware Configuration Connection condition of a device for user
Card Reader Status
authentication is displayed.
< Version >
The date and time when the printer printed for the
Usage History First Time Printing
first time is displayed.
Total Number of Pages The total number of printed pages is displayed.
The total number of pages printed in monochrome is
Total Number of B&W Pages
displayed.
The total number of pages printed in color is
Total Number of Color Pages
Number of Pages < Sorted by Function > displayed.
The total number of printed 2-sided pages is
Total Number of 2-Sided Printing Pages
displayed.
The total number of printed one-sided pages is
Total Number of 1-Sided Printing Pages
displayed.

Confidential
Item Explanation
A3/Ledger
A4/Letter
A5 The total number of printed pages per paper size is
displayed.
< Sorted by Paper Size > A6
(1-Sided/2-Sided, B&W/Color) Detailed count per function (one-sided/2-sided,
B4/Legal monochrome/color) is also displayed for each paper
B5 size.
Envelope
Other
B&W Copy*
Number of Pages
Color Copy*
B&W Fax*
Color Fax* The total number of printed pages for each of the
< Sorted by Usage >
B&W Print from Computer or Mobile Device purposes is displayed.
Color Print from Computer or Mobile Device
B&W Print from Memory Device or Other Functions
Color Print from Memory Device or Other Functions
ESC/P-R
< Sorted by Printer Language > Printed pages in each language is displayed.
Other
B&W Scan
Scanned page number* The total number of sheets scanned is displayed.
Color Scan

Confidential
 Service Status Sheet

Item Explanation
< Hardware >
< Version >
Whether the sleep timer is enabled or not is displayed. When enabled,
Sleep Timer
Basic Settings the time period before the product enters sleep mode is also displayed.
Power Off Timer Whether the auto power off setting is enabled or not is displayed.
Ink Drying Time Setting (Standard/Longer/Longest) is displayed.
Printer Settings Thick Paper Setting (ON/OFF) is displayed.
Quiet Mode Setting (ON/OFF) is displayed.
Paper Size
Cassette 1
Paper Type
Cassette 2 Paper Size
(printed only when cassette
2 is equipped) Paper Type
Paper Source
Paper Cassette Paper size and type settings for each of the paper sources are displayed.
Settings Cassette 3 Paper Size
(printed only when cassette
3 is equipped) Paper Type
Paper Size
Rear Paper Feed
Paper Type
Top Offset
Left Offset
The offset setting (-30 to 30) is displayed.
Top Offset in Back
Print Settings Universal Print Settings
Left Offset in Back
Check Paper Width Setting (ON/OFF) is displayed.
Skip Blank Page Setting (ON/OFF) is displayed.

Confidential
Item Explanation
IP Address
Subnet Mask
Default Gateway
Primary DNS Server
Network Settings Secondary DNS Server The network settings are displayed.
Proxy Server Setting
Proxy Server
Proxy Server Port Number
DNS Domain Name
Color Mode The color setting (Color or Mono) is displayed.
Document Open Password Whether the password setting is enabled or not is displayed.
Printing Whether printing scanned document is permitted or not is displayed.
Permissions Password
Editing Whether editing scanned document is permitted or not is displayed.
Resolution Scan resolution setting is displayed.
2-Sided Printing Scan setting (simplex/duplex) is displayed.
Binding position of documents (left/top/--- (in case of one-side
Binding Direction
scanning)) is displayed.
Remove Shadow Shadow remove setting (ON/OFF) is displayed.
Scan The frame width setting (0 to 40 mm/---(in case of the shadow remove
<Common settings> Surround
Settings* setting is disabled)) is displayed.
The center width setting (0 to 40 mm/---(in case of the shadow remove
Center
Remove Punch Holes Remove punch holes setting (ON/OFF) is displayed.
The erasing position setting (left edge/right edge/top edge/bottom edge/
Erasing Position
--- (in case of the remove punch holes setting is disabled)) is displayed.
The erasing amount setting (0 to 20 mm/--- (in case of the remove
Erase Amount
punch holes setting is disabled)) is displayed.
Orientation (Original) Document orientation setting (portrait/landscape) is displayed.
Document Type Document type setting (text/text & photo/photo) is displayed.
Density The density setting (-4 to 4) is displayed.

Confidential
Item Explanation
Subject The subject of email is displayed.
< Scan to Email >
Attached File Max Size The maximum file size that can be attached to an email is displayed.
Scan Compression Ratio Compression ratio setting (low/standard/high) is displayed.
< Scan to Network Folder/FTP >
Settings* Filename Prefix File name prefix setting for scanned file is displayed.
< Scan to Memory Device >
< Scan to Cloud >
Epson Open Platform Information Product key The product key is displayed (“---” is displayed when it is not set).

Confidential
Item Explanation
Setting (ON/OFF) is displayed.
Fax Function
(Always “OFF” is displayed in WF-C579R/C579Ra)
Optional Cassette 1
(printed only when Firmware version
Optional Cassette 1 is
equipped)
Option Settings Firmware version of each of the option cassettes are displayed.
Optional Cassette 2
(printed only when
Firmware version
Optional Cassette 2 is
equipped)
Display Setting of Ink Low Whether the ink low display setting is enabled or not is displayed.
Display Setting of Ink Level Whether the ink level display setting is enabled or not is displayed.
Black Replaced number and remaining count value are displayed as below.
(Replaced number) - (Remaining count value)
Part Number Model number of each of the ink packs is displayed.
Serial Number Manufacturer's serial number of each of the ink packs is displayed.
Cyan Replaced number and remaining count value are displayed as below.
Supply Status < Ink Packs >
Magenta Replaced number and remaining count value are displayed as below.
Yellow Replaced number and remaining count value are displayed as below.

Confidential
Item Explanation
Replaced number and remaining count valuer are displayed as below.
< Maintenance Box > (Replaced number) - (Remaining count value)
Part Number The model number of the Maintenance Box is displayed.
Number of Sheets Loaded The number of sheets fed is displayed.
Feed Roller 1 The number of replacements (the number of times the counter is reset)
Number of Replacements
is displayed.
Feed Roller 2 Number of Sheets Loaded The number of sheets fed is displayed.
(printed only when Feed The number of replacements (the number of times the counter is reset)
Supply Status Number of Replacements
Roller 2 is equipped) is displayed.
Periodic Replacement Parts
Feed Roller 3 Number of Sheets Loaded The number of sheets fed is displayed.
(printed only when Feed The number of replacements (the number of times the counter is reset)
Roller 3 is equipped) Number of Replacements
is displayed.
Number of Sheets Loaded The number of sheets fed is displayed.
Rear Paper Feed The number of replacements (the number of times the counter is reset)
Number of Replacements
is displayed.
Print head serial ID ID of the print head is displayed.
The date and time when the printer printed for the first time is
First Time Printing
displayed.
Total Number of Pages The total number of printed pages is displayed.
< Sorted by Function > Total Number of B&W Pages The total number of pages printed in monochrome is displayed.
Total Number of Color Pages The total number of pages printed in color is displayed.
A3/Ledger
Usage History A4/Letter
A5
< Sorted by Paper Size > The total number of printed pages per paper size is displayed.
A6
(1-Sided/2-Sided, B&W/ Detailed count per function (one-sided/2-sided, monochrome/color) is
Color) B4/Legal also displayed for each paper size.
B5
Envelope
Other

Confidential
Item Explanation
B&W Copy*
Color Copy*
B&W Fax*
Color Fax*
B&W Print from Computer or
< Sorted by Usage > Mobile Device The total number of printed pages for each of the purposes is displayed.
Color Print from Computer or
Mobile Device
B&W Print from Memory Device
or Other Functions
Color Print from Memory Device
or Other Functions
Plain Paper
Letterhead
Recycled
Color
Usage History Preprinted
High quality plain paper
The total number of pages printed on each of the paper types is
Thick-Paper 1 displayed.
Paper Type
Thick-Paper 2 Notes: Count in number of sheet including paper jam.The number does
not meet with the other count.
Envelope
Ultra Glossy Photo Paper
Premium Semigloss Photo Paper
Matte
The Cumulative Number of
Other The total number of times a paper jam error occurs is displayed.
Paper Jam
Document Table
(Number of Pages) The total number of pages scanned on the scanner glass or in the ADF
Number of Sheets is displayed.
Scanned* ADF (Number of Pages)
ADF (Number of Fed Sheets) The total number of document sheets fed by the ADF is displayed.

Confidential
Item Explanation
Cassette 1
Cassette 2
(printed only when cassette 2 is
equipped)
Usage History Number of Sheets Loaded The total number of printed pages per paper source is displayed.
Cassette 3
(printed only when cassette 3 is
equipped)
Rear Paper Feed
Adjustment name and execution date and time of last five adjustments
Setting Change History User Adjustment
executed by the user are displayed.
Cleaning type and execution date and time of last five cleaning
Cleaning History Cleaning History
operations are displayed.
A number that represents the level of nozzle clogging (from 0) is
Nozzle Clogging State Rank
displayed.
Printer Error For each of the errors, the following information is displayed.
Paper Jam Error • Error code
• Sub code
• Date and time of occurrence
Fatal Error When Printing • Internal temperature
• Internal humidity
• Paper feed path
Error History Scanner Error* For each of the errors, the following information is displayed
• Error code
Fatal Error When Scanning* • Date and time of occurrence
• Number of pages to be scanned
Fax Error*
For each of the errors, the following information is displayed
Network Error
• Error code
System Error
• Date and time of occurrence
Other Error
Cumulative ink coverage of print jobs finished before printing this
PD1 Level status sheet is displayed according to the rule below.
L: less than 5%, M: 5% to 20%, H: more than 20%
Coverage Coverage Ratio
Ink coverage of the last print job is displayed according to the rule
PD2 Level below.
L: less than 20%, M: 20% to 50%, H: more than 50%

Confidential
Item Explanation
Printer Error 6-digit error code is displayed.
Scanner Error Always “---” is displayed.
Status Fax Error
Network Error 6-digit error code is displayed.
Other Error

Confidential

WF-C579R WF-C579Ra WF-C529R A Service Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

WF-C579R WF-C579Ra WF-C529R A Service Manual

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

WF-C579R WF-C579Ra WF-C529R A Service Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

SERVICE MANUAL

Color Inkjet Printer

Copyright © 2018 SEIKO EPSON CORPORATION.

CHAPTER 1.PRODUCT OUTLINE

CHAPTER 2. PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS

CHAPTER 5. SERVICE SUPPORT MODE

CHAPTER 7. REPAIR WORK

1.1 Product Summary  Compact

Figure 1-2. Paper cassettes

Product outline Product Summary 12

2.1 Product Hardware Specifications

Product Specifications Product Hardware Specifications 14

Note "*": 40 degrees C: within one month

Product Specifications Product Hardware Specifications 15

Product Specifications Product Hardware Specifications 16

Product Specifications Product Hardware Specifications 17

2.2 Printing Specifications 2.3 Copying Specifications (WF-C579R/C579Ra

Product Specifications Printing Specifications 18

Item Specification 2.4 ADF Specifications (WF-C579R/C579Ra only)

Product Specifications ADF Specifications (WF-C579R/C579Ra only) 19

2.5 Scanner Specifications (WF-C579R/C579Ra 2.6 Options Specifications

Product Specifications Scanner Specifications (WF-C579R/C579Ra only) 20

2.7 Network Specifications/Fax Specifications  Fax specifications (WF-C579R/C579Ra only)

Product Specifications Network Specifications/Fax Specifications 21

Figure 3-1. Name of Each Part

Structure Product Configuration (Name of Each Part) 23

Table 3-2. Name of Each Part

Figure 3-2. Name of Each Part

Structure Product Configuration (Name of Each Part) 24

Table 3-3. Name of Each Part

Figure 3-3. Name of Each Part

Structure Product Configuration (Name of Each Part) 25

Table 3-4. Name of Each Part

Figure 3-4. Name of Each Part

Structure Product Configuration (Name of Each Part) 26

Table 3-5. Name of Each Part

Figure 3-5. Name of Each Part

Structure Product Configuration (Name of Each Part) 27

Table 3-6. Name of Each Part

Structure Product Configuration (Name of Each Part) 28

3.1.2 WF-C529R Table 3-7. Name of Each Part

Figure 3-7. Name of Each Part

Structure Product Configuration (Name of Each Part) 29

Table 3-8. Name of Each Part

Figure 3-8. Name of Each Part

Structure Product Configuration (Name of Each Part) 30

Table 3-9. Name of Each Part

Figure 3-9. Name of Each Part

Structure Product Configuration (Name of Each Part) 31

Table 3-10. Name of Each Part

Figure 3-10. Name of Each Part

Structure Product Configuration (Name of Each Part) 32

Table 3-11. Name of Each Part

Structure Product Configuration (Name of Each Part) 33

3.2 Motor, Sensor, Clutch, and Solenoid Specifications

Structure Motor, Sensor, Clutch, and Solenoid Specifications 34

3.2.1 Printer Main Unit (Motors and solenoids)

Used for driving the pump of Inksystem DC motor

Figure 3-12. Motors and solenoids